Et200al Manual Collection en-US PDF
Et200al Manual Collection en-US PDF
SIMATIC
7KLVGRFXPHQWFRQWDLQVD
FRPSLODWLRQRIDOOPDQXDOVIRU
WKH(7$/V\VWHPIDPLO\
8VHWKHERRNPDUNVRQWKHOHIW ET 200AL
HGJHRIWKHVFUHHQWR
QDYLJDWH ET 200AL distributed I/O system
___________________
Documentation guide 1
SIMATIC
___________________
System overview 2
___________________
Application planning 3
ET 200AL
Distributed I/O system
___________________
Mounting 4
___________________
Connecting 5
System Manual
___________________
Configuring 6
___________________
Configuration control (option
handling) 7
___________________
Commissioning 8
___________________
Maintenance 9
___________________
Technical specifications 10
___________________
Safety-related shutdown of
ET200AL standard modules A
___________________
Dimension drawings B
___________________
Accessories/spare parts C
02/2018
A5E31861578-AF
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Conventions
Please observe notes labeled as follows:
Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation and on
the handling of the product to which particular attention should be paid.
Additional support
● Information about Technical Support is available in section Siemens Industry Online
Support (Page 4).
● The range of technical documentation for the individual SIMATIC products and systems
can be found on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal).
● Information about the online catalog and online order system is available in section
Industry Mall (Page 5).
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions only form one element of such a concept.
Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines
and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the
enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security
measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. For more information about industrial security, please visit
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to
always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported,
and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Industry Mall
The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive
solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power
(TIP).
Catalogs for all the products in automation and drives are available on the Internet
(https://mall.industry.siemens.com).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 8
2 System overview ................................................................................................................................... 12
2.1 What is the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system? ...................................................... 12
2.2 Components ........................................................................................................................... 15
3 Application planning .............................................................................................................................. 16
3.1 Hardware configuration .......................................................................................................... 16
3.2 Configuration variants with ET-Connection ........................................................................... 18
3.2.1 ET 200AL with ET-Connection............................................................................................... 18
3.2.2 Hybrid configuration ET 200AL/ET 200SP with ET-Connection ............................................ 20
4 Mounting ............................................................................................................................................... 23
4.1 Basics ..................................................................................................................................... 23
4.2 Mounting modules .................................................................................................................. 24
5 Connecting ........................................................................................................................................... 28
5.1 Rules and regulations for operation ....................................................................................... 28
5.2 Operation of the ET 200AL on grounded/non-grounded infeed ............................................ 30
5.3 Electrical configuration of the ET 200AL ................................................................................ 33
5.4 Connecting ET 200AL to functional earth .............................................................................. 36
5.4.1 Mounting ET 200AL modules on conductive substrate ......................................................... 36
5.4.2 Mounting ET 200AL modules on non-conductive substrate .................................................. 37
5.5 Connecting cables for ET 200AL ........................................................................................... 39
5.6 Wiring ..................................................................................................................................... 40
5.7 ET 200AL marking ................................................................................................................. 44
5.7.1 Factory markings.................................................................................................................... 44
5.7.2 Optional markings .................................................................................................................. 45
5.7.3 Mounting identification labels ................................................................................................. 45
6 Configuring ........................................................................................................................................... 47
7 Configuration control (option handling) .................................................................................................. 51
7.1 Configuration control .............................................................................................................. 51
7.2 Configuring ............................................................................................................................. 54
7.3 Creating the control data record ............................................................................................ 56
7.3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 56
7.3.2 Control data record for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system ................................................ 58
7.3.3 Feedback data record at the ET200AL distributed I/O system .............................................. 60
7.3.4 Example of a configuration control......................................................................................... 61
7.4 Transferring the control data record in the user program of the CPU ....................................64
7.5 Behavior during operation .......................................................................................................66
8 Commissioning ..................................................................................................................................... 67
8.1 PROFINET IO .........................................................................................................................67
8.1.1 Commissioning ET 200AL on PROFINET IO .........................................................................67
8.1.2 Startup on PROFINET IO .......................................................................................................68
8.1.3 PROFIenergy ..........................................................................................................................70
8.2 PROFIBUS DP ........................................................................................................................71
8.2.1 Commissioning ET 200AL on PROFIBUS DP ........................................................................71
8.2.2 Startup on PROFIBUS DP ......................................................................................................72
8.3 Identification and maintenance data .......................................................................................74
8.3.1 Reading out and entering I&M data ........................................................................................74
8.3.2 Data record structure for I&M data .........................................................................................76
9 Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................... 78
9.1 Replacing modules .................................................................................................................78
9.2 Firmware update .....................................................................................................................80
9.3 Resetting interface module to factory settings (PROFINET) ..................................................81
9.4 Cleaning modules ...................................................................................................................83
10 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 84
10.1 Standards and authorizations .................................................................................................85
10.2 Electromagnetic compatibility .................................................................................................88
10.3 Transport and storage conditions ...........................................................................................90
10.4 Mechanical and climatic ambient conditions ..........................................................................91
10.5 Details on insulation, protection class, degree of protection and rated voltage .....................92
10.6 Safety-related symbols for IP65/IP67 modules ......................................................................93
A Safety-related shutdown of ET200AL standard modules ........................................................................ 94
B Dimension drawings .............................................................................................................................. 96
C Accessories/spare parts ........................................................................................................................ 97
C.1 Accessories/spare parts..........................................................................................................97
C.2 Cables ...................................................................................................................................102
C.3 Pin assignment and core color .............................................................................................110
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 112
Index................................................................................................................................................... 115
Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web
server.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667).
"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).
PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the system network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans the PROFINET network and all connected
components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).
SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).
SIMATIC ET 200AL
The SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system is a scalable and highly flexible, distributed
I/O system for connecting process signals to a higher-level control system with a field bus.
Area of application
The SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system is especially well suited for use in tight
spaces, moving applications and for assembly and handling technology. Thanks to its
scalable construction, you have the option to precisely customize its configuration to your on
site needs.
The SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system features degree of protection IP65/IP67 and
is suited to distributed use on a machine or assembly line.
Setup
The SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system is made up of the following components:
● Interface modules (PROFINET/PROFIBUS)
● Digital and analog I/O modules
● Communication module
After an interface module you can configure 2 lines (ET-Connection), each with 16 modules.
Alternatively, you can configure a line with 16 I/O modules on the SIMATIC ET 200SP
distributed I/O system with BaseUnit BU-Send and the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC.
The ET-Connection backplane bus is designed as a cable. This allows you to create spatial
distances of up to 15 m between the modules.
Configuration example
The figure below shows a configuration example of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O
system with a PROFINET interface module.
2.2 Components
Power cable and M8 con- • The power cable provides power to the
nector for power supply modules
Reference
You will find more information in the section Connecting cables for ET 200AL (Page 39).
ET-Connection1
The figure below shows a configuration in the IP65/IP67 environment with one ET-
Connection line.
Requirement
For a hybrid configuration, you need at least the following components:
● Interface module
– IM 155-6 PN HF (V3.0 or higher)
– IM 155-6 PN ST (V3.1 or higher)
– IM 155-6 DP HF (V3.0 or higher)
Note
Using 15 m cable
Keep in mind that you can only use cables with a cable length of 15 m between the
modules in combination with interface modules as of firmware version V3.3.0.
● CPU
– 1510SP-1 PN (V2.0 or higher and STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V14 or higher)
– 1512SP-1 PN (V2.0 or higher and STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V14 or higher)
– 1510SP F-1 PN (V2.0 or higher and STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V14 or higher)
– 1512SP F-1 PN (V2.0 or higher and STEP 7 (TIA Portal) V14 or higher)
● BaseUnit BU-Send with BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
● ET-Connection cable pre-assembled on one side
● Power cable pre-assembled on one side
Rules
When putting together a hybrid configuration, you must observe the following rules:
● The bus length of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system is a maximum of 1 m
(excluding interface module/CPU, including BU-Send, BA-Send 1×FC and server
module).
● A maximum of 16 ET 200AL I/O modules can be connected to ET-Connection.
● The maximum length of the bus cable for ET-Connection between two modules is 15 m.
Procedure
Watch video sequence (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95886672)
Proceed as follows to put together a multi-tier configuration:
1. Mount the BaseUnit BU-Send directly to the right of the ET 200SP interface module or the
ET 200SP CPU.
2. Then install the other BaseUnits/I/O modules for the ET 200SP distributed I/O system and
the server module.
3. Connect the bus cable for ET-Connection to the BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC and install it
on the BaseUnit BU-Send.
4. Fasten the BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC with the BaseUnit BU-Send (1 screw with
tightening torque of 0.2 Nm). Use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3.5 mm blade to do this.
5. Connect the other end of the bus cable for ET-Connection (with M8 connector) to the first
ET 200AL I/O module (socket X30 ET-Connection IN).
6. Connect the supply voltage (24 V DC) to the ET 200AL I/O modules (X80 connector).
Introduction
All the modules of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system are designed for the degree of
protection IP65/IP67. This means that you can directly mount this system in your plant.
Installation position
You can mount the ET 200AL distributed I/O system in any position.
Minimum clearances
At ambient temperatures of 50 °C or higher, please ensure that the module is mounted at a
distance of least 1 cm from an adjacent module or another device.
Mounting rules
When mounting the modules, you do not need to following any special rules.
Note
Mounting of the modules
Mount the ET 200AL distributed I/O system only with disconnected supply voltages.
Introduction
The modules of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system are designed for installation on a level,
firm surface.
Thanks to the axisymmetrical drill holes in the modules, you have the option to fasten the
modules on an aluminum profile using tee nuts.
The following images shows the aluminum profile on which you can mount the modules.
Required tools
For installation, you need a screwdriver or an Allen wrench.
Required screws
The following table shows and explains the screw types required to mount the modules.
Figure 4-2 Dimensions for mounting interface modules and 45 mm I/O modules
Introduction
Depending on the area of application, the ET 200AL distributed I/O system, as a component
of plants and systems, requires that special rules and specifications be followed.
This section gives an overview of the most important rules to be followed for integration of
the ET 200AL distributed I/O system in a plant or in a system.
Specific application
Follow the safety and accident prevention regulations applicable to specific applications, e.g.
the machinery directive.
EMERGENCY-STOP device
EMERGENCY-STOP devices according to IEC 60204 (corresponds to DIN VDE 113) must
remain in effect in all operating modes of the plant or system.
Line voltage
The following section describes what you need to pay attention to with respect to the line
voltage (you will find additional information in the section Information on insulation, protection
class, degree of protection, and rated voltage (Page 92)):
● For stationary plants or systems without an all-pole line disconnector, there must be a
disconnector unit (all-pole) fitted in the building installation.
● For load current supplies, the configured rated voltage range must correspond to the local
line voltage.
● For all power circuits of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system, the fluctuation/deviation of
the line voltage from the rated value must be within the permitted tolerance.
24 V DC supply
Below there is a description of what you need to pay attention to with 24 V DC supply:
● For buildings:
If there is a danger due to overvoltages, you must take lightning protection measures for
external lightning protection (e.g. lighting protection elements).
● With 24 V DC supply lines and signal lines:
If there is a danger due to overvoltages, you must take lightning protection measures for
internal lightning protection (e.g. lightning protection elements. You will find additional
information in the Designing interference-free controllers
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59193566) function manual).
● For 24 V DC supply:
Ensure that there is a safe (electrical) separation of low voltage (SELV/PELV) according
to IEC 60364-4-41.
You must secure all feeding supply voltages with a UL/IEC approved fuse 24 V DC/4 A
(trigger characteristic type B or C).
Reference
Additional information can be found in the function manual Designing interference-free
controllers (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59193566).
Introduction
Information is provided below on the overall configuration of an ET 200AL distributed I/O
system on a grounded incoming supply (TN-S network). The specific subjects discussed are:
● Disconnecting devices, short-circuit and overload protection to IEC 60364 (corresponding
to DIN VDE 0100) and IEC 60204 (corresponding to DIN VDE 0113)
● Load current supplies and load circuits
● Supply voltages of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system
Grounded infeed
In grounded incoming supplies, the neutral conductor of the supply system is grounded. A
simple ground fault between a live conductor and ground or a grounded section of the plant
causes the protective devices to trip.
Supply voltages
Two supply voltages are available for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system.
● 1L+: Supply voltage (non-switched)
● 2L+: Load voltage (switched)
① Main switch
② Short-circuit and overvoltage protection
③ Fuses for cable protection (automatic circuit breaker for 4 A)
④ When configuring the ET 200AL distributed I/O system with non-grounded reference potential,
no connection is made between 1M, 2M and FE.
Insulation monitoring
In the following situations, you must provide insulation monitoring.
● When configuring the ET 200AL distributed I/O system with non-grounded reference
potential
● When hazardous system conditions may occur due to errors
Electrical isolation
When electrically configuring the ET 200AL distributed I/O system, there is electrical isolation
between:
● Load voltage 2L+ and all other switching parts
● Communication interfaces (PROFINET/PROFIBUS) of the interface modules and all other
switching parts
● ET-Connection and all other switching parts
The following images show the potential conditions of the modules of the ET 200AL
distributed I/O system.
Figure 5-2 Potential conditions of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (Part 1)
Figure 5-3 Potential conditions of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system (Part 2)
WARNING
Pay attention to the potential group
When a digital output is connected to a digital input, pay attention to the potential groups.
Depending on the configuration, 1M and 2M may then be connected, resulting in
elimination of the electrical isolation between 1L+ and 2L+. The possible compensating
currents can destroy the digital module.
Cable protection
According to IEC 60364, cable protection is required, i.e. you must always secure the
incoming lines externally.
You must secure all incoming supply voltages with a UL/IEC approved 24 V DC/4 A fuse
(trigger characteristic type B or C).
Note
Turning 1L+ and 2L+ on and off
In contrast to the 2L+ load voltage, the 1L+ supply voltage may not be turned on and off in
operation.
The figure below shows a configuration with a new voltage infeed for the modules. The
different potential groups have a gray background.
Reference
You will find additional information on electrical configuration and the voltage drop in the
section Connecting cables for ET 200AL (Page 39).
Introduction
You must connect the distributed I/O system ET 200AL to functional earth (FE)
Requirement
Conductive substrate for mounting of the module
Required tools
To connect to functional earth, you need the following tools:
● Screwdriver
Required accessories:
To connect to functional earth, you need the following accessories:
● 2 x M4 fastening screws.
Mounting
To connect modules of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system to functional earth with a
conductive mounting substrate, proceed as follows:
1. Drill two fastening holes.
2. Screw the module with the M4 fastening screws using a torque of 1.2 Nm.
Note
Earthing with conductive mounting substrate
When you fasten a module of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system on a conductive,
grounded substrate, the bottom fastening screw provides a conductive connection to the
ground potential.
Ensure that there is a low-impedance connection between the module and conductive
underground as well as between the conductive underground and functional earth.
Reference
You will find more information on installing the modules in the section Mounting modules
(Page 24).
Requirement
Conductive substrate for mounting of the module
Required tools
To connect to functional earth, you need the following tools:
● Screwdriver
● Stripping tool
● Crimp tool
Required accessories:
To connect to functional earth on a non-conductive fastening substrate, you need the
following accessories:
● 2 x M4 fastening screws.
● Cable lug suitable for M4 screws
● Grounding cable (braided copper cable) with a minimum cross section of 4 mm2
Mounting
To connect modules of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system to functional earth, proceed as
follows:
1. Drill two fastening holes.
2. Strip the grounding cable.
3. Fasten the cable lug to the grounding cable.
4. Screw the module and the cable lug with the M4 fastening screws using a torque of 1.2
Nm.
The figure below shows how to connect functional earth using the example of the
IM 157-1 PN interface module.
Note
Earthing with non-conductive mounting substrate
Make sure there is a low-impedance connection between the module and the functional
earth.
Reference
You will find more information on installing the modules in the section Mounting modules
(Page 24).
CAUTION
Pay attention to maximum incoming currents
For each power supply (1L+, 2L+), you can feed in a maximum of 4A.
If you exceed the maximum incoming currents and do not comply with the required cable
cross sections, an increased incoming current could lead to overheating of the cable
insulation and the contacts. This could result in damage to the modules.
The figure below shows the voltage drop depending on the cable length for 4 current
strengths, using the example of a copper cable with ∅ 0.5 mm2.
To estimate the voltage drop in your ET 200AL distributed I/O system, you must add the
voltage drops of the different cables. For every module used, you must add an additional
voltage drop of around 0.1 V.
Example
If you have a 7 m power supply cable with ∅ 0.5 mm2, the voltage drop is around 1.5 V with
a load of 3 A.
5.6 Wiring
Connection
Connect all cables to the front side of the modules:
● Supply voltage and ET-Connection to the 4-pole M8 round sockets and M8 round
connectors
● Signal lines to the 3-pole M8 or 4/5-pole M12 round sockets
● Fieldbus lines to the 4/5 pole M12 round sockets and M12 round connectors
Note
Color coding
The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These
colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables.
Requirement
Wire the modules with the supply voltage off.
Required tools
If you are not using pre-assembled cables, you need the following tools:
● Stripping tool
● Screwdriver to wire the connection plugs
● Stripping Tool for ET-Connection
Note
ET-Connection cables
When connecting ET-Connection use only the offered cables.
Connecting M8 connectors
To connect M8 connectors, proceed as follows:
1. Insert the connector in the appropriate round socket on the module.
Make sure that there is proper locking between the connector and socket.
2. Tighten the connector using the knurled screw with a torque of 0.4 Nm.
The figure below shows the connection of the M8 connectors, using the example of the
DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 8xM8 digital input/
digital output module.
Y-cable
The Y-cable allows you to connect two actuators or sensors to the inputs or outputs.
The use of a Y-cable is particularly recommended when two channels are occupied for each
socket of an I/O device. The Y-cable distributes the channels to two circular connectors.
Introduction
For better orientation, the ET 200AL distributed I/O system is identified using various
markings which will help you when configuring and connecting the modules.
interface Labeling
PROFINET IO interfaces X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R
PROFIBUS DP interfaces X1 DP1 and X1 DP2
I/O input and output interfaces X10 through X17
ET-Connection interfaces (interface modules) X30 (ET-CON1) and X31 (ET-CON2)
ET-Connection interfaces (I/O modules) X30 (ET-CON IN) and X31 (ET-CON OUT)
Power supply interfaces X80 (IN) and X81 (OUT)
Note
Color coding
The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These
colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables.
NOTICE
ET-Connection/supply voltage
Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET-Connection and the supply voltage.
Mixing up the ET-Connection connectors and the connectors for the supply voltage can
destroy the module.
Pin assignment
The pin assignments of the various interfaces are lasered at the factory, on the side of every
module.
Introduction
In addition to the factory markings, there are also optional possibilities for labeling and/or
identifying interfaces and modules on the ET 200AL distributed I/O system.
Identification label
The identification labels come with each module as strips and can be machine-printed. A
strip has 10 identification labels measuring 10 x 5 mm in the color RAL9016. The
identification labels can be inserted into every module at the points provided. The
identification labels are used for channel, module and slot labeling.
The figure below shows all points where you can use the identification labels using the
example of the IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 communication module.
① Identification labels
Introduction
This section describes how to mount or remove identification labels.
Required tools
You need a screwdriver with 3 mm blade width (only to remove identification labels).
Mounting procedure
To mount an identification label, proceed as follows:
1. Print the identification label using commercially available marking systems.
2. Press the identification label out of its holder.
3. Stick the identification labels into the cutouts provided, as shown in the figure Optional
marking (Page 45).
Mounting the identification labels is the same for all modules.
Removal procedure
To remove an identification label, proceed as follows:
1. Carefully use a screwdriver to pull out the identification label.
Removing identification labels is the same for all modules.
Requirements
The figure below shows the maximum configuration with modules of the ET 200AL
distributed I/O system.
Reference
You can find additional information on this topic in section Configuration control (option
handling) (Page 51).
The figure below shows the maximum configuration with modules of the ET 200AL
distributed I/O system.
Reference
You can find additional information on this topic in section Configuration control (option
handling) (Page 51).
Introduction
With configuration control (option handling), you handle various standard machine
configuration levels in one project without having to change the hardware configuration or
user program.
The following figure shows 3 configurations of a standard machine with the corresponding
station options of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system.
Figure 7-1 Various configuration levels of a standard machine with the corresponding station
options of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system.
Benefits
● Easy project handling and commissioning through use of a single STEP 7 project for all
station options.
● Easy handling during maintenance, versioning and upgrades.
● Hardware savings: Only the I/O modules needed for the current station option of the
machine are installed.
● Potential savings when building, commissioning and creating documentation for standard
machines.
Procedure
To set up the configuration control, follow these steps in the order given:
7.2 Configuring
Requirements
Via PROFINET IO:
● Configuration software, for example STEP 7 Professional as of V13
● IM 157-1 PN
● You have assigned the interface module to an IO controller in STEP 7
Via PROFIBUS DP:
● Configuration software, for example STEP 7 Professional as of V13
● IM 157-1 DP
● You have assigned the interface module to an DP master in STEP 7
● The parameter "Operation if preset configuration does not match actual configuration" is
activated.
The parameter "Operation if preset configuration does not match actual configuration" is
located in STEP 7 in the properties of the interface module under "Module parameters" >
"Start-up".
Note
Disabled parameter "Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration"
If an I/O module is missing or an incorrect or additional I/O module is plugged in and the
"Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration" parameter is
disabled, the ET 200AL distributed I/O system does not start up.
The diagnostic "Slot x no module" or "Slot x wrong module" is generated.
If the IM 157-1 DP interface module does not start up in this status, the RUN and ERROR
LEDs on the interface module flash red. The DIAG LEDs flash green on all I/O modules
as well.
Required steps
Enable the "Allow to reconfigure the device via the user program" parameter when
configuring the interface module.
● The parameter "Enable reconfiguration of device via user program" is located in the
properties of the interface module under "Module parameters" > "Configuration control".
7.3.1 Introduction
Required steps
The following description shows as an example how you can create a control data record for
the configuration control in STEP 7 (TIA Portal).
To create a control data record for the configuration control, follow these steps:
1. Create a PLC data type that contains the structure of the control data record for an
ET 200AL interface module.
You can find the structure of the control data record in section Control data record for the
ET 200AL distributed I/O system (Page 58)
3. Create an array of the data type of the above created PLC data type in the data block.
The following figure shows a data block containing the control data records for an
ET200AL interface module. In this example the data block contains three control data
records.
4. In the "Start value" column of the control data records, enter which module is located at
which slot.
Rules
Observe the following rules:
● Slot entries in the control data record outside the station master are ignored by the
interface module.
● The control data record must contain the entries up to the last slot of the station option.
● Each slot of a station option may only be present once in the control data record.
● Each slot of a station option may only be assigned to one slot in the station master.
● The interface module (slot 0) is not an element of the configuration control, but instead
controls this.
● The topology modules always have to exist in the data record:
– The topology module ET-Connection 1 is always located on Slot 1.
– The topology module ET-Connection 2 is always located on Slot 18.
7.3.2 Control data record for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system
Slot assignment
Note
Topology modules ET-Connetion1 and ET-Connection2
Both topology modules ET-Connection1 and ET-Connection2 should be treated like real
modules during configuration control.
Restriction: ET-Connetion1 is always placed in Slot 1 and ET-Connection2 is always placed
in Plot 18.
The following table shows the possible slots for the various modules for an
ET 200AL interface module:
Operating principle
The feedback data record informs you about the accuracy of the module assignment and
gives you the option of detecting assignment errors in the control data record. The feedback
data record is mapped via a separate data record 197 V2.0.
Note
The data in the feedback data record is always mapped for all modules. In a Shared Device
configuration, it is therefore irrelevant which IO controller the respective modules are
assigned to.
As long as no control data record was sent, a one-to-one module assignment is assumed for
the compilation of data record 197 (station master → station option).
Error messages
In the case of an error when reading the feedback data record, the RDREC instruction
returns the following error messages via the STATUS block parameter:
Introduction
Several options/functional variations often exist for machines designed as series products.
Or you have a plant that can operate in different modes.
Combine the modules that are needed for a function. With configuration control (option
handling), you have the option to switch these functions on and off or expand their
configuration.
The following examples show how you can form the control data record for a station option.
The station master consists of an interface module IM 157-1 PN and 15 I/O modules in this
case.
Figure 7-6 Example: Hardware configuration of Station option 2 and 4 with the associated control
data record in STEP 7
Figure 7-7 Example: Hardware configuration of station option 2 to 4 with the associated control data
record in STEP 7
7.4 Transferring the control data record in the user program of the CPU
Required steps
Transfer the created control data record 196 to the interface module using the WRREC
(Write data record) instruction.
Special requirements relating to the transfer of the control data record to the interface module
● If you have enabled configuration control, the ET 200AL station is not ready for operation
without a control data record. As long as no valid control data record has been
transferred, the I/O modules are considered as failed by the CPU and exhibit substitute
value behavior. The interface module continues to exchange data.
● The control data record is stored retentively in the interface module. Note:
– If the configuration is unchanged, you do not have to rewrite the control data
record 196 during restart.
– If you write a control data record with modified configuration, this will result in a station
failure in the distributed I/O system. The original data record 196 is deleted and the
new data record 196 is saved retentively. The station will then restart with the modified
configuration.
Error messages
In case of error, the WRREC instruction returns the following error messages via the
STATUS block parameter:
80B1H Invalid length; the length information in data record 196 is not correct.
80B2H Invalid slot: The configured slot is not assigned
80B5H Configuration control parameters not assigned.
80B8H Parameter error
Reasons for a parameter error are:
• Incorrect block ID in the header (not equal to 196)
• Invalid version identifier in the header
• A reserved bit was set
• A station master slot was assigned an invalid slot in the station option
• Multiple slots in the station master are assigned to the same slot in the station op-
tion
• For shared device on submodule level: violation of defined restrictions
80C5H DP slave or module not available. Indicates that a data record has not been acknowl-
edged due to the system.
If you receive the error code 80A2H, 80B2H or 80C5H when writing to control data record 196,
check whether the required configuration was accepted despite the error code.
Introduction
The commissioning of your distributed I/O system depends on the system configuration. The
following procedure describes the commissioning of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system on
an IO controller.
Note
Performing tests
You must ensure the safety of your plant. You therefore need to perform a complete
functional test and the necessary safety checks before the final commissioning of a plant.
Also plan the tests to include any possible foreseeable errors. This will allow you to prevent
people or plants from being placed in danger during operation.
Procedure
The following table shows the chapters/documents in which the required actions are
described.
Table 8- 1 Requirements for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system on the PROFINET IO
Reference
You can find additional information on assigning the PROFINET IO parameters in the
PROFINET with STEP 7 V14
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856) function manual.
Principle of operation
The figure below schematically shows the startup of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system on
the PROFINET IO (= IO device) as a flow chart.
Figure 8-1 Startup of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system on the PROFINET IO
The figure below schematically shows the startup of an ET 200AL I/O module after an
ET 200AL PROFINET interface module.
8.1.3 PROFIenergy
PROFIenergy (for PROFINET) makes it possible to reduce the energy consumption of the
device using the PROFIenergy command during production downtime.
Additional information
You will find more information on the Internet (http://www.profibus.com) under Common
Application Profile PROFIenergy; Technical Specification for PROFINET; as well as in the
following documentation:
● IM 157-1 PN interface module
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254863) manual
● I/O modules (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14247/man) manuals
● PROFINET System Description
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/19292127) system manual
● PROFINET with STEP 7 V14
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856), function manual,
Section: Saving energy with PROFIenergy
● Application guide for implementation of shutdown concepts with PROFIenergy.
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/96837137)
● Saving energy with SIMATIC S7 (STEP 7 as of V5.5)
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454)
● Saving energy with SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC HMI (TIA Portal)
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58235225)
● SIMATIC S7 library for simple configuration of PROFIenergy.
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478388)
● You can find additional information on the PROFIenergy FBs ("PE_START_END" -
FB 815, "PE_CMD" - FB 816) in the online help for STEP 7 V5.5 as of SP2, Help on
system functions/function blocks.
8.2 PROFIBUS DP
Introduction
The commissioning of your distributed I/O system depends on the system configuration. The
following procedure describes the commissioning of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system on
a DP master.
Note
Performing tests
You must ensure the safety of your plant. You therefore need to perform a complete
functional test and the necessary safety checks before the final commissioning of a plant.
Also plan the tests to include any possible foreseeable errors. This helps to avoid
endangering persons or equipment during operation.
Procedure
The following table shows the chapters/documents in which the required actions are
described.
Principle of operation
The figure below schematically shows the startup of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system on
the PROFIBUS DP (= DP slave) as a flow chart.
The figure below schematically shows the startup of an ET 200AL I/O module after an
ET 200AL PROFIBUS interface module as flow chart.
Introduction
Identification data I&M is information that is saved either as read-only (I data) or read/write
(M data) on the interface module.
Identification data (I&M0): Manufacturer information on the module that is read-only and in
some cases is also printed on the module housing, for example, article number, serial
number and firmware version.
Maintenance data (I&M1, 2, 3): Plant-dependent information, e.g. installation location.
Maintenance data is created during configuration and written to the module.
All modules of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system support identification data (I&M0 to
I&M3).
The I&M identification data supports you in the following activities:
● Checking the plant configuration
● Locating hardware changes in a system
● Correcting errors in a system
With the I&M identification data, you have the option of clearly identifying modules online.
In STEP 7, the identification data is displayed in the "Module status - IM 157" and
"Properties..." tabs (see STEP 7 online help).
Reference
You can find additional information on I&M data of the ET 200SP (mixed configuration) in the
ET 200SP distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58649293) system manual.
The following table shows the structure of data records for I&M identification data.
Reading I&M data records with data record 255 (distributed via PROFIBUS DP)
The modules support standardized access to identification data using DR 255 (index 65000
to 65003). For additional information on the DR 255 data structure, refer to the specifications
of the Profile Guideline - Order No. 3.502.
Replacing modules
Replacing a module is not permitted during ongoing operation.
WARNING
Material damage can occur
If you remove/insert modules with the power connected, this can lead to undefined states in
your system.
Material damage to the ET 200AL distributed I/O system may occur as a result.
Only remove or replace modules when the power is disconnected.
Always comply with the required standards and safety guidelines when configuring a
system.
WARNING
Mixing up ET-Connection1 and ET-Connection2
When connecting the modules, always ensure that they are properly connected.
If you mix up the lines for ET-Connection1 and ET-Connection2 when connecting the
modules, this can lead to undefined states in your system.
Behavior of ET-Connection
During ongoing operation, a module replacement may be necessary, e.g. because the
module is defective. If an I/O module fails in an ET-Connection line, the line remains active
up to the failed I/O module. After replacing the I/O module, the ET-Connection line starts up
by itself.
Procedure
To replace a module, proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the supply voltage to the module to be replaced.
2. Completely remove all cables connected to the module.
3. Completely remove the fixing screws of the module
Note
"New" module
The removed module may only be replaced by a module of the same type.
WARNING
Pay attention to the slot number of the module
If you mix up the ET 200AL I/O modules when connecting them, this can cause personal
injury and damage to the machine.
The ET 200AL distributed I/O system cannot distinguish between modules of the same type
during the actual/target comparison.
We recommend that you clearly label the ET 200AL I/O modules with the slot number.
The figure below shows a recommendation for labeling the ET 200AL I/O modules with the
slot number.
Result
The disconnected I/O module and all downstream I/O modules start up again by themselves.
Introduction
During operation, it can become necessary to update the firmware (e.g. for function
extensions).
Firmware updates are used to update the firmware of the interface module and I/O modules.
Note
Temporary bus interruption
When you perform a firmware update of an ET 200AL I/O module, then the ET-Connection is
temporarily interrupted due to the restart of I/O module. All downstream ET 200AL I/O
modules report a pull/plug interrupt.
Reference
You can find additional information on the procedure in the FAQs on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/88778936) and in the online help for
STEP 7.
Introduction
When you "Reset to factory settings", the interface module is reset to the delivery state
settings. This means that all information that was saved internally on the interface module is
deleted.
Note
Failure of downstream stations is possible
Resetting an interface module to factory settings can lead to failure of downstream stations
in a line.
Note
Substitute value behavior of I/O modules when resetting to factory settings
When "Resetting to factory settings", the I/O modules in the station take on the non-
configured state, which means input data are not entered and output data are not output.
Reset options
There are two ways to reset an interface module to factory settings:
● Online with STEP 7 (TIA Portal)
● Online with STEP 7, V5.5 or higher
Requirement
You need an online connection to reset an interface module to factory settings.
Reference
You will find more information on the procedure in the STEP 7 online help.
Reference
The certificates for the markings and approvals can be found on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com).
Note
Details on the components of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system
The currently valid markings and approvals are printed on the components of the ET 200AL
distributed I/O system.
CE mark
The ET 200AL distributed I/O system fulfills the requirements and protection targets of the
following directives and complies with the harmonized European standards (ES) which have
been promulgated for programmable logic controllers in the official gazettes of the European
Community:
● 2014/30/EU "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC directive)
● 2011/65/EU "Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and
electronic equipment" (RoHS Directive)
The EC declarations of conformity are available to the responsible authorities at:
Siemens AG
Digital Factory
Factory Automation
DF FA AS SYS
Postfach 1963
D-92209 Amberg
These are also available for download on the Customer Support Internet pages, under the
keyword "Declaration of Conformity".
UL approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with
● UL 61010-2-201
● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
● UL50/NEMA250 Enclosure Type 4X, Indoor use only, watertight
IEC 61131-2
The ET 200AL distributed I/O system meets the requirements and criteria of standard IEC
61131-2, excluding the requirements mentioned in section 11 to 14 (programmable logic
controllers, part 2: Equipment requirements and tests).
IEC 61010-2-201
The ET 200AL distributed I/O system fulfills the requirements and criteria of standard IEC
61010-2-201.
PROFINET standard
The interface module IM 157-1 PN based on standard IEC 61158 Type 10.
PROFIBUS standard
The interface module IM 157-1 DP based on standard IEC 61158 Type 3.
Marine approval
Classification societies:
● ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
● BV (Bureau Veritas)
● DNV-GL (Det Norske Veritas - Germanischer Lloyd)
● LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
● Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai, being prepared)
IO-Link standard
The communication module CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 based on standard IEC 61131-9.
Industrial use
The ET 200AL distributed I/O system is suitable for use in industrial environments. It meets
the following standards for this type of use:
● Requirements on interference emission EN 61000-6-4: 2007 + A1: 2011
● Requirements on immunity EN 61000-6-2: 2005
Note
ET 200AL distributed I/O system not intended for use in residential areas
The ET 200AL distributed I/O system is not intended for use in residential areas. If you are
using the ET 200AL distributed I/O system in residential areas, radio and TV reception may
be affected.
Reference
The certificates for the markings and approvals can be found on the Internet under
Service&Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of an electrical apparatus to function in a
satisfactory manner in its electromagnetic environment without affecting this environment.
An I/O device of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system fulfills the requirements of the EMC law
of the European Union. The requirement for this is that an I/O device of the ET 200AL
distributed I/O system meets the specifications and guidelines for electrical configuration.
24 V supply connection
The following table shows measurement ranges for low voltage according to EN 55016.
Insulation
The insulation is designed in compliance with the requirements of IEC 61010-2-201.
Note
Galvanic isolation with 707 V DC (Type Test) is tested for modules with 24 V DC supply
voltage (SELV/PELV).
Symbol Meaning
General warning sign Caution/Notice
You must read the product documentation. The product documentation contains
information about the type of potential hazard and enables you to recognize risks
and implement countermeasures.
The assigned safety symbols apply to devices with Ex approval.
You must read the product documentation. The product documentation contains
information about the type of potential hazard and enables you to recognize risks
and implement countermeasures.
Note that the device must be constructed and connected in accordance with EMC
regulations.
Note that a 230 V device can be exposed to electrical voltages which can be dan-
gerous.
ANSI Z535.2
Note that a device of Protection Class III may only be supplied with a protective
low voltage according to the standard SELV/PELV.
IEC 60417-1-5180 "Class III equipment"
Be aware that the device is only approved for the industrial field and only for in-
door use.
Principle of operation
The higher-level safety relay (for example: 3SK1) disconnects the 2L+ and 2M supply. This
switches all digital outputs operated with the 2L+ and 2M (switched) supply to the safe state.
The digital outputs connected to the 1L+ and 1M (non-switched) supply are not intended for
functional switching and therefore cannot be shut down safely.
There is no interaction between the outputs supplied by 1L+ and 2L+.
You can also integrate I/O modules that are operated solely at the supply 1L+ and 1M (non-
switched) in the structure of your distributed I/O system. These I/O modules are not affected
by a disconnection, they pass on the supply 2L+ and 2M (switched). The following figure
shows the modules DI and AI as an example.
Block diagram
Note
Usage of IO-Link devices
Please note that the IO-Link device must have corresponding safety characteristics in order
to use safety-oriented tripping.
Reference
You can find additional information as well as an overview of the modules with safety-related
shutdown on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/39198632).
Table C- 6 Y cable
Online catalog
Other article numbers for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system can be found on the Internet
(https://mall.industry.siemens.com) in the online catalog and the online order system.
C.2 Cables
General information
Product type designation BUS CABLE ET-CONNECTION
Function To connect ET-CONNECTION devices with de-
gree of protection IP65/IP67
Degree of protection and protection class
IP65 Yes
IP67 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during mounting
minimum -30 °C
maximum 80 °C
Storage/transport temperature
Ambient temperature during transport and storage
minimum -40 °C
maximum 80 °C
Cables
Cable designation 2Y(ST)CY 1x4x0.5/1.0-100-GN
Number of electrical wires 4
Design of shielding Overlapped aluminum-lined sheet, coated with
shielding made of tin plated copper wires
Outside diameter of the inner conductor 0.5 mm
Outside diameter of the wire insulation 1.0 mm
Outside diameter of the cable sheath 5 mm
Number of bending cycles 1000000; Trailing-chain suitable for 1 million
bending cycles with a bending radius of 100 mm,
a velocity of 4 m/s and an acceleration of 4 m/s²
Permissible bending radius
General information
One time bending, min. 20 mm
Multiple bending, min. 40 mm
Constant bending 100 mm
Color of the cable sheath Green
Color of the wire insulation of the data wires White, yellow, blue, orange
Weight per length 34 kg/km
Mechanics/material
Type of cable outlet 180° cable outlet
90° cable outlet (with angled connectors)
Number of connectors 1 or 2
Connector housing material Metal
Wire insulation material PE
Cable sheath material PVC
Material property halogen free No
Material property silicon free Yes
The following table shows the technical properties of the bus cable ET-Connection, PUR
cable.
General information
Product type designation BUS CABLE ET-CONNECTION, PUR CABLE
Function To connect ET-CONNECTION devices with de-
gree of protection IP65/IP67
Degree of protection and protection class
IP65 Yes
IP67 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during mounting
minimum -30 °C
maximum 80 °C
Storage/transport temperature
Ambient temperature during transport and storage
minimum -40 °C
maximum 80 °C
Cables
Cable designation 2Y(ST)C11Y 2x2x0.5/1.0-100-GN
Number of electrical wires 4
Design of shielding Overlapped aluminum-lined sheet, coated with
shielding made of tin plated copper wires
Outside diameter of the inner conductor 0.5 mm
Outside diameter of the wire insulation 1.0 mm
General information
Outside diameter of the cable sheath 5 mm
Number of bending cycles 1000000*; trailing-chain suitable for 1 million
bending cycles with a bending radius of 100 mm,
a velocity of 4 m/s and an acceleration of 4 m/s²
Permissible bending radius
One time bending, min. 20 mm
Multiple bending, min. 40 mm
Constant bending 100 mm
Color of the cable sheath Green
Color of the wire insulation of the data wires White, yellow, blue, orange
Weight per length 34 kg/km
Mechanics/material
Type of cable outlet 180° cable outlet
90° cable outlet (with angled connectors)
Number of connectors 1 or 2
Connector housing material Metal
Wire insulation material PE
Cable sheath material PUR
Material property halogen free Yes
Material property silicon free Yes
The following table shows the technical properties of the connecting cable for ET-Connection
standard.
General information
Product type designation CONNECTING CABLE FOR BUS CABLE ET-
CONNECTION, CABLE 0.2 M
Function To connect two bus cables ET-CONNECTION
Degree of protection and protection class
IP65 Yes
IP67 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during mounting
minimum -30 °C
maximum 80 °C
Storage/transport temperature
Ambient temperature during transport and storage
minimum -40 °C
maximum 80 °C
Cables
Cable designation 2Y(ST)CY 1x4x0.5/1.0-100-GN
Number of electrical wires 4
Design of shielding Overlapped aluminum-lined sheet, coated with
shielding made of tin plated copper wires
Cable length 0.2 m
Outside diameter of the inner conductor 0.5 mm
Outside diameter of the wire insulation 1.0 mm
Outside diameter of the cable sheath 5 mm
Permissible bending radius
One time bending, min. 20 mm
Multiple bending, min. 40 mm
Constant bending 100 mm
Color of the cable sheath Green
Color of the wire insulation of the data wires White, yellow, blue, orange
Weight per length 34 kg/km
Mechanics/material
Type of cable outlet 180° cable outlet
Connector housing material Metal
Wire insulation material PE
Cable sheath material PVC
Material property halogen free No
Material property silicon free Yes
The following table shows the technical properties of the connecting cable for ET-
Connection, PUR cable.
General information
Product type designation CONNECTING CABLE FOR BUS CABLE ET-
CONNECTION, PUR CABLE 0.2 M
Function To connect two bus cables ET-CONNECTION
Degree of protection and protection class
IP65 Yes
IP67 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during mounting
minimum -30 °C
maximum 80 °C
Storage/transport temperature
Ambient temperature during transport and storage
minimum -40 °C
maximum 80 °C
Cables
Cable designation 2Y(ST)C11Y 2x2x0.5/1.0-100-GN
Number of electrical wires 4
Design of shielding Overlapped aluminum-lined sheet, coated with
shielding made of tin plated copper wires
Cable length 0.2 m
Outside diameter of the inner conductor 0.5 mm
Outside diameter of the wire insulation 1.0 mm
Outside diameter of the cable sheath 5 mm
Permissible bending radius
One time bending, min. 20 mm
Multiple bending, min. 40 mm
Constant bending 100 mm
Color of the cable sheath Green
Color of the wire insulation of the data wires White, yellow, blue, orange
Weight per length 34 kg/km
Mechanics/material
Type of cable outlet 180° cable outlet
Connector housing material Metal
Wire insulation material PE
Cable sheath material PUR
Material property halogen free Yes
Material property silicon free Yes
General information
Product type designation POWER CABLE M8
Function For connection of ET 200AL for 24 V DC power
supply
Degree of protection and protection class
IP65 Yes
IP67 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during mounting
minimum -30 °C
maximum 80 °C
Storage/transport temperature
Ambient temperature during transport and storage
minimum -40 °C
maximum 80 °C
Cables
Cable designation 4 Li9Y 0.50 mm² Y
Number of electrical wires 4
Outside diameter of the inner conductor 0.8 mm
Outside diameter of the wire insulation 1.46 mm
Outside diameter of the cable sheath 5.2 mm
Number of bending cycles 2500000; Trailing-chain suitable for 2.5 million
bending cycles with a bending radius of 52 mm, a
speed of 3 m/s² and an acceleration of 10 m/s²
Permissible bending radius
One time bending, min. 26 mm
Multiple bending, min. 52 mm
Constant bending 52 mm
Color of the cable sheath gray
General information
Color of the wire insulation of the power wires White, brown, blue black
Weight per length 44 kg/km
Mechanics/material
Type of cable outlet 180° cable outlet
90° cable outlet (with angled connectors)
Number of connectors 1 or 2
Connector housing material Plastic
Wire insulation material PP
Cable sheath material PVC
Material property halogen free No
Material property silicon free Yes
The following table shows the technical properties of the power supply, PUR cable
General information
Product type designation POWER CABLE M8, PUR CABLE
Function For connection of ET 200AL for 24 V DC power
supply
Degree of protection and protection class
IP65 Yes
IP67 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during mounting
minimum -25 °C
maximum 80 °C
Storage/transport temperature
Ambient temperature during transport and storage
minimum -25 °C
maximum 80 °C
Cables
Cable designation LIF9Y11YFHF 4x0.50 mm²
Number of electrical wires 4
Outside diameter of the inner conductor 1 mm
Outside diameter of the wire insulation 1.46 mm
Outside diameter of the cable sheath 5.1 mm
Number of bending cycles 2000000; trailing-chain suitable for 2 million
bending cycles with a bending radius of 51 mm, a
velocity of 5 m/s and an acceleration of 5 m/s²
Permissible bending radius
One time bending, min. 26 mm
Multiple bending, min. 51 mm
Constant bending 51 mm
General information
Color of the cable sheath gray
Color of the wire insulation of the power wires White, brown, blue black
Weight per length 44 kg/km
Mechanics/material
Type of cable outlet 180° cable outlet
90° cable outlet (with angled connectors)
Number of connectors 1 or 2
Connector housing material Plastic
Wire insulation material PP
Cable sheath material PE-PUR
Material property halogen free Yes
Material property silicon free Yes
Bus
A common transfer route to which all devices are connected; it has two defined ends.
Configuration
Systematic arrangement of individual modules (design).
Connection plug
Physical connection between device and cable.
Device
Device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, e.g. IO device via PROFINET IO.
Diagnostics
Monitoring functions for the detection, localization, classification, display, and further
evaluation of errors, faults, and alarms. They run automatically while the system is in
operation. This increases the availability of systems by reducing commissioning times and
downtimes.
ET-Connection
Backplane bus through which a connection is made. This allows bus participants to be
installed several meters from each other.
Firmware update
Upgrade of firmware for modules (interface modules, I/O modules etc.), e.g. after functional
enhancements, to the newest firmware version (update).
Ground
Conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point.
All interconnected, inactive parts of a piece of equipment that cannot accept any dangerous
contact voltage, even in the event of a fault.
Ground
Conductive earth whose electrical potential can be set equal to zero at any point.
All interconnected, inactive parts of a piece of equipment that cannot accept any dangerous
contact voltage, even in the event of a fault.
GSD file
As a generic station description, this file in XML format has all the properties of a PROFINET
or PROFIBUS device that are required for its configuration.
I/O modules
All modules that can be operated with a CPU or an interface module.
Identification data
Information that is saved in modules and that supports the user in checking the plant
configuration and locating hardware changes.
Interface module
Module in the distributed I/O system. The interface module connects the distributed I/O
system via a field bus with the CPU (I/O) controller and prepared the data for the/from the
I/O modules.
Parameter assignment
Parameter assignment is the transfer of parameters from the IO controller to the IO device.
PELV
Protective Extra Low Voltage = protective extra-low voltage
PROFINET
PROcess FIeld NETwork, open Industrial Ethernet standard, which continues PROFIBUS
and Industrial Ethernet. A cross-manufacturer communication, automation and engineering
model, defined as an automation standard by PROFIBUS International e.V.
PROFINET IO controller
Device used to address connected I/O devices (e.g. distributed I/O systems). This means
that: The IO controller exchanges input and output signals with assigned I/O devices. The IO
controller often corresponds with the CPU in which the automation program is running.
PROFINET IO device
Distributed field device that can be assigned to one or more IO controllers (e.g. distributed
I/O system, valve terminals, frequency converters, switches).
PROFINET IO
Communication concept for the realization of modular, distributed applications in the
framework of PROFINET.
Reference potential
Potential from which the voltages of the circuits involved are observed and/or measured.
SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage = Safety extra-low voltage
TIA Portal
Totally Integrated Automation Portal
The TIA Portal is the key to the full performance capability of Totally Integrated Automation.
The software optimizes operating, machine and process sequences.
I Power supply
Connector, 15
I/O modules, 15
Power cable, 15
Identification data, 74
PROFIenergy, 70
Identification label, 15, 45
PROFINET IO, 67
Mounting, 45
Protection class, 92
Removing, 45
Protective measures, 32
Infeed
Pulse-shaped disturbance variables, 88
grounded, 30
non-grounded, 30
Installation position, 23
R
Insulation, 92
Insulation monitoring, 32 Radio interference, 87
Interface module Rated voltage, 92
PROFIBUS DP, 15 Reference potential
PROFINET IO, 15 grounded, 30
Wiring, 40 non-grounded, 30
Interface modules, 15
S
L Safe electrical isolation, 30
Line voltage, 29 Safety relay, 94
Screws, 24
SELV, 30
M Setup, 13
Shock, 91
M12 connectors, 42
SIMATIC ET 200AL, 12
M8 connectors, 41
Sinusoidal disturbance variables, 89
Maintenance, 78
Slot number, 79
Maintenance data, 74
Sockets, 43
Marking
Spare parts, 97
Factory-marked, 44
Standards, 85
Interfaces, 44
System conditions, 28
Optional, 45
System configuration
Maximum configuration
Grounded reference potential, 30
Electrical, 17
Protective measures, 32
Mechanical, 16
Ungrounded reference potential, 30
Mechanical ambient conditions, 91
Minimum clearances, 23
Mounting, 24
T
I/O module, 26
Interface module, 25 Technical specifications
Standards and authorizations, 85
Test voltage, 92
O TN-S grid, 30
Tool, 24
Option handling, (See configuration control)
Transport and storage conditions, 90
Overall configuration, 31
TÜV certificate, 95
P U
PELV, 30
Ungrounded infeed, 30
Pin assignment, 42, 44
Use
in industrial environments, 87
in mixed areas, 87
in residential areas, 87
V
Vibrations, 91
W
Wires, 28
2
___________________
Mounting
SIMATIC
3
___________________
Connection
ET 200SP
Product Information Mixed 4
___________________
Configuring
Configuration ET 200SP / ET 200AL
5
___________________
BaseUnit BU-Send
Product Information
___________________
BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC 6
02/2016
A5E33344611-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Scope
This product information supplements the ET 200SP system manual documentation.
Security information
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security in the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Application planning ................................................................................................................................ 5
2 Mounting ................................................................................................................................................. 8
3 Connection ............................................................................................................................................. 9
4 Configuring ........................................................................................................................................... 13
5 BaseUnit BU-Send ................................................................................................................................ 17
5.1 Product overview.................................................................................................................... 17
5.2 Connection ............................................................................................................................. 18
5.3 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 19
6 BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC................................................................................................................... 20
6.1 Properties ............................................................................................................................... 20
6.2 Pin assignment....................................................................................................................... 22
6.3 Schematic circuit diagram ...................................................................................................... 22
6.4 Diagnostics by means of LED display.................................................................................... 23
6.5 Technical specifications ......................................................................................................... 24
Requirement
The following components support mixed configuration:
● Interface module
– IM 155-6 PN HF (V3.0 or higher)
– IM 155-6 PN ST (V3.1 or higher)
– IM 155-6 DP HF (V3.0 or higher)
● CPU
– CPU 1510SP-1 PN (V2.0 or higher)
– CPU 1510SP F-1 PN (V2.0 or higher)
– CPU 1512SP-1 PN (V2.0 or higher)
– CPU 1512SP F-1 PN (V2.0 or higher)
● BaseUnit BU-Send with BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
● ET-Connection cable
● Power cable
Rules
You must observe the following rules when assembling a mixed configuration:
● The bus length of the ET 200SP distributed I/O system must not exceed 1 m
(without interface module, including BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC and server module)
● A maximum of 16 ET 200AL I/O modules can be connected to ET-Connection.
● The maximum length of the bus cable for ET-Connection between BA-Send and the first
module or between two modules is 15 m.
The following table shows which firmware versions of your IM or CPU support which
maximum bus cable length.
IM/CPU 2m 5m 10 m 15 m
IM 155-6 PN HF V3.0 or higher V3.0 or higher V3.0 or higher V3.3 or higher
IM 155-6 PN ST V3.1 or higher V3.1 or higher V3.1 or higher V3.3 or higher
IM 155-6 DP HF V3.0 or higher V3.0 or higher V3.0 or higher --
CPU 1510SP-1 V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher
PN
CPU 1510SP F-1 V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher
PN
CPU 1512SP-1 V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher
PN
CPU 1512SP F-1 V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher V2.0 or higher
PN
Procedure
To assemble a multi-tier configuration, follow these steps:
1. Install the BaseUnit BU-Send to the immediate right of the ET 200SP CPU/interface
module.
When the BaseUnit BU-Send is used next to the ET 200SP CPU, a CM DP and an
Ethernet CP or a maximum of 2 Ethernet CPs can be inserted between the CPU and BU-
Send.
2. Then mount the additional BaseUnits / I/O modules for the ET 200SP distributed I/O
system and the server module.
3. Connect the bus cable for ET-Connection to the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC and mount
this on the BaseUnit BU-Send.
4. Screw the BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC to the BaseUnit BU-Send (1 screw with 0.2 Nm
tightening torque). To do this, use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3.5 mm blade.
5. Connect the other end of the bus cable for ET-Connection (with M8 connector) to the first
ET 200AL I/O module (X30 socket ET-Connection IN).
6. Connect the supply voltage (24 V DC) to the ET 200AL I/O modules (X80 connector).
Note
Firmware update of an ET 200AL I/O module
When you run a firmware update of an ET 200AL I/O module, ET-Connection is briefly
interrupted by the restart of the module. All downstream ET 200AL I/O modules report a
pull/plug interrupt.
Requirement
● The mounting rail is mounted.
● The interface module is mounted.
Required tools
3 to 3.5 mm screwdriver (only for dismantling the BusAdapter)
4. Mount the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC only after you have connected the bus cable for
ET-Connection (see section Connecting (Page 9)).
Required tools
Screwdriver with 3 to 3.5 mm blade
Required accessories
Use the bus cable for ET-Connection as connecting cable between the BusAdapter BA-Send
1xFC and the ET 200AL I/O modules.
We recommend using the stripping tool for ET-Connection (6ES7194-2KA00-0AA0) with
blade cassette green (6GK1901-1B...). This guarantees fast and safe stripping.
The bus cable for ET-Connection M8, prefabricated on one side with 1 x M8 connector, 4-
pole, shielded, is available in the following lengths:
● Length 2 m: 6ES7194-2LH20-0AC0
● Length 5 m: 6ES7194-2LH50-0AC0
● Length 10 m: 6ES7194-2LN10-0AC0
● Length 15 m: 6ES7194-2LN15-0AB0
Procedure
To connect the BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC, follow these steps:
1. Strip the sheath of the bus cable at the open end as follows:
Use the stripping tool for ET-Connection to do this. The relevant settings are shown on
the tool.
2. Pull back the locking slide of the BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC and open the cover of the
connection element.
3. Lift the cable routing up as far as it will go.
4. Insert the unstripped single cores of the bus cable (according to the imprinted color
coding) into the cable routing as far as they will go and press the cable routing down as
far as it will go.
5. Close the cover of the connection element and push the locking slide forward.
6. Connect and screw the BusAdapter BA-Send 1×FC to the BaseUnit BU-Send (1 screw
with 0.2 Nm tightening torque.) To do this, use a screwdriver with a 3 to 3.5 mm blade.
7. Connect the M8 connector of the bus cable to the first ET 200AL I/O module (socket X30
ET-Connection IN). For more information about wiring the ET 200AL I/O module refer to
the system manual of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system.
For more information about connecting the ET-Connection, supply voltages, actuators and
sensors, refer to the ET 200AL system manual.
Rules
Observe the following rules when configuring:
● With mixed configurations, the following maximum configuration is possible:
– 31 (IM 155-6 DP HF and IM 155-6 PN ST)/63 (IM 155-6 PN HF and CPUs) slots for
ET 200SP modules
– 16 slots for ET 200AL I/O modules
– 1 slot for BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC
– 1 slot for server module.
● The mixed configuration may contain a maximum of 31 (IM 155-6 DP HF and IM 155-6
PN ST)/63 (IM 155-6 PN HF) ET 200SP I/O modules.
● The server module can also be mounted right next to the BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC.
● Supported functions:
Configuration control ⑥ ⑥ ⑥
Shared device ⑥ ⑥ ⑥
PROFIenergy ⑥ -- ⑥
System redundancy S2 -- -- --
Configuring
Observe the following points when configuring:
● BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC and server module must be configured. With BU-Send/BA-Send
1xFC, no parameters are available.
● Arrangement of the modules in the configuration:
– Configure the BU-Send/BA-Send 1xFC downstream from the interface module in slot
1. Position the ET 200SP modules behind it.
– Configure the ET 200AL I/O modules from slot 66 (PROFINET)/67 (CPU)/34
(PROFIBUS).
● The layout of the modules represents a preset configuration and is independent of the
configuration control.
● The system redundancy S2 function is not available in a mixed configuration.
Configuration example
An example of a mixed configuration is shown below:
Hardware configuration
Table 4- 1 Overview
Note
Configuration using PROFIBUS GSD file
When you use the PROFIBUS GSD file for the configuration, you must configure the gaps
between the server module and the first ET 200AL I/O module with BU-Cover.
Article number
6ES7193-6BN00-0NE0
View
Properties
BaseUnit suitable for BusAdapter BA-Send 1xFC
5.2 Connection
Pin assignment
The BaseUnit BU-Send has only one slot for an expansion module. No other connections
are available.
① Backplane bus
② BA-Send 1xFC expansion module
6ES7193-6BN00-0NE0
Product type designation BaseUnit BU-Send
Installation type/mounting
Rack mounting possible Yes
Front installation possible Yes
Rail mounting possible Yes
Wall/direct mounting possible No
Hardware configuration
Slots
Number of slots 1
Plug-in modules, other Yes; BusAdapter BA-Send
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Height 117 mm
Depth 32 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 30 g
Article number
6ES7193-6AS00-0AA0
Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● BusAdapter for the direct connection of ET-Connection
● Connects the interface module via ET-Connection with the ET 200AL I/O modules
● Supports all ET 200AL I/O modules
The module supports the following functions:
● Identification data I&M 0 to 3. See system manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Maximum configuration
● 16 ET 200AL I/O modules
● 15 m bus cable between BusAdapter BA Send and the first ET 200AL I/O module and
between two ET 200AL I/O modules.
● Supported functions:
Configuration control ⑥ ⑥ ⑥
Shared device ⑥ ⑥ ⑥
PROFIenergy ⑥ -- ⑥
System redundancy S2 -- -- --
Accessories
The following components must be ordered separately:
● Labeling strips
● Reference identification label
● Stripping tool for ET-Connection
● Bus cables for ET-Connection
See also
You can find more information on accessories and additional components in the
Accessories/spare parts section of the ET 200AL distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual.
LED display
The figure below shows the LED display (status and fault display) of the BusAdapter BA-
Send 1xFC.
① DIAG (green/red)
DIAG LED
Table 6- 2 Status and fault display DIAG
6ES7193-6AS00-0AA0
Interfaces
PROFINET IO
Cable length
• Copper cables 15 m; as of IM firmware V3.3: Bus nodes be-
tween BA-Send and the first ET-Connection as
well as between all other bus nodes.
ET-Connection
Number of interfaces ET-Connection 1
FC (FastConnect) Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature in operation
Min. 0 °C
Max. 60 °C
Dimensions
Width 20 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 44 g
___________________
Documentation guide 1
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200AL
Interface module IM 157-1 DP
___________________
Parameters 4
(6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0)
Interrupts, error messages,
Manual ___________
5
diagnostics and system
alarms
___________________
Technical specifications 6
___________________
Dimension drawing A
___________________
Cycle times B
12/2016
A5E32100641-AD
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Conventions
Please also observe notes marked as follows:
Note
Indicates important product information to which particular attention should be paid.
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions only form one element of such a concept.
Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines
and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the
enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security
measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. For more information about industrial security, please visit
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to
always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported,
and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
2.2 Operator controls and display elements .................................................................................11
2.3 Functions ................................................................................................................................12
2.3.1 PROFIBUS DP ........................................................................................................................12
2.3.2 Configuration control (option handling) ...................................................................................13
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 14
3.1 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................14
3.2 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................15
3.3 Configuring PROFIBUS DP address and terminating resistor ...............................................17
4 Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 20
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................20
4.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................21
5 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ................................................................... 23
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................23
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................26
5.2.1 Evaluating interrupts ...............................................................................................................26
5.2.2 Trigger a diagnostics interrupt ................................................................................................26
5.2.3 Triggering a hardware interrupt ..............................................................................................26
5.2.4 Triggering an insert/remove module interrupt .........................................................................27
5.2.5 Structure of data records ........................................................................................................27
5.3 Alarms .....................................................................................................................................35
5.3.1 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................35
5.3.2 Slave diagnostics ....................................................................................................................36
5.3.3 Station statuses 1 to 3 ............................................................................................................37
5.3.4 Master PROFIBUS address ....................................................................................................38
5.3.5 Manufacturer ID ......................................................................................................................39
5.3.6 Identifier-related diagnostics ...................................................................................................39
5.3.7 Module status ..........................................................................................................................40
5.3.8 Channel diagnostics................................................................................................................41
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 42
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 45
B Cycle times ........................................................................................................................................... 46
Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web
server.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667).
"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).
Article number
6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0
Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Connects the ET 200AL distributed I/O system with PROFIBUS DP
● 24 V DC supply voltage
● Operation as DP1 slave possible
● Direct data exchange (data exchange broadcast)
● Support for 2 ET-Connection lines
● Dimensions: 45 x 159 mm
The functions supported by the module are found in the chapter Functions (Page 12).
Maximum configuration
The module has the following maximum configuration:
● 244 bytes input data
● 244 bytes output data
● 32 I/O modules, up to 16 I/O modules can be connected for each ET-Connection line
Accessories
The following component is included with the module in the packaging:
● Identification labels
Other components
The following component can be ordered as spare part:
● Identification labels
The following components can be ordered as accessories:
● Connectors
● Cables
● Stripping Tool for PROFIBUS
● Stripping Tool for ET-Connection
● M8 sealing cap
● M12 sealing cap
See also
You will find additional information on accessories and the other components in the
Accessories/Spare parts section of the ET 200AL Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual.
① RUN, ERROR, MAINT: LED displays for the current operating status and diagnostics status
② X1 DP1: 1st PROFIBUS interface
③ X1 DP2: 2nd PROFIBUS interface
④ Rotary coding switch for setting the PROFIBUS address
⑤ ET-CON1, ET-CON2: LED displays for ET-Connection
⑥ X80: Connector for infeed of the supply voltage (POWER input)
⑦ X81: Socket for loop-through of the supply voltage (POWER output)
⑧ X30: Socket for ET-Connection1
⑨ X31: Socket for ET-Connection2
⑩ DP: LED displays for the current operating status of the PROFIBUS interfaces
2.3 Functions
2.3.1 PROFIBUS DP
Introduction
The interface module supports the following PROFIBUS DP functions:
● Operation as DPV0 and DPV1 slave
● Identification data I&M0 to I&M3
● Firmware update
● Configuration control by means of the user program
PROFIBUS DP
The PROFIBUS DP interface is used for connection to CPUs. With PROFIBUS DP you can
set up extended subnets.
PROFIBUS is the network for the cell and field area in the open, manufacturer-independent
communication system SIMATIC NET. Physically, PROFIBUS is an electrical network based
on a shielded two-wire cable or an optical network based on a fiber optic cable.
Data transmission via PROFIBUS DP features a standardized interface (EN 50170 Vol. 2)
for the transmission of process input and process output data between SIMATIC S7 and field
devices (DP slaves).
The transmission behavior via PROFIBUS DP is characterized by cyclical data exchange
between the DP master and the DP slaves.
Reference
You will find more information on PROFIBUS DP in the STEP 7 online help and in the
Function Manual PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193579).
Properties
Configuration control allows you to prepare your distributed I/O system for future extensions
or options. Configuration control means that you can configure the planned maximum
configuration of your distributed I/O system in advance and vary it later in a flexible manner
by means of the user program.
Reference
You can find more information on configuration control
● In the system manual ET 200AL Distributed I/O System
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254965)
● On the Internet under the following link: Application collection
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/29430270).
● In the STEP 7 online help.
Note
Color coding
The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These
colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables.
NOTICE
ET-Connection/supply voltage
Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET-Connection and the supply voltage.
Mixing up the ET-Connection connectors and the connectors for the supply voltage can
destroy the module.
Properties
Use the PROFIBUS address to specify at which address the ET 200AL distributed I/O
system is addressed on the PROFIBUS DP.
The PROFIBUS DP address is configured for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system with a
rotary coding switch on the front of the housing.
Requirements
The following requirements apply:
● Each address is only assigned once on the PROFIBUS DP.
● The configured PROFIBUS DP address must match the PROFIBUS address defined in
the configuration software.
● A change of the PROFIBUS DP address is only valid after POWER ON/POWER OFF on
the IM 157-1 DP interface module.
Required tools
You need the following tools to configure the PROFIBUS DP address:
● 14 mm socket wrench
● 2.5 mm screwdriver
The figure below shows the rotary coding switches for configuring the PROFIBUS DP
address.
Table 4- 1 Parameters
1 Note that the "Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration" parameter is
always activated when you use configuration control.
2 The defaults apply to the default startup. If no other parameters are specified by the DP master,
the interface moduleIM 157-1 DP starts up with these parameters.
Configuration control
You can use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the ET 200AL
distributed I/O system.
Note
Configuration control
The configuration control function can only be used if you set the "Startup if preset
configuration does not match actual configuration" parameter to "YES".
Note
Configuring the enable
If you configure the enable, the ET 200AL distributed I/O system requires a control data
record 196 from the user program in order for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system to
operate the I/O modules.
Enabled parameter
If the preset/actual configuration differ, a data exchange occurs between the DP master and
the ET 200AL distributed I/O system.
Disabled parameter
If the preset/actual configuration differ, no data exchange occurs between the DP master
and the ET 200AL distributed I/O system.
Note
More than 16 I/O modules in real configuration per ET-Connection line
The preset/actual configuration do not match parameter is valid for 16 I/O modules per ET-
Connection line.
Up to 16 I/O modules are recognized per line. Additional I/O modules are not recognized. A
diagnostics alarm is not issued for these I/O modules. All I/O modules in the actual system
after the 16th I/O module remain unconfigured (LED DIAG flashes green) and are not
involved in the data exchange.
Diagnostics interrupt
You can use this parameter to enable or disable diagnostics interrupts.
Hardware interrupt
You can use this parameter to enable or disable hardware interrupts.
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the IM 157-1 DP
interface module.
① RUN (green)
② ERROR (red)
③ MAINT (yellow)
④ ET-CON1 (green)
⑤ ET-CON2 (green)
⑥ DP (green)
Table 5- 1 Status and error displays of the LEDs RUN, ERROR, MAINT
DP LED
5.2 Interrupts
Introduction
With certain process statuses/errors, the DP slave in each case creates an interrupt block
with the corresponding information in the diagnostics frame (DPV1 interrupt mechanism).
Regardless of this, the diagnostic status of the DP slave is displayed in the identifier-related
diagnostics, in the module status, and in the channel diagnostics.
Note
Diagnostics "Hardware interrupt lost" (from I/O module)
Do not use hardware interrupts for technological purposes (e.g., cyclical generation of
hardware interrupts).
If the hardware interrupt load is too high, hardware interrupts can get lost depending on the
number of I/O modules and the communication load.
Definition
The interrupt section of the slave diagnostics indicates the interrupt type and the event that
led to an interrupt being triggered. The interrupt section comprises 62 bytes including an
interrupt header.
Data records
The diagnostics data of a module are located in the data records 0 and 1:
● Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data that describe the current status of the
distributed I/O system. Data record 0 is part of the header information of the OB 82 (local
data bytes 8 to 11).
● Data record 1 contains 4 bytes of diagnostics data that are also available in data record 0.
Contents
The contents of the interrupt information depend on the interrupt type:
● In the case of diagnostics interrupts, diagnostics data record 1 (up to 58 bytes) is sent as
interrupt status information (starting from byte x+4).
● The length of the interrupt status information for hardware interrupts is 4 bytes.
Structure of interrupts
The figure below shows the structure of the interrupt section for the ET 200AL distributed I/O
system.
Description
Channel number 0 … 63: Channel number for channel error
0x8000: Entire submodule
Channel properties Bits 0 to 7 00H: Free data type
01H: bit
02H: 2 bit
03H: 4 bit
04H: byte
05H: word
06H: double word
07H to FFH: Reserved
Bit 8 0: Channel
1: Channel group
Bit 9, 10 00H: Diagnostics
01H: Maintenance demanded
02H: Maintenance required
03H: Reserved
Bit 11, 12 00H: Channel error-free
01H: Incoming diagnostics
02H: Outgoing diagnostics
03H: Outgoing diagnostics, but other diagnostics are also
pending on this channel
Bits 13 to 15 00H: Reserved
01H: Input channel
02H: Output channel
03H: Input/output channel
Channel error type Explanations are available in the device manuals, in the section "Diagnostic
alarms".
Hardware interrupt of digital and analog input modules, bytes x+4 to x+7
The figure below shows the structure of a hardware interrupt.
Note
Byte x+4
You will find the event type in the device manual of the module that triggered the hardware
interrupt.
5.3 Alarms
Note
The length of the diagnostics frame varies with the IM 157-1 DP (depending on parameter
assignment) between 6 and 244 bytes in DPV1 mode.
You can identify the length of the last received diagnostics frame in STEP 7 from the
RET_VAL parameter in SFC 13.
Bit Meaning
0 1: The DP slave parameters need to be reassigned.
1 1: A diagnostics alarm is pending. The DP slave will not operate until the problem is
eliminated (static diagnostics alarm).
2 1: The bit on the DP slave is always "1".
3 1: The watchdog is activated for this DP slave.
4 1: The DP slave has received the control command "FREEZE".1
5 1: The DP slave has received the control command "SYNC".1
6 0: Bit is always "0".
7 1: The DP slave is disabled, that is, it has been removed from the processing in pro-
gress.
1 The bit is updated only if another diagnostics alarm also changes.
Bit Meaning
0 to 6 0: Bits are always set to "0".
7 1: • There are more diagnostic alarms pending than the DP slave is able to store.
• The DP master cannot enter all the diagnostics alarms sent by the DP slave in its
(channel) diagnostics buffer.
5.3.5 Manufacturer ID
The manufacturer ID contains a code specifying the type of the DP slave.
The following table shows the structure of the manufacturer ID (bytes 4, 5).
Function
Channel diagnostics provides information about channel errors in modules and details of the
identifier-related diagnostics. Channel diagnostics begins after the module status. Channel
diagnostics does not affect the module status.
The figure below shows how the channel diagnostics for the ET 200AL distributed I/O
system is structured with the IM 157-1 DP interface module.
6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0
General information
Product type designation IM 157-1 DP
Hardware functional status E01
Firmware version V1.0.x
Vendor identifier (VendorID) 81A9H
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of STEP 7 V13 SP1
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 Hotfix 3 or higher
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD as of revision 5
Configuration control
Via data record Yes
Supply voltage
Load voltage 1L+
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 20.4 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes; against destruction
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 50 mA
From load voltage 1L+ (unswitched current) 4 A; maximum value
From load voltage 2L+, max. 4 A; maximum value
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.7 W
Address area
Address space per station
Address space per station, max. 244 bytes
Interfaces
Number of PROFIBUS interfaces 1
1st interface
Interface type PROFIBUS DP
6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0
Interface hardware
RS 485 Yes
M12 port Yes; 2x M12 b-coded
Protocols
PROFIBUS DP slave Yes
Interface hardware
RS 485
Transmission rate, max. 12 Mbps
Protocols
PROFIBUS
Services
• SYNC capability Yes
• DPV0 Yes
• DPV1 Yes
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Interrupts Yes
Diagnostics functions Yes
Diagnostics indicator LED
RUN LED Yes; green LED
ERROR LED Yes; red LED
MAINT LED Yes; yellow LED
Connection display DP Yes; green LED
Electrical isolation
Between load voltages Yes
between PROFIBUS DP and all other circuit com- Yes
ponents
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Degree of protection and protection class
Degree of protection according to EN 60529
• IP65 Yes
• IP67 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
Min. -25 °C
Max. 55 °C
6ES7157-1AA00-0AB0
Connection technology
Power supply M8, 4-pin
ET-Connection
ET-Connection M8, 4-pin, shielded
Dimensions
Width 45 mm
Height 159 mm
Depth 46 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 211 g
___________________
Documentation guide 1
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200AL
Interface module IM 157-1 PN
___________________
Parameters 4
(6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0)
Interrupts, error messages,
Manual ___________
5
diagnostics and system
alarms
___________________
Technical specifications 6
___________________
Dimension drawing A
___________________
Cycle times B
12/2016
A5E32347036-AD
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Conventions
Please also observe notes marked as follows:
Note
Indicates important product information to which particular attention should be paid.
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions only form one element of such a concept.
Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines
and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the
enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security
measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. For more information about industrial security, please visit
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to
always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported,
and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 8
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 8
2.2 Operator controls and display elements .................................................................................10
2.3 Functions ................................................................................................................................11
2.3.1 PROFINET IO .........................................................................................................................11
2.3.2 PROFIenergy ..........................................................................................................................14
2.3.2.1 What is PROFlenergy? ...........................................................................................................14
2.3.2.2 Principle of operation ..............................................................................................................16
2.3.2.3 Parameter assignment ............................................................................................................18
2.3.2.4 PROFIenergy control data records .........................................................................................20
2.3.3 Configuration control (option handling) ...................................................................................20
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 21
3.1 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................21
3.2 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................22
4 Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 25
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................25
4.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................25
5 Interrupts, error messages, diagnostics and system alarms ................................................................... 26
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................26
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................29
5.2.1 Evaluating interrupts ...............................................................................................................29
5.2.2 Trigger a diagnostics interrupt ................................................................................................29
5.2.3 Triggering a hardware interrupt ..............................................................................................30
5.2.4 Triggering an insert/remove module interrupt .........................................................................30
5.3 Alarms .....................................................................................................................................30
5.3.1 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................30
5.3.2 Maintenance events ................................................................................................................32
5.3.3 Channel diagnostics................................................................................................................33
5.3.4 Invalid configuration states of ET 200AL on the PROFINET IO .............................................33
5.3.5 STOP of the IO controller and recovery of the IO device .......................................................33
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 34
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 37
B Cycle times ........................................................................................................................................... 38
Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web
server.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667).
"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).
Article number
6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0
Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● Connects the ET 200AL distributed I/O system with PROFINET IO
● 24 V DC supply voltage
● Support for 2 ET-Connection lines
● Dimensions: 45 x 159 mm
The functions supported by the module are found in the chapter Functions (Page 11).
Maximum configuration
The module has the following maximum configuration:
● 1430 bytes input data
● 1430 bytes output data
● 32 I/O modules, up to 16 I/O modules can be connected for each ET-Connection line
Note
• In the case of a shared device configuration, the sum of the I/O data of all controllers that
share the device applies.
• If more than two (max. four) controllers share the device, the maximum amount of I/O
data including user data qualifier is limited to 360 bytes per controller.
Accessories
The following component is included with the module in the packaging:
● Identification labels
Other components
The following component can be ordered as spare part:
● Identification labels
The following components can be ordered as accessories:
● Connectors
● Cables
● Stripping Tool for PROFINET
● Stripping Tool for ET-Connection
● M8 sealing cap
● M12 sealing cap
See also
You will find additional information on accessories and the other components in the
Accessories/Spare parts section of the ET 200AL Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual.
① RUN, ERROR, MAINT: LED displays for the current operating status and diagnostics status
② X1 P1 R: 1st PROFINET interface
③ X1 P2 R: 2nd PROFINET interface
④ ET-CON1, ET-CON2: LED displays for ET-Connection
⑤ X80: Connector for infeed of the supply voltage (POWER input)
⑥ X81: Socket for loop-through of the supply voltage (POWER output)
⑦ X30: Socket for ET-Connection1
⑧ X31: Socket for ET-Connection2
⑨ P1 LINK, P2 LINK: LED displays for the current operating status of the PROFINET interfaces
2.3 Functions
2.3.1 PROFINET IO
Introduction
The interface module supports the following PROFINET IO functions:
● Integrated switch with 2 ports
● Supported Ethernet services: ping, arp, network diagnostics (SNMP)/MIB-2, LLDP
● Port diagnostics
● Deactivating of ports
● Real-time communication
● Isochronous real-time communication
● Minimum update time 250 μs
● Media redundancy (MRP)
● Media redundancy with planned duplication (MRPD)
● Device replacement with topological configuration
● Device replacement without topological configuration
● Shared Device
● Identification data I&M0 to I&M4
● Firmware update via PROFINET IO
● Reset to factory settings via PROFINET IO
● PROFIenergy
● Configuration control (option handling)
● Value status (of I/O modules)
Requirements
The following table shows the software requirements for the use of PROFINET IO functions
with the IM 157-1 PN interface module.
Real-time communication
A transmission method for PROFINET IO based on a cyclic data exchange with a provider-
consumer model.
Note
IO controller as sync master with IRT communication
We recommend that you also operate the IO controller as a sync master when configuring
IRT communication.
Otherwise IRT and RT configured IO devices may fail if the sync master fails.
Media redundancy
Function for safeguarding communication and plant availability. Redundant transmission
lines (ring topology) ensure that another communication path is made available in the event
of a transmission section failure.
Shared device
A shared device is an IO device that provides its data to up to four IO controllers.
The "Shared device" function allows the modules or submodules of an IO device to be
divided up among different IO controllers. Thus allowing flexible automation concepts. You
have, for example, the possibility of combining I/O modules lying near other into an IO
device.
When operating as a shared device, there might be temporary delays in the update of the IO
data when establishing or terminating additional communications relationships to an IO
controller.
You can find additional information in the STEP 7 online help and the manual and in the
function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V14
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
Replacement of an IM 157-1 PN
If you replace an interface module with an interface module that has already been used, you
must reset this IO device to the delivery state with "Reset to factory settings".
You will find more information on "Resetting to factory settings" in the ET 200AL Distributed
I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual
in the section "Resetting interface module (PROFINET) to factory settings".
Reference
You will find more information on the PROFINET IO functions in the PROFINET with
STEP 7 V14 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) Function
Manual and in the STEP 7 online help.
2.3.2 PROFIenergy
Introduction
PROFIenergy is a PROFINET-based data interface which makes it possible to switch off
consumers in a coordinated and centrally controlled manner during break times regardless of
the manufacturer or device. This has the aim that the process is only provided with the
energy that is absolutely required. In so doing, the majority of the energy savings come from
the process itself; the PROFINET device contributes only a few watts to the possible
savings. In PROFIenergy, this operating state is referred to as a "pause".
PROFINET devices are switched off with special commands in the user program of the
PROFINET IO controller. Additional hardware is not needed: The PROFIenergy commands
are interpreted by the PROFINET devices.
The device which provides PROFIenergy and supports the matching control data record
owns the PE-Entity, the access point for these control data records. This PE-Entity
represents I/O modules which do not have their own PE-Entity on the interface module.
I/O modules that have their own PE-Entity are always addressed directly.
For the ET 200AL distributed I/O system, the PE-Entity is exclusively provided by the
PROFINET interface module.
Procedure
To configure PROFIenergy, follow these steps:
1. Create the parameter data record, Index 3, in STEP 7.
2. Transfer the parameter data record to the interface module with the instruction
"WRREC" - SFB 53.
3. Create the user program with the FBs to control the PROFIenergy commands
("PE_START_END" - FB 815, "PE_CMD" - FB 816).
4. Transfer the user program to the CPU.
Additional information
You will find more information on the Internet (http://www.profibus.com) under Common
Application Profile PROFIenergy; Technical Specification for PROFINET; as well as in the
following documentation:
● System manual ET 200AL Distributed I/O System
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254965)
● Device manuals I/O modules
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/14247/man)
● System manual PROFINET System Description
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/19292127)
● PROFINET with STEP 7 V14
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856), function manual,
section: Saving energy with PROFIenergy
● Application guide for implementation of shutdown concepts with PROFIenergy.
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/96837137)
● Saving energy with SIMATIC S7 (STEP 7 as of V5.5)
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454)
● Saving energy with SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC HMI (TIA Portal)
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/58235225)
● SIMATIC S7 library for simple configuration of PROFIenergy.
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478388)
● You will find additional information on the PROFIenergy FBs ("PE_START_END" -
FB 815, "PE_CMD" - FB 816) in the online help for STEP 7 V5.5 SP2 and higher on
System functions/system function blocks.
Note
A complete PROFIenergy sequence consists of the commands "Start_Pause" and
"End_Pause". Always observe this sequence during programming.
LED displays
PROFIenergy generally has no effect on the LED display. Exceptions can be found in the
device manuals of the I/O modules.
Note
Switching to "Pause" and out of "Pause" may cause an error to be reported.
Additional information
Additional information on diagnostics can be found in the I/O module device manuals.
Hardware interrupt
Ending a "Pause" causes hardware interrupts to be detected again.
Parameter assignment
Keep the following points in mind when assigning parameters for PROFIenergy:
● Parameters for PROFIenergy are assigned with the parameter data record (version 2),
index 3. The interface module distributes the PROFIenergy parameters to the I/O
modules.
● The parameter assignment of an additional pause behavior is possible immediately after
the start of the previous "Pause". The required state for the following pause is activated
with a new "Start_Pause" command.
● You can write the parameter assignment as often as needed.
● The interface module checks the distribution of the parameters to the I/O modules and
returns the result as a return value of the write job. In the case of a negative return value,
there are one or more I/O modules that have not accepted the parameter data record. In
this case, the I/O modules respond according to their last PROFIenergy parameter
assignment in case of an incoming "Start_Pause" command. "Start_Pause"/"End_Pause"
commands can be executed as planned with a positive return value.
● In case of a failure of an I/O module or station outage, you must repeat the parameter
assignment using the parameter data record.
● The ET 200AL distributed I/O system supports configuration of the behavior of a "pause".
If a different response is required for an additional "Pause", you will have to assign
parameters again.
Note
Effect: The response (switch-off) of the I/O modules to PROFIenergy is related to the slot,
which means all channels in the slot behave accordingly.
Error messages
The following table shows which error messages the feedback data record returns, if
necessary:
Properties
Configuration control allows you to prepare your distributed I/O system for future extensions
or options. Configuration control means that you can configure the planned maximum
configuration of your distributed I/O system in advance and vary it later in a flexible manner
by means of the user program.
Reference
You can find more information on configuration control
● In the system manual ET 200AL Distributed I/O System
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254965)
● On the Internet under the following link: Application collection
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/29430270).
● In the STEP 7 online help.
Note
Color coding
The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These
colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables.
Note
Pin assignments
If you disable "Autonegotiation" in STEP 7, you must pay attention to the different pin
assignments of X1 P1 R and X1 P2 R.
NOTICE
ET-Connection/supply voltage
Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET-Connection and the supply voltage.
Mixing up the ET-Connection connectors and the connectors for the supply voltage can
destroy the module.
CAUTION
PROFINET IO
Modules with PROFINET interfaces may only be operated under the following condition:
All connected devices must be equipped with SELV/PELV power supplies.
Configuration control
You can use this parameter to enable the configuration control function in the ET 200AL
distributed I/O system.
Note
If you configure the enable, the ET 200AL distributed I/O system requires a control data
record 196 from the user program in order for the ET 200AL distributed I/O system to
operate the I/O modules.
Reference
You will find more information in the section Configuration control (option handling) and in
the STEP 7 online help.
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the interface module
IM 157-1 PN.
① RUN (green)
② ERROR (red)
③ MAINT (yellow)
④ ET-CON1 (green)
⑤ ET-CON2 (green)
⑥ P2 LINK (green)
⑦ P1 LINK (green)
Table 5- 1 Status and error displays of the LEDs RUN, ERROR, MAINT
5.2 Interrupts
Introduction
Interrupts are triggered by the IO device in case of errors. Interrupts are evaluated based on
the I/O controller used.
System diagnostics
In STEP 7 (TIA Portal), the updated system diagnostic is available for the modules of the
S7-1500 automation system (IO controller CPU S7-1500) and ET 200AL (IO device).
Independent of the cyclic user program, messages are made available on the display of the
CPU S7-1500, the CPU web server and the HMI device.
You will find more information on systemic diagnostics in the Function Manual Diagnostics
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926).
Note
Diagnostics "Hardware interrupt lost" (from I/O module)
Avoid creating hardware interrupts cyclically.
If the hardware interrupt load is too high, hardware interrupts can get lost depending on the
number of I/O modules and the communication load.
5.3 Alarms
Function
Channel-related diagnostics provides information about channel faults in modules.
Channel faults are mapped as channel diagnostics data in IO diagnostics data records.
The data record is read with the "RDREC" instruction (SFB 52).
6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0
General information
Product type designation IM 157-1 PN
Hardware functional status E01
Firmware version V1.0.x
Vendor identifier (VendorID) 002AH
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M4
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated as of STEP 7 V13 SP1
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 Hotfix 3 or higher
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3.1
Configuration control
Via data record Yes
Supply voltage
Load voltage 1L+
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 20.4 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes; against destruction
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 100 mA
From load voltage 1L+ (unswitched current) 4 A; maximum value
From load voltage 2L+, max. 4 A; maximum value
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 2.9 W
Address area
Address space per station
Address space per station, max. 1430 bytes
Interfaces
Number of PROFINET interfaces 1
1st interface
Interface type PROFINET
Interface hardware
Integrated switch Yes
M12 port Yes; 2x M12 d-coded
6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0
Protocols
PROFINET IO device Yes
Interface hardware
M12 port
10 Mbps Yes; for Ethernet services
100 Mbps Yes; PROFINET with 100 Mbps full duplex
(100BASE-TX)
Transmission method PROFINET with 100 Mbps full duplex (100BASE-
TX)
Autonegotiation Yes
Autocrossing Yes
Protocols
PROFINET IO device
Services
• Open IE communication Yes
• IRT Yes; 250 µs, 500 µs, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms, 8 ms, 16
ms, 32 ms, 64 ms, 128 ms
• MRP Yes
• MRPD Yes
• PROFIenergy Yes
6ES7157-1AB00-0AB0
Degree of protection and protection class
Degree of protection according to EN 60529
• IP65 Yes
• IP67 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
Min. -25 °C
Max. 55 °C
Connection technology
Power supply M8, 4-pin
ET-Connection
ET-Connection M8, 4-pin, shielded
Dimensions
Width 45 mm
Height 159 mm
Depth 40 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 263 g
The cycle time at ET-Connection is synchronized with the PROFINET send clock. This
means that the input data of the I/O modules are transmitted via ET-Connection without
further delay (wait time in the interface module) via PROFINET. The output data from
PROFINET is also transmitted without further delay via ET-Connection to the I/O modules.
Thus, the cycle time of the ET-Connection, based on then number of I/O modules, is always
a multiple of the configured PROFINET send clock.
The chart shown above shows the trend for a send clock of 0.5 ms. With larger send clocks,
the gradation of the trend changes according to the send clock.
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200AL
Digital input module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
DI 8x24VDC 8xM8
(6ES7141-5BF00-0BA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual
___________________
Technical specifications 6
___________________
PROFIenergy 7
___________________
Dimension drawing A
02/2016
A5E32349579-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Conventions
Please also observe notes marked as follows:
Note
Indicates important product information to which particular attention should be paid.
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
2.2 Operator controls and display elements .................................................................................11
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................12
3.2 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................13
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................16
4.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................16
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 17
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................17
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................18
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................19
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 20
7 PROFIenergy ........................................................................................................................................ 23
7.1 Pause function ........................................................................................................................23
7.2 Behavior of the digital input module ........................................................................................24
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 25
Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web
server.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).
Article number
6ES7141-5BF00-0BA0
Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● 8 digital inputs
● M8 sockets for connection of sensors
● 24 V DC supply voltage
● Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module
● Typical input delay of 3 ms
● Suitable for switches and proximity switches
● Dimensions 30 x 159 mm
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● Identification and maintenance data I&M0 to I&M3
● Value status (Quality Information)
● PROFIenergy
Accessories
The following components are included in the module package:
● Identification labels
● Spacers
Other components
The following component can be ordered as spare part:
● Identification labels
The following components can be ordered as accessories:
● Connectors
● Cables
● Stripping Tool for ET-Connection
● M8 sealing cap
See also
You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the
ET 200AL distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual.
Note
Color coding
The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These
colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables.
NOTICE
24 V encoder supply 1US
Use only the 24 V encoder supply 1US provided by the digital input module to supply power
to the encoder.
NOTICE
ET-Connection/supply voltage
Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET-Connection and the supply voltage.
Mixing up the ET-Connection connectors and the connectors for the supply voltage can
destroy the module.
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the
DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 digital input module.
DIAG LED
5.2 Interrupts
The DI 8x24VDC 8xM8 digital input module supports diagnostic interrupts.
Diagnostic interrupt
The digital input module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Short-circuit of encoder supply to ground
6ES7141-5BF00-0BA0
General information
Product type designation DI 8X24VDC, 8XM8
Hardware functional status E01
Firmware version V1.0.x
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated As of STEP 7 V13 SP1
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 Hotfix 3 or higher
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD as of revision 5
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3.1
Supply voltage
Load voltage 1L+
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 20.4 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes; against destruction; encoder supply outputs
are connected with reverse polarity
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 25 mA; no load
From load voltage 1L+ (unswitched voltage) 4 A; maximum value
From load voltage 2L+, max. 4 A; maximum value
Encoder supply
Number of outputs 8
24 V encoder supply
Short-circuit protection Yes; per module, electronic
Output current, max. 0.7 A; total current of all encoders
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.9 W
Digital inputs
Number of inputs 8
Input characteristic curve acc. to IEC 61131, Yes
type 3
6ES7141-5BF00-0BA0
Number of inputs that can be controlled simulta-
neously
All mounting positions
• up to 55 °C, max. 8
Input voltage
Type of input voltage DC
Rated value (DC) 24 V
For signal "0" -30 ... +5 V
For signal "1" +11 ... +30 V
Input current
For signal "1", typ. 3.2 mA
Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)
For standard inputs
• at "0" to "1", min. 1.2 ms
Cable length
Unshielded, max. 30 m
Encoders
Connectable encoders
2-wire sensor Yes
• Permissible quiescent current (2-wire sensor), 1.5 mA
max.
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Interrupts
Diagnostic interrupt Yes; configurable
Diagnostics alarms
Short-circuit Yes; encoder supply to ground; module-based
Diagnostics indicator LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red LED
Electrical isolation
Between load voltages Yes
Electrical isolation of channels
Between channels No
Between the channels and backplane bus Yes
Between the channels and power supply of the No
electronics
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
6ES7141-5BF00-0BA0
Degree of protection and protection class
Degree of protection according to EN 60529
• IP65 Yes
• IP67 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature in operation
Min. -25 °C
Max. 55 °C
Connection technology
Inputs/outputs M8, 3-pin
Power supply M8, 4-pin
ET-Connection
ET-Connection M8, 4-pin, shielded
Dimensions
Width 30 mm
Height 159 mm
Depth 40 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 145 g
Introduction
PROFIenergy is a PROFINET-based data interface for switching off consumers centrally and
in a coordinated manner during pause times regardless of the manufacturer or device type.
This has the aim that the process is only provided with the energy that is absolutely required.
In so doing, the majority of the energy savings come from the process itself; the PROFINET
device contributes only a few watts to the possible savings. In PROFIenergy, this operating
state is referred to as a "pause".
Additional information
You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy"
section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254863) and the "Saving energy
with PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
Application examples (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/41986454) are
also available on the Internet.
Display
The channel status LEDs are directly influenced by the signal level at the socket.
If the encoder supply is switched off, this causes the channel status LEDs to also switch off.
Mode parameter
The following table shows the "Mode" parameter.
Table 7- 1 Mode parameter
1 As there is only one encoder supply US for all channels, the supply can only be switched off at
"pause" if no channel is configured in PE_MODE_PROCEED.
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200AL
Digital input module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
DI 8x24VDC 4xM12
(6ES7141-5AF00-0BA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5
Manual
___________________
Technical specifications 6
___________________
PROFIenergy 7
___________________
Dimension drawing A
02/2016
A5E36680963-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Preface
Conventions
Please also observe notes marked as follows:
Note
Indicates important product information to which particular attention should be paid.
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
2.2 Operator controls and display elements .................................................................................11
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................12
3.2 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................13
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................16
4.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................16
5 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms .................................................................................................................. 17
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................17
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................18
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................19
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 20
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................20
7 PROFIenergy ........................................................................................................................................ 23
7.1 Pause function ........................................................................................................................23
7.2 Behavior of the digital input module ........................................................................................24
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 25
Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web
server.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).
Article number
6ES7141-5AF00-0BA0
Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● 8 digital inputs
● M12 sockets for connection of sensors
● 24 V DC supply voltage
● Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module
● Typical input delay of 3 ms
● Suitable for switches and proximity switches
● Dimensions 30 x 159 mm
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● Identification and maintenance data I&M0 to I&M3
● Value status (Quality Information)
● PROFIenergy
Accessories
The following components are included in the module package:
● Identification labels
● Spacers
Other components
The following component can be ordered as spare part:
● Identification labels
The following components can be ordered as accessories:
● Connectors
● Cables
● Stripping Tool for ET-Connection
● M8 sealing cap
● M12 sealing cap
See also
You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the
ET 200AL distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/89254965) system manual.
Note
Color coding
The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These
colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables.
NOTICE
24 V encoder supply 1US
Use only the 24 V encoder supply 1US provided by the digital input module to supply power
to the encoder.
NOTICE
ET-Connection/supply voltage
Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET-Connection and the supply voltage.
Mixing up the ET-Connection connectors and the connectors for the supply voltage can
destroy the module.
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the
DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 digital input module.
DIAG LED
5.2 Interrupts
The DI 8x24VDC 4xM12 digital input module supports diagnostic interrupts.
Diagnostic interrupt
The digital input module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Short-circuit of encoder supply to ground
6ES7141-5AF00-0BA0
General information
Product type designation DI 8X24VDC, 4XM12
Hardware functional status E01
Firmware version V1.0.x
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated As of STEP 7 V13 SP1
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 Hotfix 7 or higher
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD as of revision 5
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3.1
Supply voltage
Load voltage 1L+
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 20.4 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes; against destruction; encoder supply outputs
are connected with reverse polarity
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 25 mA; no load
From load voltage 1L+ (unswitched voltage) 4 A; maximum value
From load voltage 2L+, max. 4 A; maximum value
Encoder supply
Number of outputs 4
24 V encoder supply
Short-circuit protection Yes; per module, electronic
Output current, max. 0.7 A; total current of all encoders
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 1.9 W
Digital inputs
Number of inputs 8
Input characteristic curve acc. to IEC 61131, Yes
type 3
6ES7141-5AF00-0BA0
Number of inputs that can be controlled simulta-
neously
All mounting positions
• up to 55 °C, max. 8
Input voltage
Type of input voltage DC
Rated value (DC) 24 V
For signal "0" -30 ... +5 V
For signal "1" +11 ... +30 V
Input current
For signal "1", typ. 3.2 mA
Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)
For standard inputs
• at "0" to "1", min. 1.2 ms
Cable length
Unshielded, max. 30 m
Encoders
Connectable encoders
2-wire sensor Yes
• Permissible quiescent current (2-wire sensor), 1.5 mA
max.
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Interrupts
Diagnostic interrupt Yes; configurable
Diagnostics alarms
Short-circuit Yes; encoder supply to ground; module-based
Diagnostics indicator LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red LED
Electrical isolation
Between load voltages Yes
Electrical isolation of channels
Between channels No
Between the channels and backplane bus Yes
Between the channels and power supply of the No
electronics
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
6ES7141-5AF00-0BA0
Degree of protection and protection class
Degree of protection according to EN 60529
• IP65 Yes
• IP67 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature in operation
Min. -25 °C
Max. 55 °C
Connection technology
Inputs/outputs M12, 5-pin
Power supply M8, 4-pin
ET-Connection
ET-Connection M8, 4-pin, shielded
Dimensions
Width 30 mm
Height 159 mm
Depth 40 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 145 g
Introduction
PROFIenergy is a PROFINET-based data interface for switching off consumers centrally and
in a coordinated manner during pause times regardless of the manufacturer or device type.
This has the aim that the process is only provided with the energy that is absolutely required.
The majority of the energy is saved by the process itself; the PROFINET device itself only
contributes a few watts of saving potential. In PROFIenergy, this operating state is referred
to as a "pause".
Additional information
You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy"
section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254863) and the "Saving energy with
PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856).
Application examples (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454) are
also available on the Internet.
Display
The channel status LEDs are directly influenced by the signal level at the socket.
If the encoder supply is switched off, this causes the channel status LEDs to also switch off.
Mode parameter
The following table shows the "Mode" parameter.
1 As there is only one encoder supply US for all channels, the supply can only be switched off at
"pause" if no channel is configured in PE_MODE_PROCEED.
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200AL
Digital input module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
DI 16x24VDC 8xM12
6ES7141-5AH00-0BA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5
Manual
___________________
Technical specifications 6
___________________
PROFIenergy 7
___________________
Dimension drawing A
02/2016
A5E36681813-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Preface
Conventions
Please also observe notes marked as follows:
Note
Indicates important product information to which particular attention should be paid.
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
2.2 Operator controls and display elements .................................................................................11
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................12
3.2 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................13
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................16
4.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................16
5 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms .................................................................................................................. 18
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................18
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................19
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................20
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 21
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................21
7 PROFIenergy ........................................................................................................................................ 24
7.1 Pause function ........................................................................................................................24
7.2 Behavior of the digital input module ........................................................................................25
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 26
Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web
server.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).
Article number
6ES7141-5AH00-0BA0
Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● 16 digital inputs
● M12 sockets for connection of sensors
● 24 V DC supply voltage
● Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module
● Typical input delay of 3 ms
● Suitable for switches and proximity switches
● Dimensions 45 x 159 mm
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● Identification and maintenance data I&M0 to I&M3
● Value status (Quality Information)
● PROFIenergy
Accessories
The following components are included in the module package:
● Identification labels
Other components
The following component can be ordered as spare part:
● Identification labels
The following components can be ordered as accessories:
● Connectors
● Cables
● Stripping Tool for ET-Connection
● M8 sealing cap
● M12 sealing cap
See also
You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the
ET 200AL distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/89254965) system manual.
Note
Color coding
The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These
colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables.
NOTICE
24 V encoder supply 1US
Use only the 24 V encoder supply 1US provided by the digital input module to supply power
to the encoder.
NOTICE
ET-Connection/supply voltage
Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET-Connection and the supply voltage.
Mixing up the ET-Connection connectors and the connectors for the supply voltage can
destroy the module.
Table 4- 1 Parameters
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the
DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 digital input module.
DIAG LED
5.2 Interrupts
The DI 16x24VDC 8xM12 digital input module supports diagnostic interrupts.
Diagnostic interrupt
The digital input module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Short-circuit of encoder supply to ground
6ES7141-5AH00-0BA0
General information
Product type designation DI 16X24VDC, 8XM12
Hardware functional status E01
Firmware version V1.0.x
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated As of STEP 7 V13 SP1
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 Hotfix 7 or higher
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD as of revision 5
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3.1
Supply voltage
Load voltage 1L+
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 20.4 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes; against destruction; encoder supply outputs
are connected with reverse polarity
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 30 mA; no load
From load voltage 1L+ (unswitched voltage) 4 A; maximum value
From load voltage 2L+, max. 4 A; maximum value
Encoder supply
Number of outputs 8
24 V encoder supply
Short-circuit protection Yes; per module, electronic
Output current, max. 1.4 A; total current of all encoders
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 2.7 W
Digital inputs
Number of inputs 16
Input characteristic curve acc. to IEC 61131, Yes
type 3
6ES7141-5AH00-0BA0
Number of inputs that can be controlled simulta-
neously
All mounting positions
• up to 55 °C, max. 16
Input voltage
Type of input voltage DC
Rated value (DC) 24 V
For signal "0" -30 ... +5 V
For signal "1" +11 ... +30 V
Input current
For signal "1", typ. 3.2 mA
Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)
For standard inputs
• at "0" to "1", min. 1.2 ms
Cable length
Unshielded, max. 30 m
Encoders
Connectable encoders
2-wire sensor Yes
• Permissible quiescent current (2-wire sensor), 1.5 mA
max.
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Interrupts
Diagnostic interrupt Yes; configurable
Diagnostics alarms
Short-circuit Yes; encoder supply to ground; module-based
Diagnostics indicator LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red LED
Electrical isolation
Between load voltages Yes
Electrical isolation of channels
Between channels No
Between the channels and backplane bus Yes
Between the channels and power supply of the No
electronics
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
6ES7141-5AH00-0BA0
Degree of protection and protection class
Degree of protection according to EN 60529
• IP65 Yes
• IP67 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature in operation
Min. -25 °C
Max. 55 °C
Connection technology
Inputs/outputs M12, 5-pin
Power supply M8, 4-pin
ET-Connection
ET-Connection M8, 4-pin, shielded
Dimensions
Width 45 mm
Height 159 mm
Depth 40 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 184 g
Introduction
PROFIenergy is a PROFINET-based data interface for switching off consumers centrally and
in a coordinated manner during pause times regardless of the manufacturer or device type.
This has the aim that the process is only provided with the energy that is absolutely required.
In so doing, the majority of the energy savings come from the process itself; the PROFINET
device contributes only a few watts to the possible savings. In PROFIenergy, this operating
state is referred to as a "pause".
Additional information
You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy"
section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254863) and the "Saving energy with
PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856).
Application examples (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454) are
also available on the Internet.
Mode parameter
The following table shows the "Mode" parameter.
1 As there is only one encoder supply US for all channels, the supply can only be switched off at
"pause" if no channel is configured in PE_MODE_PROCEED.
___________________
Technical specifications 6
___________________
PROFIenergy 7
A
___________________
Dimension drawing
02/2016
A5E3234988-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Conventions
Please also observe notes marked as follows:
Note
Indicates important product information to which particular attention should be paid.
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
2.2 Operator controls and display elements .................................................................................11
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................12
3.2 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................13
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................16
4.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................17
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 19
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................19
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................21
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................21
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 22
7 PROFIenergy ........................................................................................................................................ 26
7.1 Pause function ........................................................................................................................26
7.2 DI operating mode ..................................................................................................................27
7.3 DQ operating mode.................................................................................................................28
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 29
Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web
server.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).
Article number
6ES7143-5BF00-0BA0
Image 2-1 View of the DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0,5A 8xM8 digital input/digital output module
Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● 4 digital inputs or digital outputs and 4 digital outputs, depending on parameter
assignment
– DIQ signals connected to 1L+ (non-switched)
– DQ signals connected to 2L+ (switched)
● M8 sockets for connection of sensors and actuators
● Digital inputs:
– 24 V DC supply voltage
– Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module
– Typical input delay of 3 ms
– Suitable for switches and proximity switches
● Digital outputs:
– Rated load voltage 24 V DC
– Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
– Output current 0.5 A per output
– Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module
● Dimensions 30 x 159 mm
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● Identification and maintenance data I&M0 to I&M3
● Value status (Quality Information)
● PROFIenergy
Accessories
The following components are included in the module package:
● Identification labels
● Spacers
Other components
The following component can be ordered as spare part:
● Identification labels
The following components can be ordered as accessories:
● Connectors
● Cables
● Stripping Tool for ET-Connection
● M8 sealing cap
See also
You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the
ET 200AL distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual.
Note
Color coding
The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These
colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables.
NOTICE
24 V encoder supply 1US
Use only the 24 V encoder supply 1US provided by the digital input/digital output module to
supply power to the encoder.
NOTICE
ET-Connection/supply voltage
Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET-Connection and the supply voltage.
Mixing up the ET-Connection connectors and the connectors for the supply voltage can
destroy the module.
Note
Parameter assignment of the channels
Parameters for the first four channels can be freely assigned.
For the channels 0 … 3 that are configured as input, the corresponding values in the output
data do not trigger any reaction.
For the channels 0 … 3 that are configured as output, the input value in the process image
is 0.
Configuration options of the digital input/digital output module DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 8xM8
You have the following configuration options:
● Configuration 1: without value status
● Configuration 2: with value status
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the digital input/
digital output module DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 8xM8.
DIAG LED
PWR LED
5.2 Interrupts
The DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 8xM8 digital input/digital output module supports diagnostic
interrupts.
Diagnostic interrupt
The digital input/digital output module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following
events:
● Short-circuit of encoder supply to ground
● Short-circuit of outputs to ground
● Load voltage 2L+ missing or too low
Note
Channel type
The digital input/digital output module is always signaled as a mixed module (channel type
"Input/Output") in the case of diagnostic events, even if you have configured the digital
input/digital output module exclusively as an output module.
6ES7143-5BF00-0BA0
General information
Product type designation DIQ 4+DQ 4X24VDC/0,5A, 8xM8
Hardware functional status E01
Firmware version V1.0.x
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated As of STEP 7 V13 SP1
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 Hotfix 3 or higher
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD as of revision 5
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3.1
Supply voltage
Load voltage 1L+
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 20.4 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes; against destruction; encoder supply outputs
are connected with reverse polarity, loads will be
activated
Load voltage 2L+
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 20.4 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes; against destruction; loads will be activated
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 40 mA; no load
From load voltage 1L+ (unswitched voltage) 4 A; maximum value
From load voltage 2L+, max. 4 A; maximum value
Encoder supply
Number of outputs 4
24 V encoder supply
Short-circuit protection Yes; per module, electronic
Output current, max. 0.7 A; total current of all encoders
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 2.5 W
6ES7143-5BF00-0BA0
Digital inputs
Number of inputs 4; can be configured as DIQ
Input characteristic curve acc. to IEC 61131, Yes
type 3
Number of inputs that can be controlled simulta-
neously
All mounting positions
• up to 55 °C, max. 4
Input voltage
Type of input voltage DC
Rated value (DC) 24 V
For signal "0" -3 ... +5 V
For signal "1" +11 ... +30 V
Input current
For signal "1", typ. 3.2 mA
Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)
For standard inputs
• at "0" to "1", min. 1.2 ms
Cable length
Unshielded, max. 30 m
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 8; 4 DQ fixed, 4 DIQ can be assigned
• In groups of 4; 2 load groups for 4 outputs each
6ES7143-5BF00-0BA0
Switching frequency
With resistive load, max. 100 Hz
With inductive load, max. 0.5 Hz
With lamp load, max. 1 Hz
Total current of outputs
Current per group, max. 2A
Cable length
Unshielded, max. 30 m
Encoders
Connectable encoders
2-wire sensor Yes
• Permissible quiescent current (2-wire sensor), 1.5 mA
max.
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Substitute values can be applied Yes; channel-based, configurable
Interrupts
Diagnostic interrupt Yes; configurable
Diagnostics alarms
Short-circuit Yes; outputs to ground; encoder supply to
ground; module-based
Diagnostics indicator LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red LED
For load voltage monitoring Yes; green LED
Electrical isolation
Between load voltages Yes
Electrical isolation of channels
Between the channels, in groups of 4; DIQ channels are electrically isolated from DQ
channels
Between the channels and backplane bus Yes
Between the channels and power supply of the No; DIQ channels are non-isolated and DQ
electronics channels are isolated from supply voltage 1L+
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Degree of protection and protection class
Degree of protection according to EN 60529
• IP65 Yes
• IP67 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature in operation
Min. -25 °C
Max. 55 °C
6ES7143-5BF00-0BA0
Connection technology
Inputs/outputs M8, 3-pin
Power supply M8, 4-pin
ET-Connection
ET-Connection M8, 4-pin, shielded
Dimensions
Width 30 mm
Height 159 mm
Depth 40 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 145 g
Introduction
PROFIenergy is a PROFINET-based data interface for switching off consumers centrally and
in a coordinated manner during pause times regardless of the manufacturer or device type.
This has the aim that the process is only provided with the energy that is absolutely required.
In so doing, the majority of the energy savings come from the process itself; the PROFINET
device contributes only a few watts to the possible savings. In PROFIenergy, this operating
state is referred to as a "pause".
Additional information
You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy"
section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254863) and the "Saving energy
with PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
Application examples (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58235225) are
also available on the Internet.
Display
The channel status LEDs are directly influenced by the signal level at the socket.
If the encoder supply is switched off, this causes the channel status LEDs to also switch off.
Mode parameter
The following table shows the "Mode" parameter.
1 As there is only one encoder supply US for all channels, the supply can only be switched off at
"pause" if all channels are configured to switch off.
Display
The channel status LEDs are directly affected by the signal level at the socket.
Mode parameter
The following table shows the "Mode" parameter.
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200AL
Digital input/digital output module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12
(6ES7143-5AF00-0BA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostic alarms 5
Manual
___________________
Technical specifications 6
___________________
PROFIenergy 7
___________________
Dimension drawing A
02/2016
A5E36683613-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Preface
Conventions
Please also observe notes marked as follows:
Note
Indicates important product information to which particular attention should be paid.
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
2.2 Operator controls and display elements .................................................................................11
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................12
3.2 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................13
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................16
4.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................17
5 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms .................................................................................................................. 19
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................19
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................21
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................21
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 22
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................22
7 PROFIenergy ........................................................................................................................................ 26
7.1 Pause function ........................................................................................................................26
7.2 DI operating mode ..................................................................................................................27
7.3 DQ operating mode.................................................................................................................28
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 29
Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web
server.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).
Article number
6ES7143-5AF00-0BA0
Image 2-1 View of the DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12 digital input/digital output module
Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● 4 digital inputs or digital outputs and 4 digital outputs, depending on parameter
assignment
– DIQ signals connected to 1L+ (non-switched)
– DQ signals connected to 2L+ (switched)
● M12 sockets for connection of sensors and actuators
● Digital inputs:
– 24 V DC supply voltage
– Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module
– Typical input delay of 3 ms
– Suitable for switches and proximity switches
● Digital outputs:
– Rated load voltage 24 V DC
– Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
– Output current per output 0.5 A
– Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module
● Dimensions 30 x 159 mm
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● Identification and maintenance data I&M0 to I&M3
● Value status (Quality Information)
● PROFIenergy
Accessories
The following components are included in the module package:
● Identification labels
● Spacers
Other components
The following component can be ordered as spare part:
● Identification labels
The following components can be ordered as accessories:
● Connectors
● Cables
● Stripping Tool for ET-Connection
● M8 sealing cap
● M12 sealing cap
See also
You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the
ET 200AL distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/89254965) system manual.
Note
Color coding
The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These
colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables.
NOTICE
24 V encoder supply 1US
Use only the 24 V encoder supply 1US provided by the digital input/digital output module to
supply power to the encoder.
1 Unassigned
2 Output signal DQ5: Connector X12
Output signal DQ7: Connector X13
3 Ground 2M
4 Output signal DQ4: Connector X12
Output signal DQ6: Connector X13
5 Functional earth FE
NOTICE
ET-Connection/supply voltage
Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET-Connection and the supply voltage.
Mixing up the ET-Connection connectors and the connectors for the supply voltage can
destroy the module.
Table 4- 1 Parameters
Note
Parameter assignment of the channels
Parameters for the first four channels can be freely assigned.
For the channels 0 … 3 that are configured as input, the corresponding values in the output
data do not trigger any reaction.
For the channels 0 … 3 that are configured as output, the input value in the process image is
0.
Configuration options of the digital input/digital output module DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12
You have the following configuration options:
● Configuration 1: without value status
● Configuration 2: with value status
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the digital input/
digital output module DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12.
DIAG LED
PWR LED
5.2 Interrupts
The DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12 digital input/digital output module supports diagnostic
interrupts.
Diagnostic interrupt
The digital input/digital output module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following
events:
● Short-circuit of encoder supply to ground
● Short-circuit of outputs to ground
● Load voltage 2L+ missing or too low
Note
Channel type
The digital input/digital output module is always signaled as a mixed module (channel type
"Input/Output") in the case of diagnostic events, even if you have configured the digital
input/digital output module exclusively as an output module.
Technical specifications of the DIQ 4+DQ 4x24VDC/0.5A 4xM12 digital input/digital output module
6ES7143-5AF00-0BA0
General information
Product type designation DIQ 4+DQ 4X24VDC/0,5A, 4XM12
Hardware functional status E01
Firmware version V1.0.x
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated As of STEP 7 V13 SP1
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 Hotfix 7 or higher
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD as of revision 5
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3.1
Supply voltage
Load voltage 1L+
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 20.4 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes; against destruction; encoder supply outputs
are connected with reverse polarity, loads will be
activated
Load voltage 2L+
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 20.4 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes; against destruction; loads will be activated
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 40 mA; no load
From load voltage 1L+ (unswitched voltage) 4 A; maximum value
From load voltage 2L+, max. 4 A; maximum value
Encoder supply
Number of outputs 4
24 V encoder supply
Short-circuit protection Yes; per module, electronic
Output current, max. 0.7 A; total current of all encoders
6ES7143-5AF00-0BA0
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 2.5 W
Digital inputs
Number of inputs 4; can be configured as DIQ
Input characteristic curve acc. to IEC 61131, Yes
type 3
Number of inputs that can be controlled simulta-
neously
All mounting positions
• up to 55 °C, max. 4
Input voltage
Type of input voltage DC
Rated value (DC) 24 V
For signal "0" -3 ... +5 V
For signal "1" +11 ... +30 V
Input current
For signal "1", typ. 3.2 mA
Input delay (for rated value of input voltage)
For standard inputs
• at "0" to "1", min. 1.2 ms
Cable length
Unshielded, max. 30 m
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 8; 4 DQ fixed, 4 DIQ can be assigned
• In groups of 4; 2 load groups for 4 outputs each
6ES7143-5AF00-0BA0
Switching frequency
With resistive load, max. 100 Hz
With inductive load, max. 0.5 Hz
With lamp load, max. 1 Hz
Total current of outputs
Current per group, max. 2A
Cable length
Unshielded, max. 30 m
Encoders
Connectable encoders
2-wire sensor Yes
• Permissible quiescent current (2-wire sensor), 1.5 mA
max.
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Substitute values can be applied Yes; channel-based, configurable
Interrupts
Diagnostic interrupt Yes; configurable
Diagnostics alarms
Short-circuit Yes; outputs to ground; encoder supply to
ground; module-based
Diagnostics indicator LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red LED
For load voltage monitoring Yes; green LED
Electrical isolation
Between load voltages Yes
Electrical isolation of channels
Between the channels, in groups of 4; DIQ channels are electrically isolated from DQ
channels
Between the channels and backplane bus Yes
Between the channels and power supply of the No; DIQ channels are non-isolated and DQ
electronics channels are isolated from supply voltage 1L+
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Degree of protection and protection class
Degree of protection according to EN 60529
• IP65 Yes
• IP67 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature in operation
Min. -25 °C
Max. 55 °C
6ES7143-5AF00-0BA0
Connection technology
Inputs/outputs M12, 5-pin
Power supply M8, 4-pin
ET-Connection
ET-Connection M8, 4-pin, shielded
Dimensions
Width 30 mm
Height 159 mm
Depth 40 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 145 g
Introduction
PROFIenergy is a PROFINET-based data interface for switching off consumers centrally and
in a coordinated manner during pause times regardless of the manufacturer or device type.
This has the aim that the process is only provided with the energy that is absolutely required.
In so doing, the majority of the energy savings come from the process itself; the PROFINET
device contributes only a few watts to the possible savings. In PROFIenergy, this operating
state is referred to as a "pause".
Additional information
You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy"
section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254863) and the "Saving energy with
PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856).
Application examples (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454) are
also available on the Internet.
Display
The channel status LEDs are directly influenced by the signal level at the socket.
If the encoder supply is switched off, this causes the channel status LEDs to also switch off.
Mode parameter
The following table shows the "Mode" parameter.
1 As there is only one encoder supply US for all channels, the supply can only be switched off at
"pause" if all channels are configured to switch off.
Display
The channel status LEDs are directly affected by the signal level at the socket.
Mode parameter
The following table shows the "Mode" parameter.
___________________
Documentation guide 1
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
Configuration modes for
___________________
digital inputs/outputs 3
ET 200AL
Digital input/Digital output module
___________________
Counting 4
DIQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 8xM12
(6ES7143-5AH00-0BA0)
___________________
Technical specifications 5
Manual
___________________
PROFIenergy 6
___________________
Dimension drawing A
09/2017
A5E38688112-AB
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Preface
Conventions
Please also observe notes marked as follows:
Note
Indicates important product information to which particular attention should be paid.
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 11
2.1 Properties ................................................................................................................................11
2.2 Operator controls and display elements .................................................................................14
3 Configuration modes for digital inputs/outputs ....................................................................................... 15
3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................................15
3.2 Wiring ......................................................................................................................................16
3.2.1 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................16
3.2.2 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................17
3.3 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................20
3.3.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................20
3.3.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................21
3.3.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................22
3.4 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms ....................................................................................................25
3.4.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................25
3.4.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................27
3.4.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................27
4 Counting ............................................................................................................................................... 28
4.1 Configuration method 2xCount ...............................................................................................30
4.1.1 Wiring ......................................................................................................................................30
4.1.1.1 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................30
4.1.1.2 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................31
4.1.2 Parameters/address space .....................................................................................................34
4.1.2.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................34
4.1.2.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................37
4.1.2.3 Assignment of the control interface ........................................................................................41
4.1.2.4 Explanations on the control interface......................................................................................42
4.1.2.5 Assignment of the feedback interface.....................................................................................43
4.1.2.6 Explanations for the feedback interface..................................................................................44
4.1.3 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms ....................................................................................................46
4.1.3.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................46
4.1.3.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................48
4.1.3.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................49
Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web
server.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667).
"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).
PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the system network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans the PROFINET network and all connected
components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).
SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).
Article number
6ES7143-5AH00-0BA0
Figure 2-1 View of the digital input/digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 8xM12
Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● 16 digital inputs or digital outputs, depending on configuration and parameter assignment
– 8 DIQ signals connected to 1L+ (non-switched)
– 8 DQ signals connected to 2L+ (switched)
● M12 sockets for connection of sensors and actuators
● Digital inputs:
– 24 V DC supply voltage
– Suitable for switches and proximity switches
– Input delay configurable
– Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module
● Digital outputs:
– Rated load voltage 24 V DC
– Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
– Output current per output 0.5 A
– Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module
● Counters:
– Configuration method 2xCount or 4xCount with 2 or 4 counters
– Counting frequency 2 kHz
– Counting width 32 bits
– Counting direction parameterizable or controllable via direction input
– GATE function controllable via the control interface or via control input
– Configurable diagnostics and hardware interrupts can be set for each module
– Input delay configurable
● Dimensions 45 x 159 mm
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● Identification and maintenance data I&M0 to I&M3
● Value status (Quality Information)
● PROFIenergy
Accessories
The following components are included in the module package:
● Identification labels
Other components
The following component can be ordered as spare part:
● Identification labels
The following components can be ordered as accessories:
● Connectors
● Cables
● Stripping Tool for ET-Connection
● M8 sealing cap
● M12 sealing cap
See also
You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the
ET 200AL distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/89254965) system manual.
Introduction
With the configuration modes for digital inputs and outputs, you can configure each channel
of the module as an input or output consistent with your application.
You use the available configuration modes to specify how the channels will be used:
● DIQ:
You can use each channel as an input or output through a corresponding parameter
assignment.
● DIQ with value status:
You can use each channel as an input or output through a corresponding parameter
assignment. Additionally, the value status gives you information about the validity of the
digital values and the channel status.
● DQ16:
All channels (0..15) are configured as outputs.
● DI8/DQ8:
Channels 0..7 are configured as inputs, and channels 8..15 are configured as outputs.
Benefits
The address space occupied by the module is significantly reduced in the DQ16 and
DI8/DQ8 configuration modes compared with the DIQ configuration modes.
This reduction offers you advantages if you have already assigned the available address
space of your plant for other processes.
3.2 Wiring
Note
Color coding
The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These
colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables.
NOTICE
24 V encoder supply 1US / 2US
Use only the 24 V encoder supplies 1US and 2US provided by the digital input/digital output
module to supply power to the encoder.
NOTICE
ET-Connection/supply voltage
Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET-Connection and the supply voltage.
Mixing up the ET-Connection connectors and the connectors for the supply voltage can
destroy the module.
3.3.1 Parameters
The following table shows the parameters for the DIQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 8xM12 digital input /
digital output module in the configuration modes for digital inputs and outputs.
Table 3- 6 Parameters
* = Can only be set in DIQ or DIQ with value status configuration mode.
** = Not available in DQ16 mode. Only values starting from 1.6 ms can be configured for the input
delay for channels 8..15.
Input delay
This parameter can be used to avoid signal faults. Changes to the signal are only detected if
they are present and stable for longer than the set input delay time.
You cannot set this parameter in DQ16 mode.
Figure 3-2 Address space in DIQ without value status configuration mode
Figure 3-3 Address space in DIQ with value status configuration mode
Note
Parameter assignment of the channels
In the configuration modes for digital inputs and outputs, either all channels are user
configurable or all channels have a fixed configuration, depending on the configuration.
For the channels that are configured as an input, the corresponding values in the output data
do not trigger any reaction.
For the channels that are configured as an output, the input value in the process image is 0.
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the digital input
module / digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 8xM12.
DIAG LED
PWR LED
3.4.2 Interrupts
The digital input / digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 8xM12 in the configuration
method DIQ supports diagnostic interrupts.
Diagnostic interrupt
The digital input/digital output module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following
events:
● Short-circuit of an encoder supply to ground, or
● Short-circuit of an output to ground
● Load voltage 2L+ missing or too low
● Parameter assignment error
Note
Channel type
The digital input/digital output module is always signaled as a mixed module (channel type
"Input/Output") in the case of diagnostic events, even if you have configured the digital
input/digital output module exclusively as an output or input module.
Counter limits
The counter values define the range of values of the counter value than can be used. The
counter limits are configurable and can be modified during runtime using the user program.
The maximum adjustable count limit amounts to 2147483647 (231-1). The maximum
adjustable count limit amounts to -2147483648 (-231).
You can continue or stop counting (automatic gate stop) on violation of a counting limit At an
overflow or underflow of the count value one event bit is respectively set in the feedback
interface. The count value jumps to the respective other counting limit.
Start value
You can configure a start value within the counter limits. The start value can be modified
during runtime with the user program.
Load value
In addition to the parameterization you can influence the counting behavior additionally via
the control interface by means of the load value. Depending on the bit sequence of the load
request (LD_SLOT) contained in the control byte you can load the load value (SLOT) as a
current count value, start value, comparative value or count limit.
If you re-parameterize the module, loaded values are overwritten automatically. Therefore, if
necessary, carry out the adjustment of the values via the control interface again after a re-
parameterization.
Comparison value
You specify a comparison value that controls the associated count output independently of
the user program.
The comparison value can be parameterized and can be changed with the user program
during runtime.
Gate control
Together with the hardware gate the software gate forms the internal gate. The module only
counts when the internal gate is open.
You control the HW gate externally via the digital inputs DI4 and DI6. You control the SW
gate via the user program. You can activate and use the hardware gate in the 2xCount
configuration method by using parameterization.
Counting direction
The counting direction is specified either by the direction of the respective counter or via the
parameter assignment of the counter.
You control the counting direction via the digital inputs DI5 and DI7. You can activate and use
the direction inputs in the 2xCount configuration method by using parameterization.
Note
Color coding
The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These
colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables.
Pin assignment of the sockets for counting channels and digital inputs / outputs
The table below shows the pin assignments of the 4 sockets for the connection of the
counting channels.
NOTICE
24 V encoder supply 1US
Use only the 24 V encoder supply 1US provided by the digital input/digital output module to
supply power to the encoder.
The table below shows the pin assignments of the 4 sockets for the connection of the digital
inputs / digital outputs.
NOTICE
24 V encoder supply 2US
Use only the 24 V encoder supply 2US provided by the digital input/digital output module to
supply power to the encoder.
NOTICE
ET-Connection/supply voltage
Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET-Connection and the supply voltage.
Mixing up the ET-Connection connectors and the connectors for the supply voltage can
destroy the module.
4.1.2.1 Parameters
In the configuration method 2xCount of the digital input / digital output module
DIQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 8xM12 the Channels 0 to 7 are used by the counting function. The
Channels 8 to 15 can be parameterized freely.
The table below shows the parameters of the freely assignable Channels 8...15.
See also
Pin assignment (Page 31)
General parameters
Diagnostics: Missing load voltage 2L+
Enabling of the diagnostics for missing or insufficient load voltage 2L+.
Diagnostics: Short circuit to ground
Enabling of the diagnostics, at short-circuit of an encoder supply or of an output to ground.
Behavior at CPU/master STOP (8...15)
With this parameter you set the reaction of the digital outputs of after a CPU/master STOP.
Behavior DQ at freely assignable Channels 8...15:
● Deactivate: The digital output is de-energized.
● Keep last value: The last value of the digital output remains activated.
● Output substitute value: The digital output outputs a configured substitute value.
Note
Influences the counting frequency
When setting the input delay take into account that the counting frequency possible is
automatically reduced at higher values.
In order to achieve the maximum counting frequency of 2 kHz select an input delay smaller
than 0.4 ms.
Counting direction
Use this parameter to select the direction in which counting is carried out:
● Forward
● Backward.
Note
If you have parameterized DI5 or DI7 as the direction input in the respective counter, this
parameter is ineffective.
Edge selection
Use this parameter to select the edge that is counted:
● At rising edge:
The respective counter counts all the rising edges at the counter input.
● At falling edge:
The respective counter counts all the falling edges at the counter input.
Note
If you have parameterized DI5 or DI7 as the direction input in the respective counter and the
counting direction changes in the process, the count edge is adapted automatically (contrary
edges).
Behavior DQ
With the "Behavior DQ" you select the counter values at which the count output is set.
When the current count value fulfils the parameterized condition, the associated count output
is set.
This means the signal state "1" is set at the count output when:
● Count value between a comparison value and the high counting limit:
Comparison value ≤ Count value ≤ High counting limit
or
● Count value between a comparison value and the low counting limit:
Low counting limit ≤ Count value ≤ Comparison value.
Hardware interrupt DQ
With this parameter you specify whether or not a hardware interrupt is generated by the
event "Comparison event occurred for DQ".
Behavior at CPU/master STOP for DQ
With this parameter you set the reaction of the count output of a counter after a
CPU/master STOP.
Behavior DQ:
● Continue: Signal state of the count output continues to be controlled by comparison
conditions.
● Output substitute value: The count output outputs a configured substitute value.
Note
Count value at CPU/Master STOP
Independently of the selected reaction of the count output, the count value continues to
change during a CPU/Master STOP depending on the input edge, counting continues.
Substitute value DQ
With this parameter you set the substitute value of the digital output of a counter if the setting
"Output substitute value" has been selected at the parameter "Behavior at CPU/master
STOP for DQ".
Behavior DI (gate control)
With this parameter you select whether a counting function is assigned to the digital input or
whether this functions like a standard digital input:
● Gate start/stop:
The digital input influences the internal gate of Counter 0 or Counter 1. Signal "1" at the
digital input opens the HW gate for the counter. Signal "0" at the digital input closes the
HW gate for the counter.
● Digital input without function:
No counting function is assigned to the digital input. It functions like a standard digital
input.
See also
Assignment of the feedback interface (Page 43)
Note
Parameter assignment of the channels
The corresponding values in the output data do not trigger any reaction for all the channels
that are used as an input.
You cannot control the count outputs via the user program.
Note
When you have initiated the resetting of an event bit, you have to wait for the respective
feedback bit. You can initiate a further reset subsequently.
Note
An opening of the SW gate or HW gate (0-1 transition) resets all event bits.
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the digital input
module / digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 8xM12.
DIAG LED
PWR LED
4.1.3.2 Interrupts
The digital input / digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 8xM12 in the configuration
method 2xCount supports diagnostic and hardware interrupts.
Diagnostic interrupt
The digital input/digital output module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following
events:
● Short-circuit of an encoder supply to ground, or
● Short-circuit of an output to ground
● Load voltage 2L+ missing or too low
● Parameter assignment error
Hardware interrupt
The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following event:
● Comparison event occurred for DQ
For detailed information on the error event, refer to the hardware interrupt organization block
with the "RALRM" instruction (read additional interrupt info) and to the STEP 7 online help.
The module channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information
of the organization block. The figure below shows the assignment to the bits of the local data
double word 8.
Figure 4-6 Start information of the organization block in the configuration method 2xCount
always output. This alarm is output even if all channels are configured as outputs.
2If you are using ET 200AL modules in connection with the ET 200SP distributed I/O system, the
diagnostic alarm "Load voltage missing" is displayed.
Note
Color coding
The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These
colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables.
Pin assignment of the sockets for counting channels and digital inputs / outputs
The table below shows the pin assignments of the 4 sockets for the connection of the
counting channels.
NOTICE
24 V encoder supply 1US
Use only the 24 V encoder supply 1US provided by the digital input/digital output module to
supply power to the encoder.
The table below shows the pin assignments of the 4 sockets for the connection of the digital
inputs / digital outputs.
NOTICE
24 V encoder supply 2US
Use only the 24 V encoder supplies 2US provided by the digital input/digital output module
to supply power to the encoder.
NOTICE
ET-Connection/supply voltage
Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET-Connection and the supply voltage.
Mixing up the ET-Connection connectors and the connectors for the supply voltage can
destroy the module.
4.2.2.1 Parameters
In the configuration method 4xCount of the digital input / digital output module
DIQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 8xM12 the Channels 0 to 7 are used by the counting function. The
Channels 8 to 15 can be parameterized freely.
The table below shows the parameters of the freely assignable Channels 8...15.
See also
Pin assignment (Page 51)
General parameters
Diagnostics: Missing load voltage 2L+
Enabling of the diagnostics for missing or insufficient load voltage 2L+.
Diagnostics: Short circuit to ground
Enabling of the diagnostics, at short-circuit of an encoder supply or of an output to ground.
Behavior at CPU/master STOP (8...15)
With this parameter you set the reaction of the digital outputs of after a CPU/master STOP.
Behavior DQ at freely assignable Channels 8...15:
● Deactivate: The digital output is de-energized.
● Keep last value: The last value of the digital output remains activated.
● Output substitute value: The digital output outputs a configured substitute value.
Note
Influences the counting frequency
When setting the input delay take into account that the counting frequency possible is
automatically reduced at higher values.
In order to achieve the maximum counting frequency of 2 kHz select an input delay smaller
than 0.4 ms.
Counting direction
Use this parameter to select the direction in which counting is carried out:
● Forward
● Backward.
Edge selection
Use this parameter to select the edge that is counted:
● At rising edge:
The respective counter counts all the rising edges at the counter input.
● At falling edge:
The respective counter counts all the falling edges at the counter input.
Behavior when a counting limit is exceeded
With this parameter you select the behavior when the high counting limit is violated in the
upward direction or the low counting limit is violated in the downward direction:
● Stop counting:
After a counting limit is violated, the internal gate is closed. This stops the counting
process. The counter value is set to the opposite counting limit. To start the counting
process again, you must close and reopen the SW gate.
● Continue counting:
After a counting limit is violated, the counter value is set to the opposite counting limit and
counting continues.
Comparison value
With this parameter you specify the comparison value.
The following applies:
● Low counting limit ≤ Comparison value ≤ High counting limit
Start value
With this parameter you specify the start value.
The following applies:
● Low counting limit ≤ Start value ≤ High counting limit
Note
Count value at CPU/Master STOP
Independently of the selected reaction of the count output, the count value continues to
change during a CPU/Master STOP depending on the input edge, counting continues.
Substitute value DQ
With this parameter you set the substitute value of the digital output of a counter if the setting
"Output substitute value" has been selected at the parameter "Behavior at CPU/master
STOP for DQ".
Note
Parameter assignment of the channels
The corresponding values in the output data do not trigger any reaction for all the channels
that are used as an input.
You cannot control the count outputs via the user program.
Feedback interface
The user program receives current values and status information from the module via the
feedback interface.
The figure below shows the address assignment of the module in the process image input in
the configuration method 4xCount.
At Counter 0 x stands for the input byte IB 2 in this case, at Counters 1 to 3 you add 6 bytes,
12 bytes and 18 bytes respectively to this input byte.
When you assign a different start address to the digital input/digital output module, the byte
sequence changes correspondingly.
Note
When you have initiated the resetting of an event bit, you have to wait for the respective
feedback bit. You can initiate a further reset subsequently.
Note
An opening of the SW gate or HW gate (0-1 transition) resets all event bits.
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the digital input
module / digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 8xM12.
DIAG LED
PWR LED
4.2.3.2 Interrupts
The digital input / digital output module DIQ 16x24VDC/0.5A 8xM12 in the configuration
method 4xCount supports diagnostic and hardware interrupts.
Diagnostic interrupt
The digital input/digital output module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following
events:
● Short-circuit of an encoder supply to ground, or
● Short-circuit of an output to ground
● Load voltage 2L+ missing or too low
● Parameter assignment error
Hardware interrupt
The module generates a hardware interrupt at the following event:
● Comparison event occurred for DQ
For detailed information on the error event, refer to the hardware interrupt organization block
with the "RALRM" instruction (read additional interrupt info) and to the STEP 7 online help.
The module channel that triggered the hardware interrupt is entered in the start information
of the organization block. The figure below shows the assignment to the bits of the local data
double word 8.
Figure 4-12 Start information of the organization block in the configuration method 4xCount
always output. This alarm is output even if all channels are configured as outputs.
2If you are using ET 200AL modules in connection with the ET 200SP distributed I/O system, the
diagnostic alarm "Load voltage missing" is displayed.
Behavior DQ - Count value between a comparison value and the high counting limit (counting
direction forward)
The following section shows the behavior of the count output with the parameter assignment
"Set output DQ: Count value between a comparison value and the high counting limit".
The count output is set to "1" if the current values lies between the comparison value and the
high count limit.
You can optionally enable a hardware interrupt through the parameterization. This is
generated with the rising edge of the count output.
The following figure shows an example of the signal state of the count output depending on
the parameterization mentioned above.
Behavior DQ - count value between a comparison value and the low counting limit (counting direction
backward)
The following section shows the behavior of the count output with the parameter assignment
"Set output DQ: Between a comparison value and the low counting limit".
The count output is set to "1" if the current values lies between the comparison value and the
low count limit.
You can optionally enable a hardware interrupt through the parameterization. This is
generated with the rising edge of the count output.
The following figure shows an example of the signal state of the count output depending on
the parameterization mentioned above.
Start and stop the counting process via the gate control (counting direction forward, configuration
method 2xCount)
The following section shows the behavior of the counter depending on the control input at
the parameterization "Behavior DI: Gate control in combination with "Behavior when a
counting limit is exceeded: Stop counting".
If you set the HW gate to "1" via the control input, the counting process is started. If you set
the HW gate to "0", the counting process stops.
Note that the counting process also stops if you close the SW gate while the HW gate is
opened.
HW gate ans SW gate together form the internal gate. The module only counts when the
internal gate is open.
The following figure shows an example of the behavior of the counter at gate control with the
principle of stopping counting when a counting limit is exceeded.
Change counting direction via count input and stop counting (configuration method 2xCount)
The following section shows the behavior of the counter depending on the direction input at
the parameterization "Behavior DI: Counting direction" in combination with "Behavior when a
counting limit is exceeded: Stop counting".
If you have parameterized the digital input of a counter as a direction input, you can change
the counting direction via corresponding signals at this input.
Irrespective of the parameterization the counter always forward id the signal state "0" is set
at direction input or, respectively backward if the signal state is "1".
If you change the counting direction via a signal change at the direction input, the edge
detection (rising / falling edge) is also switched over.
The following figure shows an example of the behavior of the counter at a change in the
counting direction with the principle of stopping counting when a counting limit is exceeded.
Figure 4-16 Changing the counting direction and principle: Stop counting
Behavior when a counting limit is exceeded - Stop counting (counting direction forward)
The following section describes the effects of the parameter "Behavior when a counting limit
is exceeded: Stop counting" in the counting direction forward. To control the counter, the bits
of the control byte of the control interface are used, see the configuration method 2xCount,
section Assignment of the control interface (Page 41) and configuration method 4xCount,
section Assignment of the control interface (Page 60).
You have entered the bit string 011 in the control byte of the control interface. This bit string
loads the value defined in the load value (SLOT) as the start value of the counter via the load
request (LD_SLOT).
After the high counting limit is violated, counting is aborted (counting stops) and the counted
value jumps to the low counting limit.
The bit STS_GATE is reset in the feedback interface, the bit EVENT_OFLW is set.
The following figure shows an example of the principle of stopping counting when the high
count limit is exceeded, counting direction forward.
The behavior "Behavior DQ" is set to "Count value between a comparison value and the high
counting limit".
You can find additional information on the behavior of the counter at an overflow in the
section Explanations for the feedback interface (Page 44).
Behavior when a counting limit is exceeded - Continue counting (counting direction backward)
The following section describes the effects of the parameter "Behavior when a counting limit
is exceeded: Continue counting". To control the counter, the bits of the control byte of the
control interface are used, see the configuration method 2xCount, section Assignment of the
control interface (Page 41) and configuration method 4xCount, section Assignment of the
control interface (Page 60).
After the low counting limit is underpassed, the counted value jumps to the high counting
limit and counting is continued.
The bit STS_GATE is not reset when a count limit is exceeded.
The following figure shows an example of the principle of stopping counting when the low
count limit is exceeded, counting direction backward.
The behavior "Behavior DQ" is set to "Count value between a comparison value and the high
counting limit".
Reference
You will find general information on the counting function in the section Counting (Page 28).
Further information about the pin assignment, parameters, control and feedback interface,
etc. is available in the sections Configuration method 2xCount (Page 30) and Configuration
method 4xCount (Page 50).
Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated STEP 7 V14 or higher
as of version
• STEP 7 configurable/integrated as of ver- V5.5 SP4 Hotfix 7 or higher
sion
• PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSD as of Revision 5
sion
• PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revi- GSDML V2.3.1
sion
Operating mode
• DI Yes
• Counter Yes
• DQ Yes
Supply voltage
Load voltage 1L+
• Rated value (DC) 24 V
• Output current, max. 1.4 A; Total current of all encoders, max. 0.7 A
per load voltage
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 4W
Digital inputs
Number of digital inputs 16; Parameterizable as DIQ
Input characteristic curve in accordance with Yes
IEC 61131, type 3
Number of simultaneously controllable inputs
all mounting positions
– up to 55 °C, max. 16
Digital input functions, parameterizable
• Freely usable digital input Yes
• Counter Yes
– Number, max. 4
– Counting frequency, max. 2 kHz
– Counting width 32 bit; Incl. sign
– Counting direction up/down Yes
Input voltage
• Type of input voltage DC
Digital outputs
Number of digital outputs 16; Parameterizable as DIQ
• in groups of 8; 2 load groups for 8 outputs each
• upper limit 4 kΩ
Output voltage
• for signal "1", min. L+ (-0.8 V)
Output current
• for signal "1" rated value 0.5 A
Switching frequency
• with resistive load, max. 100 Hz
Cable length
• unshielded, max. 30 m
Encoder
Connectable encoders
• 2-wire sensor Yes
Potential separation
between the load voltages Yes
Potential separation channels
• between the channels, in groups of 8
• between the channels and the power sup- No; 8 channels are non-isolated and 8 channels
ply of the electronics are isolated from supply voltage 1L+
Isolation
Isolation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Degree and class of protection
Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529
• IP65 Yes
• IP67 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• min. -25 °C
• max. 55 °C
Connection method
Design of electrical connection for the inputs M12, 5-pole
and outputs
Power supply M8, 4-pole
ET-Connection
• ET-Connection M8, 4-pin, shielded
Dimensions
Width 45 mm
Height 159 mm
Depth 40 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 195 g
Introduction
PROFIenergy is a PROFINET-based data interface for switching off consumers centrally and
in a coordinated manner during pause times regardless of the manufacturer or device type.
This has the aim that the process is only provided with the energy that is absolutely required.
In so doing, the majority of the energy savings come from the process itself; the PROFINET
device contributes only a few watts to the possible savings. In PROFIenergy, this operating
state is referred to as a "pause".
Additional information
You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy"
section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254863) and the "Saving energy with
PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V14
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856).
Application examples (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454) are
also available on the Internet.
Display
The channel status LEDs are directly influenced by the signal level at the socket.
If the encoder supply is switched off, this causes the channel status LEDs to also switch off.
Mode parameter
The following table shows the "Mode" parameter.
Table 6- 1 Mode parameter
1 There are two encoder supplies, 1US for Channels 0 to 7 and 2US for Channels 8 to 15. At a
"Pause" the supplies can only be switched off if no channel is configured in
PE_MODE_PROCEED.
Display
The channel status LEDs are directly affected by the signal level at the socket.
Mode parameter
The following table shows the "Mode" parameter.
Display
The channel status LEDs are directly influenced by the signal level at the socket.
If the encoder supply is switched off, this causes the channel status LEDs to also switch off.
Note
Channels of a counter
All the channels that belong to a counter must have the same PROFIenergy behavior.
If substitute value behavior is parameterized, this also has to be the same for all channels of
a counter.
If the PROFIenergy behavior is not the same for all the channels of a counter, the module
rejects the PROFIenergy parameterization.
Further information on the assignment of the counting channels for the configuration method
2xCount is available in the section Pin assignment (Page 31), for the configuration method
4xCount in the section Pin assignment (Page 51).
Mode parameter
The following table shows the "Mode" parameter.
___________________
PROFIenergy 7
A
___________________
Dimension drawing
02/2016
A5E36683723-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Preface
Conventions
Please also observe notes marked as follows:
Note
Indicates important product information to which particular attention should be paid.
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
2.2 Operator controls and display elements .................................................................................11
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................12
3.2 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................13
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................16
4.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................16
4.3 Address space ........................................................................................................................17
5 Interrupts/diagnostic alarms .................................................................................................................. 18
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................18
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................20
5.3 Diagnostics alarms..................................................................................................................20
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 21
6.1 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................21
7 PROFIenergy ........................................................................................................................................ 24
7.1 Pause function ........................................................................................................................24
7.2 Behavior of the digital output module .....................................................................................25
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 26
Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the
SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control,
Web server.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).
Article number
6ES7142-5AF00-0BA0
Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● 8 digital outputs
– Channels 0 to 3 connected to 1L+ (non-switched)
– Channels 4 to 7 connected to 2L+ (switched)
● M12 sockets for connection of actuators
● Rated load voltage 24 V DC
● Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors, and indicator lights
● Output current per output 2 A
● Configurable diagnostics can be set for each module
● Dimensions 45 x 159 mm
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● Identification and maintenance data I&M0 to I&M3
● Value status (Quality Information)
● PROFIenergy
Accessories
The following components are included in the module package:
● Identification labels
Other components
The following component can be ordered as spare part:
● Identification labels
The following components can be ordered as accessories:
● Connectors
● Cables
● Stripping Tool for ET-Connection
● M8 sealing cap
● M12 sealing cap
See also
You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the
ET 200AL distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/89254965) system manual.
Note
Color coding
The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These
colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables.
* The outputs DQ0 to DQ3 are connected to 1L+; the outputs DQ4 to DQ7 are connected to 2L+.
NOTICE
ET-Connection/supply voltage
Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET-Connection and the supply voltage.
Mixing up the ET-Connection connectors and the connectors for the supply voltage can
destroy the module.
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED displays (status and error displays) of the digital output
module DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12.
DIAG LED
PWR LED
5.2 Interrupts
The digital output module DQ 8x24VDC/2A 8xM12 supports diagnostics interrupts.
Diagnostic interrupt
The digital output module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Short-circuit of outputs to ground
● Load voltage 2L+ missing or too low
6ES7142-5AF00-0BA0
General information
Product type designation DQ 8X24VDC/2A, 8XM12
Hardware functional status E01
Firmware version V1.0.x
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated As of STEP 7 V13 SP1
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 Hotfix 7 or higher
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD as of revision 5
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3.1
Supply voltage
Load voltage 1L+
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 20.4 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes; against destruction; loads will be activated
Load voltage 2L+
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 20.4 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes; against destruction; loads will be activated
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 40 mA; no load
From load voltage 1L+ (unswitched voltage) 4 A; maximum value
From load voltage 2L+, max. 4 A; maximum value
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 4W
Digital outputs
Number of outputs 8
• In groups of 4; 2 load groups for 4 outputs each
6ES7142-5AF00-0BA0
Switching capacity of outputs
With lamp load, max. 10 W
Load resistance range
Low limit 12 Ω
High limit 4 kΩ
Output voltage
For signal "1", min. L+ (-0.8 V)
Output current
For signal "1" rated value 2A
For signal "1" permissible range, max. 2 A, with inductive load according to IEC 60947-
5-1, DC13 / AC-15
For signal "0" residual current, max. 0.5 mA
Switching frequency
With resistive load, max. 100 Hz
With inductive load, max. 0.1 Hz; 0.25 Hz at 25 °C
With lamp load, max. 1 Hz
Total current of outputs
Current per group, max. 4 A; with inductive load, max. 2 channels per
group
Cable length
Unshielded, max. 30 m
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Substitute values can be applied Yes; channel-based, configurable
Interrupts
Diagnostic interrupt Yes; configurable
Diagnostics alarms
Short-circuit Yes; outputs to ground; module-based
Diagnostics indicator LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red LED
For load voltage monitoring Yes; green LED
Electrical isolation
Between load voltages Yes
Electrical isolation of channels
Between the channels, in groups of 4
Between the channels and backplane bus Yes
Between the channels and power supply of the No; 4 channels are non-isolated and 4 channels
electronics are isolated from supply voltage 1L+
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
6ES7142-5AF00-0BA0
Degree of protection and protection class
Degree of protection according to EN 60529
• IP65 Yes
• IP67 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature in operation
Min. -25 °C
Max. 55 °C
Connection technology
Inputs/outputs M12, 5-pin
Power supply M8, 4-pin
ET-Connection
ET-Connection M8, 4-pin, shielded
Dimensions
Width 45 mm
Height 159 mm
Depth 40 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 192 g
Introduction
PROFIenergy is a PROFINET-based data interface for switching off consumers centrally and
in a coordinated manner during pause times regardless of the manufacturer or device type.
This has the aim that the process is only provided with the energy that is absolutely required.
In so doing, the majority of the energy savings come from the process itself; the PROFINET
device contributes only a few watts to the possible savings. In PROFIenergy, this operating
state is referred to as a "pause".
Additional information
You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy"
section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254863) and the "Saving energy with
PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856).
Application examples (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454) are
also available on the Internet.
Display
The channel status LEDs are directly affected by the signal level at the socket.
Mode parameter
The following table shows the "Mode" parameter.
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200AL
Analog input module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12
(6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual
___________________
Technical specifications 6
___________________
PROFIenergy 7
___________________
Dimension drawing A
___________________
Representation of analog
values B
03/2016
A5E32350124-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Conventions
Please also observe notes marked as follows:
Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation and on
the handling of the product to which particular attention should be paid.
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
2.2 Operator controls and display elements .................................................................................12
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 13
3.1 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................13
3.2 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................15
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 19
4.1 Measurement types and measuring ranges ...........................................................................19
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................19
4.3 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................24
4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................27
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 28
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................28
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................30
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................32
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 34
7 PROFIenergy ........................................................................................................................................ 38
7.1 Pause function ........................................................................................................................38
7.2 Response of the analog input module ....................................................................................39
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 40
B Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 41
B.1 Representation of analog values in voltage measuring ranges ..............................................41
B.2 Representation of analog values in current measuring ranges ..............................................41
B.3 Representation of analog values for resistance-based sensors .............................................42
B.4 Representation of analog values for resistance thermometer ................................................42
Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control,
Web server.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/tech-doc-et200/Pages/Default.aspx).
"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).
Article number
6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0
Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● 4 analog inputs
● M12 sockets for connection of sensors
● Measurement type can be set for each channel:
– Voltage
– Current (2-/4-wire transducers)
– Resistance (2-/3-wire connection)
– Resistance thermometer (RTD) (2-/3-wire connection)
● Resolution 16-bit
● Dimensions 30 x 159 mm
● Configurable diagnostics can be set for each channel
● Hardware interrupt on limit violation can be set per channel
(two high and two low limits per channel)
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● Identification and maintenance data I&M0 to I&M3
● Value status (Quality Information)
● PROFIenergy
Note
Process values during startup
As long as no parameters have been received by the I/O module, the I/O module returns the
process value 7FFFH.
Accessories
The following components are included in the module package:
● Identification labels
● Spacers
Other components
The following component can be ordered as spare part:
● Identification labels
The following components can be ordered as accessories:
● Connectors
● Cables
● Stripping Tool for ET-Connection
● M8 sealing cap
● M12 sealing cap
See also
You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the
ET 200AL distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual.
The example in the following figure shows the pin assignment for the resistance
thermometer.
Note
Color coding
The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These
colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables.
Table 3- 1 Pin assignment of the sockets for analog inputs (voltage measurement)
Table 3- 2 Pin assignment of the sockets for analog inputs (current measurement)
Table 3- 3 Pin assignment of the sockets for analog inputs (RTD/R 2-wire connection)
Table 3- 4 Pin assignment of the sockets for analog inputs (RTD/R 3-wire connection)
NOTICE
Incorrect connection of sensors at channel
If the measurement type current or voltage measurement is configured at the I/O module, a
connected resistance thermometer could be destroyed.
NOTICE
ET-Connection/supply voltage
Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET-Connection and the supply voltage.
Mixing up the connector for ET-Connection and the connector for the supply voltage can
destroy the module.
4.2 Parameters
NOTICE
Match of encoder and parameters
The default setting of the analog inputs is voltage measurement (1 V to 5 V).
Make sure that the connected encoders and the selected parameters match.
The connected encoder can be destroyed in the case of incorrect parameters.
The table below shows the PROFINET and PROFIBUS parameters for the analog input
module AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12 for configuration with GSD file.
Note
Unused channels
"Deactivate" unused inputs in the parameter assignment to shorten the cycle time of the
module.
A deactivated input always returns the value 7FFFH.
The table below shows the permitted value ranges for the measurement type.
Temperature unit
You use this parameter to set the temperature unit with which you want to measure the
temperature.
Note
Unused channels
"Deactivate" unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the cycle time of the
module.
A deactivated channel always returns the value 7FFFH.
Smoothing channel n
The purpose of smoothing is to filter out interferences. The greater the smoothing factor, the
better the filter effect. This is technically implemented in the form of a digital filter. The
smoothing can be set in 4 levels. The smoothing factor k is equal to the number of module
cycles. The time constant of the smoothing filter is the product of the smoothing factor k and
the cycle time of the I/O module. The greater the smoothing, the greater the time constant of
the filter.
Smoothing time = number of module cycles (k) × cycle time of the module.
The following figure shows how many module cycles it takes for the smoothed analog value
to approach 100%, depending on the configured smoothing. This is valid for all signal
changes at the analog input.
① No smoothing (k = 1)
② Weak (k = 4)
③ Medium (k = 16)
④ Strong (k = 32)
Note
Wire break diagnostics
A wire break diagnostics is not possible for all measuring ranges and measurement types for
analog input channels.
The table below shows the rules you must observe in the case of a wire break in the
measuring ranges 1 to 5, 4 to 20 mA:
The table below shows the diagnostics that can occur for wire break with the measurement
type RTD/R.
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED display (status and error displays) of the analog input
module AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12.
DIAG LED
5.2 Interrupts
Analog input module AI 4xU/I/RTD 4xM12 supports the following diagnostic and hardware
interrupts.
Diagnostic interrupt
The table below shows the events for which the analog input module returns a diagnostic
interrupt, depending on the parameter assignment.
Hardware interrupt
The analog input module generates a hardware interrupt with the following events:
● Low limit 1 violated
● High limit 1 violated
● Low limit 2 violated
● High limit 2 violated
Detailed information on the event is available in the hardware interrupt organization block
with the instruction "RALRM" (Read additional interrupt information) and in the STEP 7
online help.
The start information of the organization block includes information on which channel of the
analog input module triggered the hardware interrupt.
Note
Violation of two limits
If two limits are violated at the same time, limit 1 is always signaled first, followed by limit 2.
The figure below shows the assignment to the bits of the local data double word 8.
Table 5- 7 Diagnostics alarms - for the measuring range: 150 Ω and 300 Ω
Table 5- 8 Diagnostics alarms - for the measuring range: Pt100 and Ni100
6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0
General information
Product type designation AI 4XU/I/RTD, 4XM12
Hardware functional status E01
Firmware version V1.0.x
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated As of STEP 7 V13 SP1
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 Hotfix 3 or higher
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD as of revision 5
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3.1
Supply voltage
Load voltage 1L+
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 20.4 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes; against destruction
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 50 mA; no load
From load voltage 1L+ (unswitched voltage) 4 A; maximum value
From load voltage 2L+, max. 4 A; maximum value
Encoder supply
Number of outputs 4
24 V encoder supply
Short-circuit protection Yes; per channel, electronic
Output current, max. 0.5 A; per channel, total current of all channels
max. 1 A
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 2.5 W
6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0
Analog inputs
Number of analog inputs 4
• For current measurement 4
6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0
Measured value smoothing
Configurable Yes
Setting: None Yes; 1 x cycle time
Setting: Weak Yes; 4 x cycle time
Setting: Medium Yes; 16 x cycle time
Setting: Strong Yes; 32 x cycle time
Encoders
Connection of signal encoders
for voltage measurement Yes
for current measurement as 2-wire transducer Yes
for current measurement as 4-wire transducer Yes
for resistance measurement with two-wire connec- Yes
tion
for resistance measurement with three-wire con- Yes
nection
Errors/accuracies
Linearity error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.025%
Temperature error (in relation to input range), (+/-) 0.01%/K
Crosstalk between the inputs, max. -70 dB
Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 °C (in rela- 0.01%
tion to input range), (+/-)
Operational limit in the entire temperature range
Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.35%
Current in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.45%
Resistance in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.25%
Resistance thermometer in relation to input range, 0.25%
(+/-)
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)
Voltage in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.25%
Current in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.25%
Resistance in relation to input range, (+/-) 0.15%
Resistance thermometer in relation to input range, 0.15%
(+/-)
Disturbance voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 +/-
0.5%), f1 = interference frequency
Series-mode interference (peak of the interference 40 dB
< rated value of the input range), min.
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Interrupts
Diagnostic interrupt Yes; configurable
Limit interrupt Yes; configurable
Diagnostics alarms
Wire break Yes; for 4 mA to 20 mA and 1 V to 5 V
Short-circuit Yes; encoder supply to ground, channel-based
Overflow/underflow Yes
6ES7144-5KD00-0BA0
Diagnostics indicator LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red LED
Electrical isolation
Between load voltages Yes
Electrical isolation of channels
Between channels No
Between the channels and backplane bus Yes
Between the channels and power supply of the No
electronics
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Degree of protection and protection class
Degree of protection according to EN 60529
• IP65 Yes
• IP67 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature in operation
Min. -25 °C
Max. 55 °C
Connection technology
Inputs/outputs M12, 5-pin
Power supply M8, 4-pin
ET-Connection
ET-Connection M8, 4-pin, shielded
Dimensions
Width 30 mm
Height 159 mm
Depth 40 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 168 g
Introduction
PROFIenergy is a PROFINET-based data interface for switching off consumers centrally and
in a coordinated manner during pause times regardless of the manufacturer or device type.
This has the aim that the process is only provided with the energy that is absolutely required.
In so doing, the majority of the energy savings come from the process itself; the PROFINET
device contributes only a few watts to the possible savings. In PROFIenergy, this operating
state is referred to as a "pause".
Additional information
You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy"
section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254863) and the "Saving energy
with PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
Application examples (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/41986454) are
also available on the Internet.
Requirement
You can use the PROFIenergy function when you use the internal encoder supply.
Display
The channel status LEDs are not affected by PROFIenergy.
Resistance-based sensor
___________________
Documentation guide 1
SIMATIC
___________________
Product overview 2
___________________
Wiring 3
ET 200AL
Analog output module
___________________
Parameters/address space 4
AQ 4xU/I 4xM12
(6ES7145-5ND00-0BA0)
___________________
Interrupts/diagnostics alarms 5
Manual
___________________
Technical specifications 6
___________________
PROFIenergy 7
___________________
Dimension drawing A
___________________
Representation of analog
values B
12/2016
A5E38687953-AA
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Preface
Conventions
Please also observe notes marked as follows:
Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation and on
the handling of the product to which particular attention should be paid.
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions only form one element of such a concept.
Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines
and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the
enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security
measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. For more information about industrial security, please visit
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to
always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported,
and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Properties .................................................................................................................................. 9
2.2 Operator controls and display elements .................................................................................11
3 Wiring ................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................12
3.2 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................13
4 Parameters/address space ................................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Output ranges .........................................................................................................................16
4.2 Parameters .............................................................................................................................17
4.3 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................18
4.4 Address space ........................................................................................................................20
5 Interrupts/diagnostics alarms ................................................................................................................. 21
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................21
5.2 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................23
5.3 Diagnostics alarms ..................................................................................................................23
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................ 24
7 PROFIenergy ........................................................................................................................................ 27
7.1 Pause function ........................................................................................................................27
7.2 Response of analog output module ........................................................................................28
A Dimension drawing ............................................................................................................................... 29
B Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 30
B.1 Representation of analog values in the voltage output ranges ..............................................30
B.2 Representation of analog values in the current output ranges ...............................................32
Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web
server.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667).
"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).
Article number
6ES7145-5ND00-0BA0
Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● 4 analog outputs
● M12 sockets for connection of actuators
● Voltage output can be set for each channel
● Current output can be set for each channel
● Resolution: 16-bit
● Dimensions 30 x 159 mm
● Configurable diagnostics can be set for each channel
The module supports the following functions:
● Firmware update
● Identification and maintenance data I&M0 to I&M3
● Value status (Quality Information)
● PROFIenergy
Accessories
The following components are included in the module package:
● Identification labels
● Spacers
Other components
The following component can be ordered as spare part:
● Identification labels
The following components can be ordered as accessories:
● Connectors
● Cables
● Stripping Tool for ET-Connection
● M8 sealing cap
● M12 sealing cap
See also
You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the
ET 200AL distributed I/O system
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/89254965) system manual.
Note
Color coding
The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These
colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables.
Table 3- 1 Pin assignment of the sockets for analog outputs (voltage output)
Table 3- 2 Pin assignment of the sockets for analog outputs (current output)
NOTICE
ET-Connection/supply voltage
Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET-Connection and the supply voltage.
Mixing up the connector for ET-Connection and the connector for the supply voltage can
destroy the module.
The tables of the output ranges, overflow, overrange, etc. are provided in the appendix
Representation of analog values (Page 30).
4.2 Parameters
* = With configuration via PROFIBUS GSD file, the two short-circuit diagnostics ("Diagnostics: Actua-
tor supply short circuit to ground" and "Diagnostics: Short circuit to ground" for voltage outputs) are
activated or deactivated using a module-wide parameter “Diagnostics: Short circuit to ground".
They cannot be adjusted independently of one another.
Short-circuit detection
The diagnostics for short circuit to ground can be configured for the voltage output type.
Short-circuit detection cannot be guaranteed for small output values (between 0.1 V and
+0.1 V).
Note
Unused channels
"Deactivate" unused channels in the parameter assignment to improve the power
consumption of the module.
A deactivated channel always returns the value "no voltage or current".
Diagnostics: Underflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the output value violates the underrange, falls below the
minimum output value or reaches the underflow.
Diagnostics: Overflow
Enabling of the diagnostics when the output value exceeds the overrange.
Substitute value
With this parameter, you set substitute values for the analog outputs.
The table below shows the permitted value ranges for the substitute values:
LED displays
The figure below shows the LED display (status and error displays) of the AQ 4xU/I 4xM12
analog output module.
DIAG LED
5.2 Interrupts
The AQ 4xU/I 4xM12 analog output module supports diagnostics interrupts.
Diagnostic interrupt
The module generates a diagnostic interrupt at the following events:
● Short-circuit of the actuator supply
● Short-circuit (voltage)
● Wire break (current)
● High limit violated
● Low limit violated
● Parameter assignment error
6ES7145-5ND00-0BA0
General information
Product type designation AQ 4XU/I, 4XM12
Hardware functional status E01
Firmware version V1.0.x
Product function
I&M data Yes; I&M0 to I&M3
Engineering with
STEP 7 TIA Portal can be configured/integrated STEP 7 V14 or higher
as of version
STEP 7 can be configured/integrated as of version V5.5 SP4 Hotfix 7 or higher
PROFIBUS as of GSD version/GSD revision GSD as of revision 5
PROFINET as of GSD version/GSD revision GSDML V2.3.1
Supply voltage
Load voltage 1L+
Rated value (DC) 24 V
Low limit of permitted range (DC) 20.4 V
High limit of permitted range (DC) 28.8 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes; against destruction; actuator supply outputs
are connected with reverse polarity
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 110 mA; no load
From load voltage 1L+ (unswitched voltage) 4 A; maximum value
From load voltage 2L+, max. 4 A; maximum value
Actuator supply
Number of outputs 4
Short-circuit protection Yes; per module, electronic
Output current
Rated value Total current 1 A to 45 °C, 0.5 A to 55 °C
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 2.6 W
Analog outputs
Number of analog outputs 4
Voltage output, short-circuit protection Yes
Voltage output, short-circuit current, max. 24 mA
Current output, no-load voltage, max. 15 V
Cycle time (all channels), max. 1 ms
6ES7145-5ND00-0BA0
Output ranges, voltage
0 V to 10 V Yes; 15 bit
1 V to 5 V Yes; 14 bit
-10 V to +10 V Yes; 16 bit incl. sign
Output ranges, current
0 mA to 20 mA Yes; 15 bit
-20 mA to +20 mA Yes; 16 bit incl. sign
4 mA to 20 mA Yes; 14 bit
Wiring the actuators
for voltage output two-wire connection Yes
for voltage output four-wire connection Yes
for current output two-wire connection Yes
for current output four-wire connection Yes
Load resistance (in the rated range of the output)
for voltage outputs, min. 1 kΩ
for voltage outputs, capacitive load, max. 1 µF
for current outputs, max. 500 Ω
for current outputs, inductive load, max. 1 mH
Destruction limit for externally applied voltages
and currents
Voltages at the outputs to MANA 16 V
Cable length
Shielded, max. 30 m
Analog value generation for the outputs
Settling time
for resistive load 1 ms
for capacitive load 1 ms
for inductive load 1 ms
Errors/accuracies
Output ripple (in relation to output range, band- 0.02%
width 0 kHz to 50 kHz), (+/-)
Linearity error (in relation to output range), (+/-) 0.1%
Temperature error (in relation to output range), 0.005%/K
(+/-)
Crosstalk between outputs, max. -70 dB
Repeat accuracy in settled state at 25 °C (in rela- 0.03%
tion to output range), (+/-)
Operational limit in the entire temperature range
Voltage in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.25%
Current in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.25%
Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 °C)
Voltage in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.15%
Current in relation to output range, (+/-) 0.15%
6ES7145-5ND00-0BA0
Interrupts/diagnostics/status information
Substitute values can be applied Yes; channel-based, configurable
Interrupts
Diagnostic interrupt Yes; configurable
Diagnostics alarms
Wire break Yes; channel-based, only for output type current
Short-circuit Yes; actuator supply module-based, for output
type voltage channel-based
Diagnostics indicator LED
Channel status display Yes; green LED
For module diagnostics Yes; green/red LED
Electrical isolation
Between load voltages Yes
Electrical isolation of channels
Between channels No
Between the channels and backplane bus Yes
Between the channels and power supply of the No
electronics
Insulation
Insulation tested with 707 V DC (type test)
Degree of protection and protection class
Degree of protection according to EN 60529
• IP65 Yes
• IP67 Yes
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature in operation
Min. -25 °C
Max. 55 °C
Connection technology
Inputs/outputs M12, 5-pin
Power supply M8, 4-pin
ET-Connection
ET-Connection M8, 4-pin, shielded
Dimensions
Width 30 mm
Height 159 mm
Depth 40 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 175 g
Introduction
PROFIenergy is a PROFINET-based data interface for switching off consumers centrally and
in a coordinated manner during pause times regardless of the manufacturer or device type.
This has the aim that the process is only provided with the energy that is absolutely required.
In so doing, the majority of the energy savings come from the process itself; the PROFINET
device contributes only a few watts to the possible savings. In PROFIenergy, this operating
state is referred to as a "pause".
Additional information
You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy"
section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/89254863) and the "Saving energy with
PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V14
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/49948856).
Application examples (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454) are
also available on the Internet.
Display
The channel status LEDs are not affected by PROFIenergy.
Mode parameter
The following table shows the "Mode" parameter.
Table 7- 1 Mode parameter
1 As there is only one actuator supply UA for all channels, the supply can only be switched off during
a "pause" if all channel parameters have been set to switch off.
___________________
Documentation guide 1
2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
3
___________________
Wiring
ET 200AL
Communication module 4
___________________
Parameters/address space
CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12
(6ES7147-5JD00-0BA0)
___________________
Diagnostics alarms 5
Manual
___________________
Technical specifications 6
___________________
Replacing modules 7
8
___________________
PROFIenergy
___________________
Dimension drawing A
10/2017
A5E32352322-AE
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Conventions
Please also observe notes marked as follows:
Note
Indicates important product information to which particular attention should be paid.
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide ................................................................................................................................. 6
2 Product overview ..................................................................................................................................... 10
2.1 Properties................................................................................................................................10
2.2 Operator controls and display elements .................................................................................13
2.3 Functions ................................................................................................................................14
2.4 Reset communication module to factory settings ...................................................................14
3 Wiring ...................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.1 Terminal and block diagram ...................................................................................................15
3.2 Pin assignment .......................................................................................................................16
4 Parameters/address space ...................................................................................................................... 19
4.1 Parameters .............................................................................................................................19
4.2 Explanation of the parameters ................................................................................................21
5 Diagnostics alarms .................................................................................................................................. 25
5.1 Status and error displays ........................................................................................................25
5.2 Diagnostics alarms..................................................................................................................27
6 Technical specifications ........................................................................................................................... 29
7 Replacing modules .................................................................................................................................. 32
8 PROFIenergy ........................................................................................................................................... 33
8.1 Pause function ........................................................................................................................33
8.2 DI operating mode ..................................................................................................................34
8.3 DQ operating mode.................................................................................................................35
8.4 IO-Link operating mode ..........................................................................................................36
A Dimension drawing .................................................................................................................................. 38
Basic information
The System Manual and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation,
wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC ET 200AL distributed I/O system. The STEP 7
online help supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics regarding the SIMATIC
ET 200AL distributed I/O system, e.g. diagnostics, communication, Motion Control, Web
server.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742667).
"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).
PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the system network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans the PROFINET network and all connected
components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a system.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).
SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).
Article number
6ES7147-5JD00-0BA0
Properties
The module has the following technical properties:
● IO-Link Master according to IO-Link specification V1.1
● 4 ports, type class B
● 4 M12 connectors
● SIO mode (standard IO mode)
● Supported data transmission rates:
– COM1 (4.8 kBd)
– COM2 (38.4 kBd)
– COM3 (230.4 kBd)
● Configuration limits:
– Max. 32 bytes input and output data per port
– Max. 32 bytes input and output data per module
● Automatic backup of device parameters during replacement of the IO-Link device
(only for V1.1 devices)
● Suitable for connection of IO-Link devices with 3-wire and 5-wire connection
● Configurable diagnostics can be set for each channel
● Dimensions 30 x 159 mm
The module supports the following functions:
Accessories
The following components are included in the module package:
● Identification labels
● Spacers
Other components
The following component can be ordered as spare part:
● Identification labels
The following components can be ordered as accessories:
● Connectors
● Cables
● Stripping Tool for ET-Connection
● M8 sealing cap
● M12 sealing cap
See also
You can find more information on accessories in the Accessories/spare parts section of the
ET 200AL distributed I/O system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) system manual.
2.3 Functions
IO-Link is a point-to-point connection between an IO-Link master and an IO-Link device. On
the IO-Link master, you can use IO-Link devices as well as conventional sensors/actuators
with unshielded standard cables using proven 3-wire technology. IO-Link is backward
compatible to conventional digital sensors or actuators. Switching status channel and data
channel are in proven 24 V DC technology.
Reference
For more information on the IO-Link system, please see the IO-Link system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/65949252) function manual.
Note
The device parameters are deleted and the factory state is restored.
You should reset a removed CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 communication module to the factory
settings before you place it in storage.
Procedure
To perform a "Reset to factory settings", proceed as described in the S7-PCT online help.
Note
Color coding
The sockets for ET-Connection and the power supply of the modules are color-coded. These
colors correspond to the colors of the offered cables.
Note
Port Class B
The pin assignment of the IO-Link interface corresponds to the IO-Link specification as per
Port Class B. Port Class B is specially suited for the connection of actuators with additional
supply (e.g. valve terminals).
To connect devices with Port Class A (e.g. sensors) to the communication module
CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12, a 3-wire connection cable should be used (Port Class A compatibility).
The table below shows the pin assignments of the 4 sockets for the connection of IO-Link.
The M12 connectors are designed according to IO-Link specification as port type Class B.
Pins 2 and 5 contain an additional power supply.
Reaction-free connection of devices with different port types (Class A and Class B) is
possible using a 3-wire connecting cable (assignment of pins 1, 3 and 4).
NOTICE
24 V encoder supply 1US
For the supply of devices, only use the 24 V 1US encoder supply provided by the
communication device.
NOTICE
ET-Connection/supply voltage
Observe the correct wiring of the M8 sockets for ET-Connection and the supply voltage.
Mixing up the connector for ET-Connection and the connector for the supply voltage can
destroy the module.
Parameters
The following table shows the general parameters for the communication module
CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12.
The following table shows the port parameters for the communication module
CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 with firmware version V1.1.
* Take care not to exceed the maximum possible length of the input or output data for all ports.
Example:
You have selected the 32I/32O configuration. You have assigned the first port 16 bytes of input
data.
You can still assign a total of 16 bytes of input data for the remaining three ports.
** Only in effect when "IO-Link manual" port mode is used.
Diagnostics port
This parameter enables the diagnostics for the selected port.
The diagnostics possible depends on the IO-Link device in use. Additional information about
the diagnostic interrupts can be found in the description of the utilized IO-Link device.
Operating mode
This parameter determines the mode in which the selected port should be operated.
You can select from the following options:
● IO-Link autostart
● IO-Link manual
● DI
● DQ
● Disabled
IO-Link autostart
The connected IO-Link device starts automatically (Plug&Play functionality). The IO-Link
device is immediately ready for operation.
IO-Link manual
The connected IO-Link device is not started automatically.
You must store the Vendor ID and Device ID of the connected IO-Link device in STEP 7.
In addition, you can select the inspection severity for data storage:
● Identical type (V1.0) without Backup&Restore
● Type-compatible (V1.1) without Backup&Restore
● Type-compatible (V1.1) with Backup&Restore
● Type-compatible (V1.1) with Restore
You can find the Vendor ID and Device ID on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109748852).
DI
The port is operating as a standard digital input.
DQ
The port is operating as a standard digital output.
Disabled
The port is disabled.
Port configuration
You can use a CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 communication module as of firmware version V1.1 to
commission the IO-Link ports of the IO-Link master or the connected IO-Link devices in two
different ways:
● Port configuration without S7-PCT
● Port configuration with S7-PCT
Note
Port Qualifier Information (PQI)
If you have enabled the Port Qualifier Information (PQI), this information is always sent with
the size of 1 byte together with the input data of the IO-Link device.
Reference
For more information, please refer to the IO-Link system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/65949252) function manual.
LED displays
The following figure shows the LED display of the CM 4xIO-Link 4xM12 communication
module.
DIAG LED
LEDs Cn
Valid for IO-Link port in IO-Link mode.
PWR LED
LEDs Qn
Valid for IO-Link port in SIO mode.
Error 9H • All IO-Link error codes which are not listed here are mapped to X
this PROFIBUS DP error
Supply voltage 11H • 24 V encoder supply 1US (of 1L+) for device missing (1806H) X
missing
• 24 V encoder supply 1US (of 1L+) for device too low (<20 V)
(1807H)
• Load voltage 2L+ (switched) missing (1888H)
• 24 V actuator supply 2 UA (of 2L+) for device missing (180EH)
Defective fuse 12H • Fuse on device is defective (5101H) X
External fault 1AH • Error during data backup (1809H, 180AH, 180BH, 180CH, 180DH) X
• More than six errors are pending simultaneously on the IO-Link
device (1808H)
• Consistency error in electronic coding element (1885H)
• Process data length exceeded (1887H)
Engineering with
• STEP 7 TIA Portal configurable/integrated STEP 7 V15 or higher
as of version
Input current
Current consumption (rated value) 40 mA; without load
from load voltage 1L+ (unswitched voltage) 4 A; Maximum value
from load voltage 2L+, max. 4 A; Maximum value
Power loss
Power loss, typ. 2.6 W
IO-Link
Number of ports 4
• of which simultaneously controllable 4
• DI Yes
Diagnostic messages
• Monitoring the supply voltage Yes
• Wire-break Yes
• Short-circuit Yes
Potential separation
between the load voltages Yes
Potential separation channels
• between the channels No
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature during operation
• min. -25 °C
• max. 55 °C
Connection method
Design of electrical connection for the inputs M12, 5-pole
and outputs
Power supply M8, 4-pole
ET-Connection
• ET-Connection M8, 4-pin, shielded
Dimensions
Width 30 mm
Height 159 mm
Depth 40 mm
Weights
Weight, approx. 145 g
Master Backup
The "IO_LINK_MASTER" function block is used to read all relevant IO-Link device and
IO-Link master parameters. These can be stored retentively at a central location, such as in
a data block in the IO controller.
The status of the IO-Link devices or IO-Link ports stored in the IO-Link master can be
restored with the "IO_LINK_MASTER" function block.
As a result, the IO-Link ports and the IO-Link master are configured with the values stored in
the master backup.
A typical application is the restoration of parameters after replacement of the IO-Link master.
Note
Availability
Note that the Master Backup function is available only for IO-Link devices that are specified
for the IO-Link Standard as of V1.1.
You will find information on the Master Backup and Master Restore functions in section
"Master backup" of chapter "Integration into the automation system" of the IO-Link System
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/65949252) function manual.
Reference
You will find additional information on replacing modules in the system manual ET 200AL
distributed I/O system (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965) in
the "Module" section.
You will find additional information on replacing IO-Link masters in the S7-PCT online help.
Introduction
PROFIenergy is a PROFINET-based data interface for switching off consumers centrally and
in a coordinated manner during pause times regardless of the manufacturer or device type.
This has the aim that the process is only provided with the energy that is absolutely required.
In so doing, the majority of the energy savings come from the process itself; the PROFINET
device contributes only a few watts to the possible savings. In PROFIenergy, this operating
state is referred to as a "pause".
Additional information
You can find additional information on working with PROFIenergy in the "PROFIenergy"
section of the manual IM 157-1 PN interface module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254863) and the "Saving energy
with PROFIenergy" section of function manual PROFINET with STEP 7 V13
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856).
Application examples (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/41986454) are
also available on the Internet.
Display
If no external supply voltage is connected, switching off supply voltages 1US and 2UA also
leads to switching off the associated channel status LED Qn.
Mode parameter
The following table shows the "Mode" parameter.
Table 8- 1 Mode parameter
Note
Supply voltages 1US and 2UA
Supply voltages 1US and 2UA can only be switched off separately for each module.
If all channels require switching off during the pause, all supply voltages are switched off if
no channel is assigned in PE_MODE_PROCEED.
Display
The channel status LEDs Qn show the output value.
Mode parameter
The following table shows the "Mode" parameter.
Note
Supply voltages 1US and 2UA
Supply voltages 1US and 2UA can only be switched off separately for each module.
If all channels require switching off in the pause, the supply voltages are switched off.
Display
Switching off the supply voltage 1US also switches off the associated port status LED Cn.
Mode parameter
The following table shows the "Mode" parameter.
1 Supply voltage 1US of the assigned port is switched off. Result: The IO-Link device is no longer
supplied with voltage.
Note
Supply voltages 1US and 2UA
Supply voltages 1US and 2UA can only be switched off separately for each module.
If all channels require switching off in the pause, the supply voltages are switched off.
___________________
Documentation guide 1
Overview of system
SIMATIC
___________________
diagnostics 2
___________________
Quick start 3
S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP,
ET 200AL, ET 200pro Setting and determining
___________________
system diagnostics 4
Diagnostics
___________________
System diagnostics by
means of the user program 5
Function Manual
___________________
Alarms 6
09/2016
A5E03735838-AD
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Diagnostics
4 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Preface
What's new compared to the previous version of the function manual (06/2014 edition)
What's new? What are the customer benefits? Where can I find the infor-
mation?
New contents Extended functionality of the • You obtain information about: Section Diagnostics infor-
Web server mation using the web server
– Know-how protection or copy pro-
(Page 49),
tection of the PLC program
Web server
– Program/communication load and
(http://support.automation.siem
cycle time
ens.com/WW/view/en/5919356
– F-collective signatures, cycle times 0) function manual,
and runtimes of the F-runtime
Using the trace and logic ana-
group(s) (with an F-CPU)
lyzer function
• You can monitor statuses, errors, (https://support.industry.sieme
technology alarms and the current val- ns.com/cs/ww/en/view/648971
ues of technology objects (TOs) with 28) function manual
the Web server.
• You can read, view and save trace
recordings via the Web server and
thus obtain plant and project infor-
mation for diagnostics and mainte-
nance without STEP 7.
• You can set four additional languages
for the Web interface.
Assignment of different You can assign up to three different pro- Section Editing alarms in the
project languages extended ject languages for comments and alarm alarm editor (Page 78)
texts to the user interface languages of
display devices.
Changed Scope of the function man- Functions that you will be familiar with Operating instructions CPU
contents ual expanded to include from the SIMATIC S7-1500 CPUs are 1516pro-2 PN
CPU 1516pro-2 PN implemented in the CPU 1516pro-2 PN (https://support.industry.sieme
(degree of protection IP65, IP66 and ns.com/cs/ww/en/view/109482
IP67). 416)
Security events added You know which types of events are regis- Section CPU diagnostics buffer
tered as security events in the diagnostics (Page 43)
buffer and can configure group alarms for
them.
Influence of the value status You know which factors influence the bit in Section System diagnostics
explained the value status and can take this into using process image inputs
account during configuration. (Page 72)
Note added on the maximum configuration limits of program alarms. Section Creating alarms with
the "Program_Alarm" instruc-
tion (Page 76).
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 5
Preface
Conventions
STEP 7: We refer to "STEP 7" in this documentation as a synonym for the configuration and
programming software "STEP 7 as of V12 (TIA Portal)" and subsequent versions.
This document contains illustrations of the described devices. The illustrations may differ
slightly from the device supplied.
You should also pay particular attention to notes such as the one shown below:
Note
A note contains important information on the product, on the handling of the product or on
the section of the documentation to which particular attention should be paid.
See also
SIMATIC Portal (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal)
Catalog (http://mall.automation.siemens.com)
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions only form one element of such a concept.
Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines
and networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the
enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security
measures (e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. For more information about industrial security, please visit
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to
always use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported,
and failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Diagnostics
6 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Preface
Industry Mall
The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive
solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power
(TIP).
Catalogs for all the products in automation and drives are available on the Internet
(https://mall.industry.siemens.com).
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 7
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 4
1 Documentation guide ............................................................................................................................ 10
2 Overview of system diagnostics ............................................................................................................ 14
2.1 Properties of system diagnostics ........................................................................................... 14
2.2 Benefits of innovative system diagnostics ............................................................................. 16
3 Quick start ............................................................................................................................................ 17
3.1 Using the display of the CPU ................................................................................................. 17
3.2 Using STEP 7......................................................................................................................... 19
4 Setting and determining system diagnostics .......................................................................................... 24
4.1 Configuring alarms for system diagnostics ............................................................................ 24
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics ............................................................................. 26
4.2.1 Diagnostics information at the devices .................................................................................. 27
4.2.1.1 LEDs ...................................................................................................................................... 27
4.2.1.2 Display of the CPU ................................................................................................................. 28
4.2.2 Diagnostics information in STEP 7 ........................................................................................ 30
4.2.2.1 Explanation of diagnostics symbols ....................................................................................... 30
4.2.2.2 Accessible devices (without project) ...................................................................................... 32
4.2.2.3 Devices & networks ............................................................................................................... 34
4.2.2.4 Online & diagnostics .............................................................................................................. 37
4.2.2.5 "Diagnostics" tab in the Inspector window ............................................................................. 40
4.2.2.6 CPU diagnostics buffer .......................................................................................................... 43
4.2.2.7 "Online tools" task card .......................................................................................................... 46
4.2.2.8 Configuring the settings for I/O modules in STEP 7 .............................................................. 48
4.2.3 Diagnostics information using the web server ....................................................................... 49
4.2.4 Diagnostics information using the HMI diagnostics view ....................................................... 59
4.2.4.1 Configuring system diagnostics ............................................................................................. 59
4.2.4.2 Different views of the HMI diagnostics view .......................................................................... 62
4.2.4.3 Inserting system diagnostics indicator ................................................................................... 65
4.2.4.4 Configuring button as system diagnostics indicator............................................................... 67
5 System diagnostics by means of the user program ................................................................................ 70
5.1 Options of system diagnostics in the user program ............................................................... 70
5.2 System diagnostics using process image inputs ................................................................... 72
6 Alarms .................................................................................................................................................. 75
6.1 Creating alarms with the "Program_Alarm" instruction .......................................................... 76
6.2 Editing alarms in the alarm editor .......................................................................................... 78
6.3 Display of program alarms ..................................................................................................... 81
6.4 Output of the alarm state with the "Get_AlarmState" instruction ........................................... 82
Diagnostics
8 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Table of contents
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 9
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system, for CPU 1516pro-2 PN
based on SIMATIC S7-1500, and for the distributed I/O systems SIMATIC ET 200MP,
ET 200SP and ET 200AL is divided into three areas.
This division allows you easier access to the specific information you require.
Basic information
System manuals and Getting Started manuals describe in detail the configuration,
installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and
ET 200AL systems; use the corresponding operating instructions for CPU 1516pro-2 PN.
The STEP 7 online help supports you in configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
Diagnostics
10 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Documentation guide
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics such as diagnostics,
communication, Motion Control, Web server, OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and additions to the manuals are documented in product information sheets.
You will find the product information on the Internet:
● S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815)
● ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864)
● ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/99494757)
Manual Collections
The Manual Collections contain the complete documentation of the systems put together in
one file.
You will find the Manual Collections on the Internet:
● S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384)
● ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942)
● ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965)
"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 11
Documentation guide
Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).
Diagnostics
12 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Documentation guide
PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 13
Overview of system diagnostics 2
2.1 Properties of system diagnostics
Introduction
In the SIMATIC environment, the term "system diagnostics" refers to diagnostics of devices
and modules.
All SIMATIC products have integrated diagnostic functions that you can use to detect and
remedy faults. The components automatically flag a potential fault in the operation and
provide detailed information. You can minimize unscheduled standstill times with plant-wide
diagnostics.
The SIMATIC automation system monitors the following states in the running plant:
● Device failure/recovery
● Insert/remove event
● Module fault
● I/O access error
● Channel fault
● Parameter assignment error
● Failure of the external auxiliary voltage
Diagnostics
14 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Overview of system diagnostics
2.1 Properties of system diagnostics
Consistent diagnostics from the field level all the way to the management level
The various diagnostics media give you a uniform view of maintenance-related information of
every automation component in the plant: System status (module and network status, alarms
for system errors) are available plant-wide in a uniform display.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 15
Overview of system diagnostics
2.2 Benefits of innovative system diagnostics
Step Description
① The device detects an error and sends diagnostics data to the assigned CPU.
② The CPU informs the connected display media. The display of the system diagnostics is
updated.
Diagnostics
16 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Quick start 3
Introduction
The following chapters of this documentation describe the different options for establishing
system diagnostics. All described options can be used independently of one another.
This chapter gives you an overview of the basic procedure to get initial diagnostics
information fast.
Note
System diagnostics is generally available for the devices of the SIMATIC series.
Requirements
● A project has been created.
● The project has been downloaded to the CPU.
Determining diagnostics information using the display of the SIMATIC S7-1500 CPU
To determine diagnostics information using the display, follow these steps:
1. Select the "Diagnostics" menu on the display.
2. Select the "Diagnostics buffer" command from the "Diagnostics" menu.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 17
Quick start
3.1 Using the display of the CPU
Result
The diagnostics events are displayed in the diagnostics buffer in the sequence in which they
occur.
Figure 3-2 Display of the diagnostics buffer in the display of the SIMATIC S7-1500 CPU
Note
Automatic updating of diagnostics information
You set automatic updating of the diagnostics information under: "Display" >
"DiagnosticRefresh".
Additional information
You can find information about the configuration of alarms in the section Configuring alarms
for system diagnostics (Page 24).
Diagnostics
18 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Quick start
3.2 Using STEP 7
Requirements
● A project has been created.
● The project has been downloaded to the CPU.
● An error has occurred.
● The programming device must be able to establish a connection to the CPU via an
interface.
Figure 3-3 Device selection for online connection in the portal view
5. Activate the "Go online" option button for the device that you want to use to establish an
online connection.
6. Click on the "Go online" button.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 19
Quick start
3.2 Using STEP 7
Diagnostics
20 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Quick start
3.2 Using STEP 7
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 21
Quick start
3.2 Using STEP 7
10.Double-click the device which displays an alarm message to access the faulty module
directly. This is the CPU in the example.
The device view of the CPU is opened in the work area. In this view you can see directly
in which module the error has occurred.
11.Open the "Diagnostics" tab and the subordinate "Device information" tab in the Inspector
window for a more detailed error description.
Diagnostics
22 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Quick start
3.2 Using STEP 7
Result
The link in the "Details" table column takes you to the online and diagnostics view of the
device and to the diagnostics buffer there, for example. This includes more information on all
diagnostics events in the order in which they occurred.
Note
Symbols and their meaning
You can find a legend with the meaning of each symbol in Explanation of diagnostics
symbols (Page 30) and in the online help for STEP 7.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 23
Setting and determining system diagnostics 4
Introduction
System diagnostics is generally available for the devices of the SIMATIC series.
In the properties of each individual CPU, you can specify if you want to receive alarms for
system diagnostics on your display device. Alarms are provided on the display of the
SIMATIC S7-1500 CPU, the CPU Web server and the HMI device. Alarms are enabled by
default. If you do not want to receive alarms for system diagnostics on your display devices,
you can disable the sending of alarms.
Requirements
● STEP 7 is open.
● A project is open.
Diagnostics
24 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.1 Configuring alarms for system diagnostics
Procedure
To make alarm settings for system diagnostics of the project in STEP 7, follow these steps:
1. Open the "Common data" folder in the project tree.
2. Double-click the "System diagnostics settings" entry.
You now have access to the alarm settings. System diagnostics is enabled by default.
System diagnostics cannot be disabled for the use of a CPU from the SIMATIC S7-1500
product series.
3. In the settings, specify the alarm category that is to be displayed and if it needs to be
acknowledged.
The check boxes in the "Activation" column are enabled by default. When you disable all
check boxes, the status of the HMI system diagnostics view is still updated with the "Info
Report" functionality.
Result
You have configured the alarms for system diagnostics of the project in STEP 7.
The settings are saved with the project and become effective after the compiling and
downloading of the hardware configuration to the involved components.
Maintenance events (maintenance demanded, maintenance required) are entered in the
alarm buffer of the CPU just like any other event.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 25
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Example
This section includes a diagnostics example to show how system diagnostics is established
with the help of different display options. The example includes a CPU from the SIMATIC
S7-1500 product series that is connected to an ET 200S distributed I/O system and an HMI
Comfort Panel via PROFINET.
The following sections include figures that illustrate how diagnostics information is displayed
with the help of different display options.
● Using the LEDs on the hardware (Page 27)
● Local error analysis via the display of the CPU (Page 28)
● Using STEP 7 as of V12 (Page 30)
● Remote diagnostics using the Web server (Page 49)
● Stationary system diagnostics using the HMI diagnostics view (Page 59)
Diagnostics
26 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
4.2.1.1 LEDs
Overview
All hardware components, such as CPUs, interface modules and modules, provide
information about their operating mode as well as internal and external errors through their
LEDs. Diagnostics by means of LEDs is an initial tool for error localization.
The graphics below include examples for the arrangement of LEDs on some modules.
Table 4- 1 LED displays on the modules
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 27
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Additional information
The meaning of the individual LED displays, their different combinations and the remedial
measures resulting from them in case of errors are device-specific. The explanation can be
found in the manuals of the modules.
Introduction
Each CPU in the S7-1500 automation system has a front cover with a display and operating
keys. You can display status information in various menus on the display of the CPU. You
use the operating keys to navigate through the menus.
Diagnostics
28 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Display options
The display of the SIMATIC S7-1500 CPU shows the following diagnostics information:
● CPU operating mode
"Diagnostics" menu
● Active diagnostic alarms
● Information entered in the diagnostics buffer
● Error and alarm texts (system diagnostics alarms)
● Watch tables
● Information on the cycle times of the user program
● Utilization of the CPU memory
"Modules" menu
● Information on modules and the network
● Detailed device view with diagnostics symbols
● Order number, CPU version and central I/O modules
● Module status for central and distributed modules
● Information about the currently installed firmware
Additional information
For additional information on the topic "Functions and operation of the display of the
SIMATIC S7-1500 CPU", see the documentation for the S7-1500 automation system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792).
You can find detailed information on the individual options, a training course and a simulation
of the available menu commands of the display for the CPU in the SIMATIC S7-1500 Display
Simulator (http://www.automation.siemens.com/salesmaterial-as/interactive-manuals/getting-
started_simatic-s7-1500/disp_tool/start_en.html).
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 29
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Symbol Meaning
The connection with a CPU is being established.
The configured CPU and the CPU actually present are of incompatible types.
Example: An existing CPU 315-2 DP is incompatible with a configured CPU 1516-
3 PN/DP.
On establishment of the online connection to a protected CPU, the password dialog was
terminated without specification of the correct password.
No fault
Maintenance required
Maintenance demanded
Error
The module or the device cannot be reached from the CPU (valid for modules and de-
vices below a CPU).
Diagnostics data is not available because the current online configuration data differ from
the offline configuration data.
The configured module or device and the module or device actually present are incom-
patible (valid for modules or devices under a CPU).
The configured module does not support display of the diagnostics status (valid for mod-
ules under a CPU).
The connection is established, but the module status has not yet been determined or is
unknown.
Hardware error in lower-level component: A hardware fault has occurred in at least one
lower-level hardware component (occurs as a separate symbol only in the project tree).
Diagnostics
30 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Symbol Meaning
Hardware error in lower-level component: The online and offline versions differ (only in
the project tree) in at least one lower-level hardware component.
Software error in lower-level component: The online and offline versions differ (only in
the project tree) in at least one lower-level software component.
Online and offline versions of the object are different
STOP
STARTUP
DEFECTIVE
The configured module does not support display of the operating mode.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 31
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Event table
The following information is displayed in the table for each diagnostics event:
● Sequential number of the entry
The first entry contains the latest event.
● Date and time of the diagnostics event
If no date and time are shown, the module has no integrated clock.
● Short designation of the event and, if applicable, the reaction of the CPU
● Symbol for information on incoming/outgoing status
The following table shows the possible symbols and their meaning.
Symbol Meaning
Incoming event
Outgoing event
Additional information
For additional information on the individual symbols, please refer to the online help for
STEP 7.
Accessible devices
Accessible devices are all devices that are connected to a PG/PC either directly by an
interface or by means of a subnet and that are switched on. These devices can display
diagnostic information even without an offline project.
Requirements
● STEP 7 is open.
● The portal view or project view is open.
Diagnostics
32 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Procedure
To display diagnostic information for specific devices even without an offline project, follow
these steps:
1. Establish a connection to the respective CPU.
2. Select the command "Accessible devices" from the "Online" menu.
The "Accessible devices" dialog opens.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 33
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Result
The device is displayed in the project tree. You open the diagnostic information in the work
area with a double-click on "Online & Diagnostics".
Information is available on the diagnostic status, cycle times, memory usage and the
diagnostics buffer.
Requirements
● STEP 7 is open.
● A project is open.
● The project view is open.
Diagnostics
34 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Procedure
To get an overview of the current state of your automation system, follow these steps:
1. Open the "Network view" in the working area.
2. Select the CPU.
3. Click the "Go online" button in the toolbar.
The "Go online" dialog opens.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 35
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Result
The connected devices are now displayed with diagnostic information in the network view in
the working area. Here you get an overview of the current state of your automation device.
You get to the "Device view" with a double-click on the device. The diagnostic information for
the individual modules is displayed in this view.
Note
Symbols and their meaning
You will find a legend with the meaning of each symbol in Explanation of diagnostics
symbols (Page 30) and in the online help for STEP 7.
Diagnostics
36 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Online mode
In online mode there is an online connection between your PG/PC and one or several
devices. Depending on the properties of a device, you are offered specific diagnostics
options and certain functions in online mode.
● Diagnostics
– General module information
– Diagnostics status
– Cycle time
– Memory
– Diagnostics buffer
– Display
– Interface information (e.g. IP parameter, port information)
● Functions
– Assign IP address
– Set time and date of the CPU
– Firmware update (e.g. for PLC, display)
– Assign device name
– Reset to factory settings
– Format memory card
– Save service data
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 37
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
To establish an online connection at least one PG/PC interface must be installed that is
physically connected with a device, for example, with an Ethernet cable. The current online
status of a device is indicated by a symbol to the right of the device in the project tree.
Requirements
● STEP 7 is open.
● A project is open.
● The project view is open.
Diagnostics
38 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Procedure
To display an overview of the faulty devices, follow these steps:
1. Select the affected device folder in the project tree.
2. Select the shortcut menu command "Online & Diagnostics".
The online and diagnostics view of the module to be diagnosed is started.
Result
You can find detailed diagnostics information on each device in the Inspector window, in the
"Diagnostics" section of the area navigation on the "Properties" tab.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 39
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Note
Symbols and their meaning
You can find a legend with the meaning of each symbol in Explanation of diagnostics
symbols (Page 30) and in the online help for STEP 7.
Note
Communication and access errors
Errors that occur in the user program (e.g., communication errors, access errors) are not
reported in the "Diagnostics" tab of the device information. You must read out the
diagnostics buffer of the CPU in the online and diagnostics view to get this information.
The link in the "Details" column opens the diagnostics buffer.
Diagnostics
40 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
If a module has been selected (network view), the tab contains the following group:
● Connection resources
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 41
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
5. Alarms are now displayed in the alarm display. "Archive view" is enabled by default.
6. To display the latest alarms, click the "Active alarms" icon .
Diagnostics
42 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Definition
Each CPU and some other modules have their own diagnostics buffer, in which detailed
information on all diagnostic events is entered in the order in which they occurred.
The CPU diagnostics buffer can be displayed on all display media (STEP 7, SIMATIC HMI
devices, SIMATIC S7-1500 Web server and display of the CPU).
Diagnostic events
The entries available in the diagnostics buffer include:
● Internal and external errors on a module
● System errors in the CPU
● Operating mode transitions (e.g., from RUN to STOP)
● Errors in the user program
● Removal/insertion of modules
● Security events
The contents of the diagnostics buffer are stored in the retentive memory in case of a
memory reset of the CPU. Errors or events can be evaluated even after a longer period of
time thanks to the diagnostics buffer to determine the cause of a STOP or to trace the
occurrence of a single diagnostic event and to be able to assign it.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 43
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Procedure
To display the diagnostics buffer of a CPU in STEP 7, follow these steps:
1. Select the respective CPU.
2. Select the shortcut menu command "Online & Diagnostics".
The "Online access" view is opened in the work area.
Diagnostics
44 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
4. Click .
5. Select the area "Diagnostics buffer".
Note
Filtering events
You can filter the entries in the diagnostics buffer in the settings of the "Diagnostics
buffer" area to only display specific types of events. This means that specific events, such
as "CPU and configuration-internal events" or "Connection diagnostics events", can be
displayed separately.
Security events
The following security events (event types) result in an entry in the diagnostics buffer.
● Going online with the correct or incorrect password
● Manipulated communications data detected
● Manipulated data detected on memory card
● Manipulated firmware update file detected
● Changed protection level (access protection) downloaded to the CPU
● Password legitimization restricted or enabled (by instruction or CPU display)
● Online access denied due to the possible number of simultaneous access attempts being
exceeded
● Timeout when an existing online connection is inactive
● Logging on to the Web server with the correct or incorrect password
● Creating a backup of the CPU
● Restoring the CPU configuration (Restore)
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 45
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
To prevent the diagnostics buffer being "swamped" by large numbers of identical security
events, you can set parameters so that these events are entered in the diagnostics buffer as
a group alarm. For every interval (monitoring time), the CPU then only generates one group
alarm per event type.
Diagnostics
46 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
The "Online tools" task card provides an overview of the CPU state, the cycle time and the
memory usage.
● The "CPU operator panel" pane displays the current state of some LEDs and the mode
selector of a CPU.
● The "Cycle time" pane displays the cycle time diagram and below it the measured cycle
times as absolute values.
● The "Memory" pane contains the current memory usage of the associated CPU. The free
memory is shown both as a bar graph and as a numerical value (percentage).
The display for "Load memory" contains, in addition to the online project data (program
code, data blocks, hardware configuration etc.), all other data that may be on the
SIMATIC memory card, such as recipes, data logs, HMI backups or non-SIMATIC files
that have been copied to the memory card via the Web server of the CPU or offline in
Explorer (for example, PDF files).
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 47
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Requirements
● STEP 7 is open.
● A project is open.
● The project view is open.
● A design with I/O modules has been configured.
Procedure
To make settings for system diagnostics of I/O modules in STEP 7, follow these steps:
1. Select the respective I/O module in the device view.
2. Open the "Properties" tab in the Inspector window.
3. Select the area "Inputs", for example.
You have access to the settings for system diagnostics of the I/O module. If you select
"Wire break", for example, a possible wire break for the channel is signaled during
operation.
Diagnostics
48 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Additional information
The documentation for the respective module includes additional information on parameter
assignment of I/O modules.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 49
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
The following diagnostics options are available with the integrated Web server:
● Start page with general CPU information
● Information on diagnostics
● Contents of the diagnostics buffer
● Module information
● Alarms
● Information about communication
● PROFINET topology
● Motion Control diagnostics
● Trace
Requirements
● You have opened STEP 7.
● You have added a CPU to the project.
● You have opened the project view.
Procedure
1. Open the network view.
2. Select the CPU.
3. Open the "Properties" tab in the Inspector window.
4. Select the entry "Web server" in the "General" area navigation.
Diagnostics
50 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
NOTICE
Utilizing the full functionality of the Web server
A valid CA-signed Web server certificate in the CPU is a requirement for:
• User management with password-protected users
• The use of safety-related functions (online backup and restore of the CPU
configuration, saving and downloading diagnostic information in csv files)
To use the full functionality of the Web server, we recommend that you create a CA-
signed server certificate and assign it to the CPU.
To create a CA-signed Web server certificate, you must enable the Certificate Manager
in the global security settings of STEP 7 and assign a CA-signed server certificate to the
Web server in the properties of the CPU.
You can find additional information on handling Web server certificates in the
"Configuring the Web server" section of the Web server function manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560).
Detailed information on Certification Authority (CA) certificates, device certificates (End
Entity certificate), "Public Key Infrastructure" (PKI) and certificate management can be
found in the Communication function manual
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59192925) and in the online help
for STEP 7, keyword "Secure communication".
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 51
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Note
Managing access rights
In STEP 7, you can create users, define access rights and assign passwords under "Web
server > User management". Users only have access to the options that are permanently
linked to the access rights.
You can find additional information on managing access rights in the "Configuring the
Web server" section of the Web server function manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560).
Diagnostics
52 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
"Diagnostics" option
The "Diagnostics" web page provides more information about the tabs:
● Identification
This tab contains the characteristics of the CPU (serial number, article number, hardware
and firmware version, etc.).
● Program protection
This tab provides information on whether the PLC program contains know-how protection
or copy protection.
● Memory
This tab contains current values on the memory currently in use.
● Runtime information
Current information on program/communication load and cycle time can be found in this
tab.
● F-runtime groups (only with an F CPU)
The safety program of an F-CPU consists of one or two F-runtime groups. You can find
their cycle time (F-monitoring time) and runtime in this tab.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 53
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Diagnostics
54 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 55
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Diagnostics
56 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 57
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Additional information
Additional information on the topic is available in the Web server function manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560).
You can find additional information on the trace function in the Using the trace and logic
analyzer function (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/64897128) function
manual.
Diagnostics
58 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Note
Compatibility with Basic Panels
Only the "System diagnostics view" object is available with Basic Panels.
Basic Panels do not support the "System diagnostics window" object or the graphic symbol
"System diagnostics indicator".
Introduction
You add a system diagnostics view or a system diagnostics window to your project to get an
overview of all devices available in your plant.
The system diagnostics window behaves like the system diagnostics view but is only
available in the global screen.
Requirements
● At least one CPU has been set up in the project.
● An HMI device (e.g., Comfort Panel) has been set up in the project.
● CPU and the HMI device are connected with each other by an HMI connection.
● You have created a screen (for the system diagnostics view).
● The global screen is open (for the system diagnostics window).
● The Inspector window is open.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 59
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Procedure
Proceed as follows to configure the system diagnostics:
1. Double-click the "System diagnostics view" object in the "Tools" task card. The object is
added to the screen.
Diagnostics
60 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Result
The system diagnostics view has been added to the screen. The diagnostics status of the
entire plant is displayed in the system diagnostics view in WinCC Runtime.
The system diagnostics window has been added to the global screen. If there is an error
message in the plant, the system diagnostics window responds and displays the affected
device.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 61
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Introduction
There are three different views available in the system diagnostics view and the system
diagnostics window.
● Device view
● Details view
● Matrix view (for master/IO systems only, PROFIBUS, PROFINET)
Device view
The device view shows all the available devices of a layer in a table. Double-clicking on a
device opens either the lower-level devices or the detail view. Symbols in the first column
provide information about the current state of the device.
Diagnostics
62 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Details view
The detail view gives detailed information about the selected device and any pending errors.
Check whether the data is correct in the detail view.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 63
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Matrix view
The matrix view is only available for distributed I/O systems. The matrix view shows the
status of the devices of the PROFIBUS/PROFINET subnet.
● In PROFIBUS, the numbers assigned by PROFIBUS are used for identification (DP
station number).
● In PROFINET, the IO devices are numbered consecutively from 1.
Navigation buttons
Button Function
Opens the lower-level devices or the detail view if there are no lower-
level devices.
Diagnostics
64 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Introduction
The system diagnostics indicator is a predefined graphic symbol of the library which alerts
you to errors in your plant.
The library object shows two different states:
● No error
● Error
Requirements
● An HMI device (e.g., Comfort Panel) has been set up in the project.
● The "Libraries" task card is opened.
● The global library "Buttons and Switches > DiagnosticsButtons" is open.
● A screen is open.
● The system diagnostics window has been set up in the global screen.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 65
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Procedure
1. Select the "DiagnosticsIndicator" object in the library.
2. Drag-and-drop the library object to the position in the work area where you want to insert
the object.
The library object is added.
Diagnostics
66 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Result
The system diagnostics indicator has been added to the project and connected with the
system diagnostics window.
The system diagnostics indicator changes its appearance if an error message is output in
WinCC Runtime. The system diagnostics window opens when you click on the system
diagnostics indicator. The system diagnostics window shows the detail view of the affected
device.
Introduction
Instead of using the object "DiagnosticsIndicator" from the library, you can, for example,
configure a button in "Graphic" mode to indicate errors in your plant.
Requirements
● At least one CPU has been created.
● An HMI device (e.g., Comfort Panel) has been set up in the project.
● The "Tools" task card is open.
● A bit graphics list has been created with two different graphics for the states.
● A screen is open.
● You have created a system diagnostics view.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 67
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Procedure
Follow these steps to configure a button as system diagnostics indicator:
1. Double-click the "Button" object in the "Tools" task card. A button is added to the screen.
2. Enable the "Properties" tab in the Inspector window and the "Graphic" mode in the
"General" area.
3. Select the bit graphics list as graphics list.
4. Select the "Properties" tab in the Inspector window and select the tag
@DiagnosticsIndicatorTag under "Tag" in the "General" area.
5. To assign a function to the button, select the "Events" tab in the Inspector window.
6. Select the "Click" event.
7. Click on "Add function" in the table.
8. Select "EnableSystemDiagnosticsView".
9. Select the system diagnostics view.
Diagnostics
68 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Setting and determining system diagnostics
4.2 Options for displaying system diagnostics
Result
You have configured an interface that reacts to error events from the CPU. The button
changes when an error event occurs in Runtime.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 69
System diagnostics by means of the user program 5
5.1 Options of system diagnostics in the user program
Introduction
You can configure responses to diagnostics alarms in the user program. You can, for
example, specify that your plant is stopped in case of specific diagnostics alarms.
Instructions
A vendor-independent structure of data records with diagnostics information applies. The
following instructions are available for determining the system diagnostics of a device:
Table 5- 1 Instructions for determining the system diagnostics
Instruction Description
RDREC • Reads data records of a component (module or submodule) of a DP slave/IO device that may
contain error information
• Works asynchronously, which means processing takes place across several calls
RALRM • Reads the start information of the OB when calling the diagnostics interrupt OB (OB 82)
• Provides information on cause and location of error
DPNRM_DG • Reads the current diagnostics data of a DP slave (DP standard diagnostics)
GEN_DIAG • Generates diagnostics information
• To generate diagnostics information, the module or submodule is identified with its logical address
Gen_UsrMsg • Generates an alarm that is entered in the diagnostics buffer
GET_DIAG • Provides diagnostics information
• To provide diagnostics information, the module or submodule is selected
GET_NAME • Reads the name of an IO device
T_DIAG • Provides diagnostics and status information on a connection
• Works asynchronously, which means processing takes place across several calls
RD_SINFO • Reads the start information of the OB called last that has not been processed completely and the
startup OB started last
• Provides general error information
LED • Reads the status of the module LED
Get_IM_Data • Reads the Information&Maintenance data of the CPU
• Works asynchronously, which means processing takes place across several calls
Transfer_IM_Data • Transmits the Information&Maintenance data of the CPU
DeviceStates • Outputs the state of all devices of an IO system
ModuleStates • Outputs the state of all modules of a device
Diagnostics
70 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
System diagnostics by means of the user program
5.2 System diagnostics using process image inputs
Additional information
Online help
In the online help for STEP 7, you can find:
● Additional information on instructions for system diagnostics
● Information about further options for evaluating diagnostic information in the user program
(e.g. with the "RDREC", "RALRM", "GET_DIAG" instructions)
● Information on SIMATIC ProDiag. This functionality enables targeted and fast machine
and plant diagnostics for SIMATIC S7-1500 and SIMATIC HMI:
– Standardized diagnostics concept for different SIMATIC components
– No additional configuration work for diagnostics functionality
– Reduces the load on PLC memory and program run time
You can find details in the online help under "Supervising machinery and plants with
ProDiag".
Manuals
You can find additional information about evaluating diagnostic information in the user
program in the following manuals:
● PROFINET with STEP 7 V14
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49948856) function manual
● From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/19289930) programming manual
● Manual for the respective module
Application examples
You can find detailed application examples with further documentation and example projects
on the Service&Support Website:
● Diagnostics in the user program with S7-1500
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/98210758)
● System diagnostics with S7-1500 and TIA Portal
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/68011497)
FAQ
For more information about how to realize channel diagnostics in the user program of the
SIMATIC S7-1500, refer to the FAQ with entry ID 109480387 on the Service&Support
Website (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109480387).
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 71
System diagnostics by means of the user program
5.2 System diagnostics using process image inputs
Introduction
In addition to event-driven system diagnostics, the input and output modules of the SIMATIC
series provide diagnostics information using the process image input.
The system diagnostics described in the preceding sections is made available
asynchronously to the program processing. To ensure the correct processing of the input
and output data in the case of faults while reading the input and output data, some modules
offer the so-called value status (QI = Quality Information) for evaluation.
Diagnostics
72 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
System diagnostics by means of the user program
5.2 System diagnostics using process image inputs
Table 5- 2 Example for evaluation of the user datum in case of a wire break for a digital input module
Example - Evaluation of the value status for the input channel of an analog input module
The example below shows the basic evaluation of the value status for the input channel of
an analog input module in the user program. The diameter of a cylinder is measured by
means of a channel and its circumference is calculated.
● If the value status indicates the channel is error-free, the circumference is to be
calculated.
● If the value status indicates the channel is defective, the value "0" is to be output as
substitute value for the circumference.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 73
System diagnostics by means of the user program
5.2 System diagnostics using process image inputs
The figure below shows the evaluation of the value status in the user program.
Figure 5-2 Example - Evaluation of the value status in the user program
Additional information
Depending on the I/O module, the value status reserves different addresses in the process
image input. The manual for the module used includes specific information on the
assignment and arrangement.
Diagnostics
74 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Alarms 6
Introduction
Alarms allow you to display events from processing in the automation system and to quickly
detect errors, to precisely localize them and to remove them. Downtimes are significantly
reduced in a plant.
Before alarms can be output, they need to be configured.
You can create, edit and compile event-dependent alarms along with their alarm texts and
alarm attributes and display them on display devices.
In STEP 7, you create program alarms in the user program with the "Program_Alarm"
instruction. You edit the attributes and alarm texts in the alarm editor in STEP 7.
You can output the alarm status with the "Get_AlarmState" instruction.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 75
Alarms
6.1 Creating alarms with the "Program_Alarm" instruction
"Program_Alarm" instruction
You create a program alarm in STEP 7 with the "Program_Alarm" instruction.
The figure below shows the "Program_Alarm" instruction with the most important input tags.
① The "Program_Alarm" instruction monitors the signal at the SIG block input and generates a
program alarm in case of a signal change at the SIG parameter. The instruction generates an
incoming alarm when the signal changes from 0 to 1 and an outgoing program alarm if the
signal changes from 1 to 0. The program alarm is triggered synchronously to program execu-
tion.
② The time stamp is automatically created when the alarm event occurs in the automation system
and is passed along with the alarm.
③ You can append up to ten associated values to the program alarm at the parameters SD_i
(1 ≤ i ≤10). The associated values are acquired at the time of the signal change at the SIG
parameter and assigned to the program alarm.
Associated values are used to display dynamic contents in alarms.
Example: The temperature in the tank <associated value 1> is <associated value 2> °C.
You can find more information on associated values in the STEP 7 online help.
Diagnostics
76 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Alarms
6.1 Creating alarms with the "Program_Alarm" instruction
Note
The "Program_Alarm" instruction can only be called in a function block.
A program alarm can be up to 256 bytes long in total (with associated values and texts from
the text list).
The associated values can be a maximum of 512 bytes in length. Text lists are not affected
by this.
The CPUs of the SIMATIC S7-1500 product series have the following memory for text lists:
• CPU 1510-x to CPU 1513-x: 2.25 MB
• CPU 1515-x to CPU 1516-x: 4.5 MB
• CPU 1517-x to CPU 1518-x: 6.75 MB
The number of configurable program alarms depends on the CPU used. With a
CPU 1515-2 PN, for example, a maximum of 10,000 program alarms are possible. You can
find this information in the device manual for the respective CPU under "Number of
configurable alarms".
The number of simultaneously active "Program_Alarms" depends on the CPU used. With a
1515-2 PN CPU, for example, a maximum of 600 program alarms are possible. You can find
this information in the device manual for the respective CPU under "Number of reserved user
interrupts".
Sometimes, it is not possible for all program alarms that are active at the same time to be
output within one cycle. Query the status of each "Program_Alarm" and activate the
instruction again, if necessary. The cycle time is increased for a short time by simultaneously
activating/sending multiple "Program_Alarms".
A maximum of 40,000 program alarms should be configured in a STEP 7 project on a 64-bit
operating system.
Additional information
You can find more information on creating program alarms in the STEP 7 online help under
"Creating and editing alarms".
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 77
Alarms
6.2 Editing alarms in the alarm editor
Introduction
You can edit the created alarms in STEP 7 either in the program editor or in the alarm editor.
You can find additional information on editing alarms in the program editor in the STEP 7
online help under "Creating and editing alarms".
Diagnostics
78 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Alarms
6.2 Editing alarms in the alarm editor
You can enter or modify the necessary parameters, texts and attributes in the table or in the
Inspector window.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 79
Alarms
6.2 Editing alarms in the alarm editor
Multilingual alarms
You can have program alarms displayed in multiple languages by assigning different project
languages to the interface languages of the display devices.
Note
The project languages you want to assign must be activated and the corresponding texts
(translations) must be available in the project. The project language selection can be found
in the project tree under "Languages & Resources".
To create the texts of the program alarm as multilingual, follow these steps:
1. In the Inspector window of the alarm editor, open the "Properties" tab and the lower-level
"Texts" tab.
2. Enter the text in the desired project language.
3. Open the "Properties" tab in the Inspector window of the CPU and select the "Display"
command in the "General" area navigation. Under "Multilingual", assign one of the
activated project languages to each interface language of the display devices. Overall,
you can assign up to three different project languages to the user interface languages. All
assigned project languages are loaded into the CPU.
Additional information
You can find additional information on texts and attributes in the STEP 7 online help under
"Texts and attributes".
You can find more information on text lists in the STEP 7 online help under "Text lists for
alarms".
Diagnostics
80 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Alarms
6.3 Display of program alarms
Multilingual alarms
You can have program alarms displayed in multiple languages by assigning different project
languages to the interface languages. See section Editing alarms in the alarm editor
(Page 78).
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 81
Alarms
6.4 Output of the alarm state with the "Get_AlarmState" instruction
"Get_AlarmState" instruction
The "Get_AlarmState" instruction outputs the alarm state of a program alarm. The output of
the alarm state always refers to a program alarm that was created using the
"Program_Alarm" instruction.
The program alarm is selected with the "Alarm" input parameter. Specify the instance DB of
the "Program_Alarm" instruction at the "Alarm" parameter.
Additional information
You can find additional information on evaluation of the "Get_AlarmState" instruction in the
STEP 7 online help.
Diagnostics
82 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Alarms
6.5 Example program for program alarms
6.5.1 Task
Introduction
This section describes the basic configuration of program alarms with the "Program_Alarm"
instruction based on two examples. The two examples solve the same problem but use a
different approach. Example 1 does not use associated values. In example 2, an associated
value is assigned to the program alarm to reference a text list.
Introduction
In this example, you create a program alarm for the maximum and the minimum fill level.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 83
Alarms
6.5 Example program for program alarms
Steps
The following steps are necessary for this example:
1. Define tags for signal acquisition
2. Create function block
3. Create program alarms
4. Call function block
5. Edit alarm text
The figure below shows the standard tag table with the defined tags "max" and "min".
Diagnostics
84 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Alarms
6.5 Example program for program alarms
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 85
Alarms
6.5 Example program for program alarms
3. Enter "level_max" as the name and confirm the call options by clicking "OK".
Result: The input tags of the "Program_Alarm" instruction are displayed in the instruction
part.
4. Supply the SIG input tag of the "Program_Alarm" instruction with the tags for the
maximum fill level.
#level_max(SIG:="max");
SIG: If a signal change occurs at the SIG input tag, the "Program_Alarm" instruction
generates a program alarm.
5. Insert another call of the "Program_Alarm" instruction.
The "Call options" window opens.
6. Enter "level_min" as the name and confirm the call options by clicking "OK".
Result: The input tags of the "Program_Alarm" instruction are displayed in the instruction
part.
7. Supply the SIG input tag of the "Program_Alarm" instruction with the tags for the
minimum fill level.
#level_min(SIG:="min");
Diagnostics
86 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Alarms
6.5 Example program for program alarms
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 87
Alarms
6.5 Example program for program alarms
Additional information
You can learn how to create multilingual texts under "Multilingual alarms" in the section
Editing alarms in the alarm editor (Page 78).
Introduction
In this example, you create a shared program alarm for the maximum and the minimum fill
level. The program alarm is given an associated value. The program alarm uses the
associated value to access a text list entry and outputs a separate alarm text for the
minimum and the maximum fill level.
Diagnostics
88 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Alarms
6.5 Example program for program alarms
Steps
The following steps are necessary for this example:
1. Define tags for signal acquisition
2. Create function block
3. Create program alarm
4. Call function block
5. Create a text list
6. Edit alarm text
The figure below shows the standard tag table with the defined tags "max" and "min".
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 89
Alarms
6.5 Example program for program alarms
Diagnostics
90 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Alarms
6.5 Example program for program alarms
3. Enter "level_alarm" as the name and confirm the call options by clicking "OK".
Result: The input tags of the "Program_Alarm" instruction are displayed in the instruction
part.
4. Supply the SIG input tag of the "Program_Alarm" instruction with the XOR logic operation
of the tags for minimum and maximum fill level and the input tag SD_1 with the tag for the
maximum fill level.
#level_alarm(SIG:="min"XOR"max",SD_1:="max");
SIG: If a signal change occurs at the SIG input tag, the "Program_Alarm" instruction
generates a program alarm.
SD_1: The associated value is acquired at the time of the signal change at the input tag
and assigned to the program alarm.
Result: You have created a type alarm.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 91
Alarms
6.5 Example program for program alarms
Diagnostics
92 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Alarms
6.5 Example program for program alarms
Result: You have created the text list for the alarm text.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 93
Alarms
6.5 Example program for program alarms
5. Select the text list "level_textlist" and the tag "max". Confirm your selection by clicking
"OK".
Result: You have created the alarm text for the type alarms.
If the tag "max" (associated value 1) is 0, the alarm text "level too low" is output.
If the tag "max" (associated value 1) is 1, the alarm text "level too high" is output.
Additional information
You can learn how to create multilingual texts under "Multilingual alarms" in the section
Editing alarms in the alarm editor (Page 78).
Diagnostics
94 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Alarms
6.5 Example program for program alarms
Note
Displaying alarms in STEP 7
To display alarms in STEP 7, enable the option "Receive alarms" in the shortcut menu of the
CPU.
The figure below shows the display of the alarm in STEP 7 for both examples.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 95
Glossary
Alarm
An message sent to the operator due to events or states of the system.
Button (WinCC)
Object in WinCC that points out faults in the plant
Channel fault
Channel-related error of an individual channel - an I/O with inputs, for example, wire break or
short circuit
Device
Modules with a network connection are referred to as device. Devices are installed on racks
where they can be interconnected with other modules.
Diagnostics buffer
A buffered memory area in the CPU; it stores diagnostics events in the order of their
occurrence
HMI device
Human Machine Interface, device for visualization and control of automation processes.
Diagnostics
96 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Glossary
I/O module
Device of the distributed I/O that is used as interface between the controller and the process.
Industrial Ethernet
Guideline for setting up Ethernet in an industrial environment. The main difference to the
standard Ethernet is the mechanical current carrying capacity and interference immunity of
the individual components.
Memory reset
Procedure to set the memories of the CPU to a defined initial state.
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller: Component of the CNC by which the machine manufacturer
coordinates the interaction between the NC requirements (part program), the inputs of the
machine operator and the current machine state.
PROFIBUS
Standard for fieldbus communication in automation technology.
PROFINET
Open component-based industrial communication system based on Ethernet for distributed
automation systems. Communication technology promoted by the PROFIBUS Users
Organization.
Subnet
Part of a network whose parameters must be synchronized with the devices (e.g., with
PROFINET). It includes the bus components and all connected stations. Subnets can be
linked by means of gateways, for example, to form a network.
System diagnostics
In the SIMATIC environment, the term "system diagnostics" refers to diagnostics of devices
and modules. System diagnostics is used, for example, to monitor the states of the following
components in the system: Power supply, device, I/O.
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 97
Glossary
Topology
Structure of a network. Common structures include:
● Linear bus topology
● Ring topology
● Star topology
● Tree topology
User program
In SIMATIC, a distinction is made between user programs and the firmware of the CPU.
The user program contains all instructions, declarations and data by which a plant or process
can be controlled. It is assigned to a programmable module (for example, CPU, FM) and can
be structured in smaller units.
Firmware: see glossary entry "Firmware of the CPU"
Value status
The value status describes a specific signal state. The value status is constantly updated
and cyclically transmitted by the field device as quality statement together with the measured
value.
Web server
Software/ communication service for data exchange using Ethernet. The web server
provides the documents by means of standardized transmission protocols (HTTP, HTTPS) to
a web browser. Documents can be static or dynamic upon request by the web browser
composed from different sources by the web server.
WinCC
Windows Control Center: a PC-based process visualization system
WinCC Runtime
Component of the basic software WinCC
Diagnostics
98 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
Index
" F
"Diagnostics" tab FAQs
Alarm display, 40 Download certificate, 52
Connection information, 40 Implementing channel diagnostics in the user
Device information, 40 program, 71
Inspector window, 40
H
A HMI
Accessible devices System diagnostics view, 59
Diagnostics status, 32 System diagnostics window, 59
Offline project, 32 HMI diagnostics view
Alarm display Comfort Panels, 59
Active alarms, 42 Details view, 62
Archive view, 42 Device view, 62
Alarms Matrix view, 62
Editing in the alarm editor, 78 Views, 62
Multilingual, 80 WinCC Advanced RT, 59
Application examples
Diagnostics in the user program with S7-1500, 71
System diagnostics with S7-1500 and TIA Portal, 71 I
I/O module
Inputs, 48
D
Settings, 48
Device information
Online status, 40
Operating mode, 40 L
Devices & networks
LED arrangement, 27
Current state, 34
Library
Go online, 34
System diagnostics indicator, 65
Diagnostics buffer
Diagnostic events, 43
Retentive memory, 43
O
Display of the CPU
Display options, 28 Online & diagnostics
Input options, 28 Activities, 37
Status information, 28 Information, 37
dynamize Online access, 37
Object appearance, 67 Online mode, 37
Online tools
CPU operator panel, 46
Cycle time, 46
Memory, 46
Memory usage, 46
Diagnostics
Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD 99
Index
Online view, 46 W
Task card, 46
Web server
Access to, 52
Activating, 50
P
Alarms, 55
Process image inputs, 72 Browser, 49
Quality Information, 72 Certificate, 50
User datum, 72 Configuring, 50
Value status, 72 Diagnostics, 53
Diagnostics buffer, 54
HTTPS, 50
Q Integrated Web server, 49
Module information, 55
Quick start, 17
Motion Control diagnostics, 57
Using display, 17
Topology, 56
Using STEP 7, 19
Trace, 58
Web pages, 49
S
Security events, 45
Setting options, 24
Symbol
For comparison, 31
For hardware diagnostics, 30
For operating mode, 31
For software diagnostics, 31
System diagnostics
Advantages, 16
Alarm settings, 25
Button, 67
Display concept, 16
Properties, 14
System diagnostics indicator
Button as system diagnostics indicator, 67
Inserting, 65
System diagnostics window, 65
System diagnostics view, 59
Configuring, 59
System diagnostics indicator, 65
System diagnostics window, 59
Configuring, 59
Global screen, 59
U
User program
Instructions, 70
Response to diagnostics alarms, 70
Diagnostics
100 Function Manual, 09/2016, A5E03735838-AD
___________________
Preface
___________________
Documentation guide 1
2
___________________
Product overview
SIMATIC
___________________
Communications services 3
S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP,
ET 200AL, ET 200pro 4
___________________
PG communication
Communication
5
___________________
HMI communication
Function Manual
___________________
Open User Communication 6
___________________
S7 communication 7
___________________
Point-to-point link 8
___________________
OPC UA communication 9
___________________
Routing 10
___________________
Connection resources 11
___________________
Connection diagnostics 12
Industrial Ethernet Security
___________________
with CP 1543-1 13
12/2017
A5E03735815-AF
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 3
Preface
What's new in the Communication Function Manual, Edition 12/2017 compared to Edition 09/2016
What's new? What are the customer benefits? Where can I find the infor-
mation?
New contents OPC UA Companion The OPC UA Companion Specification allows for Section Using OPC UA infor-
Specification methods to be specified uniformly and multi- mation models (Page 203)
vendor. Using these specified methods, you can
easily integrate devices from various manufactur-
ers into the plant and the production processes.
Setting up a secure You can set up a secure connection to a mail Section Secure OUC via e-mail
connection to a mail server without additional hardware. (Page 108)
server over the CPU
interface
Secure communica- You can establish secure TCP connections be- Section Secure OUC with
tion over Modbus tween a Modbus TCP client and a Modbus TCP Modbus TCP (Page 107)
TCP server.
What's new in the Communication Function Manual, Edition 09/2016 compared to Edition 12/2014
What's new? What are the customer benefits? Where can I find the infor-
mation?
New contents OPC UA server OPC UA is a uniform standard for data communi- Section OPC UA communica-
cation and is independent of any particular operat- tion (Page 126)
ing system platforms.
OPC UA uses integrated safety mechanisms on
various automation systems, for example with
data exchange, at application level, for the legiti-
mation of the user.
The OPC UA server provides a large amount of
data:
• Values of PLC tags that clients can access
• Data types of these PLC tags
• Information about the OPC UA server itself
and the CPU
In this way, clients can gain an overview of the tag
management and can read and write values.
Secure Open User Secure data exchange with other devices. Section Secure Open User
Communication Communication (Page 93)
Certificate handling You can manage certificates for the following Section Managing certificates
in applications in STEP 7: with STEP 7 (Page 45)
STEP 7
• OPC UA server
• Secure Open User Communication
• Web server of the CPU
Deactivating SNMP You can deactivate SNMP for the CPU. This can Section Disabling SNMP
for the CPU make sense under certain conditions, for example (Page 58)
if the security guidelines in your network do not
permit SNMP.
Communication
4 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Preface
Conventions
STEP 7: We refer to "STEP 7" in this documentation as a synonym for the configuration and
programming software "STEP 7 as of V12 (TIA Portal)".
"S7-1500 CPUs" also refers to the CPU variants S7-1500F, S7-1500T, S7-1500TF,
S7-1500C as well as S7-1500pro CPUs, ET200SP CPUs as well as the SIMATIC S7-1500
SW controller.
This documentation contains pictures of the devices described. The figures may differ
slightly from the device supplied.
You should also pay particular attention to notes such as the one shown below:
Note
A note contains important information on the product, on handling of the product and on the
section of the documentation to which you should pay particular attention.
See also
PRODIS (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal)
Catalog (http://mall.industry.siemens.com)
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 5
Preface
Industry Mall
The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive
solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power
(TIP).
Catalogs for all the products in automation and drives are available on the Internet
(https://mall.industry.siemens.com).
Communication
6 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Documentation guide ............................................................................................................................ 10
2 Product overview .................................................................................................................................. 15
3 Communications services ..................................................................................................................... 20
3.1 Overview of communication options .......................................................................................20
3.2 Communications protocols and port numbers used for Ethernet communication ..................23
3.3 Overview of connection resources ..........................................................................................28
3.4 Setting up a connection ..........................................................................................................29
3.5 Data consistency .....................................................................................................................33
3.6 Secure Communication...........................................................................................................36
3.6.1 Basics of Secure Communication ...........................................................................................36
3.6.2 Confidentiality through encryption ..........................................................................................39
3.6.3 Authenticity and integrity through signatures ..........................................................................41
3.6.4 Managing certificates with STEP 7 .........................................................................................45
3.6.5 Examples for the management of certificates. .......................................................................49
3.6.6 Example: HTTP over TLS .......................................................................................................54
3.7 SNMP ......................................................................................................................................58
3.7.1 Disabling SNMP ......................................................................................................................58
3.7.2 Example: Disabling SNMP for a CPU 1516-3 PN/DP ............................................................59
4 PG communication ................................................................................................................................ 61
5 HMI communication .............................................................................................................................. 64
6 Open User Communication ................................................................................................................... 66
6.1 Overview of Open User Communication ................................................................................66
6.2 Protocols for Open User Communication ...............................................................................67
6.3 Instructions for Open User Communication ............................................................................69
6.4 Open User Communication with addressing via domain names ............................................73
6.5 Setting up Open User Communication via TCP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP and ISO .......................76
6.6 Setting up communication over FDL.......................................................................................82
6.7 Setting up communication with Modbus TCP .........................................................................85
6.8 Setting up communication via e-mail ......................................................................................88
6.9 Setting up communication via FTP .........................................................................................89
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 7
Table of contents
Communication
8 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Table of contents
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 9
Documentation guide 1
The documentation for the SIMATIC S7-1500 automation system, for CPU 1516pro-2 PN
based on SIMATIC S7-1500, and for the distributed I/O systems SIMATIC ET 200MP,
ET 200SP and ET 200AL is divided into three areas.
This division allows you easier access to the specific information you require.
Basic information
System manuals and Getting Started manuals describe in detail the configuration,
installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and
ET 200AL systems; use the corresponding operating instructions for CPU 1516pro-2 PN.
The STEP 7 online help supports you in configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
Communication
10 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Documentation guide
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics such as diagnostics,
communication, Motion Control, Web server, OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742705).
Changes and additions to the manuals are documented in product information sheets.
You will find the product information on the Internet:
● S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815)
● ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864)
● ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/99494757)
Manual Collections
The Manual Collections contain the complete documentation of the systems put together in
one file.
You will find the Manual Collections on the Internet:
● S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384)
● ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942)
● ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965)
"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 11
Documentation guide
Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).
Communication
12 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Documentation guide
PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 13
Documentation guide
SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).
Communication
14 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Product overview 2
CPUs, communications modules and processors, and PC systems of the S7-1500, ,
ET 200MPET 200SPET 200pro and ET 200AL systems provide you with interfaces for
communication via PROFINET, PROFIBUS and point-to-point connections.
Figure 2-1 Interfaces of the CPU 1516-3 PN/DP and CPU 1512SP-1 PN
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 15
Product overview
① PROFIBUS DP interface
Communication
16 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Product overview
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 17
Product overview
Figure 2-4 Example of interface for point-to-point connection at the CM PtP RS422/485 BA
Communication
18 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Product overview
Figure 2-5 PROFINET interfaces IM 155-5 PN ST (ET 200MP), IM 155-6 PN ST (ET 200SP), and
IM 157-1 PN (ET 200AL)
Communications services
The communications services described below use the interfaces and communication
mechanisms provided by the system via CPUs, communication modules and processors.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 19
Communications services 3
3.1 Overview of communication options
Communication
20 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.1 Overview of communication options
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 21
Communications services
3.1 Overview of communication options
Additional information
● Application example: CPU-CPU communication with SIMATIC controllers (compendium)
You can find the application example on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/20982954).
● This FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/102420020) describes
how to configure fetch/write communication via CP1543-1 with S7-1500.
● Additional information about the Fetch/Write services is available in the STEP 7 online
help.
● You can find additional information on the PtP link in the function manual
CM PtP - Configurations for Point-to-Point Connections
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59057093).
● You will find the description of the web server functionality in the function manual Web
server (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560).
● You will find information about the standard protocol SNMP on the Service & Support
pages on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/15166742).
● You will find information about time-of-day synchronization in this FAQ
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86535497).
Communication
22 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.2 Communications protocols and port numbers used for Ethernet communication
Note
Port numbers used
The port numbers used are the standard port numbers used by the S7-1500 CPU. Many
communication protocols and implementations enable you to use other port numbers.
The tables below show the different layers and protocols that are being used.
The following table shows the protocols supported by the S7-1500 CPUs, ET 200SP CPUs
and the CPU 1516pro-2 PN. The S7-1500 software controllers also support the protocols
listed in the following table for the Ethernet interfaces that are assigned to the software
controller.
Table 3- 2 Layers and protocols of the S7-1500 CPUs and software controllers (via PROFINET interface of the CPU)
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 23
Communications services
3.2 Communications protocols and port numbers used for Ethernet communication
Communication
24 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.2 Communications protocols and port numbers used for Ethernet communication
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 25
Communications services
3.2 Communications protocols and port numbers used for Ethernet communication
The following table shows the protocols that are supported by the S7-1500 software
controller via the Ethernet interfaces assigned to Windows.
Table 3- 3 Layers and protocols of the S7-1500 Software Controller (via Ethernet interface on the Windows side)
Communication
26 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.2 Communications protocols and port numbers used for Ethernet communication
The following table shows the protocols that are supported in addition to those listed in the
tables for the S7-1500 communications modules (e.g. CP 1543-1).
Table 3- 4 Layers and protocols of S7-1500 communications modules
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 27
Communications services
3.3 Overview of connection resources
Connection resources
Some communications services require connections. Connections allocate resources on the
CPUs, CPs and CMs involved (for example memory areas in the CPU operating system). In
most cases one resource per CPU/CP/CM is allocated for a connection. In HMI
communication, up to 3 connection resources are required per HMI connection.
The connection resources available depend on the CPU being used, the CPs and CMs and
must not exceed a defined high limit for the automation system.
Additional information
You will find more detailed information on the allocation of connection resources and the
display of connection resources in STEP 7 in the section Connection resources (Page 226).
Communication
28 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.4 Setting up a connection
Automatic connection
STEP 7 sets up a connection automatically (for example PG or HMI connection) if you have
connected the PG/PC interface to an interface of the CPU physically and have made the
interface assignment in STEP 7 in the "Go online" dialog.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 29
Communications services
3.4 Setting up a connection
Communication
30 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.4 Setting up a connection
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 31
Communications services
3.4 Setting up a connection
* Note that for an S7-1500 CPU with firmware version lower than V2.0, the use of PUT/GET commu-
nication must be enabled in the properties of the CPU. You can find more information on this topic
in the STEP 7 online help.
Additional information
You will find further information on the allocation of connection resources and the display of
connection resources in STEP 7 in the section Connection resources (Page 226).
Communication
32 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.5 Data consistency
Definition
Data consistency is important for data transfer and you need to take this into account when
configuring the communication task. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur.
A data area which cannot be modified by concurrent processes is called a consistent data
area. This means that a data area which belongs together and which is larger than the
maximum size of the consistent data area can consist in part of new and of old data at the
same time.
An inconsistency can occur when an instruction for communication is interrupted, for
example by a hardware interrupt OB with higher priority. This interrupts the transfer of the
data area. If the user program in this OB now changes the data that has not yet been
processed by the communication instruction, the transferred data originates from different
times:
The following figure shows a data area that is smaller than the maximum size of the
consistent data area. In this case, when transferring the data area, it is ensured that there is
no interruption by the user program during data access so that the data is not changed.
① The source data area is smaller than the maximum size of the consistent data area (②). The
instruction transfers the data together to the destination data area.
② Maximum size of the consistent data area
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 33
Communications services
3.5 Data consistency
The following figure shows a data area that is larger than the maximum size of the consistent
data area. In this case, the data can be changed during an interruption of the data transfer.
An interruption also occurs if, for example, the data area needs to be transferred in several
parts. If the data is changed during the interruption, the transferred data originates from
different times.
① The source data area is larger than the maximum size of the consistent data area (③). At time
T1, the instruction only transfers as much data from the source data area into the destination
data area as fits in the consistent data area.
② At time T2, the instruction transfers the rest of the source data area to the destination data
area. After the transfer, data from different points in time exist in the destination data area. If
the data in the source data area has changed in the meantime, an inconsistency may result.
③ Maximum size of the consistent data area
Figure 3-4 Transfer of data larger than the maximum consistency area
Example of an inconsistency
The figure below shows an example of changing data during the transfer. The destination
data area contains data from different points in time.
Communication
34 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.5 Data consistency
Note
Measures in the user program
To achieve data consistency, you can copy transferred data to a separate data area (for
example, global data block). While the user program continues to work with the original data,
you can transfer the data saved in the separate data area consistently with the
communication instruction.
For the copying, use uninterruptible instructions such as UMOVE_BLK or UFILL_BLK. These
instructions ensure data consistency up to 16 KB.
Additional information
● You will also find the maximum amount of consistent data in the device manuals of the
communications modules in the Technical Specifications.
● You will find further information on data consistency in the description of the instructions
in the STEP 7 online help.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 35
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Introduction
The attribute "secure" is used for the identification of communication mechanisms that are
based on a Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) (for example RFC 5280 for Internet X.509 Public
Key Infrastructure Certificate and Certificate Revocation List Profile). A Public Key
Infrastructure (PKI) is a system that can issue, distribute and check digital certificates. The
digital certificates issued are used in the PKI to secure computer-based communication. If a
PKI uses asymmetric key cryptography, the messages in a network can be digitally signed
and encrypted.
Components that you have configured in STEP 7 (TIA Portal) for secure communication use
an asymmetric key encryption scheme with a public key (Public Key) and a private key
(Private Key). TLS (Transport Layer Security) is used as the encryption protocol. TLS is the
successor for the SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) protocol.
Communication
36 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 37
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
The figure below shows the TLS protocol in the context of communication layers.
Communication
38 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Symmetric encryption
The central aspect of symmetric encryption is that both communication partners use the
same key for message encryption and decryption, as shown in the figure below. Bob uses
the same key for encryption as Alice uses for decryption. In general, we also say that the two
sides share the secret key with which they encrypt or decrypt a message as a secret.
The process can be compared to a briefcase to which the sender and recipient have the
same key, which both locks and opens the case.
● Advantage: Symmetric encryption algorithms (such as AES, Advanced Encryption
Algorithm) are fast.
● Disadvantages: How can the key be sent to a recipient without getting into the wrong
hands? This is a key distribution problem. If enough messages are intercepted, the key
can also be worked out and must therefore be changed regularly.
If there are a large number of communication partners, there is also a large number of keys
to distribute.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 39
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Asymmetric encryption
Asymmetric encryption works with a pair of keys consisting of one public key and one private
key. Used with a PKI, it is also known as Public Key cryptography or simply PKI
cryptography. A communication partner, Alice in the figure below, has a private key and a
public key. The public key is provided to the public, in other words any potential
communication partner. Anyone with the public key can encrypt messages for Alice. In the
figure below, this is Bob.
Alice's private key, which she must not disclose, is used by Alice to decrypt an encrypted
message addressed to her.
① Alice provides Bob with her public key. No precautionary measures are required to this pur-
pose: Anyone can use the public key for messages to Alice if they are sure that it is actually
Alice's public key.
② Bob encrypts his message with Alice's public key.
③ Alice decrypts the encrypted message from Bob with her private key. As only Alice has the
private key and never discloses it, only she can decrypt the message. With her private key, she
can decrypt any message encrypted with her public key - not only messages from Bob.
The system can be compared to a mailbox into which anyone can put a message, but from
which only the person with the key can remove messages.
● Advantages: A message encrypted with a public key can only be decrypted by the owner
of the private key. As another (private) key is required for decryption, it is also much
harder to work out the decryption key on the basis of large numbers of encrypted
messages. This means that the public key does not have to be kept strictly confidential,
unlike with symmetric keys.
Another advantage is easier distribution of public keys. No specially secured channel is
required in asymmetric cryptography to transfer the public key from the recipient to the
sender encrypting the messages. Less work is thus required in managing the keys than
would be the case in symmetric encryption procedures.
● Disadvantages: Complex algorithm (e.g. RSA, named after the three mathematicians
Rivest, Shamir and Adleman), and therefore poorer performance than with symmetric
encryption.
Communication
40 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Abuse of encryption
You cannot tell what identity is assigned to a public key from the bit string. A fraud could
provide their public key and claim to be someone else. If a third party then uses this key
thinking that they are addressing their required communication partner, confidential
information could end up with the fraud. The fraud then uses their private key to decrypt the
message that was not intended for them, and sensitive information falls into the wrong
hands.
To prevent this type of abuse, the communication partners must be confident that they are
dealing with the right communication partner. This trust is established by using digital
certificates in a PKI.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 41
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Self-signed certificates
Self-signed certificates are certificates whose signature comes from the certificate subject
and not from an independent certificate authority.
Examples:
● You can create and sign a certificate yourself, for example, to encrypt messages to a
communication partner. In the example above, Bob (instead of Twent) could himself sign
his certificate with his private key. Using Bob's public key, Alice can check that the
signature and public key from Bob match. This procedure is sufficient for simple internal
plant communication that is to be encrypted.
● A root certificate is, for example, a self-signed certificate, signed by the certificate
authority (CA), that contains the public key of the certificate authority.
Communication
42 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Certificate content
A certificate to the X.509 V3 standard, the standard that is also used by STEP 7 and the
S7-1500 CPUs, consists primarily of the following elements:
● Public key
● Details of the certificate subject (i.e. the holder of the key), for example, the Common
Name (CN) of Subject .
● Attributes such as serial number and validity period
● Digital signature from the certificate authority (CA) confirming that the information is
correct.
There are also extensions, for example:
● Specification of what the public key may be used for (Key Usage), for example, signing or
key encryption.
When you create a new certificate with STEP 7, for example in the context of Secure
Open User Communication, select the correct entry from the list of possible usages, e.g.
"TLS".
● Specification of a Subject Alternative Name (SAN), which is used in secure
communication with Web servers (HTTP over TLS), for example, to ensure that the
certificate in the address bar of the Web browser also belongs to the Web server
specified in the URL.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 43
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Verifying a signature:
1. The authenticator of the "MyCert" certificate obtains the certificate of the issuer and thus
the public key.
2. A new hash value is formed from the certificate data with the same hash algorithm that
was used for signing (for example SHA-1).
3. This hash value is then compared with the hash value that is determined by means of the
public key of the certificate issuer and the signature algorithm for checking the signature.
4. If the signature check produces a positive result, both the identity of the certificate subject
as well as the integrity, meaning authenticity and genuineness, of the certificate content
are proven. Anyone who has the public key, i.e. the certificate from the certificate
authority, can check the signature and thus recognize that the certificate was actually
signed by the certificate authority.
The figure below shows how Alice uses the public key in the certificate from Twent (who
represents the certificate authority, CA) to verify the signature on Bob's public key. All that is
required for verification is therefore the availability of the certificate from the certificate
authority at the moment of checking. The validation itself is executed automatically in the
TLS session.
Figure 3-10 Verification of a certificate with the public key of the certificate of a certificate authority
Signing messages
The method described above for signing and verifying also uses the TLS session for signing
and verifying messages.
If a hash value is generated by a message and this hash value is signed with the private key
of the sender and attached to the original message, the recipient of the message is able to
check the integrity of the message. The recipient decrypts the hash value with the public key
of the sender, puts together the hash value from the message received and compares the
two values. If the values are not the same, the message has been tampered with on the way.
Communication
44 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 45
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Communication
46 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Special features of the section "Protection & Security > Certificate manager"
Only in this section of the Inspector window do you switch between the global, i.e. project-
wide, and the local, i.e. device-specific, certificate manager (option "Use global security
settings for the certificate manager"). The option decides whether you have access to all the
certificates in the project or not.
● If you do not use the certificate manager in the global security settings, you only have
access to the local certificate memory of the CPU. You do not have access, for example,
to imported certificates or root certificates. Without these certificates only a restricted
functionality is available. You can, for example, only generate self-signed certificates.
● If you use the certificate manager in the global security settings and you are logged on as
an administrator, you have access to the global, project-wide certificate memory. You
can, for example, assign imported certificates to the CPU, or create certificates that are
issued and signed by the project CA (certificate authority of the project).
The figure below shows how the "Global security settings" are shown in the project tree after
the "Use global security settings for the certificate manager" option has been activated in the
Inspector window of the CPU.
When you double-click "User login" in the project tree below the global security settings and
log in, a line called "Certificate manager" is displayed, among other data.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 47
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
When you double-click the "Certificate manager" line, you obtain access to all the certificates
in the project, divided into the tabs "CA" (certificate authorities), "Device certificates" and
"Trusted certificates and root certificate authorities".
Private keys
STEP 7 generates private keys while generating device certificates and server certificates
(end-entity certificates). The location where the private key is stored encrypted depends on
the use of the global security settings for the certificate manager:
● If you use global security settings, the private key is stored encrypted in the global
(project-wide) certificate memory.
● If you do not use global security settings, the private key is stored encrypted in the local
(CPU-specific) certificate memory.
The existence of the private key, which is required to decrypt data, for example, is displayed
in the "Private key" column of the "Device certificates" tab of the certificate manager in the
global security settings.
When the hardware configuration is loaded, the device certificate, the public key as well as
the private key are loaded into the CPU.
NOTICE
The "Use global security settings for certificate manager" option influences the previously
used private key: If you have already created certificates without using the certificate
manager in the global security settings and then change the option for using the certificate
manager, the private keys are lost and the certificate ID can change. A warning draws your
attention to this fact. Therefore specify at the beginning of the project configuration which
option is required for the certificate manager.
Communication
48 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 49
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Procedure
STEP 7 automatically loads the required CA certificates together with the hardware
configuration to the participating CPUs so that the requirements for certificate verification
exist for both CPUs. You therefore only have to generate the device certificates for the
respective CPU; STEP 7 does the rest for you.
1. Mark PLC_1 and activate the "Use global security settings for certificate manager" option
in the "Protection & Security" section.
2. Log in as a user in the project tree in the "Global security settings" section. For a new
project, the "Administrator" role is planned for the first login.
3. Return to the PLC-1 in the "Protection & Security" section. Click in an empty line in the
"Certificate subject" column in the "Device certificates" table to add a new certificate.
4. In the drop-down list for selecting a certificate click the "Add" button.
The "Create Certificate" dialog opens.
5. Leave the default settings in this dialog. They are tailored to the usage of Secure Open
User Communication (usage: TLS).
Tip: Supplement the default name of the certificate subject, in this case the CPU name. In
order to differentiate you better leave the default CPU name in case you have to manage
a large number of device certificates.
Example: PLC_1/TLS becomes PLC_1-SecOUC-Chassis17FactoryState.
6. Compile the configuration.
The device certificate and the CA certificate are part of the configuration.
7. Repeat the steps described above for PLC_2.
In the next step you have to create the user programs for the data exchange and load the
configurations together with the program.
Communication
50 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Proceed as follows to add the self-signed certificate of the communication partner of the
CPU:
1. Mark PLC_1 and navigate to the "Certificates of partner devices" table in the "Protection
& Security" section.
2. Click in an empty line in the "Certificate subject" column in the "Device certificates" table
to add a new certificate.
3. Select the self-signed certificate of the communication partner from the drop-down list
and confirm the selection.
In the next step you have to create the user programs for the data exchange and load the
configurations together with the program.
Secure Open User Communication between S7-1500 CPU as a TLS client and an external device as
a TLS server
Two devices are to exchange data with each other via TLS connection or TLS session, for
example, exchanging recipes, production data or quality data:
● An S7-1500 CPU (PLC_1) as TLS client; the CPU uses Secure Open User
Communication
● An external device, for example a Manufacturing Execution System (MES), as TLS server
The S7-1500 CPU establishes the TLS connection / session to the MES system as TLS
client.
① TLS client
② TLS server
The S7-1500 CPU requires the CA certificates of the MES system to authenticate the TLS
server: The root certificate and, if appropriate, the intermediate certificates for verifying the
certificate path.
You have to import these certificates into the global certificate memory of the S7-1500 CPU.
Proceed as follows to import certificates of the communication partner:
1. Open the certificate manager in the global security settings in the project tree.
2. Select the appropriate table (trusted certificates and root certificate authorities) for the
certificate to be imported.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 51
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
3. Right-click in the table to open the shortcut menu. Click "Import" and import the required
certificate or the required CA certificates.
Through the import the certificate has a certificate ID assigned to it and can be assigned
to a module in the next step.
4. Mark PLC_1 and navigate to the "Certificates of partner devices" table in the "Protection
& Security" section.
5. Click in an empty line in the "Certificate subject" column to add the imported certificates.
6. Select the required CA certificates of the communication partner from the drop-down list
and confirm the selection.
Optionally the MES system can also request a device certificate of the CPU to authenticate
the CPU (i.e., the TLS client). In this case, the CA certificates of the CPU must be made
available to the MES system. The prerequisite for importing the certificates into the MES
system is a preceding export of the CA certificates from the STEP 7 project of the CPU.
Follow these steps:
1. Open the certificate manager in the global security settings in the project tree.
2. Select the matching table (CA certificate) for the certificate to be exported.
3. Right-click the selected certificate to open the shortcut menu.
4. Click "Export".
5. Select the export format of the certificate.
In the next step you have to create the user programs for the data exchange and load the
configurations together with the program.
Communication
52 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Secure Open User Communication between an S7-1500 CPU as TLS server and an external device
as TLS client
If the S7-1500 CPU acts as TLS server and the external device, for example an ERP system
(Enterprise Resource Planning System) establishes the TLS connection / session, you
require the following certificates:
● For the S7-1500 CPU, you generate a device certificate (server certificate) with a private
key and download it with the hardware configuration into the S7-1500 CPU. You use the
"Signed by certificate authority" option when generating the server certificate.
The private key is required for the key exchange as explained in the figure for the
example "HTTP over TLS".
● You have to export the CA certificate of the STEP 7 project for the ERP system and
import / load it into the ERP system. With the CA certificate the ERP system verifies the
server certificate of the S7-1500 that was transferred from the CPU to the ERP system
during the establishment of the TLS connection / session.
① TLS server
② TLS client
Figure 3-12 Secure OUC between an S7-1500 CPU and ERP system
Figure 3-13 Secure OUC between a S7-1500 CPU and a mail server
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 53
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Requirement for secure e-mail connection is the importing of the root certificate and the
intermediate certificates of the mail server (provider) into the global certificate memory of the
S7-1500 CPU. By means of these certificates the CPU can check the server certificate that
is sent by the mail server during the establishment of the TLS connection / session.
Proceed as follows to import certificates of the mail server:
1. Open the certificate manager in the global security settings in the project tree.
2. Select the appropriate table (trusted certificates and root certificate authorities) for the
certificate to be imported.
3. Right-click in the table to open the shortcut menu. Click "Import" and import the required
certificate or the required CA certificates.
As a result of the import, the certificate has a certificate ID assigned to it and can be
assigned to a module in the next step.
4. Mark PLC_1 and navigate to the "Certificates of partner devices" table in the "Protection
& Security" section.
5. Click in an empty line in the "Certificate subject" column to add the imported certificates.
6. Select the required CA certificates of the communication partner from the drop-down list
and confirm the selection.
In the next step you have to create the user programs for the e-mail client function of the
CPU and load the configurations together with the program.
Communication
54 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 55
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
The figure does not show the measures taken at Alice's end (browser) to verify the certificate
sent by the Web server. Whether Alice can trust the Web server certificate received and
therefore the identity of the Web server, and can accept the exchange of data, depends on
positive verification.
Communication
56 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.6 Secure Communication
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 57
Communications services
3.7 SNMP
3.7 SNMP
Disabling SNMP
To disable SNMP for one of the integrated interfaces of a S7-1500 CPU, follow these steps:
1. In STEP 7, create a data block that contains the structure of data record B071H.
– The following table shows the structure of the data record B071H.
2. Transfer the data record B071H in the startup OB (OB100) with the WRREC instruction
(write data record) to the CPU.
Use the hardware ID of an integrated interface of the CPU here.
Communication
58 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Communications services
3.7 SNMP
Task
As the security guidelines in your network do not allow SNMP, you want to disable SNMP for
a CPU 1516-3 PN/DP.
Requirements
● CPU 1516-3 PN/DP with firmware version V2.0
● STEP 7 V14
Solution
First, create a data block that contains the structure of data record B071H. The figure below
shows the data block "Deactivate SNMP". The data block "Deactivate SNMP" contains the
data record B071H as well as additional tags that you use to transfer the data record. The tag
"snmp_deactivate" is used to trigger the job for WRREC. Place this tag in the retentive
memory area so that the value is also available in the startup OB (OB100).
Transfer the data record B071H in the startup OB (OB100) to CPU 1516-3 PN/DP with the
WRREC instruction (write data record).
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 59
Communications services
3.7 SNMP
In the following program code, the data record B071H is transferred with the WRREC
instruction in a REPEAT UNTIL loop.
ORGANIZATION_BLOCK "Startup"
TITLE = "Complete Restart"
{ S7_Optimized_Access := 'TRUE' }
VERSION : 0.1
BEGIN
REPEAT
"WRREC_DB_1"
(REQ := "Deactivate SNMP".snmp_deactivate,
//Transfer data record
INDEX:=16#B071,
//Data record number for SNMP deactivation
ID:="Local~PROFINET_interface_1",
//any integrated PROFINET Interface
DONE => "Deactivate SNMP".snmp_done,
ERROR => "Deactivate SNMP".snmp_error,
STATUS => "Deactivate SNMP".snmp_status,
RECORD := "Deactivate SNMP".snmp_record)
//Data record
UNTIL "Deactivate SNMP".snmp_done OR "Deactivate SNMP".snmp_error
END_REPEAT;
END_ORGANIZATION_BLOCK
Re-enabling SNMP
With small changes, you can use the program code used above to enable SNMP.
In the user program, assign the "Deactivate SNMP".snmp_record.SNMPControl tag the
value "1":
"Deactivate SNMP".snmp_record.SNMPControl := 1;
SNMP will then be enabled again the next time the CPU is started.
Communication
60 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
PG communication 4
Properties
Using PG communication, the CPU or another module capable of communication exchanges
data with an engineering station (for example PG, PC). The data exchange is possible via
PROFIBUS and PROFINET subnets. The gateway between S7 subnets is also supported.
PG communication provides functions needed to load programs and configuration data, run
tests, and evaluate diagnostic information. These functions are integrated in the operating
system of the module capable of communication.
A PG/PC can be connected to a CPU online. The PG/PC can operate a maximum of 4 online
connections at one time (for example to 4 CPUs).
Requirements
● The PG/PC is physically connected to the communication-capable module.
● If the communication-capable module is to be reached via S7 routing, the hardware
configuration has to be loaded in the participating stations (S7 router and end point).
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 61
PG communication
3. In the "Go online" dialog, make the following settings for your online connection:
– Select interface type (e.g. PN/IE) in the "Type of PG/PC interface" drop-down list.
– In the "PG/PC interface" drop-down list, select the PG/PC interface (e.g. Ind. Ethernet
card) you want to use to establish the online connection.
– Select the interface or the S7 subnet with which the PG/PC is physically connected
from the "Connection to interface/subnet" drop-down list.
– If the communication-capable module can be reached via an S7 router (gateway),
select the S7 router that connects the subnets in question from the "1st Gateway"
drop-down .
Communication
62 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
PG communication
Additional information
You can find more information on "Go online" in the STEP 7 online help.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 63
HMI communication 5
Properties
Using HMI communication, one or more HMI devices (for example HMI
Basic/Comfort/Mobile Panel) exchanges data with a CPU for operator control and monitoring
with via the PROFINET or PROFIBUS DP interface. The data exchange is via HMI
connections.
If you want to set up several HMI connections to a CPU, use for example:
● The PROFINET and PROFIBUS DP interfaces of the CPU
● CPs and CMs with the relevant interfaces
Communication
64 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
HMI communication
Additional information
You can find information on S7 routing for HMI connections in the section S7 Routing
(Page 219).
You can find more information on setting up HMI connections in the STEP 7 online help.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 65
Open User Communication 6
6.1 Overview of Open User Communication
Communication
66 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.2 Protocols for Open User Communication
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 67
Open User Communication
6.2 Protocols for Open User Communication
Modbus TCP
The Modbus protocol is a communication protocol with linear topology based on a
master/slave architecture. In the Modbus TCP (Transmission Control Protocol), the data is
transmitted as TCP/IP packets.
Communication is controlled solely by suitable instructions in the user program.
Communication
68 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.3 Instructions for Open User Communication
Introduction
You set up Open User Communication via the corresponding connection (for example, TCP
connection) as follows:
● By programming in the user programs of the communications partners or
● By configuring the connection in STEP 7 in the hardware and network editor
Regardless of whether you set up the connection by programming or configuring,
instructions are always required in the user programs of both communications partners for
sending and receiving the data.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 69
Open User Communication
6.3 Instructions for Open User Communication
Protocols, system data types and employable instructions for programmed setup
The following table shows the protocols of the Open User Communication and the matching
system data types and instructions.
Communication
70 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.3 Instructions for Open User Communication
The following table shows you the different connections of the Secure Open User
Communication and the matching system data types and instructions.
• TCON_QDN_SEC • MB_Server
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 71
Open User Communication
6.3 Instructions for Open User Communication
Additional information
The STEP 7 online help describes:
● The user and system data types
● The instructions for open communication
● The connection parameters
You will find information about the allocation and release of connection resources in the
section Allocation of connection resources (Page 230).
See also
Secure Open User Communication (Page 93)
Communication
72 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.4 Open User Communication with addressing via domain names
Figure 6-1 Entering DNS server addresses using a CPU 1516-3 PN/DP as an example
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 73
Open User Communication
6.4 Open User Communication with addressing via domain names
Setting up a TCP connection via the domain name of the communication partner
For TCP communication via the domain name you need to create a data block with the
TCON_QDN system data type yourself, assign parameters and call it directly at the
instruction. The TCON, TSEND_C and TRCV_C instructions support the system data type
TCON_QDN:
To set up a TCP connection via the domain name of the communication partner, follow these
steps:
1. Create a global data block in the project tree.
2. Define a tag of the data type TCON_QDN in the global data block.
The example below shows the global data block "Data_block_1" in which the tag
"DNS Connection1" of data type TCON_QDN is defined.
3. Program the parameters of the TCP connection (for example the fully qualified domain
name (FQDN)) in the tag of data type TCON_QDN.
4. Create a TCON instruction in the program editor.
5. Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of the TCON instruction with the tag of the data
type TCON_QDN.
In the example below, the CONNECT parameter of the TCON instruction is
interconnected with the tag "DNS connection1" (data type TCON_QDN).
Communication
74 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.4 Open User Communication with addressing via domain names
Addressing a UDP connection via the domain name of the communication partner
For S7-1500 CPUs as of firmware version V2.0, you can address the recipient with its fully
qualified domain name (FQDN) when sending data via UDP. With the instruction TUSEND at
the parameter ADDR, you hereby reference a structure of the type TADDR_SEND_QDN.
The receiver can return an IPv4 or an IPv6 address. With the TURCV instruction at the
ADDR parameter, you therefore reference a structure of the TADDR_RCV_IP type. Only this
structure can include both IP address types.
Note
Network load
In contrast to the TCP the UDP protocol does not work connection-oriented. For every edge
at the block parameter REQ, the TUSEND or TURCV command performs queries of the
DNS server. This can lead to high network load or load on the DNS server.
Additional information
You can find more information about the system data types TCON_QDN,
TADDR_SEND_QDN and TADDR_RCV_IP in the STEP 7 online help.
How to set up a secure TCP connection via the domain name of the communication partner
is described in the section Secure Open User Communication (Page 93).
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 75
Open User Communication
6.5 Setting up Open User Communication via TCP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP and ISO
Communication
76 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.5 Setting up Open User Communication via TCP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP and ISO
3. Select the "Connection parameters" group. Until you select a connection partner, only the
empty drop-down list for the partner end point is enabled. All other input options are
disabled.
The connection parameters already known are displayed:
– Name of the local end point
– Interface of the local end point
– IPv4 address of the local end point
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 77
Open User Communication
6.5 Setting up Open User Communication via TCP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP and ISO
4. In the drop-down list box of the partner end point, select a connection partner. You can
select an unspecified device or a CPU in the project as the communication partner.
Certain connection parameters are then entered automatically.
The following parameters are set:
– Name of the partner end point
– Interface of the partner end point
– IPv4 address of the partner end point
If the connection partners are networked, the name of the subnet is displayed.
5. In the "Configuration type" drop-down list, select between using program blocks or
configured connections.
6. Select an existing connection description DB in the "Connection data" drop-down list or
for configured connections select an existing connection under "Connection name". You
can also create a new connection description DB or a new configured connection. Later,
you can still select other connection description DBs or configured connections or change
the names of the connection description DBs in order to create new data blocks:
– You can also see the selected data block at the interconnection of the CONNECT
input parameter of the selected TCON, TSEND_C or TRCV_C instruction.
– If you have already specified a connection description DB for the connection partner
using the CONNECT parameter of the TCON, TSEND_C or TRCV_C instruction, you
can either use this DB or create a new DB.
– If you edit the name of the displayed data block in the drop-down list, a new data block
with the changed name but with the same structure and content is generated and
used for the connection.
– Changed names of a data block must be unique in the context of the communication
partner.
– A connection description DB must have the structure TCON_Param, TCON_IP_v4 or
TCON_IP_RFC, depending on CPU type and connection.
– A data block cannot be selected for an unspecified partner.
Communication
78 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.5 Setting up Open User Communication via TCP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP and ISO
Additional values are determined and entered after the selection or creation of the
connection description DB or configured connection.
The following is valid for specified connection partners:
– ISO-on-TCP connection type
– Connection ID with default of 1
– Active connection establishment by local partner
– TSAP ID
for S7-1200/1500: E0.01.49.53.4F.6F.6E.54.43.50.2D.31
The following is valid for unspecified connection partners:
– TCP connection type
– Partner port 2000
The following applies for a configured connection with a specified connection partner:
– TCP connection type
– Connection ID with default of 257
– Active connection establishment by local partner
– Partner port 2000
The following applies for a configured connection with an unspecified connection partner:
– TCP connection type
– Local port 2000
7. Enter a connection ID as needed for the connection partner. No connection ID can be
assigned to an unspecified partner.
Note
You must enter a unique value for the connection ID at a known connection partner. The
uniqueness of the connection ID is not be checked by the connection parameter settings
and there is no default value entered for the connection ID when you create a new
connection.
8. Select the desired connection type in the relevant drop-down list. Default values are set
for the address details depending on the connection type. You can choose between the
following:
– TCP
– ISO-on-TCP
– UDP
– ISO (only with Configuration mode "Use configured connection")
You can edit the input boxes in the address details. Depending on the selected protocol,
you can edit the ports (for TCP and UDP) or the TSAPs (for ISO-on-TCP and ISO).
9. Use the "Active connection establishment" check box to set the connection establishment
characteristics for TCP, ISO and ISO-on-TCP. You can decide which communication
partner establishes the connection actively.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 79
Open User Communication
6.5 Setting up Open User Communication via TCP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP and ISO
Changed values are checked immediately for input errors by the connection configuration
and entered in the data block for the connection description.
Note
Open User Communication between two communication partners can only work when the
program section for the partner end point has been downloaded to the hardware. To achieve
fully functional communication, make sure that you load not only the connection description
of the local CPU on the device but also that of the partner CPU as well.
Communication
80 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.5 Setting up Open User Communication via TCP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP and ISO
Additional information
The STEP 7 online help describes:
● The instructions for open communication
● The connection parameters
This FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109479564) describes how
the instructions TSEND_C and TRCV_C behave in the S7-1500.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 81
Open User Communication
6.6 Setting up communication over FDL
Requirements
● Configuration software: STEP 7 Professional V14
● End point of the connection: CPU S7-1500 firmware version V2.0 or higher with
communication module CM 1542-5 with firmware version V2.0
Communication
82 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.6 Setting up communication over FDL
3. Program the parameters of the FDL connection (e.g. the PROFIBUS addresses) in the
tag of the data type TCON_FDL.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 83
Open User Communication
6.6 Setting up communication over FDL
Communication
84 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.7 Setting up communication with Modbus TCP
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 85
Open User Communication
6.7 Setting up communication with Modbus TCP
Communication
86 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.7 Setting up communication with Modbus TCP
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 87
Open User Communication
6.8 Setting up communication via e-mail
Note
Connection parameters InterfaceId and ID
Note that you can enter the value "0" for the interface ID and the ID with instruction
version V5.0 or higher of the instruction TMAIL_C in the data type TMAIL_V4_SEC. In
this case the CPU itself searches for a matching local CPU interface or a free connection
ID.
Additional information
The STEP 7 online help describes:
● The system data types
● The instructions for open communication
● The connection parameters
Communication
88 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.9 Setting up communication via FTP
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 89
Open User Communication
6.9 Setting up communication via FTP
Communication
90 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.9 Setting up communication via FTP
Application examples
● Application example: FTP communication with S7-1500 and CP 1543-1
You can find the application example on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/103550797).
● Application example: Evaluate FTP client communication with S7-1200/1500
You can find the application example on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/81367009).
Additional information
The STEP 7 online help describes:
● The system data types
● The instructions for open communication
● The connection parameters
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 91
Open User Communication
6.10 Establishment and termination of communications relations
Communication
92 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
6.11.1 Secure OUC of an S7-1500 CPU as TLS client to an external PLC (TLS server)
The following section describes how you can set up Open User Communication via TCP
from an S7-1500 CPU as TLS client to a TLS server.
Setting up a secure TCP connection from an S7-1500 CPU as TLS client to a TLS server
S7-1500 CPUs as of firmware version V2.0 support secure communication with addressing
via a Domain Name System (DNS).
For secure TCP communication over the domain name you need to create a data block with
the TCON_QDN_SEC system data type yourself, assign parameters and call it directly at
one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON.
Requirements:
● Current date and time are set in the CPU.
● Your network includes at least one DNS server.
● You have configured at least one DNS server for the S7-1500 CPU.
● TLS client and TLS server have all the required certificates.
To set up a secure TCP connection to a TLS server, follow these steps:
1. Create a global data block in the project tree.
2. Define a tag of the data type TCON_QDN_SEC in the global data block.
The example below shows the global data block "Data_block_1" in which the tag
"DNS ConnectionSEC" of the data type TCON_QDN_SEC is defined.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 93
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
3. Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the "Start value" column. Enter
the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the TLS server, for example, for
"RemoteQDN".
4. Set the parameters for secure communication in the "Start value" column.
– "ActivateSecureConn": Activation of secure communication for this connection. If this
parameter has the value FALSE, the subsequent security parameters are irrelevant.
You can set up a non-secure TCP or UDP connection in this case.
– "ExtTLSCapabilities": If you enter the value 1, the client validates the
subjectAlternateName in the X.509-V3 certificate of the server to verify the identity of
the server. This validation is executed in the context of the instruction.
– "TLSServerCertRef": ID of the X.509-V3 certificate (usually a CA certificate) that is
used by the TLS client to validate the TLS server authentication. If this parameter is 0,
the TLS client uses all (CA) certificates currently loaded in the client certificate store to
validate the server authentication.
Figure 6-13 Certificate handling from the perspective of the S7-1500 as a TLS client
Communication
94 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
5. Create one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON in the program editor.
6. Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or
TCON with the tags of the data type TCON_QDN_SEC.
In the example below, the CONNECT parameter of the TCON instruction is
interconnected with the tag "DNS connectionSEC" (data type TCON_QDN_SEC).
Additional information
You can find more information on the TCON_QDN_SEC system data type in the STEP 7
online help.
For additional information on secure communication, refer to the section Secure
Communication (Page 36).
6.11.2 Secure OUC of an S7-1500 CPU as TLS server to an external PLC (TLS client)
The following section describes how you can set up Open User Communication via TCP
from an S7-1500 CPU as TLS server to a TLS client.
Setting up a secure TCP connection via the domain name of the communication partner
S7-1500 CPUs as of firmware version V2.0 support secure communication with addressing
via a Domain Name System (DNS).
For secure TCP communication over the domain name you need to create a data block with
the TCON_QDN_SEC system data type yourself, assign parameters and call it directly at
one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 95
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
Requirements:
● Current date and time are set in the CPU.
● Your network includes at least one DNS server.
● You have configured at least one DNS server for the S7-1500 CPU.
● TLS client and TLS server have all the required certificates.
To set up a secure TCP connection to a TLS client, follow these steps:
1. Create a global data block in the project tree.
2. Define a tag of the data type TCON_QDN_SEC in the global data block.
The example below shows the global data block "Data_block_1" in which the tag
"DNS ConnectionSEC" of the data type TCON_FDL_SEC is defined.
3. Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the "Start value" column. Enter,
for example, the local ID of the TCP connection for "ID".
Communication
96 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
4. Set the parameters for secure communication in the "Start value" column.
– "ActivateSecureConn": Activation of secure communication for this connection. If this
parameter has the value FALSE, the subsequent security parameters are irrelevant.
You can set up a non-secure TCP or UDP connection in this case.
– "TLSServerReqClientCert": Request for an X.509-V3 certificate from the TLS client.
– "TLSServerCertRef": ID of the own X.509-V3 certificate.
Figure 6-16 Certificate handling from the perspective of the S7-1500 as TLS server
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 97
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
Additional information
You can find more information about the system data types TCON_QDN_SEC in the STEP 7
online help.
For additional information on secure communication, refer to the section Secure
Communication (Page 36).
Figure 6-18 Certificate handling for Secure OUC between two S7-1500 CPUs
Communication
98 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
3. Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the "Start value" column. Enter
the IPv4 address of the TLS server, for example, for the "RemoteAddress".
Note
Connection parameters InterfaceId and ID
Note that you can enter the value "0" for the interface ID and the ID in the data type
TMAIL_V4_SEC. In this case the CPU itself searches for a matching local CPU interface
or a free connection ID.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 99
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
4. Set the parameters for secure communication in the "Start value" column.
– "ActivateSecureConn": Activation of secure communication for this connection. If this
parameter has the value FALSE, the subsequent security parameters are irrelevant.
You can set up a non-secure TCP or UDP connection in this case.
– "TLSServerCertRef": Enter the value 2 (reference to the CA certificate of the
TIA Portal project (SHA256) or the value 1 (reference to the CA certificate of the TIA
Portal project (SHA1)). If you use a different CA certificate, enter the corresponding ID
from the certificate manager of the global security settings.
– "TLSClientCertRef": ID of the own X.509-V3 certificate.
5. Create one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON in the program editor.
6. Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or
TCON with the tags of the data type TCON_IP_V4_SEC.
3. Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the "Start value" column. Enter
the IPv4 address of the TLS client, for example, for the "RemoteAddress".
Communication
100 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
4. Set the parameters for secure communication in the "Start value" column.
– "ActivateSecureConn": Activation of secure communication for this connection. If this
parameter has the value FALSE, the subsequent security parameters are irrelevant.
You can set up a non-secure TCP or UDP connection in this case.
– "TLSServerReqClientCert ": Request for an X.509-V3 certificate from the TLS client.
Enter the value "true".
– "TLSServerCertRef": ID of the own X.509-V3 certificate.
– "TLSClientCertRef": Enter the value 2 (reference to the CA certificate of the TIA Portal
project (SHA256) or the value 1 (reference to the CA certificate of the TIA Portal
project (SHA1)). If you use a different CA certificate, enter the corresponding ID from
the certificate manager of the global security settings.
5. Create one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON in the program editor.
6. Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or
TCON with the tags of the data type TCON_IP_V4_SEC.
In the example below, the CONNECT parameter of the TSEND_C instruction is
interconnected with the "SEC connection 1 TLS client" tags (data type TCON_IP_4_SEC).
Additional information
You can find more information about the system data types TCON_IP_4_SEC in the STEP 7
online help.
For additional information on secure communication, refer to the section Secure
Communication (Page 36).
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 101
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
Communication
102 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
Example: Setting up a secure TCP connection between two S7-1500 CPUs via CP interfaces
For secure TCP communication between two S7-1500 CPUs you need to create a data
block with the TCON_IPv4_SEC system data type yourself in every CPU, assign parameters
and call it directly at the one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON.
Requirements:
● Both S7 1500 CPUs have at least firmware version V2.0. If you use the CP 1543SP-1:
Firmware version as of V1.0.
● Both CPs (for example CP 1543-1) must have at least firmware version V2.0
● TLS client and TLS server have all the required certificates.
– A device certificate (end-entity certificate) for the CP must be generated and be
located in the certificate memory of the CP. If a communication partner is an external
device (for example an MES or ERP system), a device certificate also has to exist for
this device.
– The root certificate (CA certificate) with which the device certificate of the
communication partner is signed must also be located in the certificate memory of the
CP or in the certificate memory of the external device. If you use intermediate
certificates, you have to ensure that the complete certificate path exists in the
validating device. A device uses these certificates to validate the device certificate of
the communication partner.
● The communication partner must always be addressed via its IPv4 address, not via its
domain name.
The following figure shows the different certificates in the devices for the case that both
communication partners communicate via a CP 1543-1. In addition, the figure shows the
transfer of the device certificates during establishment of the connection ("Hello").
Figure 6-22 Certificate handling in secure OUC between two S7-1500 CPUs via CP interfaces.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 103
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
3. Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the "Start value" column. For
example, enter the IPv4 address of the TLS server for "RemoteAddress".
4. Set the parameters for secure communication in the "Start value" column.
– "ActivateSecureConn": Activation of secure communication for this connection. If this
parameter has the value FALSE, the subsequent security parameters are irrelevant.
You can set up a non-secure TCP or UDP connection in this case.
– "TLSServerCertRef": Enter the value 2 (reference to the CA certificate of the
TIA Portal project (SHA256) or the value 1 (reference to the CA certificate of the TIA
Portal project (SHA1)). If you use a different CA certificate, enter the corresponding ID
from the certificate manager of the global security settings.
– "TLSClientCertRef": ID of the own X.509-V3 certificate.
Communication
104 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
5. Create one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON in the program editor.
6. Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or
TCON with the tags of the data type TCON_IP_V4_SEC.
3. Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the "Start value" column. For
example, enter the IPv4 address of the TLS client for "RemoteAddress".
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 105
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
4. Set the parameters for secure communication in the "Start value" column.
– "ActivateSecureConn": Activation of secure communication for this connection. If this
parameter has the value FALSE, the subsequent security parameters are irrelevant.
You can set up a non-secure TCP or UDP connection in this case.
– "TLSServerReqClientCert ": Request for an X.509-V3 certificate from the TLS client.
Enter the value "true".
– "TLSServerCertRef": ID of the own X.509-V3 certificate.
– "TLSClientCertRef": Enter the value 2 (reference to the CA certificate of the TIA Portal
project (SHA256) or the value 1 (reference to the CA certificate of the TIA Portal
project (SHA1)). If you use a different CA certificate, enter the corresponding ID from
the certificate manager of the global security settings.
5. Create one of the instructions TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON in the program editor.
6. Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of the instruction TSEND_C, TRCV_C or TCON
with the tags of the data type TCON_IP_V4_SEC.
Communication
106 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
Requirements:
● S7-1500 CPU CPU firmware version V2.5 or higher
● The Modbus client (TLS client) can reach the Modbus server (TLS server) over IP
communication in the network.
● TLS client and TLS server have all the required certificates.
3. Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the "Start value" column. Enter
the IPv4 address of the mail server, for example, for the "MailServerAddress".
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 107
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
4. Set the parameters for secure communication in the "Start value" column. Enter the
certificate ID of the CA certificate of the communication partner, for example, for
"TLSServerCertRef".
– "ActivateSecureConn": Activation of secure communication for this connection. If this
parameter has the value FALSE, the subsequent security parameters are irrelevant. In
this case you can set up an unsecured Modbus TCP connection.
– "TLSServerCertRef": Reference to the X.509 V3 (CA) certificate of the Modbus TCP
server, which is used by the TLS client to validate the authentication of the Modbus
TCP server.
5. Create an MB_CLIENT instruction in the program editor.
6. Interconnect the CONNECT parameter of the MB_Client instruction with the tags of the
data type TCON_IP_4_SEC.
Requirements:
● TMAIL_C instruction version V5.0 or higher
● STEP 7 V15 and higher
● S7-1500 CPU V2.5 and higher
● You have assigned all the CA certificates of the mail server (TLS server) to the CPU (TLS
client) and have downloaded the configuration to the CPU.
● Current date and time are set in the CPU.
Communication
108 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
You use the "Remote Port" setting in the data types at the block parameter
"MAIL_ADDR_PARAM" to define which process is used for the communication.
Process Port
SMTPS: 4651
STARTTLS Any (≠465)2
1 The instruction TMAIL_C uses SMTPS only for Port 465. For all other ports STARTTLS is used.
2 According to RFC, mail servers use Ports 25 and 587 for secure connections with STARTTLS. The
use of other port numbers for SMTP is not RFC-compliant, successful communication with such a
mail server is not guaranteed.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 109
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
3. Set the connection parameters of the TCP connection in the "Start value" column. Enter
the IPv4 address of the mail server, for example, for the "MailServerAddress".
Note
Connection parameters InterfaceId and ID
Note that you can enter the value "0" for the interface ID and the ID with instruction
version V5.0 or higher of the instruction TMAIL_C in the data type TMAIL_V4_SEC. In
this case the CPU itself searches for a matching local CPU interface or a free connection
ID.
4. Set the parameters for secure communication in the "Start value" column. Enter the
certificate ID of the CA certificate of the communication partner, for example, for
"TLSServerCertRef".
– "ActivateSecureConn": Activation of secure communication for this connection. If this
parameter has the value FALSE, the subsequent security parameters are irrelevant.
You can set up a non-secure TCP or UDP connection in this case.
– "TLSServerCertRef": Reference to the X.509 V3 (CA) certificate of the mail server,
which is used by the TLS client to validate the authentication of the mail server.
5. Create a TMAIL_C instruction in the program editor.
6. Interconnect the MAIL_ADDR_PARAM parameter of the TMAIL_C instruction with the tag
of the data type TMAIL_V4_SEC.
In the following example the MAIL_ADDR_PARAM parameter of the TMAIL_C instruction
is interconnected with the tag "MailConnectionSEC" (data type TMAIL_V4_SEC).
Communication
110 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Open User Communication
6.11 Secure Open User Communication
Setting up a secure connection to a mail server over the interface of a communication module
For secure communication to a mail server over a communication module, you need to
create a data block with one of the system data types TMAIL_V4_SEC, TMAIL_QDN_SEC or
TMAIL_V6_SEC yourself, assign parameters and call it directly at the TMAIL_C instruction.
Requirements:
● TMAIL_C instruction with version V4.0
● S7-1500 CPU as of firmware version V2.0 with communication module CP 1543-1 as of
firmware version V2.0
● ET 200SP CPU as of firmware version V2.0 with communication module CP 1542SP-1
(IRC) as of firmware version V1.0
● You have assigned all the CA certificates of the mail server (TLS server) to the CP (TLS
client) and have downloaded the configuration to the CPU.
● Current date and time are set in the CPU.
The STEP 7 online help describes how to set up a secure connection to a mail server over
the interface of a communication module.
Application example
This application example (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/46817803)
show how you can use the CP of an S7-1500 or S7-1200 station to set up a secure
connection to an email server and send an email with the default application "TMAIL_C" from
the S7 CPU.
Additional information
You can find more information about the system data types TMail_V4_SEC and
TMAIL_QDN_SEC in the STEP 7 online help.
For additional information on secure communication, refer to the section Secure
Communication (Page 36).
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 111
S7 communication 7
Characteristics of S7 communication
S7 communication as homogeneous SIMATIC communication is characterized by vendor-
specific communication between SIMATIC CPUs (not an open standard). S7 communication
is used for migration and for connecting to existing systems (S7-300, S7-400).
For data transfer between two S7-1500 automation systems, we recommend that you use
open communication (see section Open User Communication (Page 66)).
Properties of S7 communication
Using S7 communication, the CPU exchanges data with another CPU. Once the user has
received the data at the receiver end, the reception data is automatically acknowledged to
the sending CPU.
The data is exchanged via configured S7 connections. S7 connections can be configured at
one end or at both ends.
S7 communication is possible via:
● Integrated PROFINET or PROFIBUS DP interface of a CPU
● Interface of a CP/CM
Communication
112 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
S7 communication
Note
Data blocks for PUT/GET instructions
When using the PUT/GET instructions, you can only use data blocks with absolute
addressing. Symbolic addressing of data blocks is not possible.
You must also enable this service for protection in the CPU configuration in the
"Protection" area.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 113
S7 communication
Communication
114 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
S7 communication
3. Select the "Connection parameters" group. Until you select a connection partner, only the
empty drop-down list for the partner end point is enabled. All other input options are
disabled.
The connection parameters already known are displayed:
– Name of the local end point
– Interface of the local end point
– IPv4 address of the local end point
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 115
S7 communication
4. In the drop-down list box of the partner end point, select a connection partner. You can
select an unspecified device or a CPU in the project as the communication partner.
The following parameters are automatically entered as soon as you have selected the
connection partner:
– Name of the partner end point
– Interface of the partner end point. If several interfaces are available, you can change
the interface as required.
– Interface type of the partner end point
– Subnet name of both end points
– IPv4 address of the partner end point
– Name of the connection which is used for the communication.
5. If required, change the connection name in the "Connection name" input box. If you want
to create a new connection or edit an existing connection, click on the "Select connection"
button on the right side next to the input box for the connection name.
Note
The PUT and GET instructions between two communication partners can only run if both
the hardware configuration and the program part for the partner end point have been
loaded into the hardware. To achieve fully functional communication, make sure that you
load not only the connection description of the local CPU on the device but also that of
the partner CPU as well.
Communication
116 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
S7 communication
6. In the Project tree, select the "Program blocks" folder for one of the CPUs and open OB1
in the folder by double-clicking on it. The program editor opens.
7. In the program editor, call the relevant instructions for S7 communication in the user
program of the communication partner (configured at one end) or in the user programs of
the communication partners (configured at both ends). Select the BSEND and BRCV
instructions from the "Communication" area of the "Instructions" task card, for example,
and drag them to a network of OB1.
8. At the ID parameter of the instruction, assign the local ID of the configured connection to
be used for the transmission of data.
9. Assign the parameters for the instructions indicating which data will be written to where
and which data will be read from where.
10.Download the hardware configuration and user program to the CPU(s).
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 117
S7 communication
Communication
118 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
S7 communication
5. Using drag-and-drop in our example, connect PLC_1 in the left S7 subnet (PROFIBUS) to
PLC_3 in the right S7 subnet (PROFINET).
The S7 connection between CPU 1 and CPU 3 is configured.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 119
S7 communication
Additional information
You can find detailed information on configuring S7 connections and how to use the
instructions for S7 communication in the user program in the STEP 7 online help.
Communication
120 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Point-to-point link 8
Functionality
A point-to-point connection for S7-1500, ET 200MP and ET 200SP is established via
communications modules (CMs) with serial interfaces (RS232, RS422 or RS485):
● S7-1500/ET 200MP:
– CM PtP RS232 BA
– CM PtP RS422/485 BA
– CM PtP RS232 HF
– CM PtP RS422/485 HF
● ET 200SP:
– CM PtP
The bidirectional data exchange via a point-to-point connection works between
communications modules or third-party systems or devices capable of communication. At
least 2 communication partners are required for communication ("point-to-point"). With
RS422 and RS485, more than two communications partners are possible.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 121
Point-to-point link
Communication
122 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Point-to-point link
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 123
Point-to-point link
Communication
124 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Point-to-point link
Additional information
● You can find more detailed information on communication via point-to-point connections
and basics of serial data transmission in the function manual CM PtP communication
module - Configurations for point-to-point connections
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59057093).
● You can find a description of how to use the instructions for point-to-point connections in
the user program in the STEP 7 online help.
● You can find information about the communications modules with a serial interface in the
manual of the particular communications module.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 125
OPC UA communication 9
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
Communication
126 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 127
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
Communication
128 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
See also
Unified Automation (https://www.unified-automation.com)
OPC Foundation (https://opcfoundation.org)
Standardized interface
Classic OPC only runs on Windows operating systems.
To get around this restriction, the OPC Foundation developed the OPC UA standard.
The standard is not platform-specific and uses an optimized, TCP-based binary protocol for
high-performance applications.
Different systems are therefore able to exchange data, for example:
● Controllers with MES and ERP systems
● Siemens controllers with controllers from other manufacturers
● Smartphones with controllers
● Embedded systems with controllers
● Smart sensors with controllers
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 129
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
Communication
130 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
Node classes
OPC UA servers provide information in the form of nodes. A node can be, for example, an
object, a tag or a method.
The example below shows the address space of the OPC UA server of an S7-1500 CPU
(extract from the OPC UA client "UaExpert" from Unified Automation).
Figure 9-1 Example of the address space of the OPC UA server of an S7-1500 CPU
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 131
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
Address space
The nodes are linked over references, for example, the reference "HasComponent, which
represents a hierarchical relationship between a node and its subordinate nodes. With their
references, the nodes form a network that can, for example, take the form of a tree.
A network of nodes is also called an address space. Starting from the root, all nodes can be
reached in the address space.
Namespace
All the tags or methods of an S7-1500 are contained in the namespace (Namespace)
"http://www.siemens.com/simatic-s7-opcua". By default this namespace has the Index 3. The
index may change later if additional namespaces are inserted into the server or if existing
ones are deleted. The current index of the namespace therefore needs to be requested from
the server before values are read or written.
The figure below shows the result of such a query. The Siemens "UaClient" program is used
as an example; see S7-1500 Communication function manual
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/59192925).
Communication
132 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
Identifier
The Identifier corresponds to the name of the PLC tag in quotation marks. The quotation
mark is the only sign that is not permitted as part of a name in STEP 7. Quotation marks
avoid naming conflicts.
The following example reads the value of the "StartTimer" tag:
The Identifier can consist of several components. The individual components are then
separated by a dot. The following example reads the "MyDB" array data block completely.
This data block contains an array with ten integer values. All ten values should be read in
one pass. Therefore, "0:9" is entered at the array range.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 133
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
Figure 9-2 PLC tags in the address range of the OPC UA server
Communication
134 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 135
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
Example
A tag has the SIMATIC data type "COUNTER". You read COUNTER → UInt16 in the table.
You now know that you do not need to convert; the COUNTER value is sent over the line as
a UInt16 data type.
The client can see from the "Datatype" attribute that it is actually a COUNTER data type and
can reconstruct it in this knowledge.
Communication
136 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
Arrays
A read or write job with OPC UA is always an instance of array access, i.e. it has an index
and a length, so that an individual tag is only a special case of an array (index 0 and length
1). The data type is simply sent repeatedly on the line. For the tags, the "Datatype" attribute
indicates the basic data type. The attributes "ValueRank" and "ArrayDimensions" show
whether or not you are dealing with an array and how large it is.
Structures
Structures are transferred as ExtensionObject. The S7-1500 server uses binary
representation for transmission of the ExtensionObjects over the line; the individual structure
elements come one after the other. At the front is the NodeId of the data type; this is used by
the client to establish the structure.
For the OPC UA specification <= V1.03, a client must read, decode and interpret the
complete DataTypeDictionary for this purpose (unless it has already done so offline with an
XML import).
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 137
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
Additional information
More details on basic data type, array and structure mapping can be found in the OPC UA
Specification Part 6, "Mappings", see OPC UA BINARY.
Communication
138 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
The following figure shows the "UA Sample Client" of the OPC Foundation.
The client has established a secure connection to the OPC UA server of an S7-1500 CPU to
the endpoint "opc.tcp://192.168.178.151:4840 - [SignAndEndCrypt: Basic128Rsa15:Binary]".
The security settings "SignAndEndCrypt:Basic128Rsa15" are contained in the endpoint.
Note
Select an endpoint with as strict as possible a security policy
Select an application-appropriate security policy for the end point and disable the less strict
security policy at the OPC UA server.
A Sha256 certificate is required for the two most secure end points (Basic256Sha256) of the
S7-1500 CPU OPC UA server.
A connection to a server end point is only established if the OPC UA client complies with the
security policies of that end point.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 139
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
Communication
140 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
Server restart
The OPC UA server is stopped upon each download to the CPU (for example after a
configuration or block is downloaded) and then restarts. The restart of the OPC UA server
can take a while depending on the size of the data structure.
Apart from the operating state of the CPU you can also read out the status (State) of the
server.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 141
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
For "Array Range" you specify which components of the array you want to overwrite. The
"Good" status code indicates that the values were transferred successfully. However, you
can only write the values to the S7-1500 but not the time stamps of these values. The time
stamps can only be read.
Communication
142 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
In accordance with the same scheme, the "RegisteredRead" function can also be used,
which is particularly useful for recurring data readouts. Take into account, however, that
depending on the application it may be advisable to use a Subscription instead.
Recommendation: It is best to place registrations in the startup program of the OPC UA
client, since the registration takes up time.
Please note that you can set the maximum number of registered nodes in the properties of
the S7-1500 CPU and that the Clients have to respect this number, see General settings of
the OPC UA server (Page 164).
Subscription
The term "Subscription" is used for a function in which only those tags for which an OPC UA
client has registered at the OPC UA server are transferred. The OPC UA server only sends a
message to the OPC UA client for these registered tags (Subscriptions) when a value has
changed. The monitoring of these tags makes constant sampling by the OPC UA client
superfluous which reduces the network load.
You have to create a Subscription to use this function. For this purpose, you specify the
"Publishing Interval" at the UA client and click the "Create" button. The "Publishing interval"
is the time interval in which new values are sent to the client.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 143
OPC UA communication
9.1 What you need to know about OPC UA
In the following example a subscription has been created: The client receives a message
with the new values (publishing interval 50 ms) every 50 milliseconds here.
The "Voltage" tag contains the value of a voltage that is detected by an S7-1500 CPU (via an
analog input module AI 4xU/I 2-wire).
The Sampling Intervall contains a negative value (-1). This specifies that the OPC UA server
checks for changes to the values with the smallest possible interval.
In this example, the length of the queue is set to "1": Only one value is read from the CPU at
an interval of 50 milliseconds and subsequently sent to the OPC UA client when the value
has changed.
The "Deadband" parameter in this example is "0.1": Changes in value have to amount to 0.1
Volt; only then does the sender send the new value to the client. The server does not send
smaller changes in value. You can use this parameter, for example, to disable signal noise:
Slight changes in a process variable which do not have a real meaning.
Communication
144 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.2 Security at OPC UA
Addressing risks
OPC UA allows the exchange of data between different systems, both within the process
and production levels and to systems at the control and enterprise level.
This possibility also entails security risks. That is why OPC UA uses a range of security
mechanisms:
● Verification of the identity of OPC UA server and clients.
● Checking of the identity of the users.
● Signed/encrypted data exchange between OPC UA server and clients.
These security policies should only be bypassed in cases where it is absolutely necessary:
● During commissioning
● In stand-alone projects without external Ethernet connection
If you have selected the endpoint "None" for "UA Sample Client" of the OPC Foundation, for
example, the program issues a clear warning:
Note
Disabling security policies you do not want
If you have selected all security policies (default setting) in the secure channel settings of the
S7-1500 OPC UA server – in other words the endpoint "None" (no security) – non-secure
data traffic (neither signed nor encrypted) between the server and client is also possible. The
OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU also sends its public certificate to the client at "None"
(No security). And some clients check this certificate. However, the client does not send a
certificate to the server. The identity of the client remains unknown with "None". Each OPC
UA client can then connect to the server irrespective of any subsequent security settings.
When configuring the OPC UA server, make sure that only security policies that are
compatible with the security concept for your machine or plant are selected. All other security
policies should be disabled.
Recommendation: Use the setting "Basic256Sha256", which means that the server only
accepts Sha256 certificates.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 145
OPC UA communication
9.2 Security at OPC UA
Man-in-the-middle attacks
A "man-in-the-middle" could have positioned itself between server and client. A man-in-the-
middle is a program that intercepts communication between server and client and claims to
be a client or server, and is thus able to obtain information about the S7 program or to set
values in the CPU and attack a machine or plant.
OPC UA uses digital certificates that meet standard X.509 of the International
Telecommunication Union (ITU).
This allows the identity of a program, a computer or an organization to be proven
(authenticated).
Communication
146 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.2 Security at OPC UA
X.509 certificates
An X.509 certificate includes the following information:
● Version number of the certificate
● Serial number of the certificate
● Information on the algorithm used by the certificate authority to sign the certificate.
● Name of the certificate authority
● Start and end of the validity period of the certificate
● Name of the program, person or organization for which/whom the certificate has been
signed by the certificate authority.
● The public key of the program, person or organization.
An X509 certificate thus links an identity (name of a program, person or an organization) to
the public key of the program, person or organization.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 147
OPC UA communication
9.2 Security at OPC UA
Signing
The signature makes it possible to prove the integrity and source of a message as detailed
below.
Signing starts with the sender creating a hash value from the plain text (plain text message).
The sender then encrypts the hash value with its private key and subsequently transfers the
plain text together with the encrypted hash value to the recipient. To verify the signature, the
recipient needs the public key of the sender (this is contained in the X509 certificate of the
sender). The recipient uses the sender's public key to decrypt the hash value received. The
recipient then forms the hash value themselves from the plain text received (the hash
process is contained in the sender's certificate). The recipient compares the two hash
values:
● If the two hash values are identical, the plain text message has reached the receiver
unchanged and has not been manipulated.
● If the two hash values do not match, the plain text message has not reached the receiver
unchanged. The plain text message has been manipulated or has been distorted during
transfer.
Encryption
Encrypting data prevents unauthorized parties from reading the content. X509 certificates
are not encrypted; they are public and can be viewed by anyone.
Encryption involves the sender encrypting the plain text message with the public key of the
recipient. To do so, the sender requires the recipient's X509 certificate, as it contains the
public key of the recipient. The recipient decrypts the message with their private key. Only
the recipient can decrypt the message: They alone hold the private key. The private key
must therefore never be disclosed.
Communication
148 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.2 Security at OPC UA
Secure channel
OPC UA uses the private and public key of client and server to establish a secure
connection, the secure channel. Once the secure connection has been established, the
client and server generate an internal key only known to them which they both use for
signing and encrypting messages. This symmetric process (a shared key) is much faster
than asymmetric processes (private and public key).
Note
The OPC UA server of the S7-1500 uses application certificates also for the security
setting "None" (No security). This ensures compatibility to OPC UA V1.1 and earlier
versions.
Note
Software certificates are not supported in STEP 7 V15.
Note
User certificates are not supported in STEP 7 V15.
These certificates are end-entity certificates: They identify, for example, a person, an
organization, a company or an instance (installation) of a software.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 149
OPC UA communication
9.2 Security at OPC UA
Communication
150 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.2 Security at OPC UA
Using OpenSSL
OpenSSL is a tool for generating certificates. You can also use other tools, for example
XCA, a type of key management software with a graphical user interface for an improved
overview of certificates issued.
To work with OpenSSL under Windows, follow these steps:
1. Install OpenSSL under Windows. If you are using a 64-bit version of the operating
system, install OpenSSL in the "C:\OpenSSL-Win64" directory, for example. You can
obtain OpenSSL-Win64 as a download from various providers for open source software.
2. Create a directory, for example "C:\demo".
3. Open the command line (cmd.exe). To do so, click "Start" and enter "cmd" in the search
field. Right-click "cmd.exe" in the results list and run the program as an administrator.
Windows then opens the command line (DOS prompt)
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 151
OPC UA communication
9.2 Security at OPC UA
4. Change to the "C:\demo" directory. To do this, enter the following command: "cd
C:\demo".
5. Set the following network variables:
– set RANDFILE=c:\demo\.rnd
– set OPENSSL_CONF=C:\OpenSSL-Win64\bin\openssl.cfg
The figure below shows the command line with the following commands:
6. Now start OpenSSL. If OpenSSL has been installed in the C:\OpenSSL-Win64 directory,
enter the following: C:\OpenSSL-Win64\bin\openssl.exe The figure below shows the
command line with the following command:
7. Generate a private key. Save the key to the "myKey.key" file. The key in this example is
1024 bits long; for greater RSA security, use 2048 bits in practice. Enter the following
command: "genrsa -out myKey.key 2048" ("genrsa -out myKey.key 1024" in the
example). The figure below shows the command line with the command and the output of
OpenSSL:
8. Generate a CSR (Certificate Signing Request). To do this, enter the following command:
"req -new -key myKey.key -out myRequest.csr". During execution of this command,
OpenSSL queries information about your certificate:
– Country name: for example "DE" for Germany, "FR" for France
– State or province name: for example "Bavaria".
– Location Name: for example "Augsburg".
– Organization Name: Enter the name of your company.
– Organizational Unit Name: for example "IT"
– Common Name: for example "OPC UA client of machine A"
– Email Address:
Communication
152 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.2 Security at OPC UA
Important: The IP address of the client program has to be stored in the "Subject Alternative
Name" field of the created certificate; otherwise, the CPU will not accept the certificate.
The information you enter is added to the certificate. The figure below shows the command
line with the command and the output of OpenSSL:
The command creates a file in the C:\demo directory containing the Certificate Signing
Request (CSR); in the example, this is "myRequest.csr".
The command generates an X.509 certificate with the attributes that you transfer with the
CSR (in the example "myRequest.csr"), for example with a validity of one year (-days 365).
The command also signs the certificate with your private key ("myKey.key" in the example).
Your communication partners can use your public key (contained in your certificate) to check
whether your certificate is really from you. This rules out your certificate having been
manipulated by an attacker.
With self-signed certificates, you yourself confirm that the information in your certificate is
correct. There is no independent body that checks your information.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 153
OPC UA communication
9.2 Security at OPC UA
Communication
154 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.2 Security at OPC UA
Layers required
The figure below shows the three layers that are always required for establishing a
connection: the transport layer, the secure channel and the session.
Figure 9-6 Necessary layers: transport layer, secure channel and session
● Transport layer:
This layer sends and receives messages. OPC UA uses an optimized TCP-based binary
protocol here. The transport layer is the basis for the subsequent secure channel.
● Secure channel
The secure channel receives the data received from the transport layer, and forwards that
data to the session. The secure channel forwards data of the session that is to be sent to
the transport layer.
In "Sign" security mode, the secure channel signs the data (messages) that is sent. When
a message is received, the secure channel checks the signature to detect any
manipulations.
With a "SignAndEncrypt" security policy, the secure channel signs and encrypts the send
data. Data received is decrypted by the secure channel, and the secure channel then
checks the signature.
With the "No security" security policy, the message packages pass the secure channel
unchanged (the messages are received and sent in plain text).
● Session
The session forwards the messages from the secure channel to the application, or
receives from the application the messages that are to be sent. The application uses the
process values or provides the values.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 155
OPC UA communication
9.2 Security at OPC UA
Communication
156 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
This array can be read completely in one pass by OPC UA clients (see Addressing nodes
(Page 132)). The check boxes at "Accessible from HMI/OPC UA" and "Writable from
HMI/OPC UA" are activated for all the components of the array.
Result: OPC UA clients can both read and write these components.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 157
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Rules
● Only allow read access to PLC tags and tags of data blocks in STEP 7 if this is necessary
for communication with other systems (controllers, embedded systems or MES).
You should not enable other PLC tags.
● Only allow write access over OPC UA if write rights are genuinely necessary for specific
PLC tags and tags of data blocks.
● If you have reset the "Accessible from HMI/OPC UA" option for all elements of a data
block, the data block for an OPC UA client is no longer visible in the address space of the
OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU.
● You can also prevent access to an entire data block centrally (see What you need to
know about OPC UA clients (Page 142)). This setting "overrules" the settings for the
components in the DB editor.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to completely hide a data block for OPC UA clients or to protect a data
block from write access from OPC UA clients:
1. Select the data block to be protected in the project tree.
2. Select the "Properties" shortcut menu.
Communication
158 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Note
Effect on settings in the DB editor
If you hide a DB using the DB attribute described here, the settings for the components in
the DB editor are no longer relevant; individual components can no longer be accessed or
written.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 159
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
9.3.1.4 Exporting the XML file with the enabled PLC tags
Note
Server methods are not included in the OPC UA export file.
Communication
160 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Tip
The following FAQ contains a converter with which you can convert the export file into CSV
format. You then obtain a list of the tags of the CPU that can be accessed by OPC UA.
You can find the FAQ on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742903).
Requirement
● You have acquired a Runtime license for the operation of the OPC UA server; see
Licenses for the OPC UA server (Page 179).
● When using certificates for secure communication (for example HTTPS, Secure OUC,
OPC UA), make sure that the relevant modules have the current time of day and the
current date. Otherwise, the modules will evaluate the certificates used as invalid and
secure communication will not work.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 161
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Application name
The application name is the name of the OPC UA application (server). The name is
displayed under "OPC UA > General":
● The default setting for the server name is: "SIMATIC.S7-1500.OPC-UAServer:PLC1".
● The default consists of "SIMATIC.S7-1500.OPC-UAServer:" and the name of the CPU
selected under "General > Product information > Name", in this case "PLC_1".
● Clients identify the server using the application name.
The example below originates from UaExpert:
If you have activated the server, you can also use a different name that is meaningful in your
project.
Server addresses
The OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU can be accessed over all internal PROFINET
interfaces of the CPU (as of firmware V2.0), but not over the PROFINET interfaces of
CP/CM.
With SIMATIC S7-1500 SW controllers, access to the OPC UA server is only possible via
PROFINET interfaces that are assigned to the software PLC.
Communication
162 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
In the example, connections to the OPC UA server of the CPU can be established over the
following URLs (Uniform Resource Locator):
Dynamic IP addresses
In the example below, the IP address for the PROFINET interface [X2] has not yet been
specified.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 163
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
WARNING
Access to data (for example structures) with clients that use the OPC UA specification
V1.04
Access via mechanisms that are defined in the OPC UA specification V1.04 is not
supported by S7-1500 CPUs with firmware 2.5! Clients that use these mechanisms to
access data of the OPC UA Servers possibly operate with incorrect values.
Communication
164 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Note
No error message following attempt to register more than the configured maximum number
of registrable nodes
If a client tries to register more nodes during runtime than the configured maximum number,
the server of the S7-1500 CPU only registers the configured maximum number. From the
configured maximum number of registrable nodes, the server sends the client the regular
string node IDs so the speed advantage gained by registration for these nodes is lost. The
client does not receive an error message.
When configuring, make sure you have a sufficient reserve or have the client calculate the
maximum number of nodes allowed before registration.
See also
Which ports are used by the various services for data transfer over TCP and UDP, and what
are the points to note when using routers and firewalls?
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/8970169)
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 165
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
In the example, following a value change the OPC UA server will send a new message every
200 ms if the OPC UA client requests an update.
If the OPC UA client requests an update every 1000 ms, for example, the OPC UA server
will only send a notification with the new values once every 1000 ms (one second).
If the client requests an update every 100 ms, the server will still only send a message every
200 ms (minimum publishing interval).
Communication
166 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 167
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
See also
Generating server certificates with STEP 7 (Page 174)
Secured transferring of messages (Page 154)
Communication
168 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Result
The server now trusts the client. If the server certificate is also considered trusted, the server
and client can establish a secure connection.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 169
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
NOTICE
Setting after commissioning
In order to avoid security risks, deactivate the "Automatically accept client certificates
during runtime" option again after commissioning.
Communication
170 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
By default, a server certificate is created that uses SHA256 signing. The following security
policies are enabled:
● None
Insecure end point
Note
Disabling security policies you do not want
If you have selected all security policies (default setting) in the secure channel settings of
the S7-1500 OPC UA server – in other words the endpoint "No security" – non-secure
data traffic (neither signed nor encrypted) between the server and client is also possible.
The identity of the client remains unknown with "No security". Each OPC UA client can
then connect to the server irrespective of any subsequent security settings.
When configuring the OPC UA server, make sure that only security policies that are
compatible with the security concept for your machine or plant are selected. All other
security policies should be disabled.
Recommendation: If possible, use the setting "Basic256Sha256".
● Basic128Rsa15 -Sign
Insecure end point, supports a series of algorithms that use the hash algorithm RSA15
and 128-bit encryption.
This endpoint protects the integrity of the data through signing.
● Basic128Rsa15 -Sign & Encrypt
Secure endpoint, supports a series of algorithms that use the hash algorithm RSA15 and
128-bit encryption.
This endpoint protects the integrity and confidentiality of the data through signing and
encrypting.
● Basic256Rsa15 -Sign
Secure endpoint, supports a series of algorithms that use the hash algorithm RSA15 and
256-bit encryption.
This endpoint protects the integrity of the data through signing.
● Basic256Rsa15 -Sign & Encrypt
Secure endpoint, supports a series of algorithms that use the hash algorithm RSA15 and
256-bit encryption.
This end point protects the integrity and confidentiality of the data through signing and
encrypting.
● Basic256Sha256 - Sign
Secure endpoint, supports a series of algorithms for 256-bit hashing and 256-bit
encryption.
This endpoint protects the integrity of the data through signing.
● Basic256Sha256 - Sign & Encrypt
Secure endpoint, supports a series of algorithms for 256-bit hashing and 256-bit
encryption.
This endpoint protects the integrity and confidentiality of the data through signing and
encryption.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 171
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
To enable the security setting click the check box in the relevant line.
Note
If you use the settings "Basic256Sha256 -Sign" and "Basic256Sha256 -Sign & Encrypt", the
OPC UA server and OPC UA clients must use "SHA256"-signed certificates.
For the settings "Basic256Sha256 -Sign" and "Basic256Sha256 -Sign & Encrypt", the
certificate authority of STEP 7 automatically signs the certificates with "SHA256".
Communication
172 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
3. In the properties of the CPU click "Protection & Security > Certificate manager".
4. Double-click <add>in the "Device certificates" table.
STEP 7 opens a dialog.
5. Click "Add".
6. Select the "OPC UA client" entry from the list at the "Usage".
Attention:
Under "Alternative name of the certificate holder (SAN)" the IP addresses under which
the CPU in your system can be accessed has to be entered.
You must therefore configure the IP interface of the CPU before you have generate a
Client certificate.
7. Click "OK".
STEP 7 now lists the Client certificate in the in the "Device certificates" table.
8. Right-click this row and select the "Export certificate" entry from the shortcut menu.
9. Select a directory in which you store the Client certificate.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 173
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Result
The server now trusts the client. If the server certificate is also considered trusted, the server
and client can establish a secure connection.
Communication
174 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
3. The dialog for generating new certificates is displayed (figure below). The values for an
example are already entered:
4. Use other parameters if this is necessary in accordance with the security specifications in
your company or your customer.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 175
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Communication
176 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Note
To increase security, you should only allow access to the OPC UA server with user
authentication.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 177
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Requirement
Before you can edit the security settings, the project must be protected and you must be
logged on with sufficient rights, for example as administrator.
Communication
178 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Runtime licenses
A license is required to run the OPC UA server of the S7-1500 CPU. The type of license
required depends on the performance of the respective CPU. The following license types are
differentiated:
● SIMATIC OPC UA S7-1500 small (required for CPU 1511, CPU 1512, CPU 1513, ET
200SP CPUs, CPU 1515SP PC)
● SIMATIC OPC UA S7-1500 medium (required for CPU 1515, CPU 1516, Software
Controller CPU 1507, CPU 1516pro-2PN)
● SIMATIC OPC UA S7-1500 large (required for CPU 1517, CPU 1518)
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 179
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
The required license type is displayed under "Properties > General > Runtime licenses >
OPC-UA > Type of required license":
Communication
180 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 181
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Communication
182 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
A Call of the server method and management of the "Done" information (method complete)
① Asynchronous call of the server method
② Asynchronous "Done" information for the method called (method complete)
B Wait for OPC UA client calls, management of calls in the queue, forwarding of "Done" information from the cyclic
user program to the OPC UA client
③ Data transfer from the OPC UA server to the method instances of the user program and vice versa
C Check whether method has been called.
If it has, forwarding of input data from the OPC UA server to the method instance of the user program and feed-
back to the method instance that the method has been called ("called")
④ Synchronous call of the instruction OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre as a multi-instance stating the storage area for the
input data from the OPC UA server.
The return value indicates whether or not the method has been called by the OPC UA client.
⑤ Check whether the method has been completed or is still active ("busy").
D Check whether the method has been completed.
If it has, the output data of the method instance is forwarded to the OPC UA server and the method instance is
notified that the method has been completed. The OPC UA server is notified.
⑥ Call of the method FB (in this case: FB Cool) with the required instance and the process parameters
Figure 9-13 Integrating the server method
Note
Methods are not included in OPC UA XML export
If you export the OPC UA information model, the methods generated as described above will
not be included in the exported XML file.
See also
Example program for providing a method for OPC UA clients (Page 190)
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 183
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
9.3.4.1 OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre
Introduction
This section describes the instruction "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre".
Because the instructions "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre" and "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost"
always have to be called up in pairs in the user program, please also take into account the
section on the instruction "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost".
Declaration of tags
Declare an instance of the instruction "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre" and the tags with which
you supply the instruction parameters, see also Example program for providing a method for
OPC UA clients (Page 190).
Communication
184 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Note
Name of the multiple instance
The multiple instance has to be named "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre_Instance", otherwise
no method is created on the server.
Use drag-and-drop to move the instruction from the folder "Instructions > Communication
> OPC UA > OPC UA Server" to the editor.
Next, click "Multi-instance".
● When the server method has one or more output parameters, you must declare a tag with
the name "UAMethod_InParameters".
Start by creating a user-defined data type (UDT) for the input parameters of the server
method.
Then use this UDT for the tag "UAMethod_InParameters".
In the example, the data type is called "UDT_OpenDoorInArguments" and includes the
element Number.
Alternative:
You can also assign the data type "Struct" to the tag "UAMethod_InParameters". Then
create the components of this data type according to the input parameters of the server
method (same names and data types).
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 185
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Communication
186 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
9.3.4.2 OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost
Introduction
This section describes the instruction "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost".
Because the instructions "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre" and "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost"
always have to be called up in pairs in the user program, please also take into account the
section on the instruction "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre".
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 187
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Declaration of tags
Declare an instance of the instruction "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost" and the tags with which
you supply the instruction parameters, see also Example program for providing a method for
OPC UA clients (Page 190).
The following points are important for the declaration:
● Create the instruction "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost" as a multi-instance in the calling
function block.
Note
Name of the multiple instance
The multiple instance has to be named "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost_Instance",
otherwise no method is created on the server.
Use drag-and-drop to move the instruction from the folder "Instructions > Communication
> OPC UA > OPC UA Server" to the editor. Next, click "Multi-instance".
● When the server method has one or more output parameters, you must declare a tag with
the name "UAMethod_OutParameters".
Start by creating a user-defined data type (UDT) for the output parameters of the server
method.
Then use this UDT for the tag "UAMethod_OutParameters".
In the example, the data type is called "UDT_OpenDoorOutArguments"; the only output
parameter is Result.
Alternative:
You can also assign the data type "Struct" to the tag "UAMethod_OutParameters". Then
create the components of this data type according to the output parameters of the server
method (same names and data types).
Communication
188 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 189
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Communication
190 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Program structure
The program is divided into the following sections:
1. Calling the "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre" instruction to determine if the server method
was called by a client.
2. If the server method was called, the server method is executed. It defines the actual
functionality when the method is called by an OPC UA client.
3. When the server method has been completed, the instruction
"OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost" is called. This section informs the operating system that
the server method has been executed.
Declaration
The following figure shows the declaration of local tags for the example program:
SCL program
The following program shows how you use OPC UA instructions to provide a method for
OPC UA clients that is executed in your user program (server method).
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 191
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Server method
When the tag "#Started" has the value "TRUE", this starts the actual user program (lines 15
to 31).
You have all kinds of programming options in this section: You can read in or output process
values, access global data blocks, call functions and function blocks, etc.
The application program may take several cycles.
To signal the end of the user program set the tag "#Method_Finished" to "TRUE".
With "#Method_Result" you transfer a self-defined error code that is used at the block
parameter "UAMethod_Result" of the instruction "OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost".
Communication
192 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
The operating system then takes over the acknowledgment to the client that called the
method.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 193
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Deleting method
If you no longer make a server method available and want to delete it, you not only have to
remove the call of the corresponding FB, but also delete the instance data block.
If the instance data block is not deleted, the method is visible in the address space. The tags
are not supplied.
See also
Server methods (Page 180)
Communication
194 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Error codes
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 195
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Communication
196 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 197
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Communication
198 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 199
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Communication
200 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 201
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Communication
202 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Introduction
OPC UA is universally applicable: The standard itself does not, for example, specify how
PLC tags are to be named. It is also up to the individual user (application developer) to
program and name server methods that can be called over OPC UA.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 203
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Example: Euromap 77
Euromap 77 standardizes the exchange of data between injection molding machines and the
higher-level MES (manufacturing execution system). This allows the MES to connect all
lower-level injection molding machines in the same way.
The standardized data interface facilitates the integration of injection molding machines into
a plant.
Note
Euromap 77, Euromap 83 and OPC UA for Devices (DI)
Release candidate 2 has transferred some of the Euromap definitions to Euromap 83. You
will therefore also need to import the OPC UA server interface of Euromap 83.
"OPC UA for Devices" is a generally applicable information model for the configuration of
hardware and software components. The information model also serves as the basis for
other companion standards and is therefore also imported.
Communication
204 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 205
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
6. A warning that the selected model is based on more than one model will appear. Click
"Yes".
This also selects the underlying model "Opc.Ua.Di.Nodset2.ua".
7. The "New Model" dialog opens.
In the example, you do not change the set values and click "Finish" to apply the values.
"http://yourorganisation.org/Demo/" is entered under "Namespace URI".
Use a meaningful namespace of your business in your project.
8. UaModeler opens the project.
Under "Information Model", right-click on "DeviceSet" and then on "Add Instance".
Communication
206 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Result: The address space of the OPC UA server contains an object in accordance with
Euromap 77 or Euromap 83 as a representation of the injection molding machine, for
example for an MES (Management Execution System). You can generate other sub-
objects and any other configurations in the same way to design the OPC UA server as
required.
13.Save the project.
14.Under "Project", select the demo project:
15.Right-click on "demo.ua" and select "Export XML" from the shortcut menu.
UaModeler will export the project to the "demo.xml" file.
16.Close UaModeler.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 207
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
If you do not add the namespace, the element "<si:VariableMapping>" will not be known
in the file.
4. Save the "demo.xml" file and close the editor.
Communication
208 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
The above image of the machine generated in accordance with Euromap 77 specifications is
now available in the address space of the OPC UA server.
Step 4: Creating PLC tags and server methods in the STEP 7 project
In the example, you have assigned the PLC tag
"MyIMM_MES_Interface"."InjectionUnits.NodeVersion" to the UA tag with
NodeId="ns=1;s=MyIMM_MES_Interface.InjectionUnits.NodeVersion"; see "Step 2:
Assigning PLC tags".
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 209
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Proceed as follows to create the required PLC tag with STEP 7 (TIA Portal):
1. Generate a "MyIMM_MES_Interface" data block.
2. Generate the DB element "InjectionUnits.NodeVersion". Use the SIMATIC data type
compatible with the OPC UA data type. The UA tag in the example has the OPC UA data
type "String" (DataType="String"). The compatible SIMATIC data type is WSTRING.
Note
Import blocked for namespace "http://www.siemens.com/simatic-s7-opcua"
You cannot import server interfaces with the namespace "http://www.siemens.com/simatic-
s7-opcua" to an S7-1500 CPU because this namespace is reserved for S7-1500 CPUs
(standard SIMATIC server interface) and is not available for imports.
If you want to import a server interface with the namespace
"http://www.siemens.com/simatic-s7-opcua", open the server interface to be imported (OPC
UA XML file) and change the namespace in the relevant places. The file thus changed can
then be imported.
WARNING
No checking of imported OPC UA XML files
Protect these OPC UA XML files against unauthorized manipulation since STEP 7 does not
check the integrity of these files.
Communication
210 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Recommendation
To minimize risks in the case of an extension or adaptation of the server address space,
follow these steps:
1. Protect the project (project navigation: Security settings > Settings).
2. Export the corresponding server interface before the extension or adaptation.
3. Revise this OPC UA XML file.
4. Import the file again as a server interface.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 211
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Communication
212 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
UDT "Guid"
For the basic data type "Guid", create the following PLC data type. The default values used
as examples can also be set differently.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 213
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
UDT "LocalizedText"
For the basic data type "LocalizedText", create the following PLC data type:
EncodingByte Meaning
0 The fields Locale and Text are empty
1 The field Locale has content, the field Text is empty
2 The field Locale is empty, the field Text has content
3 The fields Locale and Text have content
UDT "ByteString"
For the basic data type "ByteString", create the following PLC data type; in this case, for
example, a ByteString array with 12 elements:
UDT "XmlElement"
An XmlElement is a serialized XML fragment (UTF-8 string)
For the basic data type "XmlElement", create the following PLC data type:
Communication
214 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Definition of write and read rights in the information model (OPC UA XML)
In the OPC UA information model, the attribute "AccessLevel" regulates access to tags.
AccessLevel is defined bit by bit:
Bit 0 = CurrentRead and Bit 1 = CurrentWrite. The meaning of the bit combinations is as
follows:
● AccessLevel = 0: no access
● AccessLevel = 1: read only
● AccessLevel = 2 write only
● AccessLevel = 3: read+write
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 215
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Example
● AccessLevel = 1 (read only) in the OPC UA server interface
● Both "Accessible from HMI/OPC UA" and "Writable from HMI/OPC UA" are selected in
the PLC tag table
Result: The tag is only read.
Rules
If write rights are required:
● AccessLevel = 2 oder 3
● "Writable from HMI/OPC UA" enabled
If read rights are required:
● AccessLevel = 1 (AccessLevel 3 is also possible, but misleading. The settings suggests
that an OPC UA client has write and read rights)
● "Accessible from HMI/OPC UA" enabled, "Writable from HMI/OPC UA" disabled
If neither read nor write rights are to be granted (no access):
● AccessLevel = 0
● "Accessible from HMI/OPC UA" disabled
Only one of the two conditions needs to be met to block all access. In this case, review
whether the tag in the OPC UA server interface is actually necessary at all.
Communication
216 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Access table
"Accessible from HMI/OPC UA" must be set if access over OPC UA is to be possible at all.
"Writable from HMI/OPC UA" must be set to allow an OPC UA client to write a tag / DB
element.
Please see the table for the resulting access right.
(x = don't care)
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 217
OPC UA communication
9.3 Using the S7-1500 as an OPC UA server
Technical specification value CPU 1510SP (F) CPU 1505 (S/SP/SP F/SP T/SP TF) CPU 1507S (F)
CPU 1511 (C/F/T/TF) CPU 1515 (F/T/TF) CPU 1517 (F/T/TF)
CPU 1512C CPU 1515 SP PC (F/T/TF) CPU 1518 (F)
CPU 1512SP (F) CPU 1516 (F/T/TF)
CPU 1513 (F)
Maximum number of OPC UA server 10 10 10
interfaces (information models)
Maximum number of OPC UA nodes 1000 5000 30000
Maximum size of loadable OPC UA 1024 KB 5120 KB 15360 KB
server interfaces
Maximum number of usable server 20 50 100
methods or max. number of server
method instances (instructions
OPC_UA_ServerMethodPre,
OPC_UA_ServerMethodPost)
Note
Use a memory card with sufficient capacity
Depending on the number and scale of the server interfaces to be loaded, the download of
the hardware configuration to the CPU may be aborted with an error message.
The cause of the abort is not displayed in the diagnostic buffer.
Use a memory card with sufficient capacity and disable any server interfaces not required
(properties of the server interface, "Enable server interface and download to CPU" option).
Communication
218 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Routing 10
10.1 S7 routing
Definition of S7 routing
S7 routing is the transfer of data beyond S7 subnet boundaries. You can send information
from a transmitter to a receiver across several s7 subnets. The gateway from one S7 subnet
to one or more other subnets is provided by the S7 router The S7 router is a device which
has interfaces to the respective S7 subnets. S7 routing is possible via various S7 subnets
(PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet and/or PROFIBUS).
Note
Firewall and S7 routing
A firewall does not recognize the IP address of the sender during S7 routing when the
sender is located outside the S7 subnet adjacent to the firewall.
An overview of the devices that support the "S7 routing" function is provided in this FAQ
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/584459).
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 219
Routing
10.1 S7 routing
Communication
220 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Routing
10.1 S7 routing
The following figure shows the access from a PG via PROFINET to PROFIBUS. CPU 1 is
the S7 router between S7 subnet 1 and S7 subnet 2; CPU 2 is the S7 router between S7
subnet 2 and S7 subnet 3.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 221
Routing
10.1 S7 routing
Using S7 routing
For the CPU, select the PG/PC interface and the S7 subnet in the "Go online" dialog of
STEP 7. S7 routing is performed automatically.
Communication
222 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Routing
10.2 Data record routing
Additional information
● The allocation of connection resources with S7 routing is described in the section
Allocation of connection resources (Page 230).
● You can find more information on setting up TeleService in the STEP 7 online help.
● You can find more information on S7 routing and TeleService adapters when you search
the Internet using the following links:
– Device manual Industrial Software Engineering Tools TS Adapter IE Basic
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/51311100)
– Downloads for the TS Adapter
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805406/133100)
See also
HMI communication (Page 64)
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 223
Routing
10.2 Data record routing
Example: Data record routing with the Port Configuration Tool (PCT)
You can use the Port Configuration Tool (PCT) to configure the IO link master of the ET200
and assign parameters to connected IO link devices. The subnets are connected via data
record routers. Data record routers are, for example, CPUs, CPs, IMs, IO link master.
You can learn about the constellations of data record routers supported by the PCT in this
FAQ (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/87611392).
Communication
224 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Routing
10.2 Data record routing
The figure below shows an example configuration with the data record routing with PCT.
Figure 10-6 Example configuration for data record routing with PCT
Additional information
● The differences that exist between "normal" routing and data record routing are described
in this FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/7000978).
● Whether or not the CPU, CP or CM you are using supports data record routing can be
found in the relevant manuals.
● The allocation of connection resources with data record routing is described in the section
Allocation of connection resources (Page 230).
● You can find additional information on configuration with STEP 7 in the STEP 7 online
help.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 225
Connection resources 11
11.1 Connection resources of a station
Introduction
Some communications services require connections. Connections occupy resources in the
automation system (station). The connection resources are made available to the station by
the CPUs, communications processors (CPs) and communications modules (CMs).
Communication
226 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Connection resources
11.1 Connection resources of a station
The figure below shows an example of how individual components make connection
resources available to an S7-1500 station.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 227
Connection resources
11.1 Connection resources of a station
Table 11- 1 Maximum number of connection resources supported for some CPU types
Example
You have configured a CPU 1518-4PN/DP with a communications module CM 1542-1 and a
communications processor CP 1542-5.
● Maximum connection resources of the station: 384
● Available connection resources:
– CPU 1518-4 PN/DP: 192
– CM 1542-1: 64
– CP 1542-5: 16
– Total: 272
The setup provides 272 connection resources. By adding additional communications
modules, the station can support a maximum of 112 additional connection resources.
Communication
228 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Connection resources
11.1 Connection resources of a station
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 229
Connection resources
11.2 Allocation of connection resources
Communication
230 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Connection resources
11.2 Allocation of connection resources
Table 11- 2 Maximum occupied connection resources for different HMI devices
Basic Panel 1
Comfort Panel 21
RT Advanced 21
RT Professional 3
1 If you do not use system diagnostics or alarm configuration, the station occupies only one connec-
tion resource per HMI connection.
Example: You have configured the following HMI connections for a CPU 1516-3 PN/DP:
● Two HMI connections to an HMI TP700 Comfort. (2 connection resources each)
● One HMI connection to an HMI KTP1000 Basic. (1 connection resource)
In total 5 connection resources are occupied for HMI communication in the CPU.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 231
Connection resources
11.2 Allocation of connection resources
Data record routing also enables transfer of data beyond S7 subnets from an engineering
station connected to PROFINET to various field devices via PROFIBUS.
With data record routing, as with S7 routing, two of the special connection resources for S7
routing are also occupied on every data record router.
Note
Connection resources with data record routing
With data record routing, on the data record router, two special connection resources for S7
routing are occupied. Neither the data record connection nor the allocated connection
resources are displayed in the table of connection resources.
Communication
232 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Connection resources
11.2 Allocation of connection resources
Offline
During configuration of connections, STEP 7 monitors the occupation of the connection
resources. If the maximum possible number of connection resources is exceeded, STEP 7
signals this with a suitable warning.
Online
The CPU monitors the use of connection resources in the automation system. If you
establish more connections in the user program than those provided by the automation
system, the CPU acknowledges the instruction to establish the connection with an error.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 233
Connection resources
11.3 Display of the connection resources
Figure 11-4 Example: Reserved and available connection resources (offline view)
Communication
234 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Connection resources
11.3 Display of the connection resources
The warning triangle in the column of the dynamic station resources is therefore displayed
because the sum of the maximum available connection resources of CPU, CP and CM (=
294 connection resources) exceeds the station limit of 256.
Note
Available connection resources exceeded
STEP 7 signals the exceeding of the station-specific connection resources with a warning.
To make full use of the connection resources from the CPU, CP and CM, either use a CPU
with a higher maximum number of available station-specific connection resources or reduce
the number of communications connections.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 235
Connection resources
11.3 Display of the connection resources
The online view of the "Connection resources" table in addition to the offline view also
contains columns with the connection resources currently being used. Thus, the online view
displays all used connection resources in the automation system, regardless of how the
connection was set up.
The "Other communication" row displays connection resources assigned for communication
with external devices. The table is updated automatically.
Note
If a routed S7 connection goes through a CPU, the required connection resources of the
CPU do not appear in the table of connection resources!
Communication
236 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Connection resources
11.3 Display of the connection resources
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 237
Connection diagnostics 12
Connections table in the online view
After selecting a CPU in the Devices & networks editor of STEP 7, you will see the status of
your connections displayed in the online view of the connections table.
After selecting the connection in the connections table, you obtain detailed diagnostic
information in the "Connection information" tab.
Communication
238 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Connection diagnostics
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 239
Connection diagnostics
Communication
240 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Connection diagnostics
Additional information
You will find the description of the web server functionality in the function manual Web server
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560).
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 241
Industrial Ethernet Security with CP 1543-1 13
All-round protection - the task of Industrial Ethernet Security
With Industrial Ethernet Security, individual devices, automation cells or network segments
of an Ethernet network can be protected. Data transfer can also be protected by a
combination of different security measures:
● Data espionage
● Data manipulation
● Unauthorized access
Security measures
● Firewall
– IP firewall with stateful packet inspection (layer 3 and 4)
– Firewall also for Ethernet "non-IP" frames according to IEEE 802.3 (layer 2)
– Bandwidth limitation
– Global firewall rules
All network nodes located in the internal network segment of a CP 1543-1 are protected
by its firewall.
● Logging
To allow monitoring, events can be stored in log files that can be read out using the
configuration tool or can be sent automatically to a Syslog server.
● HTTPS
For encrypted transfer of websites, for example during process control.
● FTPS (explicit mode)
For encrypted transfer of files.
● Secure NTP
For secure time-of-day synchronization and transmission.
● SNMPv3
For secure transmission of network analysis information safe from eavesdropping.
● VPN groups
You can combine the CP 1543-1 with other security modules into VPN groups through
configuration. IPsec tunnels are established between all the security modules of a VPN
group (VPN). All internal nodes of these security modules can communicate securely with
each other through this tunnel.
● Protection for devices and network segments
The firewall and VPN groups protective functions can be applied to the operation of single
devices, multiple devices, or entire network segments.
Additional information
An overview with links to the most important contributions on Industrial Security is available
in this FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/92651441).
Communication
242 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Industrial Ethernet Security with CP 1543-1
13.1 Firewall
13.1 Firewall
Firewall rules
Firewall rules describe which packets are permitted or forbidden in which direction.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 243
Industrial Ethernet Security with CP 1543-1
13.2 Logging
13.2 Logging
Functionality
For test and monitoring purposes, the security module has diagnostics and logging functions.
● Diagnostics functions
These include various system and status functions that you can use in online mode.
● Logging functions
This involves the recording of system and security events. Depending on the event type,
the recording is made in volatile or non-volatile local buffer areas of the CP 1543-1. As an
alternative, it is also possible to record on a network server.
The parameter assignment and evaluation of these functions is only possible with a
network connection.
Functionality
To check the time validity of a certificate and the time stamp of log entries, the date and time
are maintained on the CP 1543-1 as on the CPU. This time can be synchronized with NTP.
The CP 1543-1 forwards the synchronized time to the CPU via the backplane bus of the
automation system. This way the CPU also receives a synchronized time for the time events
in program execution.
The automatic setting and periodic synchronization of the time takes place either via a
secure or non-secure NTP server. You can assign a maximum of 4 NTP servers to the
CP 1543-1. A mixed configuration of non-secure and secure NTP servers is not possible.
Communication
244 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Industrial Ethernet Security with CP 1543-1
13.4 SNMP
13.4 SNMP
Functionality
Like the CPU, the CP 1543-1 supports the transfer of management information using the
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). To achieve this, an "SNMP agent" is
installed on the CP/CPU that receives and responds to the SNMP queries. Information about
the properties of devices capable of SNMP is contained in so-called MIB files (Management
Information Base) for which the user needs to have the appropriate rights.
With SNMPv1, the "community string" is also sent. The "community string" is like a password
that is sent along with the SNMP query. The requested information is sent when the
"community string" is correct. The request is discarded when the string is incorrect.
With SNMPv3, data can be transferred encrypted. To do this, select either an authentication
method or an authentication and encryption method.
Possible selection:
● Authentication algorithm: none, MD5, SHA-1
● Encryption algorithm: none, AES-128, DES
You can deactivate the use of SNMP for the CP/CPU. Deactivate SNMP if the security
guidelines in your network do not permit SNMP or if you use your own SNMP solution.
To find out how to deactivate SNMP for the CPU, refer to section Disabling SNMP
(Page 58).
13.5 VPN
Functionality
For security modules that protect the internal network, VPN (Virtual Private Network) tunnels
provide a secure data connection through the non-secure external network.
The module uses the IPsec protocol (tunnel mode of IPsec) for tunneling.
In STEP 7 you can assign VPN groups to security modules. VPN tunnels are automatically
established between all modules of a VPN group. A module in one project can belong to
several different VPN groups at the same time in the process.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 245
Glossary
Automation system
Programmable logic controller for the open-loop and closed-loop control of process chains of
the process engineering industry and manufacturing technology. The automation system
consists of different components and integrated system functions according to the
automation task.
Bus
Transmission medium that connects several devices together. Data transmission can be
performed electrically or via optical fibers, either in series or in parallel.
Client
Device in a network that requests a service from another device in the network (server).
CM
→ Communications module
Communications module
Module for communications tasks used in an automation system as an interface expansion
of the CPU (for example PROFIBUS) and providing additional communications options
(PtP).
Communications processor
Module for expanded communications tasks covering special applications, for example in the
area of security.
Consistent data
Data that belongs together in terms of content and must not be separated when transferred.
CP
→ Communications processor
CPU
Central Processing Unit - Central module of the S7 automation system with a control and
arithmetic unit, memory, operating system and interface for programming device.
Communication
246 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Glossary
Device
Generic term for:
● Automation systems (PLC, PC, for example)
● Distributed I/O systems
● Field devices (for example, PLC, PC, hydraulic devices, pneumatic devices) and
● Active network components (for example, switches, routers)
● Gateways to PROFIBUS, AS interface or other fieldbus systems
Device certificates
Such certificates are signed by a certificate authority (CA).
The signature of an end-entity certificate is checked with the public key of the certificate
authority certificate.
The "Subject" attribute must not be identical to the "Issuer" attribute.
The "Subject", for example, contains the name of a program as with the OPC UA application
certificate.
"Issuer" is the certificate authority that signed the certificate.
The "CA" field must be set to "False".
DP master
Within PROFIBUS DP, a master in the distributed I/O that behaves according to the EN
50170 standard, Part 3.
→ See also DP slave
DP slave
Slave in the distributed I/O that is operated on PROFIBUS with the PROFIBUS DP protocol
and behaves according to the EN 50170 standard, Part 3.
→ See also DP master
Duplex
Data transmission system; a distinction is made between full and half duplex.
Half duplex: One channel is available for alternate data exchange (sending or receiving
alternately but not at the same time).
Full duplex: Two channels are available for simultaneous data exchange in both directions
(simultaneous sending and receiving in both directions).
End-entity certificate
→ See also device certificate
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 247
Glossary
Ethernet
International standard technology for local area networks (LAN) based on frames. It defines
types of cables and signaling for the physical layer and packet formats and protocols for
media access control.
FETCH/WRITE
Server services using TCP/IP, ISO-on-TCP and ISO for access to system memory areas of
S7 CPUs. Access (client function) is possible from a SIMATIC S5 or a third-party device/PC.
FETCH: Read data directly; WRITE: Write data directly.
Field device
→ Device
Freeport
Freely programmable ASCII protocol; here for data transfer via a point-to-point connection.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol; a network protocol for transferring files via IP networks. FTP is used
to download files from the server to the client or to upload files from the client to the server.
FTP directories can also be created and read out and directories and files can be renamed
or deleted.
HMI
Human Machine Interface, device for visualization and control of automation processes.
IE
→ Industrial Ethernet
IM
→ Interface module
Communication
248 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Glossary
Industrial Ethernet
Guideline for setting up an Ethernet network in an industrial environment. The essential
difference compared with standard Ethernet is the mechanical ruggedness and immunity to
noise of the individual components.
Instruction
The smallest self-contained unit of a user program characterized by its structure, function or
purpose as a separate part of the user program. An instruction represents an operation
procedure for the processor.
Interface module
Module in the distributed I/O system. The interface module connects the distributed I/O
system via a fieldbus to the CPU (IO controller/DP master) and prepares the data for the
I/O modules.
Intermediate CA certificate
This is a certificate authority certificate that is signed with the private key of a root certificate
authority.
An intermediate certificate authority signs end-entity certificates with its private key.
The signature of these end-entity certificates is verified with the public key of the
intermediate certificate authority.
The "Subject" and "Issuer" attributes of the intermediate CA certificate must not be identical.
This certificate authority has after all not signed its certificate itself.
The "CA" field must be set to "True".
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 249
Glossary
IP address
Binary number that is used as a unique address in computer networks in conjunction with the
Internet Protocol (IP). It makes these devices uniquely addressable and individually
accessible. An IPv4 address can be evaluated using a binary subnet mask that results in a
network part or a host part as a structure. The textual representation of an IPv4 address
consists, for example, of 4 decimal numbers with the value range 0 to 255. The decimal
numbers are separated by periods.
ISO protocol
Communications protocol for message or packet-oriented transfer of data in an Ethernet
network. This protocol is hardware-oriented, very fast and allows dynamic data lengths. The
ISO protocol is suitable for medium to large volumes of data.
ISO-on-TCP protocol
Communications protocol capable of S7 routing for packet-oriented transfer of data in an
Ethernet network; provides network addressing. The ISO-on-TCP protocol is suitable for
medium and large volumes of data and allows dynamic data lengths.
MAC address
Worldwide unique device identification for all Ethernet devices. The MAC address is
assigned by the manufacturer and has a 3-byte vendor ID and 3-byte device ID as a
consecutive number.
Master
Higher-level, active participant in the communication/on a PROFIBUS subnet. The master
has rights to access the bus (token), requests data and sends it.
→ See also DP master
Modbus RTU
Remote Terminal Unit; Open communications protocol for serial interfaces based on a
master/slave architecture.
Communication
250 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Glossary
Modbus TCP
Transmission Control Protocol; Open communications protocol for Ethernet based on a
master/slave architecture. The data are transmitted as TCP/IP packets.
Network
A network consists of one or more interconnected subnets with any number of devices.
Several networks can exist alongside each other.
NTP
The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a standard for synchronizing clocks in automation
systems via Industrial Ethernet. NTP uses the connectionless UDP transport protocol for the
Internet.
OPC UA
OPC Unified Automation is a protocol for communication between machines, developed by
the OPC Foundation.
Operating system
Software that allows the use and operation of a computer. The operating system manages
resources such as memory, input and output devices and controls the execution of
programs.
PG
→ Programming device
PNO
→ PROFIBUS user organization
Point-to-point connection
Bidirectional data exchange via communications modules with a serial interface between two
communications partners (and two only).
Port
Physical connector to connect devices to PROFINET. PROFINET interfaces have one or
more ports.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 251
Glossary
Process image
Address area of a programmable logic controller (PLC), in which the signal states of the
inputs and the logical states of the outputs from the connected modules are stored digitally.
PROFIBUS
Process Field Bus - European Fieldbus standard.
PROFIBUS address
Unique identifier of a device connected to PROFIBUS. The PROFIBUS address is sent in
the frame to address a device.
PROFIBUS device
Device with at least one PROFIBUS interface either electrical (for example RS-485) or
optical (for example Polymer Optical Fiber).
PROFIBUS DP
A PROFIBUS with DP protocol that complies with EN 50170. DP stands for distributed I/O =
fast, real-time capable, cyclic data exchange. From the perspective of the user program, the
distributed I/O is addressed in exactly the same way as the centralized IO.
PROFINET
Open component-based industrial communications system based on Ethernet for distributed
automation systems. Communications technology promoted by the PROFIBUS user
organization.
PROFINET device
Device that always has a PROFINET interface (electrical, optical, wireless).
PROFINET interface
Interface of a module capable of communication (for example CPU, CP) with one or more
ports. A MAC address is assigned to the interface in the factory. Along with the IP address
and the device name (from the individual configuration), this interface address ensures that
the PROFINET device is identified uniquely in the network. The interface can be electrical,
optical or wireless.
Communication
252 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Glossary
PROFINET IO
IO stands for input/output; distributed I/O (fast, cyclic data exchange with real-time
capability). From the perspective of the user program, the distributed I/O is addressed in
exactly the same way as the centralized IO.
PROFINET IO as the Ethernet-based automation standard of PROFIBUS & PROFINET
International defines a cross-vendor communication, automation, and engineering model.
With PROFINET IO, a switching technology is used that allows all devices to access the
network at any time. In this way, the network can be used much more efficiently through the
simultaneous data transfer of several devices. Simultaneous sending and receiving is
enabled via the full-duplex operation of Switched Ethernet.
PROFINET IO is based on switched Ethernet with full-duplex operation and a bandwidth of
100 Mbps.
Programming device
Programming devices are essentially compact and portable PCs which are suitable for
industrial applications. They are identified by a special hardware and software configuration
for programmable logic controllers.
Protocol
Agreement on the rules by which the communication between two or more communication
partners transpires.
PtP
Point-to-Point, interface and/or transmission protocol for bidirectional data exchange
between two (and only two) communications partners.
Ring topology
All devices of a network are connected together in a ring.
Root CA certificates
→ See also root certificate
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 253
Glossary
Root certificate
This is the certificate of a certificate authority: It signs end-entity certificates and intermediate
CA certificates with its private key.
The "Subject" attribute and the "Issuer" of this certificate must be identical. This certificate
authority has signed its certificate itself.
The "CA" field must be set to "True".
TIA Portal V14 has such a root CA certificate:
If you configure the OPC UA server of an S7-1500 in the TIA Portal, the TIA Portal generates
an end-entity certificate for the OPC UA server and signs that certificate with its own private
key.
The signature of this end-entity certificate can be verified with the public key of the TIA
Portal. This key can be found in the root CA certificate of the TIA Portal.
Router
Network node with a unique identifier (name and address) that connects subnets together
and allows transportation of data to uniquely identified communications nodes in the
network.
RTU
Modbus RTU (RTU: Remote Terminal Unit, transfers the data in binary form; allows a good
data throughput. The data must be converted to a readable format before it can be
evaluated.
S7 routing
Communication between S7 automation systems, S7 applications or PC stations in different
S7 subnets via one or more network nodes functioning as S7 routers.
SDA service
Send Data with Acknowledge. SDA is an elementary service with which an initiator (for
example DP master) can send a message to other devices and then receives
acknowledgment of receipt immediately afterwards.
SDN service
Send Data with No Acknowledge. This service is used primarily to send data to multiple
stations and the service therefore remains unacknowledged. Suitable for synchronization
tasks and status messages.
Communication
254 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Glossary
Security
Generic term for all the measures taken to protect against
● Loss of confidentiality due to unauthorized access to data
● Loss of integrity due to manipulation of data
● Loss of availability due to the destruction of data
Self-signed certificates
These are certificates that you sign with your private key and use as end-entity certificates.
The signature of these end-entity certificates is verified with your public key.
The "Subject" and "Issuer" attributes of self-signed certificates must be identical: You have
signed your certificate yourself.
The "CA" field must be set to "False".
You can, for example, use self-signed certificates as application certificates for an OPC UA
client.
The procedure required to generate a self-signed certificate with the certificate generator of
the OPC Foundation is described here (Page ).
Server
A device or more generally an object that can provide certain services; the service is
performed at the request of a client.
Slave
Distributed device in a fieldbus system that can only exchange data with a master after the
master has requested this.
→ See also DP slave
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol, uses the wireless UDP transport protocol. SNMP
works in much the same way as the client/server model. The SNMP manager monitors the
network nodes. The SNMP agents collect the various network-specific information in the
individual network nodes and makes this information available in a structured form in the MIB
(Management Information Base). This information allows a network management system to
run detailed network diagnostics.
Subnet
Part of a network whose parameters must be matched up on the devices (for example in
PROFINET). A subnet includes the bus components and all connected stations. Subnets can
be linked together, for example using gateways or routers to form one network.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 255
Glossary
Switch
Network components used to connect several terminal devices or network segments in a
local network (LAN).
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol, connection-oriented network protocol,
generally recognized standard for data exchange in heterogeneous networks.
Time-of-day synchronization
Capability of transferring a standard system time from a single source to all devices in the
system so that their clocks can be set according to the standard time.
Tree topology
Network topology characterized by a branched structure: Two or more bus nodes are
connected to each bus node.
Twisted-pair
Fast Ethernet via twisted-pair cables is based on the IEEE 802.3u standard (100 Base-TX).
The transmission medium is a shielded 2x2 twisted-pair cable with an impedance of 100
Ohms (22 AWG). The transmission characteristics of this cable must meet the requirements
of category 5.
The maximum length of the connection between the terminal and the network component
must not exceed 100 m. The connectors are designed according to the 100Base-TX
standard with the RJ-45 connector system.
UDP
User Datagram Protocol; communications protocol for fast and uncomplicated data transfer,
without acknowledgment. There are no error checking mechanisms as found in TCP/IP.
User program
In SIMATIC, a distinction is made between the CPU operating system and user programs.
The user program contains all instructions, declarations and data by which a system or
process can be controlled. The user program is assigned to a programmable module (for
example, CPU, FM) and can be structured in smaller units.
USS
Universal Serial Interface protocol (Universelles Serielles Schnittstellen-Protokoll); defines
an access method according to the master-slave principle for communication via a serial
bus.
Communication
256 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Glossary
Web server
Software/communications service for data exchange via the Internet. The web server
transfers the documents using standardized transmission protocols (HTTP, HTTPS) to a
Web browser. Documents can be static or put together dynamically from different sources by
the web server on request from the Web browser.
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 257
Index
Module-specific, 235
occupying, 232
A Overview, 28, 226
S7 routing, 231
Advanced Encryption Algorithm, 39
Station specific, 234
AES, 39
Consistency of data, 33
Applicant, 42
CP, 15
Asymmetric encryption, 40
D
B
Data consistency, 33
BRCV, 113
Data record routing, 224
BSEND, 113
Digital certificates, 42
C E
Certificate authorities, 42
E-mail, 20, 68, 88
Certificate subject, 42
End-entity certificate, 45
CM, 15
Establishment and termination of communications, 92
Communication
Export file for OPC UA, 160
Data record routing, 224
HMI communication, 64
Open communication, 66
F
Open User Communication, 66
PG communication, 61 FDL, 68
Point-to-point connection, 121 Fetch, 20
S7 communication, 112 Firewall, 243
S7 routing, 219 Freeport protocol, 121
Communication options FTP, 20, 68, 88, 89
Overview, 20
Communication via PUT/GET instruction
Creating and configuring a connection, 114 G
Communications
GET, 113
Communication protocols, 67
Establishment and termination, 92
Communications module, 15
H
Communications processor, 15
Communications services Handshake Protocol, 41
Connection resources, 28 HMI communication, 20, 64
Connection
Diagnostics, 238
Instructions for Open User Communication, 69 I
Connection diagnostics, 238
IM, 19
Connection resources
Industrial Ethernet Security, 242
Data record routing, 231
Interface module, 19
Display in STEP 7, 234
Interfaces for communication, 16
Display in the Web server, 237
HMI communication, 231
Communication
258 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
Index
O P
Occupation of connection resources, 232
PCT, 224
OPC UA
PG communication, 20, 61
Certificate generator, 150
Point-to-point connection, 20, 121
DB tags, 157
Private Key, 37
End points, 138
Procedure 3964(R), 121
Identifier, 133
Protocols for Open User Communication, 67
Introduction, 127, 128, 129
Public Key, 37
Layer model, 155
PUT, 113
Namespace, 132
OpenSSL, 151
PLC tags, 157
R
Secure channel, 154
Secure connection, 154 Record Protocol, 41
Security mechanisms, 145 RFC 5280, 37
Security settings, 138 Root certificate, 45
Signing and encryption, 147
X.509 certificates, 149
OPC UA client S
Basics, 142
S7 communication, 20, 112, 231
Certificate, 172
S7 routing, 219
OPC UA server
Connection resources, 231
Address range, 134
Secure communication, 37
Addressing, 162
Secure Socket Layer, 41
Application name, 162
Security, 242
Authentication, 177
Security measures, 242
Basics, 130
Firewall, 243
Commissioning, 161
Logging, 244
Customizing the server certificate, 174
Communication
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF 259
Index
NTP, 244
SNMP, 245
Self-signed certificates, 42
Server certificate, 174
Setting up a connection, 29
By configuring, 80
ISO connection with CP 1543-1, 81
Signature, 43
SNMP, 20, 245
SSL, 41
Symmetric encryption, 39
Syslog, 244
System data type, 70
T
TCON, 69
TCP, 20, 67, 76
TDISCON, 69
Time-of-day synchronization, 20
TLS, 41
Transport Layer Security, 41
TRCV, 69
TRCV_C, 69
TSEND, 69
TSEND_C, 69
U
UDP, 20, 67, 76
URCV, 113
USEND, 113
USS protocol, 121
W
Web server, 20
Write, 20
X
X.509, 37
Communication
260 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E03735815-AF
___________________
Preface
___________________
Documentation guide 1
2
___________________
Description
SIMATIC
Parameter
___________________
assignment/addressing 3
PROFINET
PROFINET with STEP 7 V15 Diagnostics and
4
___________________
maintenance
5
___________________
Functions
Function Manual
12/2017
A5E03444486-AH
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Scope
This documentation is the basic documentation for all SIMATIC products from the
PROFINET environment. The product documentation is based on this documentation.
The examples are based on the functionality of the S7-1500 automation system.
What's new in the PROFINET function manual, version 12/2017 compared to version 09/2016
This manual (version 12/2017) encompasses the following new functions compared to the
previous version (version 09/2016):
What's new in the PROFINET function manual, Version 09/2016 compared to Version 12/2014
This manual (version 09/2016) encompasses the following new functions compared to the
previous version (version 12/2014):
Conventions
STEP 7: We refer to "STEP 7" in this documentation as a synonym for the configuration and
programming software "STEP 7 as of V12 (TIA Portal)" and subsequent versions.
This documentation contains pictures of the devices described. The figures may differ
slightly from the device supplied.
You should also pay particular attention to notes such as the one shown below:
Note
A note contains important information on the product, on handling of the product and on the
section of the documentation to which you should pay particular attention.
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Industry Mall
The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive
solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power
(TIP).
You can find catalogs for all automation and drive products on the Internet
(https://mall.industry.siemens.com).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Documentation guide ............................................................................................................................ 12
2 Description............................................................................................................................................ 17
2.1 Introduction to PROFINET ..................................................................................................... 17
2.1.1 PROFINET terms ................................................................................................................... 19
2.1.2 Basic terminology of communication ..................................................................................... 22
2.1.3 PROFINET interface .............................................................................................................. 25
2.1.4 Implementation of the PROFINET device model in SIMATIC ............................................... 28
2.2 Setting up PROFINET ............................................................................................................ 30
2.2.1 Active Network Components.................................................................................................. 31
2.2.2 Cabling technology ................................................................................................................ 33
2.2.3 Wireless design ...................................................................................................................... 35
2.2.3.1 Basics ..................................................................................................................................... 35
2.2.3.2 Tips on assembly ................................................................................................................... 37
2.2.4 Network security..................................................................................................................... 38
2.2.4.1 Basics ..................................................................................................................................... 38
2.2.4.2 Network components and software........................................................................................ 40
2.2.4.3 Application example ............................................................................................................... 41
3 Parameter assignment/addressing ........................................................................................................ 43
3.1 Assigning an IO device to an IO controller ............................................................................ 45
3.2 Device name and IP address ................................................................................................. 47
3.2.1 Device name .......................................................................................................................... 48
3.2.2 IP address .............................................................................................................................. 49
3.2.3 Assigning a device name and IP address .............................................................................. 52
3.2.4 Assign device name via communication table ....................................................................... 57
3.2.5 Permitting changes to the device name and IP address directly on the device .................... 60
3.3 Configuring an IO device through hardware detection .......................................................... 62
3.4 Specifying the router for a PROFINET IO device .................................................................. 64
3.5 Configuring topology .............................................................................................................. 68
3.5.1 Topology view in STEP 7 ....................................................................................................... 70
3.5.2 Interconnecting ports in the topology view ............................................................................. 71
3.5.3 Interconnecting ports - Inspector window .............................................................................. 73
3.5.4 Automatic assignment of devices by offline/online comparison ............................................ 74
3.5.5 Apply the port interconnections identified online manually to the project .............................. 75
3.5.6 Include the devices identified online manually in the project ................................................. 76
3.5.7 Automatic assignment of devices by advanced offline/online comparison ............................ 76
Basic information
System manuals and Getting Started manuals describe in detail the configuration,
installation, wiring and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and
ET 200AL systems; use the corresponding operating instructions for CPU 1516pro-2 PN.
The STEP 7 online help supports you in configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics such as diagnostics,
communication, Motion Control, Web server, OPC UA.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109742705).
Changes and additions to the manuals are documented in product information sheets.
You will find the product information on the Internet:
● S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/68052815)
● ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/73021864)
● ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/us/en/view/99494757)
Manual Collections
The Manual Collections contain the complete documentation of the systems put together in
one file.
You will find the Manual Collections on the Internet:
● S7-1500/ET 200MP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/86140384)
● ET 200SP (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/84133942)
● ET 200AL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/95242965)
"mySupport"
With "mySupport", your personal workspace, you make the best out of your Industry Online
Support.
In "mySupport", you can save filters, favorites and tags, request CAx data and compile your
personal library in the Documentation area. In addition, your data is already filled out in
support requests and you can get an overview of your current requests at any time.
You must register once to use the full functionality of "mySupport".
You can find "mySupport" on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en).
"mySupport" - Documentation
In the Documentation area in "mySupport" you can combine entire manuals or only parts of
these to your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find "mySupport" - Documentation on the Internet
(http://support.industry.siemens.com/My/ww/en/documentation).
Application examples
The application examples support you with various tools and examples for solving your
automation tasks. Solutions are shown in interplay with multiple components in the system -
separated from the focus on individual products.
You will find the application examples on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/sc/ww/en/sc/2054).
PRONETA
With SIEMENS PRONETA (PROFINET network analysis), you analyze the plant network
during commissioning. PRONETA features two core functions:
● The topology overview independently scans PROFINET and all connected components.
● The IO check is a fast test of the wiring and the module configuration of a plant.
You can find SIEMENS PRONETA on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67460624).
SINETPLAN
SINETPLAN, the Siemens Network Planner, supports you in planning automation systems
and networks based on PROFINET. The tool facilitates professional and predictive
dimensioning of your PROFINET installation as early as in the planning stage. In addition,
SINETPLAN supports you during network optimization and helps you to exploit network
resources optimally and to plan reserves. This helps to prevent problems in commissioning
or failures during productive operation even in advance of a planned operation. This
increases the availability of the production plant and helps improve operational safety.
The advantages at a glance
● Network optimization thanks to port-specific calculation of the network load
● Increased production availability thanks to online scan and verification of existing systems
● Transparency before commissioning through importing and simulation of existing STEP 7
projects
● Efficiency through securing existing investments in the long term and optimal exploitation
of resources
You can find SINETPLAN on the Internet (https://www.siemens.com/sinetplan).
Objectives of PROFINET
The objectives of PROFINET:
● Industrial networking, based on Industrial Ethernet (open Ethernet standard)
● Compatibility of Industrial Ethernet and standard Ethernet components
● High robustness due to Industrial Ethernet devices. Industrial Ethernet devices are suited
to the industrial environment (temperature, noise immunity, etc.).
● Use of IT standards such as TCP/IP, http.
● Real-time capability
● Seamless integration of other fieldbus systems
STEP 7
The STEP 7 engineering tool supports you in setting up and configuring an automation
solution. STEP 7 provides a uniform application view over all bus systems.
PROFINET IO devices
The following graphic shows the general names used for the most important devices in
PROFINET. In the table below the graphic you can find the names of the individual
components in the PROFINET IO context.
See also
Communication (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192925)
Network security (Page 38)
Functions (Page 113)
PROFINET communication
PROFINET communication takes place via Industrial Ethernet. The following transmission
types are supported:
● Acyclic transmission of engineering and diagnostics data and interrupts
● Cyclic transmission of user data
The PROFINET-IO communication takes place in real-time.
For additional information on the real-time communication, refer to chapter Real-time
communication (Page 173).
① Management level
② Control level
③ Production level
Figure 2-4 Access to process data
Update time
The update time is a time interval. IO controller and IO device/I-device exchange IO data
cyclically in the IO system within this time interval. The update time can be configured
separately for each IO device and determines the interval at which output data is sent from
the IO controller to the IO device (output module/submodule) as well as input data from the
IO device to the IO controller (input module/submodule).
STEP 7 calculates the update time automatically in the default setting for each IO device of
the PROFINET IO system, taking into account the volume of data to be exchanged as well
as the set send clock.
For additional information on the update time, refer to section Real-time communication
(Page 173).
Watchdog time
The watchdog time is the time interval that an IO controller or IO device permits, without
receiving IO data. If the IO device is not supplied by the IO controller with data within the
watchdog time, the device detects the missing frames and outputs substitute values. This is
reported in the IO controller as a station failure.
In STEP 7, the watchdog time is made up from an integral multiple of the update time and
can be set by the user.
Send clock
The period of time between two consecutive communication cycles. The send clock is the
shortest possible interval in data exchange.
Additional information
For information on real-time communication, refer to the section Real-Time Communication
(RT) (Page 174).
Overview
PROFINET devices of the SIMATIC product family have one or more PROFINET interfaces
(Ethernet controller/interface). The PROFINET interfaces have one or more ports (physical
connection options).
In the case of PROFINET interfaces with multiple ports, the devices have an integrated
switch.
PROFINET devices with two ports on one interface allow you to configure the system in a
line or ring topology. PROFINET devices with three or more ports on one interface are also
ideal for setting up tree topologies.
Properties and rules for naming the PROFINET interface and its representation in STEP 7
are explained in the following.
Properties
Every PROFINET device on the network is uniquely identified via its PROFINET interface.
For this purpose, each PROFINET interface has:
● A MAC address (factory default)
● An IP address
● A PROFINET device name
Examples of identification
Three examples illustrate the rules for identifying PROFINET interfaces:
Table 2- 4 Examples for identifying PROFINET interfaces
Number Description
① PROFINET interface of an IO controller in STEP 7
② PROFINET interface of an IO device in STEP 7
③ These lines represent the PROFINET interface.
④ These lines represent the "ports" of a PROFINET interface.
Figure 2-5 Representation of the PROFINET interfaces in STEP 7
Table 2- 5 Differences between the PROFINET interfaces of the CPU 1516-3 PN/DP (as of firm-
ware version V2.0)
Number Description
① Slot with bus interface
② Slot with module
③ Subslot with submodule
④ Channel
Introduction
The following active network components are available for PROFINET:
● Switch
● Router
Switched Ethernet
PROFINET IO is based on switched Ethernet with full-duplex operation and a bandwidth of
100 Mbps. In this way, the network can be used much more efficiently through the
simultaneous data transfer of several devices. The PROFINET IO frames are processed with
high priority.
Switches
Switches are network components used to connect several terminal devices or network
segments in a local network (LAN).
For the communication of a device with several other devices on PROFINET, the device is
connected to the port of a switch. Other communication devices (including switches) can
then be connected to the other ports of the switch. The connection between a
communication device and the switch is a point-to-point connection.
A switch has the task of receiving and distributing frames. The switch "learns" the Ethernet
address(es) of a connected PROFINET device or additional switches and only forwards
those frames that are intended for the connected PROFINET device or the connected
switch.
Switch variants
Switches are available in two models:
● Integrated into a PROFINET device
For PROFINET devices with multiple ports (two or more), we are dealing with devices
with an integrated switch (for example, CPU 1516-3 PN/DP).
● As autonomous device (for example, switches of the SCALANCE product family)
Router
A router connects separated network segments with each other (e.g. management level and
control level). The volume of data volume must be coordinated with the services of the
respective network segment. A router also separates two networks and acts as a mediator
between both networks. It thus reduces the network load. Routing functionality is provided in
the SCALANCE X device family, with SCALANCE X300 or higher.
Communication devices on different sides of a router can only communicate with one
another if you have explicitly enabled communication between them via the router.
If you want to access manufacturing data directly from SAP, for example, use a router to
connect your Industrial Ethernet in the factory with the Ethernet in your office.
Note
If devices need to communicate beyond the limits of a network, you must configure the
router so that it allows this communication to take place.
Note
A maximum of four plug-in pairs are allowed between two switches per Ethernet path.
Physical Connection methods Cable type / transmission Transmission Max. segment Advantages
properties medium rate / length (be-
mode tween two
devices)
standard
Electrical RJ45 connector ISO 100Base-TX 100 Mbps, full 100 m Simple and cheap
60603-7 2x2 twisted, symmetrical duplex cable connection
and shielded copper cable,
CAT 5 transmission re-
quirement
IEEE 802.3
Optical SCRJ 45 100Base-FX 100 Mbps, full 50 m Use when there are
ISO/IEC 61754-24 POF fiber-optic cable (Po- duplex large differences in
lymer Optical Fiber, POF) potential
980/1000 µm (core diameter Insensitive towards
/ external diameter) electromagnetic
radiation
ISO/IEC 60793-2
Low line attenuation
Plastic-cladded glass fiber 100 Mbps, full 100 m
(Polymer Cladded Fiber, duplex Considerably longer
PCF) segments possible1
200/230 µm (core diameter /
external diameter)
ISO/IEC 60793-2
BFOC (Bayonet Monomode glass fiber optic 100 Mbps, full 26 km
Fiber Optic Connect- cable duplex
or) and SC (Sub- 10/125 µm (core diameter /
scriber Connector) external diameter)
ISO/IEC 60874 ISO/IEC 60793-2
Multimode glass fiber optic 100 Mbps, full 3000 m
cable duplex
50/125 µm and 62.5/125 µm
(core diameter / external
diameter)
ISO/IEC 9314-4
Electroma - IEEE 802.11 x Depends on the 100 m Greater mobility
gnetic extension used Cost-effective net-
waves (a, g, h, etc.) working to remote,
difficult to access
devices
1 Applies for fiber-optic cables only
See also
PROFINET interface (Page 25)
Assembly Instructions for SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/27069465)
PROFINET Installation Guideline (http://www.profibus.com/nc/download/installation-
guide/downloads/profinet-installation-guide/display/)
2.2.3.1 Basics
Application examples
● Communication with mobile subscribers (mobile controllers and devices, for example),
conveyor lines, production belts, translation stages , and rotating machines
● Wireless coupling of communication segments for fast commissioning or cost-effective
networking where routing of wires is extremely expensive (e.g. public streets, railroad
lines)
● Stacker trucks, automated guided vehicle systems and suspended monorail systems
The following graphic illustrates the many possible applications and configurations for
SIMATIC device family wireless networks.
Figure 2-9 Application example for the use of Industrial Wireless LAN
Range
With SCALANCE W (access points), wireless networks can be set up indoors and outdoors.
Multiple access points can be installed to create large wireless networks in which mobile
subscribers are transferred seamlessly from one access point to another (roaming).
As an alternative to a wireless network, point-to-point connections of Industrial Ethernet
segments can also be set up over large distances (several hundred meters). In this case, the
range and characteristics of the RF field are determined by the antennas used.
Note
Range
The range can be considerably less, depending on spatial factors, the wireless standard
used, the data rate, and the antennas on the send and receive sides.
Additional information
More information about SCALANCE W Industrial Wireless LAN components can be found in
the manual SIMATIC NET SCALANCE W-700
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/42784493).
More information about wired data transmission can be found in the manual SIMATIC NET
Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736).
More information about wireless data transmission can be found in the manual Basics for
configuring an industrial wireless LAN
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/9975764).
You should also read the PROFINET installation guideline of the PROFIBUS User
Organization on the Internet (http://www.profibus.com/nc/download/installation-
guide/downloads/profinet-installation-guide/display/). Various documents that assist with the
setting up of your PROFINET automation solution are available here:
● PROFINET planning guideline
● PROFINET installation guideline
● PROFINET commissioning guideline
● Additional documents for setup of PROFINET
2.2.4.1 Basics
Introduction
The topic of data security and access protection (Security) has become increasingly
important in the industrial environment. The increased networking of entire industrial
systems, vertical integration and networking of levels within a company and new techniques
such as remote maintenance all result in higher requirements for protecting the industrial
plant.
Data security solutions for office environments cannot simply be transferred one-to-one to
industrial applications to protect against manipulation in sensitive systems and production
networks.
Requirements
Additional security requirements arise from the specific communication requirements in the
industrial environment (real-time communication, for example):
● Protection against interaction between automated cells
● Protection of network segments
● Protection against faulty and unauthorized access
● Scalability of network security
● Must not influence the network structure
Definition of security
Generic term for all the measures taken to protect against:
● Loss of confidentiality due to unauthorized access to data
● Loss of integrity due to manipulation of data
● Loss of availability due to destruction of data, for example, through faulty configuration
and denial-of-service attacks
Threats
Threats can arise from external and internal manipulation. The loss of data security is not
always caused by intentional actions.
Internal threats can arise due to:
● Technical errors
● Operator errors
● Defective programs
Added to these internal threats there are also external ones. The external threats are not
really any different to the known threats in the office environment:
● Software viruses and worms
● Trojans
● Man-in-the-middle attacks
● Password Phishing
● Denial of Service
Protective measures
The most important precautions to prevent manipulation and loss of data security in the
industrial environment are:
● Filtering and control of data traffic by means of firewall
● A virtual private network (VPN) is used to exchange private data on a public network
(Internet, for example).
The most common VPN technology is IPsec. IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) is a
collection of security protocols that are used as the basis for the IP protocol at the
mediation level and allow a secured communication via potentially unsecure IP networks.
● Segmenting in protected automation cells
This concept has the aim of protecting the lower-level network devices by means of
security modules. A group of protected devices forms a protected automation cell.
● Authentication (identification) of the devices
The security modules identify each other over a safe (encrypted) channel using
authentication procedures. It is therefore impossible for unauthorized parties to access a
protected segment.
● Encrypting the data traffic
The confidentiality of data is ensured by encrypting the data traffic. Each security module
is given a VPN certificate which includes the encryption key.
Features
Both of these products have a wide variety of features, such as:
● Easy integration of existing networks without configuration, with integrated firewall.
● Segmenting in protected automation cells
● Authentication (identification) of the devices
● Encrypting the data traffic
Figure 2-11 Network configuration with the SCALANCE S security module and the SOFTNET security client
Additional information
Additional information on the configuration of a security standard in PROFINET, is available:
● In the PROFINET security guideline. These guidelines can be found on the homepage of
the PROFIBUS user organization on the Internet (http://www.profinet.com).
● In the Industrial Ethernet Security
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/56577508) manual
● In the SCALANCE S and SOFTNET Security Client
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/21718449) manual
You can find general information on industrial security concepts, functions and news on the
Industrial Security website (http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Configuring
"Configuring" is understood to mean arranging, setting and networking devices and modules
within the device, topology or network view.
An I/O address is automatically assigned to each module. The I/O addresses can be
subsequently modified.
The CPU compares the configuration preset in STEP 7 with the actual current configuration
of the system. In this way, potential errors can be detected and reported straight away.
The exact procedure for configuring devices is described in detail in the STEP 7 online help.
Assigning parameters
"Assigning parameters" is understood to mean setting the properties of the components
used. The settings for the hardware components and for data communication are configured
at the same time.
In STEP 7, you can "assign parameters" for the following settings PROFINET:
● Device names and IP address parameters
● Port interconnection and topology
● Module properties / parameters
The parameters are loaded into the CPU and transferred to the corresponding modules
when the CPU starts up. Modules are easy to replace from spare parts, as the parameters
assigned for the SIMATIC CPUs are automatically loaded into the new module at each
startup.
PROFINET IO System
A PROFINET IO system is comprised of a PROFINET IO controller and its assigned
PROFINET IO devices. After these devices have been placed in the network or topology
view, STEP 7 assigns default values for them. Initially, you only have to worry about the
assignment of IO devices to an IO controller.
Requirement
● You are in the network view of STEP 7.
● A CPU has been placed (e.g., CPU 1516-3 PN/DP).
● An IO device has been placed (e.g., IM 155-6 PN ST).
Procedure
To assign IO devices to an IO controller, proceed as follows:
1. Place the pointer of the mouse over the interface of the IO device.
2. Press and hold down the left mouse button.
3. Move the pointer.
The pointer now uses the networking symbol to indicate "Networking" mode. At the same
time, you see the lock symbol on the pointer. The lock symbol disappears only when the
pointer is over a valid target position.
4. Now move the pointer onto the interface of the IO controller. You can keep the left mouse
button pressed or release it when performing this action.
5. Now release the left mouse button or press it again (depending on your previous action).
Result
You have assigned an IO device to an IO controller.
Introduction
In order that the PROFINET device can be addressed as node on PROFINET, the following
are required:
● A unique PROFINET device name
● A unique IP address in the relevant IP subnet
STEP 7 assigns a device name during the arrangement of a PROFINET device in the
hardware and network editor. The IP addresses are typically assigned automatically by
STEP 7 and assigned to the devices based on the device name.
You can change the name and IP address manually.
In STEP 7
You can find the device name and the IP address under "Ethernet addresses" in the
properties of the PROFINET interface in the Inspector window.
The function, the assignment and the changing of the device name and the IP address are
described in the following sections.
Device names
Before an IO device can be addressed by an IO controller, it must have a device name. In
PROFINET, this method was selected because it is simpler to work with names than with
complex IP addresses.
The assignment of a device name for a specific IO device can be compared to setting the
PROFIBUS address of a DP slave.
In delivery state, an IO device does not have a device name. A device name must first be
assigned before an IO device can be addressed by an IO controller, for example, for
transferring configuration data during startup or for exchanging user data in cyclic mode. You
assign the device names to the IO device, for example, with the programming device / PC.
IO devices that have a slot for removable storage media provide the option of writing the
device name directly to the removable storage medium in the programming device.
When a device is replaced by a device without removable medium, the IO controller assigns
the device name based on topological configuration (see section Configuring topology
(Page 68)).
Device number
In addition to the device name, STEP 7 also assigns a device number beginning with "1"
when an IO device is allocated.
The device number is located in the Inspector window in the properties of the PROFINET
interface, under "Ethernet addresses" in the area PROFINET.
This device number can be used to identify an IO device in the user program (for example,
with the instruction "LOG2GEO").
3.2.2 IP address
IP address
To allow a PROFINET device to be addressed as a device on Industrial Ethernet, this device
also requires an IP address that is unique within the network. The IP addresses are typically
assigned automatically by STEP 7 and assigned to the devices based on the device name. If
it is a standalone network, you can apply the IP address and subnet mask suggested by
STEP 7. If the network is part of an existing Ethernet company network, obtain the
information from your network administrator.
Generating IP addresses
The IP addresses of the IO devices are generated by STEP 7 and first assigned to the IO
devices when the CPU starts up. In addition, for some IO devices (e.g., SCALANCE X,
S7-300 CPs), it is possible not to obtain the IP address during startup of the IO controller, but
rather to set it beforehand on the device (see Permitting changes to the device name and IP
address directly on the device (Page 60)).
The IP addresses of the IO devices always have the same subnet mask as the IO controller
and are assigned from the IP address of the IO controller in ascending order. The IP address
can be changed manually, if necessary.
For devices with several PROFINET interfaces (e.g., CPU 1516-3 PN/DP), the IP addresses
must be located in different subnets.
Default router
The default router is used when data has to be forwarded via TCP/IP or UDP to a partner
located outside the local network.
In STEP 7, the default router is named Router. You can activate the use of a router in the
Inspector window of a CPU with the "Use router" check box in the "IP protocol" section.
STEP 7 assigns the local IP address to the default router by default.
The router address that is set on the PROFINET interface of the IO controller is
automatically transferred for the configured IO devices.
Subnet mask
The bits set in the subnet mask decide the part of the IP address that contains the address
of the network.
In general, the following applies:
● The network address is obtained from the AND operation of the IP address and subnet
mask.
● The device address is obtained from the AND NOT operation of the IP address and
subnet mask.
Note
Range of values for the first decimal point
A value between 224 and 255 is also possible for the first decimal number of the IP address
(address class D etc.). However, this is not recommended because there is no address
check for these values.
Result:
All devices with addresses from 129.80.001.000 to 129.80.127.254 are located in a subnet,
all devices with addresses from 129.80.128.000 to 129.80.255.254 in a different subnet.
Assigning an IP address and subnet mask for an IO controller for the first time
You have the following options:
● Using a programming device or PC:
Connect your programming device/PC to the same network as the relevant PROFINET
device. The interface of the programming device/PC must be set to TCP/IP mode. During
the download, first of all display all available devices via the "Accessible devices"
download dialog box. Select the target device via its MAC address and then assign its
IP address before you download the hardware configuration including the configured
IP address (IP address is saved retentively).
● Using the display of a S7-1500 CPU:
The S7-1500 CPUs have a front cover with a display and operating keys. You can use
this display to assign or change the IP address. To set the IP address, navigate on the
display via the menu items "Settings" > "Addresses" > "X1 (IE/PN)" > "Parameters".
● Using a memory card:
If your PROFINET device is equipped for a memory card (Micro Memory Card/SIMATIC
memory card), plug this into your programming device/PC and save the hardware
configuration together with the configured IP address on this memory card. Then plug the
memory card into the PROFINET device. Once inserted, the PROFINET device
automatically applies the IP address.
If you have saved a configuration to the memory card with the "IP address is set directly
at the device" option, you must assign the IP address using a different method after
inserting the memory card (see section Permitting changes to the device name and IP
address directly on the device (Page 60)).
Assigning device names and IP address for "Device replacement without exchangeable
medium/programming device"
For devices without exchangeable medium (e.g., ET 200MP, ET 200SP) and devices that
support "Device replacement without exchangeable medium/PG" (e.g., ET 200S), the IO
controller can identify the device without name from the neighbor relationships specified by
the set topology and from actual neighbor relationships determined by the real PROFINET
devices. The IO controller then assigns the PROFINET device the configured name and
incorporates the PROFINET device in the user data traffic. (See also Device replacement
without exchangeable medium (Page 210)).
Procedure: Changing the device name using properties of the PROFINET interface
You can change the PROFINET name via the properties of the PROFINET interface. This is
useful when the PROFINET device has not received its previous name from the automatic
generation, for example, in the case of a migration.
1. In the network or device view of the STEP 7 hardware and network editor, select the
PROFINET interface of a PROFINET device.
2. In the Inspector window, go to "Ethernet addresses" in the PROFINET area.
3. Clear the "Generate PROFINET device name automatically" check box.
4. Enter the new PROFINET device name in the relevant field.
Figure 3-4 Changing the device name of a PROFINET device in the properties
Alternative procedure: Changing the device name of a PROFINET device in the network view
Requirement: The "Generate PROFINET device name automatically" check box is selected.
1. In STEP 7, select the "Network overview" tab in the tabular area of the network view.
2. In the "Device" column, overwrite the name in the row of the relevant PROFINET device.
The name is also changed accordingly in the graphic area of the network view.
Additional information
You can find a detailed description of the operation and functions of the display of the
S7-1500 CPUs in the system manual S7-1500, ET 200MP
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792).
Introduction
You can assign the device names of PROFINET IO devices configured offline to the devices
online. You can do this in the table area of the network view in the table "I/O
communication". You can also assign the device names to several devices at the same time.
The objects displayed in the table of the "Online assignment" tab depend on the setting of
the filter function. If only selected objects should be displayed, only objects of the
corresponding context are displayed depending on the selection in the network view.
● PROFINET subnet: All connected devices and their PROFINET interfaces
● IO system All devices involved and their PROFINET interfaces
● Sync domain: All devices involved and their PROFINET interfaces
● Devices: The device and any existing PROFINET interfaces
● Other subnets or interfaces such as MPI or PROFIBUS are not displayed
If the display is set for all devices using the filter function, all devices are displayed that have
a PROFINET interface, regardless of whether they are connected via a PROFINET subnet
or are part of an IO system. Devices without a PROFINET interface, for example only with a
DP or MPI interface, are not displayed.
General procedure
To assign PROFINET device names, you must first detect the IO devices available online.
With this procedure, it matters whether the MAC addresses are known or unknown. This
results in a general procedure in two steps:
1. Detecting the IO devices available online
2. Assigning configured PROFINET device names to the IO devices available online
Requirements
● You are in the network view.
● There is an online connection to the devices.
Procedure (step 1)
To detect IO devices available online from the I/O communication table, follow these steps:
1. Optional: Entered known MAC addresses in the "MAC address" column. After every valid
entry, the check box under "Assign device" is selected for the relevant row.
Note
You can enter, insert or import the MAC address in different formats. The correct format
is automatically entered in the cell. The following entries are supported and then
converted to the required format:
• "08:00:06:BA:1F:20"
• "08 00 06 BA 1F 20"
• "080006BA1F20"
The formats used in the example are automatically converted to "08-00-06-BA-1F-20".
2. Click "Check devices" to start the check of the IO devices available online.
3. Set the PG/PC interface in the dialog window and click "Start".
Intermediate result
After the check, the result is displayed for every device in the table. Online data found is
automatically entered in the table and the check box "Assign device" is set to "checked" in
the rows in which a MAC address was entered or found online. The result of the check is
shown as an icon in the "Status" column.
Status Meaning
Matching device and compatible type
Non-matching device
Note
The icon "Ready for assignment" appears when a MAC address exists and matching device
data was found, but no PROFINET device name was found online.
You can update the data of the detected devices again via their MAC addresses at any time.
To do this, you specify the MAC address and the status of the device is displayed
immediately without having to re-detect the device.
Procedure (step 2)
All PROFINET device names configured offline will be assigned to the devices available
online in a bulk operation.
1. Click the "Assign now" button.
Note
The bulk operation cannot be reversed. A message to this effect appears in a dialog
window.
2. Click "Start" in the dialog window to start the assignment of the PROFINET device
names.
Result
The PROFINET device names configured offline will be assigned to the devices available
online. This relates to devices in whose row the check box under "Assign device" is selected,
that have a MAC address and have the status "Ready for assignment".
3.2.5 Permitting changes to the device name and IP address directly on the device
Introduction
Machines are frequently commissioned on site or integrated into the existing infrastructure
without STEP 7. You can find typical applications in all areas of the series machine building.
Alternative means for assigning the IP address are available for this.
Procedure
1. In the network or device view of the STEP 7 Hardware and Network editor, select the
PROFINET interface of an IO controller.
2. Navigate in the Inspector window to "Ethernet addresses".
3. Select the "IP address is set directly at the device" option in the "IP protocol" area.
4. In the "PROFINET" area, select the " PROFINET device name is set directly at the
device" check box.
Figure 3-9 Setting the device name and IP address on the device
Note
Gateway
When you operate a PROFINET device with the option "Allow adaption of the device
name/IP address directly on device", you cannot use this PROFINET device as gateway
for S7 routing.
Additional information
For information on the "T_CONFIG" instruction and on downloading to the target system,
refer to the STEP 7 online help.
A free Download (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/14929629) of the
Primary Setup Tool (PST) can be found on the Internet. On this Internet page, you will also
find a list of devices for which the PST is approved.
Introduction
As of STEP 7 V15, you have the possibility to detect a real existing IO device and to import it
into your project.
You find the IO device in STEP 7 through the "Hardware detection" function. A detected
device can be imported into your project. STEP 7 inserts the IO device with all the modules
and submodules.
Prerequisites
● STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V15
● It must be possible to technically access the IO device via IP
Procedure
Proceed as follows to detect one or more existing IO devices in STEP 7 and to import them
into the project:
1. In STEP 7, navigate to "Online" > "Hardware detection".
2. Click "IO devices".
STEP 7 opens the "Hardware detection of IO devices."
3. Select the interface of your programming device at "PG/PC interface:".
4. Click "Start search".
STEP 7 begins with the hardware detection. When the hardware detection is completed,
STEP 7 displays all the detected IO devices.
5. Select the IO devices that you want to import into the project by clicking the
corresponding check box before the IO device.
6. Click "Add devices".
After a brief moment, a window is opens to report about the success or failure of the
hardware detection.
Introduction
You always require a router (also referred to as a "Standard Gateway") when the PROFINET
device has to communicate with a node whose IP addresses lie outside the own IP subnet. If
the PROFINET device sends an IP packet to an IP address outside its own IP subnet, the IP
packet first goes to the configured router. The router in turn checks the IP address. If this lies
outside its own subnet, the router passes the IP packet on to the next router. The IP packet
is routed to the next router until it has reached the target address.
Like all S7-1500 CPUs, S7-1500 CPUs with several PROFINET interfaces provide the
possibility to configure the IP address of a router. However, there is the restriction that you
can only enter the IP address of a router at a PROFINET interface.
You cannot include an IP address of a router on the other PROFINET interfaces of the CPU.
IO devices that are connected to this PROFINET interface adopt this setting. Up to and
including STEP 7 V14 SP1, these IO devices did not have any possibility to reach devices in
a different IP subnet.
As of STEP 7 V15, you have the possibility to assign the address of a router for an IO device
independent of the setting of the IO controller. You can now, for example, set a router
address at the IO device in the following cases as well:
● You have not set an IP address of a router for the interface of the associated IO
controller.
● You have already set a router address for a different interface in the CPU.
Rules
Observe the following rules if you want to configure a router for the PROFINET interface of
an IO controller:
● A PROFINET IO device supports exactly one router, irrespective of the number of
interfaces.
● You can configure a router for exactly one PROFINET interface. All IO devices that are
assigned to the PROFINET interface adopt the configured router from the IO controller.
● You cannot configure a router for the further PROFINET interfaces of the CPU. The
further PROFINET interfaces take on the IP address "0.0.0.0" as the router and pass it on
to their IO devices.
As of STEP 7 V15, you can configure the use of a router for an IO device. This allows the
IO device to communicate with a node outside its own IP subnet, irrespective of the setting
of the PROFINET interface of the IO controller.
You have a CPU 1516-3PN/DP. The two PROFINET interfaces X1 and X2 of the CPU work
in the "IO controller" operating mode. The PROFINET interface X1 is connected with the
subnet "Production line 1". PROFINET interface X2 is connected with the subnet "Production
line 2". The two subnets "Production line 1" and "Production line 2" are each connected via a
router with the higher-level network "Superior line".
For PROFINET X1, you configure the router "Router 1" with the IP address 192.168.1.100.
The IO device (ET 200SP) in the "Production line 1" subnet adopts the router from the
IO controller.
You cannot configure a router for the PROFINET interface X2 because you have already
configured a router for the PROFINET interface X1 of the CPU.
No router is transferred by the PROFINET interface X2 to the IO device in the subnet
"Production line 2".
In order for the IO device in the subnet "Production line 2" to reach nodes in the higher-level
"Superior line", configure the router "Router 2" with the IP address 192.168.2.100 for the IO
device.
Line
All the communication devices are connected in a linear bus topology.
In PROFINET, the linear bus topology is implemented with switches that are already
integrated into the PROFINET devices. Therefore, the linear bus topology at PROFINET is
merely a special form of tree / star topology.
If a link element (switch, for example) fails, communication across the failed link element is
no longer possible. The network is then divided into 2 subsegments.
Linear bus topology structures require the least cabling.
Star
If you connect communication devices to a switch with more than two PROFINET ports, you
automatically create a star network topology.
If an individual PROFINET device fails, this does not automatically lead to failure of the
entire network, in contrast to other structures. It is only if a switch fails that part of the
communication network will fail as well
Tree
If you interconnect several star structures, you obtain a tree network topology.
Ring
In order to increase the availability of a network, use ring structures. In principle, a linear bus
topology is connected to a ring through a so-called redundancy manager.
The task of the redundancy manager is managed by an external switch SCALANCE X, a
CPU that supports the Media Redundancy Protocol MRP (e.g., CPU 1516-3 PN/DP) or a CP
(e.g., CP 343-1 Lean).
If there is a break in the network, the redundancy manager ensures that the data is
redirected over an alternative network connection in the ring.
Number Meaning
① S7-1500 as IO controller
② S7-300 as IO controller
③ Industrial WLAN with SCALANCE W
④ SCALANCE X 307-3 with seven electrical and three optical ports
⑤ ET 200SP with integrated 2-port switch
⑥ SCALANCE X 204 with four electrical ports
⑦ PROFINET/Industrial Ethernet
⑧ IE/PB-Link PN IO
⑨ PROFIBUS DP
⑩ ET 200S with two optical ports
Star topology
Additional information
Observe the PROFINET Installation Guideline
(http://www.profibus.com/nc/download/installation-guide/downloads/profinet-installation-
guide/display/) of the PROFIBUS User Organization when planning your PROFINET
topology.
For more detailed information, see the SIMATIC NET Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736) manual.
You can find basic information in the Communication with SIMATIC
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1254686) manual.
Introduction
The topology view is one of three working areas of the hardware and network editor. You
undertake the following tasks here:
● Displaying the Ethernet topology
● Configuring the Ethernet topology
● Identify and minimize differences between the set and actual topology (online)
The topology view in STEP 7 consists of a graphic area and a table area.
Graphic area
The graphic area of the topology view displays PROFINET devices with their appropriate
ports and port connections. Here you can add more PROFINET devices.
The following figure shows the graphic area of the topology view.
Overview navigation
Click in the overview navigation to obtain an overview of the created objects in the graphic
area. By holding down the mouse button, you can quickly navigate to the desired objects and
display them in the graphic area.
Table area
● Topology overview: This displays the Ethernet or PROFINET devices with their
appropriate ports and port connections in a table. This table corresponds to the network
overview table in the network view.
● Topology comparison: Here you can import devices and port interconnections
automatically through offline/online comparison or extended Offline/Online comparison
into STEP 7.
Requirement
You are in the graphic view of the topology view.
Procedure
To interconnect ports in the topology view, follow these steps:
1. Place the pointer of the mouse on the port you want to interconnect.
2. Press and hold down the left mouse button.
3. Move the pointer.
The pointer now uses the networking symbol to indicate "Interconnecting" mode. At the
same time, you see the lock symbol on the pointer. The lock symbol disappears only
when the pointer is over a valid target position.
4. Now drag the pointer to the target port. You can keep the left mouse button pressed or
release it when performing this action.
5. Now release the left mouse button or press it again (depending on your previous action).
Result
You have created a port interconnection.
Overview
During the offline/online comparison, the configured topology is compared with the actual
existing topology. Devices identified online are automatically assigned to configured devices
as far as this is possible.
Note
The availability detection can take several seconds. During this time, no user input is
possible.
No automatic assignment
In the following situations, no automatic assignment is possible:
● No device can be identified online to match a configured device. (This means that the
corresponding columns in the "Online topology" area of the topology comparison table
are empty.)
In this case, you should add the already configured device to your system or delete the
configured device from the configuration.
● A device identified online can be assigned to a configured device, but there are
differences in the port interconnections.
In this case, you can Apply the port interconnections identified online manually to the
project (Page 75).
● A device identified online cannot be assigned to a configured device. (In this case, the
corresponding columns in the "Offline topology" area of the topology comparison table
are empty.)
In this case, you can Include the devices identified online manually in the project
(Page 76).
3.5.5 Apply the port interconnections identified online manually to the project
Requirements
You have run an offline/online comparison in the topology view. The result of this is that at
least one device identified online was automatically assigned to a configured device, but that
there are differences relating to the interconnection.
Procedure
To adopt one more port interconnections identified online in the project manually, follow
these steps:
1. Select the row belonging to the port interconnection.
2. If applicable, select further roles using multi-selection.
3. Select "Apply" > "Use selected" in the shortcut menu.
The content of the corresponding table cells in the "Action" column changes to "Apply".
4. If you have mistakenly prepared too many port interconnections to be included in the
project:
Select the rows belonging to the port interconnections you have mistakenly prepared for
inclusion in the project using multi-selection.
Select "Reset" > "Reset selected" in the shortcut menu.
The content of the corresponding table cells in the "Action" column change to "No action".
5. Click the "Synchronize" button.
Result
The port interconnections identified online for the corresponding devices are included in the
project. Successful adoption is indicated by the diagnostics icon "Identical topology
information" for each port.
Note
If other port interconnections are recognized for a device identified online and these differ
from those that exist in the project, adopting these in the project means that the port
interconnections that were previously in the project are replaced by those identified online. If
no port interconnections are detected for a device identified online, adopting in the project
means that all the port interconnections of this device are deleted in the project.
Requirements
You have run an offline/online comparison in the topology view. The result of this is that at
least one device identified online could not be assigned to any configured device.
Procedure
To adopt one more devices identified online in the project manually, follow these steps:
1. For a configured device without an online partner, move the mouse pointer to the
"Device/port" column of the online topology.
2. Select the device you want to assign to the configured device from the drop-down list of
this box.
3. Repeat the previous steps if necessary for other configured devices without an online
partner.
Result
The selected device that was identified online is moved up from the end of the table.
Following this, it is in the row of the configured device to which you have just assigned it.
Overview
With the advanced offline/online comparison, ICMP is also used alongside DCP to be able to
detect devices that do not support DCP.
Num- Description
ber
① The IO device detects an error and sends diagnostics data to the IO controller.
② The IO controller notifies the programming/HMI device. The display of the system diagnostics
is updated.
③ In STEP 7, you can read the station status for "Accessible devices" directly from the IO device
regardless of the IO controller. This is only possible if the programming device is connected to
Industrial Ethernet.
This means that you can access diagnostics information during the commissioning phase or
for servicing even if the IO controller is not operational.
Figure 4-1 PROFINET IO diagnostics with PG/PC or HMI device
Concept
The IO device sends all error messages that occur to the IO controller. The scope and
volume of diagnostics information varies according to the level of diagnostics data evaluation
and the PROFINET devices you are using.
Diagnostics levels
You can evaluate diagnostics data at different levels. The number and type of channels is
selected, for example, at the diagnostics level 4.
The following figure shows the diagnostics levels with PROFINET IO.
Number Description
① Level 1: Error(s) in the device
② Level 2: Error(s) in the module
Figure 4-3 Diagnostics levels in the device view of STEP 7
4.1.2 Maintenance
Further information
To find out whether and to what extent a PROFINET device supports I&M data, refer to the
documentation of the relevant device.
Which I&M data can be loaded to PROFINET IO devices and your modules?
You can load I&M 1 data (plant designation and location identifier) and/or I&M 2 data
(installation date) and/or I&M 3 data (additional information) to the actual hardware.
Requirements
● In the project settings (Options > Settings, Hardware configuration > Compiling and
downloading), the option "Download I&M data" must be enabled.
● There is an online connection to the PROFINET IO devices and the modules to which you
want to load I&M data.
● You have entered the I&M data you want to download in the properties of the respective
PROFINET IO devices and your modules (Inspector window: "Properties" tab > "General"
tab, Settings > Identification & Maintenance).
Note
Language dependency of the I&M data to be loaded
The I&M data are loaded to the real hardware in the form that you specified in the properties
of the relevant PROFINET IO devices and your modules. There is no language dependency.
Application examples
Importing asset management records enables you to read the following information during
installation or operation, for example:
● Are only approved devices being used (whitelist check)?
● A firmware update is due. Obtain a fast overview: Which devices or components are
affected and have to be upgraded?
Further information
Whether and to which extent a PROFINET device supports asset management data,
meaning whether it makes an AMR available, is specified in the documentation of the
respective device.
Element of the data structure Designation according to IEC Code Data type / length in
61158-6-10 bytes
Header AssetManagement- BlockType 0x0035 UINT / 2
Data BlockLength Number of bytes without UINT / 2
counting the bytes for
BlockType and BlockLength
BlockVersion 0x0100 UINT / 2
AssetManagementInfo NumbersOfEntries Number of AssetManage- UINT / 2
AssetManagementBlocks (n) mentBlocks
AssetManagementBlock 1 See the table below
AssetManagementBlock 2
...
AssetManagementBlock n
AM_Location
Asset management at PROFINET supports two formats for coding the location of an asset:
● Slot-oriented format ("Slot and SubslotNumber format")
● Hierarchical format ("Twelve Level Tree format" abbreviated LT format)
Assets that are part of the PROFINET device use the slot-oriented format. These assets are
bound completely to the PROFINET modules and submodules.
Assets that are located outside the PROFINET device use the hierarchical format (LT
format) for coding the location of an asset.
These assets are localized by their tree level. The tree level begins with Level 0. The value
of Level 0 provides information about the proximity to the PROFINET device:
● If the asset is connected to a module that can be addressed through the PROFINET
device model, Level 0 has the value 0. The subsequent levels (Level 1 to Level 3) then
have the meaning of slot address, subslot address and channel number. If further assets
are connected to this asset, the next Level 4 is used. The limit is reached at Level 11.
● If the asset belongs to a PROFINET device but is not connected to a module that can be
addressed through the PROFINET device model, Level 0 has a value between 1 and
0x1FF. An example of such an asset is a power supply unit in the PROFINET device. If a
further asset is connected to this power supply unit, for example a sensor, the next tree
level is used to localize this sensor (Level 1).
● If the asset is located outside the PROFINET device, but, for example, belongs to a
machine into which the PROFINET device is installed, Level 0 has a value between
0x200 and 0x3FE.
The value 0x3FF for a tree level shows that this tree level is not used. This means that no
further asset is connected. In this case, all the lower tree levels down to Level 11 must also
have this value.
Requirement
● S7-1500-CPU as of firmware V2.5, configured as an I-device
● STEP 7 (TIA Portal) as of V15
● If an IO controller is to read the asset management record:
The PROFINET IO controller is programmed correspondingly to read an asset
management record.
For a SIMATIC IO controller, for example, you call a read instruction (RDREC) with
record index 0xF880. The instruction addresses any submodule of the I-device, for
example the first configured transfer area submodule.
Basic procedure
The following steps are fundamentally required to create the requirements so that an I-
device can make its local modules available as an asset management record to a requesting
IO controller:
1. Make the settings in the properties of the PROFINET interface of the CPU.
– Activate "IO device" operating mode
– Activate the "Activate asset management using user program" option
PROFINET interface forwards a request of an IO controller to the user program of the
I-device for reading the asset management record only if the option is selected.
2. Configure the program routine for compiling the asset management record. The program
part collects the required I&M0 data of the plugged central modules and stores them in
the corresponding fields of the data record structure of the asset management record.
3. Configure the program part for coordinating the data record provision:
For this, call the instruction PRVREC (Provide Record) in accordance with the following
templates in the corresponding modes:
– Cyclic calling (for example in the cycle OB) of the PRVREC instruction with Mode 0, in
order to recognize the AMR request.
– When the AM record request is recognized, the PRVREC program has to
acknowledge within one second that the request has been recognized. This means
that PRVREC must be called with the Mode 2, and with the required AM record. If the
I-device does not adhere to the time frame, the I-device acknowledges the record
request of the IO controller as negative!
Particular aspect for configuration of the PRVREC call: PRVREC has to be called with
F_ID = 0. This codes that this is an IO-device-specific data record. The SLOT and
SUBSLOT output parameters therefore also return the value 0.
– Within 10 seconds the AM record now has to be completed and PRVREC be called
with Mode 3 (positive response to the IO controller with provision of the AM record). If
the I-device does not adhere to the time frame, the I-device acknowledges the record
request of the IO controller as negative!
A detailed description of the PRVREC instruction and possible error codes for evaluating
the function can be found in the online help of STEP 7 (TIA Portal).
Additional information
You can find a detailed description of all LEDs of the module with cause of the error and
remedies in the relevant documentation for the module.
Display
The S7-1500 CPU has a display and operating keys. The display of the CPU shows you the
control and status information in different menus. You use operating keys to navigate
through the menus and make a variety of settings in the process.
Module status
To show the module status, navigate on the display through the menu items "Module" >
"PROFINET I/O (X1)" > "Station" > "Slot" > "Status" > "Module status".
The module status indicates that a fault has occurred in the module. The "lower-level status"
is the status of the module in the diagnostics level below this. In the example, the status is
"good", i.e., the fault is not in the lower diagnostics level submodule or channel, but instead
in the module.
To show the alarm messages of the automation system, navigate through the menu items
"Diagnostics" > "Alarms" > "Alarm text" on the display.
Note
Updating the alarm display
The display shows the currently read status of the CPU in static form, the display is not
automatically updated. The alarm display is updated after it has been exited and opened
again.
You set the automatic updating of the diagnostics information under: "Display" >
"DiagnosticRefresh".
Additional information
You can find the description of the operation and functions of the display in the
SIMATIC S7-1500 Display Simulator (http://www.automation.siemens.com/salesmaterial-
as/interactive-manuals/getting-started_simatic-s7-1500/disp_tool/start_de.html).
Connection Meaning
Set topology Actual topology
green The current actual connection matches the configured set detected connections
connection.
red The current actual connection does not match the config- -
ured set connection (e.g., port interchanged).
yellow The connection cannot be diagnosed. Causes: -
• The communication to an IO device has been disrupted
(e.g., cable removed)
• Connection to a passive component
• Connection to PROFINET devices of another IO control-
ler or PROFINET system
③ Disabled devices
All disabled, configured PROFINET devices are displayed light-gray.
④ Interchanged ports
Interchanged ports are marked red in the set topology view. The currently connected ports
are displayed in the actual topology, the configured set connection in the set topology.
Additional information
The tabular view of the actual topology and the status overview of the PROFINET devices in
the project are possible.
You can find these views, additional topology examples, and detailed information on the
operation and the functions of the Web server in the Web server
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560) manual.
Additional information
You can find information on the system diagnostics for S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and
ET 200AL in the Diagnostics
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926) function manual and online
help for STEP 7.
The aim of the diagnostics concept is the early detection and elimination of potential faults -
before they cause a production outage.
Other status information is defined in addition to the Good (no fault) and Bad (fault) status
information for a PROFINET device.
The maintenance information is generated with the following system alarms:
● Maintenance required (symbolized by a green wrench) and
● Maintenance demanded (symbolized by a yellow wrench)
The times at which the two system alarms are generated can be customized for most wear
parameters.
Num- Description
ber
① The system reserve of the fiber-optic cable drops below 0 dB.
② Both the ET 200S PN FO and the switch send the maintenance demanded alarm to the IO
controller.
③ Based on the interrupts, the IO controller detects the maintenance demanded from the switch
and from the IO device. The module information data is updated in the IO controller and the
corresponding error OBs are called. Note: To be able to start the error OBs in the IO control-
ler, the "Call the user program if communication errors occur" property must be selected in
STEP 7 for the relevant IO controller.
④ In STEP 7 (on the programming device/PC), the maintenance demanded message is indica-
ted on the IO device and at the switch by a yellow wrench symbol.
⑤ STEP 7 can also read out detailed information directly from the switch.
Figure 4-17 Maintenance demanded for a PROFINET cable
Network diagnostics
The network management protocol SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) uses the
wireless UDP transport protocol. It consists of two network components, similar to the
client/server model. The SNMP manager monitors the network nodes and the SNMP clients
collect the various network-specific information in the individual network nodes and store it in
a structured form in the MIB (Management Information Base). This information allows a
network management system to run detailed network diagnostics.
MIB
The MIB (Management Information Base) is the database of a device. SNMP clients access
this database in the device. The S7 device family supports the following standard MIBs:
● MIB II, standardized in the RFC 1213
● LLDP-MIB, standardized in the international standard IEC 802.1AB
● LLDP-PNIO-MIB, standardized in the international standard IEC 61158-6-10
Diagnostics mechanism
The IO device outputs a diagnostics interrupt to the IO controller when it detects faults such
as wire break on an IO module. This interrupt calls a corresponding organization block in the
user program (diagnostics interrupt OB82), in order to generate a defined (programmed)
response to the fault and passes a diagnostics data record.
A group of diagnostics and configuration data records are available for each address level
(exception: device level always 0xF80c). In HEX representation, the individual groups of data
records are distinguished by the first letter of the data record number.
The information for each IO device (addressing level AR), module (addressing level slot) or
submodule (addressing level subslot) is always transferred in separate diagnostics or
configuration data records. The data record returns diagnostics data or configuration data for
one or more subslots, slots and APIs, depending on the addressing level.
Note
The diagnostics information is only generated for configured modules / submodules /
channels.
Num- Description
ber
① All individual errors are collected in a single data record on the interface module.
② In your user program, the instruction "RDREC" reads the entire station status asynchronous-
ly directly from the IO device.
Figure 4-19 Example: Evaluating diagnostics data records with the instruction "RDREC"
2. Evaluation of interrupts
When the error OB (OB 82) is called, the OB's start information provides you with information
on the cause and location of the error. Detailed information on the error event can be
obtained in the error OB using the instruction "RALRM" (read additional interrupt
information).
Num- Description
ber
① Every error is sent to the IO controller individually as channel diagnostics information in the
form of an interrupt.
② In the IO controller, the module status data is updated automatically and the error OB
(OB 82) is started.
③ In your user program in the error OB (OB 82), the instruction "RALRM" reads the error syn-
chronously from the IO controller without addressing the IO device.
Figure 4-20 Diagnostics with OB 82 and the instruction "RALRM"
Fieldbus integration
PROFINET allows you to use a proxy-capable PROFINET device to integrate existing
fieldbus systems (for example, PROFIBUS, AS interface). The devices of these fieldbus
systems are mapped on proxy PROFINET devices. In this way, you can set up any hybrid
systems consisting of fieldbus and Ethernet-based subsystems. This allows a continuous
exchange of information.
Figure 5-2 Gateway from PROFINET and PROFIBUS via IE/PB link
5.1.3 Connect the DP slave via the IE/PB Link to a PROFINET IO system
Requirements
● STEP 7 as of V13 SP1
● S7-1500 CPU as of firmware version 1.7
● ET 200SP CPU as of firmware version 1.7
● CPU 1516pro-2 PN as of firmware version 2.0
● S7-1500 Software Controller as of firmware version 1.7
● S7-300/400 CPU
7. In the Inspector window, go to the "Gateway" area and select the "Network gateway as
PROFINET IO proxy" option.
8. In the PROFINET device number area, you can assign a PROFINET device number for
the DP slave.
If you have selected the "Device number = PB address" check box (default), STEP 7
automatically assigns the device number according to the PROFIBUS address of the
slave. In addition, you no longer need to update the device number if the PROFIBUS
address changes.
Result
You have connected the DP slave to the PROFINET IO system.
Reference
Additional information on the IE/PB link is available in the manual Gateway IE/PB Link PN IO
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19299692).
I-device functionality
The "I-device" (intelligent IO device) functionality of a CPU facilitates data exchange with an
IO controller and operation of the CPU as intelligent preprocessing unit of sub processes, for
example. The I-device is linked as an IO device to a "higher-level" IO controller.
The preprocessing is handled by the user program in the I-device. The process values
acquired in the centralized or distributed (PROFINET IO or PROFIBUS DP) I/O are
preprocessed by the user program and made available to the IO controller.
Fields of application
Fields of application of the I-device:
● Distributed processing
A complex automation task can be divided into smaller units/subprocesses. This results
in manageable processes which lead to simplified subtasks.
● Separating subprocesses
Complicated, widely distributed and extensive processes can be subdivided into several
subprocesses with manageable interfaces by using I-devices. These subprocesses can
be stored in individual STEP 7 projects if necessary, which can later be merged to form
one master project.
● Know-how protection
Components can only be delivered with a GSD file for the I-device interface description
instead of with a STEP 7 project. The know-how of the user program may no longer be
published.
Properties
Properties of the I-device:
● Unlinking STEP 7 projects
Creators and users of an I-device can have completely separated STEP 7 automation
projects. The GSD file forms the interface between the STEP 7 projects. This allows a link
to standard IO controllers via a standardized interface.
● Real-time communication
The I-device is provided with a deterministic PROFINET IO system via a PROFINET IO
interface and therefore supports RT (real-time communication) and IRT (isochronous real
time).
Advantages
The I-device has the following advantages:
● Simple linking of IO controllers
● Real-time communication between IO controllers
● Relieving the IO controller by distributing the computing capacity to I-devices.
● Lower communication load by processing process data locally.
● Manageable, due to processing of subtasks in separate STEP 7 projects
Principle
An I-device is included in an IO system like a standard IO device.
In addition to its role as IO controller, an I-device can also be used via a PROFIBUS
interface as DP master for a lower-level PROFIBUS system.
Unit 1 and unit 2 each consist of an I-device with centralized I/O. The I-device along with the
distributed I/O system (for example ET 200) forms unit 3.
The user program on the I-device is responsible for preprocessing the process data. For this
task, the user program of the I-device requires default settings (for example control data)
from the higher-level IO controller. The I-device provides the higher-level IO controller with
the results (for example status of its subtask).
Introduction
The next chapter shows the data exchange between the higher- and lower-level IO system.
Transfer areas
Transfer areas are an interface to the user program of the I-device CPU. Inputs are
processed in the user program and outputs are the result of the processing in the user
program.
The data for communication between IO controller and I-device is made available in the
transfer areas. A transfer area contains an information unit that is exchanged consistently
between IO controller and I-device. You can find more information on configuration and use
of transfer areas in the section Configuring the I-device (Page 125).
The next figure shows the data exchange between the higher- and lower-level IO system.
The individual communication relations are explained below based on the numbers.
③ Transfer relationship between the user program and the transfer area
In this way, the user program and the transfer area exchange input and output data.
④ Data exchange between the user program and the I/O of the I-device
In this way, the user program and the centralized / distributed I/O exchange input and output
data.
Introduction
There are basically two possibilities for configuration:
● Configuration of an I-device within a project
● Configuration of an I-device that is used in another project or in another engineering
system.
STEP 7 allows you to configure an I-device for another project or for another engineering
system by exporting a configured I-device to a GSD file. You import the GSD file in other
projects or engineering systems as with other GSD files. The transfer areas for the data
exchange, among other data, are stored in this GSD file.
7. Configure the transfer areas. The transfer areas are found in the area navigation section
"I-device communication".
– Click in the first field of the "Transfer area" column. STEP 7 assigns a default name
which you can change.
– Select the type of communication relation: you can currently only select CD or F-CD
for "Controller-device communication relation".
– Addresses are automatically preset; you can correct addresses if necessary, and
determine the length of the transfer area which is to be consistently transferred.
8. A separate entry is created in the area navigation for each transfer area. If you select one
of these entries, you can adjust the details of the transfer area, or correct them and
comment on them.
Introduction
This simple program example shows how you use the transfer areas of an I-device.
Requirements
You have configured an I-device.
Task
The result of an "AND logic operation" of two inputs (preprocessing) in the I-device is to be
provided to the higher-level IO controller. This result is to be assigned to a local output in the
IO master (further processing).
Use a transfer area with the following addresses for this purpose:
● Address in the I-device: Q568
● Address in the IO controller: I68
Required steps
The following steps to solve the task:
1. Configuring the transfer area
2. Programming I-device
3. Programming IO controller
Programming I-device
To program the sample program for the I-device, follow these steps:
1. Using the SCL programming language, create a new function with the name
"preprocessing" in the project tree in "Program blocks" > "Add new block". Open the
function.
2. In the interface of the function "preprocessing", create the following tags:
3. In the instruction window of the function "preprocessing", write the following program
code:
#result:=#input 1&#input 2;
4. Call the function "preprocessing" in a program cycle OB, for example, in OB1.
5. Wire the function "preprocessing" in the program cycle OB as follows:
Programming IO controller
To program the sample program for the IO controller, follow these steps:
1. Using the SCL programming language, create a new function with the name "further
processing" in the project tree in "Program blocks" > "Add new block". Open the function.
2. In the interface of the function "further processing", create the following tags:
3. In the instruction window of the function "further processing", write the following program
code:
#output:=#result;
4. Call the function "further processing" in a program cycle OB, for example, in OB1.
5. Wire the function "further processing" in the program cycle OB as follows:
Result
The IO controller and the I-device can exchange data with each other through the
input/output transfer areas.
Note
The diagnostics messages of the I/O can be processed in the user program of the I-
device CPU and passed on from there to the higher-level IO controller via transfer areas.
Note
Special characteristic during startup of the higher-level IO controller
In contrast to the station return message from IO devices in the IO controller, which are
covered completely by the call of the OB 86, the station return message of a higher-level IO
controller in the I-device is separated into 2 parts:
1. Call of the OB 86: The initial values for the outputs of the I-device are set. However, the
input values are not yet valid. These values will first be valid with the opening of OB 86 in
the higher-level IO controller.
2. Call of OB 83 for each input transfer area; with this call, the validity of an input transfer
area is displayed. The starting up of the I device is first complete when the OB 83 has
been called for the input transfer areas. This step can be delayed or not occur at all in the
following situations:
– Higher-level IO controller is in STOP: OB 83 is first called at the STOP-RUN transition
of the higher-level IO controller.
– The IRT communication has been disrupted (sync-master failure, topology error, ...).
OB 83 is opened only after the IRT communication has taken place.
Reference
For more information on error handling in the case of direct I/O access, refer to "Error
handling" in the STEP 7 online help.
Introduction
The following recommendations for the structure and configuration of an IO system when
using I-devices will help you to keep the bandwidths required for keeping communication
small.
The following communication paths should not overlap:
● Communication paths between the IO controller and the IO device of its IO system.
● Communication paths of the I-device CPU and the IO devices of your IO system.
Bandwidth
The number of addresses of the configured transfer areas affects the usable bandwidth of
the I-device:
● Bandwidth of the transfer areas + bandwidth of the lower-level IO system = total
bandwidth used on the I-device
If the address space of the transfer areas is too large, this indicates a larger bandwidth
requirement and can thus lead to longer update times.
Tip: Keep the address space of the transfer area as small as possible.
Requirements
● STEP 7 as of V13 service pack 1
● CPU supports PROFIenergy with I-devices, for example CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC as of
firmware version 4.2
● You use the PROFINET IO interface as an I-device and have created transfer areas.
● The user program in the I-device handles PROFIenergy commands
Background: You need to program PROFIenergy functions with I-devices in the user
program using the "PE_I_DEV" instruction and corresponding auxiliary blocks; this is
different compared with IO devices for which this functionality is made available by the
firmware. You may therefore only activate the PROFIenergy support for transfer areas if
the user program in the I-device is configured correspondingly as well.
Once the I-device is fully configured, generate the GSD file for the I-device and import this
file in the project for the I/O controller. The GSD file generated contains an entry that
specifies that the I-device supports the PROFIenergy profile.
To address the I-device, for example for the PE command "PE_START_END", use the
hardware identifier of the "PROFIenergy supporting" transfer area in the I-device.
To address the IO controller for the PE command "PE_I_DEV", use the hardware identifier of
the transfer area that is supplied with the data for PROFIenergy on the IO controller.
You can find more information on PROFIenergy in the sectoin Saving energy with
PROFIenergy (Page 243).
① PROFINET
② Logical assignment
Figure 5-21 Example: Shared device with 2 IO controllers
Principle
Access to the submodules of the shared device is then divided up among the individual
IO controllers. Each submodule of the shared device is assigned exclusively to one
IO controller.
Requirements
● STEP 7 V12 Service Pack 1 or higher
● IO device supports the shared device function, e.g. interface module IM 155-5 PN ST
● IO controller supports the shared device function, for example CPU 1516-3 PN/DP as of
firmware version 1.1 or CPU 1215 DC/DC/DC as of firmware version 4.1
Explanatory notes:
● A CPU that is configured as an I-device can be used as a shared device. For this
purpose, you create a GSD file for the I-device in STEP 7 via "GSD export". You then
import the GSD file into a different project and assign the I-device to the IO controller
there. The CPU has to support the GSD export, for example CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC as
of firmware version 4.1.
The maximum number of IO controllers that you can assign to a CPU configured as a
shared I-device is given in the technical specifications in the CPU manuals.
Boundary conditions
The following boundary conditions result because a shared device configuration is
distributed across several projects:
● The addresses of modules or submodules that are not assigned to this IO controller are
missing in the address overview of each IO controller that has access to a shared device.
● The modules or submodules that are not assigned are not taken into consideration in the
configuration limit calculation for the shared device during the consistency check. For this
reason, you must verify for yourself that the maximum number of submodules or the
maximum amount of cyclic IO data for the shared device will not be exceeded.
For information on the maximum quantities, refer to the documentation for the devices
you are using.
● Configuration errors such as the assignment of a module or submodule to several
IO controllers are not detected in STEP 7.
● CPUs that are loaded with a shared device configuration do not have any information on
whether the IO device is a shared device. Modules or submodules that are assigned to
other IO controllers and therefore other CPUs are missing in the loaded configuration.
These modules or submodules are therefore displayed neither in the CPU web server nor
in the CPU display.
Requirements
● STEP 7 V12 Service Pack 1 or higher
● The IO controller supports the shared device function, for example CPU 1513-1 PN as of
firmware version 1.1.
● IO device supports shared device functionality, for example interface module
IM 155-5 PN ST as of firmware version 2.0.
3. Keep the "PLC1" setting for all modules and submodules that are to remain in the
address range of the local CPU.
Select the setting "---" for all modules and submodules that are to be located in the
address range of the CPU from the "Shared-Device-2" project (PLC2). This means that
an IO controller outside the project is to have access to the module or submodule.
4. Select the interface module in the network view or device view of project "Shared-Device-
2".
5. Select the "Shared Device" area in the Inspector window.
A table shows which CPU has access to the respective module or submodule for all
configured modules.
6. Select the setting "---" for all modules and submodules that are to be located in the
address range of the CPU from the "Shared-Device-1" project (PLC1).
7. Finally, check whether the settings for access are "complementary" for each module or
submodule in both projects. This means that if the local CPU has access in one project,
the option "---" must be set in the other project and vice versa.
Special consideration: The option "---" for the PROFINET interface and therefore for the
ports makes the associated parameters read-only and not changeable. Parameters of the
PROFINET interface and port parameters can only be edited in the project in which the
PROFINET interface is assigned to the local CPU. The ports can be interconnected in
both projects regardless of this.
8. Check whether the same IP address parameters and device name are set for the shared
device in all projects.
Check whether the same S7 subnet ID is set in all projects for the subnet to which the
shared device is connected (subnet properties, "General" area in the Inspector window).
Note
If you make changes to the shared device: Make the same changes in each project on
the shared device. Make sure that only one IO controller has access to a module or
submodule.
These errors do not show up until operation and are output as configuration errors, for
example.
Note
After a configuration has been loaded in the IO controller, non-assigned modules or
submodules retain their current parameterization state to ensure the independence from the
parameterizations of other IO controllers.
Manufacturer view
You assign the following parameters for an S7-1500 CPU as an I-device: centralized and
distributed I/O, the desired transfer areas, and the number of IO controllers having access to
this I-device (always greater than 1 for a shared device!).
Special consideration: The I-device is configured without a higher-level IO controller. As a
result, only the local I/O addresses of the transfer area are available (= "Address in the I-
device") in order to create the user program for editing the addresses from the transfer area.
The I-device that has been completely configured except for the connection to the higher-
level IO controller is loaded to the S7-1500 CPU.
Operator view
You must install the PROFINET GSD file created from the I-device configuration in all
engineering systems that are involved in configuring a PROFINET IO system with this
shared I-device. If all uses of this I-device will be configured with STEP 7 V13, it is sufficient
to install the GSD file in STEP 7.
You configure the I-device as a GSD variant on the PROFINET IO system in the projects
involved. In STEP 7 V13, this I-device can be found under "Other field devices > PROFINET
IO > PLCs & CPs" following installation.
In each of the projects involved, you define which transfer areas are assigned exclusively to
the higher-level IO controller (default setting: all). You set the other transfer areas to "---" (not
assigned). As a result of this setting, the local IO controller has no access to this transfer
area and it can therefore be assigned to another IO controller in another project.
You adapt the addresses from the view of the IO controller in the device overview. To open
the device overview, double-click the I-device.
Figure 5-26 I/O addresses of the transfer areas in the device overview
Requirements
● STEP 7 as of V13
Figure 5-27 Changing the address type for the transfer area
– Select the number of IO controllers (at least two) that will access the shared I-device
during operation ("Operating mode" > "Real time settings" area, "Shared Device"
area).
6. Save the project.
7. Click the "Export" button ("Mode" > "I-device configuration" area, "Export general station
description file (GSD)" section).
If you do not change the name in the Export dialog, the GSD file has a name in the form
"GSDML-V2.31-#Siemens-PreConf_PLC-I-Device-20130925-123456", for example.
7. Adapt the parameters of the subnet and PROFINET interface. Because the shared I-
device involves the same device in different projects, these data must match.
8. Save the project.
Both projects now have an identically configured shared I-device. The IO controller access
and the parameters of the PROFINET interface should still be checked in the different
projects during the next step.
Note
If you make changes to the I-device (e.g., change the number or length of the transfer
areas):
Export the I-device as a GSD file again. Re-install the GSD file in each project that uses
the I-device as a shared device. Make sure that only one IO controller has access to a
transfer area.
Note
After a configuration has been loaded in the IO controller, non-assigned modules or
submodules retain their current parameterization state to ensure the independence from the
parameterizations of other IO controllers.
Introduction
This section describes the module-internal shared input/shared output (MSI/MSO)
functionality for I/O modules that are operated on PROFINET.
The module-internal shared output (MSO) function allows an output module to make its
output data available to up to four IO controllers. An IO controller has write access to the
channels of the output module. Up to three IO controllers can additionally have read-access
to the channels.
The following figure shows the MSO functionality.
Advantages of MSI/MSO
Module-internal shared input/shared output (MSI/MSO) offers the following advantages:
● Real-time acquisition in multiple CPUs
● Lower costs due to saving on additional IO devices and modules
● Lower space requirements due to saving on additional IO devices and modules
● Reduced communication load because no CPU-CPU communication is needed
● No additional programming effort is needed for CPU-CPU communication
MSI submodules
The input values of all channels are copied to a basic submodule and up to three other MSI
submodules during MSI configuration of an input module. The channels of the module are
then available with identical input values in the basic submodule and the MSI submodules.
The MSI submodules can be assigned to up to three IO controllers when the module is used
in a shared device. Each IO controller has read access to the same channels.
The following figure shows a digital input module with the basic submodule and three MSI
submodules. Each submodule is assigned to an IO controller. Diagnostics and parameter
assignment of the digital input module can be performed from the IO controller 1 via the
basic submodule.
① Read access
② Parameter assignment and system diagnostics
Figure 5-30 DI module with MSI submodules
MSO submodules
During MSO configuration of an output module, the output values of all channels of the
module are copied from a basic submodule to up to three other MSO submodules. The
channels of the module are then available with identical values in the basic submodule and
the MSO submodules. The MSO submodules can be assigned to up to three IO controllers
when the module is used in a shared device.
● The IO controller to which the basic submodule is assigned has write access to the
outputs of the module. The basic submodule therefore occupies output addresses in the
process image of the IO controller.
● The IO controllers to which the MSO submodules are assigned have read access to the
outputs of the module. MSO submodules therefore occupy input addresses in the
process image of the IO controller.
The following figure shows a digital output module with the basic submodule and three MSO
submodules. Each submodule is assigned to an IO controller. Diagnostics and parameter
assignment of the digital output module can be performed from IO controller 1 via the basic
submodule.
① Write access
② Read access
③ Parameter assignment and system diagnostics
Figure 5-31 DQ module with MSO submodule
Requirements
● Configuration software STEP 7 as of V13
● IO device supports MSI/MSO (for example IM 155-5 PN ST as of firmware version 2.0.0)
Procedure
1. In the network view of STEP 7, insert an IM 155-5 PN ST interface module as of V2.0.
2. Double-click the IO device.
You are now in the device view.
3. Place the I/O modules from the hardware catalog in a suitable slot.
4. Add MSI/MSO submodules to the I/O modules:
– Input modules: Select the number of MSI submodules under "Module parameters
" > "DI configuration" or "AI configuration" in the area "Copy of module for Shared
Device (MSI)".
– Output modules: Select the number of MSO submodules under "Module parameters
" > "DQ configuration" or "AW configuration" in the area "Copy of module for shared
device (MSO)".
Configuring access to a shared device and the module-internal shared input / shared output
(MSI /MSO) function
You can learn how to access a shared device and the MSI /MSO function in STEP 7 with this
FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109736536).
① Redundancy manager
② Test frames
③ Redundancy clients
Figure 5-33 Media redundancy in ring topology
The ring ports of a device are the ports that establish the connection to the two neighboring
devices in the ring topology. The ring ports are selected and set in the configuration of the
relevant device (is also preset, if applicable).
In the redundancy manager, one of the two ring ports is blocked in uninterrupted network
operation for normal communication so that no data frames are circulated. In terms of data
transmission, the ring topology is a linear bus topology. The redundancy manager monitors
the ring for interruptions. For this purpose, it sends test frames not only from ring port 1 but
also from ring port 2. The test frames pass through the ring in both directions until they arrive
at the other ring port of the redundancy manager.
An interruption of the ring can be caused by loss of the connection between two devices or
by failure of a device in the ring.
If the test frames of the redundancy manager no longer arrive at the other ring port during an
interruption of the ring, the redundancy manager connects its two ring ports. This substitute
path once again restores a functioning connection between all remaining devices in the form
of a linear bus topology.
The time between the ring interruption and restoration of a functional linear topology is
known as the reconfiguration time.
As soon as the interruption has been eliminated, one of the two ring ports is blocked again in
the redundancy manager. The redundancy clients are informed about the change and use
the original paths to the other devices again.
Requirements
● All devices in the ring support MRP.
● You have complied with the rules for topology set out below. STEP 7 monitors
compliance with the rules during compilation and outputs corresponding alarms.
Topology
The following schematic shows a possible topology for devices in a ring with MRP. The
devices inside the shaded oval are in the redundancy domain.
Example of a ring topology with the MRP media redundancy protocol:
Figure 5-34 Example of a ring topology with the MRP media redundancy protocol:
The following rules apply to a ring topology with media redundancy using MRP:
● All devices must be connected to one other via their ring ports.
● All devices in the ring belong to the same redundancy domain.
● A device in the ring takes on the task of a redundancy manager.
– One device only has the role of "Manager". No other device may have the role of
"Manager". Or
– Several devices in the ring have the role of "Manager (auto)". The devices with the
role of "Manager (auto)" then negotiate between themselves which device is to take
on the role of redundancy manager. In this case, no device is permitted to have the
role of "Manager".
● All other devices in the ring are redundancy clients.
● You can connect up to 50 devices in a ring.
Non MRP-compliant devices can, for example, be connected to the ring via a SCALANCE X
switch or via a PC with a CP 1616.
In order to ensure that an invalid MRP configuration does not result in the failure of the
network, delete the ring before loading.
Follow these steps:
1. Delete the ring.
2. Load the error-free and consistent MRP configuration from your project onto all the
devices involved and ensure that the devices are in data exchange mode (i.e. the
application relations (ARs) are set up).
3. Close the ring.
Boundary conditions
MRP and RT
RT operation is possible with the use of MRP.
Note
The RT communication is disrupted (station failure) if the reconfiguration time of the ring is
greater than the selected response monitoring time of the IO device. This is why you should
select a response monitoring time of the IO devices that is sufficiently large.
Configuring MRP
Proceed as follows to create a PROFINET IO configuration with MRP in STEP 7:
1. Generate a ring via the port interconnections in the topology view. First interconnect the
devices to a line topology. Connect the unassigned port of the last device in the line with
To have the media redundancy roles assigned automatically, click the "Configure MRP
automatically" button. STEP 7 automatically assigns the media redundancy role for each
device in the ring. After the automatic MRP configuration, you can make modifications to the
media redundancy roles in the "MRP role" column.
Diagnostic interrupts
If diagnostic interrupts to the MRP state are to be output in the local CPU, select the
"Diagnostic interrupts" check box. The following diagnostic interrupts can be configured:
● Wiring or port error
Diagnostic interrupts will be generated for the following errors in the ring ports:
– A neighbor of the ring port does not support MRP.
– A ring port is connected to a non-ring port
– A ring port is connected to the ring port of another MRP domain.
● Interruption / return (redundancy manager only)
If the ring is interrupted and the original configuration is returned, diagnostic interrupts will
be generated. If both of these interrupts occur within 0.2 seconds, this indicates an
interruption of the ring.
You can respond to these events in the user program by programming the appropriate
response in the diagnostic error interrupt OB (OB 82).
Configuring MRPD
You do not have to explicitly activate MRPD in STEP 7. The function is available
automatically as soon as all the requirements for MRPD are fulfilled.
The figure below shows the display of the redundancy levels in STEP 7 for the example
configuration.
Multiple rings
Use multiple rings to achieve higher availability for PROFINET IO networks with star
topology.
In a multiple ring configuration, several PROFINET lines lead from a switch (star topology).
The individual PROFINET lines lead from IO device to IO device. Redundant PROFINET
cables run back to the switch from the last IO device on each individual line.
The switch operates as a manager. The manager must have two ring ports for each ring.
Several rings are possible. For example, the SCALANCE X414 as of firmware version 3.10
supports up to 4 rings.
The manager monitors all the rings individually: It checks for each particular ring (an MRP
domain) whether the transmission path is intact. To do this, it uses an MRP instance in each
case. An MRP instance is required for each connected ring (set up automatically by
STEP 7).
Requirements
● SCALANCE X414 as of version 3.10
● SCALANCE X300 as of version 4.0 (configured via GSD file)
In the example, Switch 1 belongs to two MRP rings. Ring 1 is formed by Switch 1 and PLC 1,
Ring 2 by Switch 1 and IO device 1.
STEP 7 automatically assigns the "Manager" role to the switch. The other devices receive
the "Client" role.
The manager is located at the point of intersection of the two rings 1 and 2. The manager
monitors the two rings separately. To do this, it uses two MRP instances.
One MRP instance checks whether all devices in ring 1 are reachable, another instance
monitors whether all devices in ring 2 are reachable (only one device in each case in the
example).
You can configure each MRP instance separately.
The following figure shows the two MRP instances in the manager (PROFINET interface of
the switch). Here in the example, MRP instance 1 checks whether the devices in the MRP
domain "mrpdomain-1" can be reached. The MRP instance 2 is responsible for monitoring
the devices of the MRP domain "mrpdomain-2".
The following figure shows Ring 1 (mrpdomain-1). The participants of the mrpdomain-1 are
the PROFINET interface of the CPU as the "Client" and the MRP interface 1 of the
PROFINET interface of the switch as the "Manager".
The following figure shows Ring 2 (mrpdomain-2). The participants of the mrpdomain-2 are
the PROFINET interface of the IO device as the "Client" and the MRP instance 2 of the
PROFINET interface of the switch as the "Manager".
5.5.1 Introduction
Properties
PROFINET IO is a scalable real-time communication system based on the Layer 2 protocol
for Fast Ethernet. With the RT transmission method, two real-time-support performance
levels are available for time-critical process data and IRT for high-accuracy and also
isochronous processes .
5.5.2 RT
PROFINET IO with real-time communication (RT) is the ideal solution for integrating IO
systems. This is a solution that also uses standard Ethernet in the devices and commercially
available industrial switches as infrastructure components. A special hardware support is not
required.
If you want to use PROFINET functions that provide an additional value, such as topology
detection, diagnostics, device exchange without exchangeable medium/PG, you have to use
switches that support the PROFINET standard according to the IEC 61158 standard. In the
integrated switches of PROFINET devices and PROFINET switches (e.g., the SCALANCE
product family), PROFINET functions in accordance with the PROFINET standard are
implemented and can be used without restriction for integration in the PROFINET IO system
(see also section Active network components (Page 31).
Switching mechanisms
Switches in SIMATIC meet the real-time requirements with two mechanisms on PROFINET:
"Store and forward" and "Cut through".
Cut through
In the Cut through process the entire data package is not stored temporarily in a buffer, it is
passed directly onto the target port as soon as the target address and the target port have
been determined.
The times required by the data package to pass through the switch are then minimal and
independent of the frame length. The data are only stored temporarily in accordance with the
Store and forward process as per priority when the section between the target segment and
the port of the next switch is occupied.
5.5.3 IRT
Advantages
PROFINET with IRT is synchronized communication in reserved time intervals. With IRT
you have the option to be able to control time-critical applications such as motion control via
PROFINET. With IRT you use further advantages:
● High-precision deterministics allow highest control quality and thus, for example, exact
positioning of axes
● Simple and flexible integration of PROFINET devices for real-time applications in existing
company networks
● Shortest response times and highest deterministics by means of bandwidth reservation
and thus also for applications that have to satisfy highest performance requirements (e.g.,
printing control/position control for presses, print-mark recognition with packaging
machines)
● Secured standard communication parallel to real-time communication via the same
transmission medium
● You can continue to use standard components for your PROFINET IO system outside of
the sync domain
Note
IWLAN and IRT
PROFINET devices that are connected to PROFINET IO via access points, do not support
IRT.
Synchronization
The prerequisite for the IRTcommunication is a synchronization cycle for all PROFINET
devices in a sync domain for distributing a mutual time basis. A synchronism of the
transmission cycle of the PROFINET devices within a sync domain is achieved with this
basic synchronization.
A sync master specifies the clock to which sync slaves are synchronized. An IO controller or
an IO device can have the role of sync master. If the sync master fails, all IO devices with
IRT will fail.
Sync master and sync slaves are always devices in a sync domain. Bandwidth is reserved
within the sync domain for IRT communication. Real-time and non-real-time communication
(TCP/IP communication) is possible outside of the reserved bandwidth.
Property RT IRT
Transmission method Prioritizing the RT frames through Path-based switching on the basis of a communi-
Ethernet priority (VLAN tag) cation path plan; no transmission of TCP/IP fra-
mes in the time range with IRT communication.
Determinism Variance of the duration of trans- Exact, planned transmission, transmission and
mission by the shared use of the reception times are guaranteed for all topologies.
transmission bandwidth with other
protocols (e.g., TCP/IP)
Hardware support through special Not required Required
Ethernet controllers is required
Isochronous application - Yes
Starting time of the isochronous - The point in time for the reception of the data is
application planned exactly. Application can be started syn-
chronized to the cycle.
Introduction
If you want to configure a PROFINET IO system with IRT, you have to configure the
PROFINET IO devices. These PROFINET devices must support IRT. Set which device acts
as the sync master and synchronizes the other devices. This is done by configuring a sync
domain with a sync master and at least one sync slave.
Requirement
● There is an IO system with an IO controller and at least one IO device.
● You have configured the topology for the IO system.
● The devices support IRT.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to enable an existing IO system for the use of IRT:
1. Select the PROFINET interface of the IO controller.
2. In the Inspector window, navigate to "Advanced options > Real time settings >
Synchronization".
3. Assign the IO controller the role of sync master under "Synchronization role".
4. Select the PROFINET interfaces of an associated IO device.
5. In the Inspector window, navigate to "Advanced options > Real time settings >
Synchronization".
6. Activate the RT class "IRT". The IO device will then automatically be assigned the
synchronization role "sync slave".
7. You can check and correct your settings at any time using the "Domain settings" button.
Or
1. Highlight the PROFINET IO system in the network view.
2. Click on the PROFINET IO system.
3. Navigate to the device of the required sync domain in the Inspector window.
Bandwidth level
For PROFINET IO with IRT, you can specify the maximum portion of the send cycle that you
want to use for cyclic IO communication.
You have the following setting options for the bandwidth usage in STEP 7.
● Maximum 25% cyclic IO data. Focus on non-cyclic data.
● Maximum 37.5% cyclic IO data. Focus on non-cyclic data.
● Maximum 50% cyclic IO data. Balanced proportion.
● Maximum 90% cyclic IO data. Focus on cyclic IO data. (Requirement: The "Make 'high
performance' possible" option is activated)
For information on how to set the bandwidth usage for IRT with maximum performance, refer
to the section Configuration of IRT with high performance (Page 193)
① Shared path
Figure 5-52 Multi-controller application with shared path
In the figure below, the two PROFINET IO systems do not use shared paths.
● If separation is not possible: Increase the update time for the affected IO devices.
Setting limitation of the data infeed into the network for a CPU
To set the limitation of the data infeed into the network, follow these steps:
1. In the network view of STEP 7, select the interface of the CPU.
2. In the Inspector window, go to "Properties" > "General" > "Advanced options" > "Interface
options".
3. Select or clear the "Limit data infeed into the network" check box.
Performance upgrade
The performance upgrade implements the application class "High Performance" of the
PROFINET specification V2.3.
The performance upgrade provides a series of measures that lead to the following
improvements for PROFINET with IRT:
● Reduction of runtime delays in the IO devices
● Increase in the bandwidth for cyclic IO data
● Reduction of the bandwidth used for PROFINET frames
● Reduction of the send clocks
The improvements achieved with the performance upgrade mean that you can operate your
PROFINET IO system with more devices with the same send clock or the same number of
devices with a shorter send clock.
With PROFINET, it was previously possible to reach a send clock of 250 µs.
With the performance upgrade, it is now possible to achieve isochronous send clocks of up
to 125 µs with the fast forwarding, dynamic frame packing and fragmentation procedures,
depending on the performance capability of the CPU (see Technical Specifications in the
device manuals). With short send clocks, standard communication remains possible.
The performance upgrade will help you to implement applications with high speed and send
clock requirements.
① The PROFINET IO frame contains the user data for all 3 IO devices (green, blue and orange).
② The PROFINET IO frame reaches the first IO device. The IO device takes its user data (green)
from the frame and forwards the remaining frame.
③ The PROFINET IO frame contains the user data for two IO devices (blue and orange).
④ The PROFINET IO frame reaches the second IO device. The IO device takes its user data
(blue) from the frame and forwards the remaining frame.
⑤ The PROFINET IO frame contains the user data for one IO device (orange).
⑥ The PROFINET IO frame reaches the last IO device. The IO device saves the entire frame
including user data (orange).
Figure 5-55 Dynamic Frame Packing (DFP)
DFP groups
Dynamic frame packing automatically groups IO devices that support the performance
upgrade into DFP groups. To be grouped together in a DFP group. the IO devices must be
located one after the other in a line and must have the same update time and watchdog time.
As soon as a maximum frame size for the DFP group is exceeded or a maximum number of
members for a DFP group is reached, Dynamic Frame Packing automatically opens a new
DFP group.
STEP 7 shows the DFP groups in "Domain management" > "Sync domains" > "Name of the
sync domain" > "Device" in the "IO devices" box.
Note
Dynamic frame packing with high watchdog times
If you set the parameter "Accepted update cycles without IO data" higher than 31, Dynamic
Frame Packing does not place this IO device in a DFP group.
5.6.2 Fragmentation
The transfer of a complete standard Ethernet frame with TCP/IP data takes up to 125 µs.
This means that the cycle time for PROFINET IO data cannot be reduced by any desired
amount.
The performance upgrade uses the fragmentation procedure, which breaks down TCP/IP
frames into sub-frames. These frame segments are transferred to the target device over
multiple send clocks; there they are reassembled to the original TCP/IP frame.
Fragmentation is a requirement for cycle times lower than 250 µs. In these short send
clocks, you can use more bandwidth for cyclic IO data, since the fragments of the standard
Ethernet frames use significantly less bandwidth than a complete standard Ethernet frame.
Note
The PROFINET IO interface of the IO controller supports fragmentation if all the ports except
one are deactivated.
The figure below compares the throughput of a PROFINET IO frame in an IO device with
and without fast forwarding.
① Start:
• Both PROFINET frames reach the IO device.
The IO devices start to check the frames for the frame ID
② After 320 ns:
• Without fast forwarding: The IO device is still checking the PROFINET frame for the frame
ID.
• With fast forwarding: The IO device receives the frame ID from the PROFINET frame and
forwards the frame.
③ After 1440 ns:
• Without fast forwarding: The IO device receives the frame ID from the PROFINET frame
and forwards the frame.
• The PROFINET frame with fast forwarding is "ahead" of the PROFINET frame without fast
forwarding.
Requirements
● S7-1500 CPU as of firmware version V2.0
Note
Bandwidth usage in isochronous mode
If you operate your PROFINET IO system in isochronous mode, avoid using the setting for
the bandwidth usage "Maximum 90% cyclic IO data. Focus on cyclic IO data."
Note
Fast forwarding and IPv6
The operation of fast forwarding in combination with IPv6 is not supported.
As soon as an IO device in the subnet uses an IPv6 address, you must not activate "fast
forwarding".
Port 2 of the X1 interface and the ports of the interface modules on the bus use the following
setting: Medium copper, cable length < 20 m or signal delay max. 0.12µs
A programming device connection to the CPU can be established via the interfaces X2 and X3
of the CPU or via the free port at the end of the line.
Figure 5-64 Example configuration for IRT with high performance
Just-In-Time
The high speed and reliable reaction time of a system operating in isochronous mode is
based on the fact that all data are provided just-in-time. The constant bus cycle time
PROFINET IO cycle beats the time here.
Isochronous workflow
When the isochronous mode property of the system is used, the measured value acquisition
is clocked and occurs simultaneously at the various measuring points. The time required for
measurement is reduced. Resultant workflow:
● Continuous machining of the camshaft
● Synchronous measurement of the camshaft positions and gradients within a continuous
rotation.
● Machining of the next camshaft
All camshaft positions and the corresponding measured values (red) are measured
synchronously within a single rotation of the camshaft. This increases machine output and
maintains or enhances precision of the measurement.
The start of the I/O read cycle is advanced by the amount of a bias time TI in order to make
all input data available for transfer on the PROFINET IO line at the start of the next
PROFINET IO cycle. TI is the "flashlight" for the inputs; at this instant all synchronized inputs
are read in. TI is necessary in order to compensate for analog-to-digital conversion,
backplane bus times, and the like. The bias time TI can be configured by STEP 7 or by the
user. We recommend automatically assigning the bias time TI of STEP 7.
The PROFINET IO line transports the input data to the IO controller. The application can be
started synchronized to the cycle, i.e., the isochronous mode interrupt OB is called after a
parameterizable delay time. The user program in the isochronous mode interrupt OB decides
the process reaction and provides the output data in time for the start of the next data cycle.
The length of the data cycle is always configured by the user.
TO is the compensation arising from the backplane bus and the digital-to-analog conversion
within the IO device. TO is the "flashlight" for the outputs; at this instant the synchronized
outputs are output. The time TO can be configured by STEP 7or by the user. We recommend
automatically assigning the bias time To of STEP 7.
Note
To prevent inconsistent data from being returned to OB6x, you should avoid using the
"DPRD_DAT" and "DPWR_DAT" instructions (direct data access) in the isochronous mode
OB.
Direct access to the I/O areas returns current values of the process that do not, however,
necessarily match the values supplied by "SYNC_PI" and "SYNC_PO".
The "SYNC_PI" and "SYNC_PO" instructions can update the process image partition only
within the permitted execution window. The execution window for the possible call of the
"SYNC_PI" and "SYNC_PO" instructions stretches from the end of the cyclical data
exchange on the PROFINET IO until the point in time before the end of T_DC at which the
outputs can still be copied on time. The data exchange must be started within this time
window. If the "SYNC_PI" and "SYNC_PO" instructions are not processed within the
execution window, the system functions will indicate this with a corresponding error
message. An image in which the execution window and the corresponding times are
displayed can be found in the next section.
5.7.6 Program processing according to the IPO model with application cycle = 1
Figure 5-68 Program execution according to the IPO model with application cycle = 1
The figure shows the IPO model with the application cycle factor = 1 from acquisition through
processing on the CPU to output of the process values. STEP 7 calculates the delay time or
you can enter it yourself (see section Setting the application cycle and delay time
(Page 208)). During this time, the read input data and the written output data is on its way on
PROFINET IO. The delay time is set as a default to the start of the execution window.
The isochronous user program in OB 6x begins with the "SYNC_PI" instruction and ends
with the "SYNC_PO" instruction.
The "SYNC_PI" and "SYNC_PO" instructions may only be processed within the execution
window. The processing of the user program must be completed within the data cycle T_DC.
5.7.7 Program execution according to the IPO model with application cycle > 1
Figure 5-69 Program execution according to the IPO model with application cycle factor > 1
The figure shows the signals of the IPO model with application cycle factor = 2 over time
from the acquisition through the processing on the IO controller to the output of the process
values. STEP 7 calculates the delay time TM. During this time, the read input data and the
written output data is on its way on PROFINET IO.
The IPO model with application cycle factor > 1 is particularly ideal for large IO
infrastructures with a comprehensive user program in the OB6x. With this model, longer
calculation times are possible when executing the input data and obtaining the
corresponding output data.
With the IPO model with application cycle factor > 1, there is a constant execution time from
the "input terminal" to the "output terminal" of TI + (application cycle factor + 1) x T_DC + TO.
TI + (2 x application cycle factor + 1) x T_DC + TO can be guaranteed for the process
response time.
Introduction
The configuring of isochronous mode for a module is described as IO device in the following
based on the ET 200MP distributed I/O system. The procedure described also applies to
other distributed I/O systems (e.g., ET 200S or ET 200SP).
The IO controller is an S7-1500 CPU.
Requirements
● The STEP 7 network view is open.
● A S7-1500 CPU has been placed (e.g., CPU 1516-3 PN/DP).
● An interface module IM 155-5 PN HF (ET 200MP) has been placed and networked with
the CPU.
● All requirements for an IRT configuration are met, namely:
– The ports of the CPU and the interface module are interconnected.
– The RT class of the interface module is set to "IRT" (area "Advanced options > Real
time settings > Synchronization").
– You have assigned the "sync master" and "sync slave" roles.
Procedure
To create an isochronous connection between the I/O and user program, follow these steps:
1. Select the "IM 155-5 PN HF" in the network view of STEP 7 and switch to the device
view.
2. Insert an IO module that can be operated in isochronous mode (module with the
extension "HF").
3. Go to the "I/O addresses" area in the Inspector window of the selected I/O module.
Figure 5-71 Creating the organization block for programming isochronous mode
Requirement
● You have created an isochronous mode configuration in STEP 7.
● You have created an isochronous mode interrupt OB.
● The isochronous mode interrupt OB is open.
Note
When you exchange a device, make sure that the PROFINET cable is again inserted into the
correct port, as it is configured in STEP 7.
Otherwise, the system will not run.
Advantages
With the Device replacement without exchangeable medium/PG PROFINET functionality,
you can profit from the following advantages:
● After the replacement of the IO device, it automatically obtains its device name from the
IO controller. You no longer have to assign device names with the PG or exchangeable
medium.
● You can save on the storage medium for the IO device that replaces the removed one.
● Simple device name allocation with series machines that have the same configuration
and set topology. It is no longer necessary to assign device names via exchangeable
medium/PG.
Neighborhood
Neighborhood is the physical relationship between two ports of adjacent PROFINET devices.
A PROFINET device is connected in this case through one of its ports over a physical
Ethernet line to a specific port of the second PROFINET device in close proximity
(neighbors).
Both terminal devices, for example, IO controllers and IO devices with a port, and network
components, for example, switches, IO controllers and IO devices with multiple ports, are
considered PROFINET devices.
For the device replacement, the following information is available to the IO controller:
The IO device with the device name "Mill" fails in this example:
Requirement
The PROFINET device replacing the removed one has no device name.
Note
If you insert a device with the Device replacement without exchangeable medium/PG
PROFINET functionality at a different location than the configuration, a different device
name is then assigned to the device.
Reset a wrongly inserted device to delivery state before you use it again.
Introduction
Replacement of IO devices is sometimes frequently required in automation systems. The IO
devices are generally assigned a device name by either inserting an exchangeable medium
or via the programming device. The CPU identifies the IO device by using these device
names.
Under certain circumstances, replacing an IO device can be done without inserting an
exchangeable medium or without the PG.
Requirements
● The topology of the PROFINET IO system with the respective IO devices must be
configured.
By configuring the topology, the neighbor relationships of all the PROFINET devices
located in the PROFINET IO system are announced to the PROFINET IO system or the
IO controller. From the neighbor relationships specified by the set topology and the actual
neighbor relationships established by the real PROFINET devices, the IO controller can
identify the replaced IO device without a name and assign to it the configured name and
the IP address and then again list it in the user data traffic.
● The affected IO devices in the automation system must support device replacement
without exchangeable medium.
If the individual IO devices in the automation system do not support device replacement
without exchangeable medium, a corresponding alarm is output for the IO device.
Note
Use only new IO devices as replacements or restore configured IO devices to their
delivery state.
Requirements
● IO controller supports the "Permit overwriting of device names of all assigned IO devices"
option, for example CPU 1215C DC/DC/DC as of firmware version 4.0
How the "Permit overwriting of PROFINET device names of all assigned IO devices" option works
The IO controller (CPU) can overwrite the PROFINET device names of IO devices in the
IO system when the "Permit overwriting of PROFINET device names of all assigned IO
devices" option is enabled.
Multiple use IO systems can only be operated when this option is enabled. The IO controller
checks prior to overwriting if the type of the IO device matches the configured type.
If the option is not selected, the IO controller cannot overwrite the device names of the
IO devices. In this case, you must manually assign the PROFINET device name on the
IO device if the PROFINET device name changes in the configuration or when a device is
replaced, or delete the device names of the IO devices prior to an automatic commissioning.
CAUTION
Error at partial commissioning
If device names are assigned incorrectly during partial commissioning or incorrect wiring,
these have to be deleted manually after a correction of the wiring in order to attain correct
assignment of the device names.
WARNING
Wrong PROFINET device name
When the "Permit overwriting of PROFINET device names of all assigned IO devices"
option is enabled, incorrectly connected devices can be assigned an incorrect PROFINET
device name from the configuration.
Depending on the connected I/O, there is risk of death, severe injuries or damage caused
by malfunctions.
To rule out any danger, check whether the suitable replacement device has been
connected in case of a device replacement and whether the port interconnection matches
the configured preset topology.
Due to the control of different actuators, the plant could become hazardous in this case.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to change the "Permit overwriting of PROFINET device names of all
assigned IO devices" option:
1. Select the PROFINET interface of the CPU for which you want to change the option in the
network view or in the device view.
2. Select the area "Advanced options", section "Interface options".
3. Change the option.
Introduction
Standard machine projects are STEP 7 projects that use a set of innovative functions
allowing simple configuration and commissioning of flexible automation solutions for
standard machines or for machines with a modular structure.
A hardware configuration consisting of an IO controller and any number of connected
IO devices represents a "PROFINET IO system master". This master is configured with a
maximum configuration based on a template from which various options can be derived for
different standard machines, for example with different configuration variants of the
IO system.
Application examples
You can find application examples for configuration control at the device layer, configuration
control for IO systems and multiple-use IO systems on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/29430270).
Additional information
For more information on multiple use IO systems, refer to section Multiple use IO systems
(Page 218).
For more information on the configuration control for IO systems, refer to section
Configuration control for IO systems (Page 226).
For more information on configuration control, refer to the system manual S7-1500,
ET 200MP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792).
The following figure shows how an automation solution with a multiple use IO system is
loaded on different automation systems and then one automation system is adapted to the
existing network infrastructure locally.
Principle
The automation components for a machine include a PROFINET IO system, consisting of an
IO controller (PROFINET interface of a CPU) and the IO devices assigned to it.
With the "Multiple use IO system" setting for the IO system, you turn a STEP 7 project into a
"Standard machine project".
The "Multiple use IO system" setting triggers various settings and checks of the configuration
by STEP 7. The settings ensure that the IO system is self-contained and there are no
dependencies on components outside the IO system.
Requirements
● STEP 7 as of V13
● The IO controller supports the "Multiple use IO system" function, for example a CPU
1512SP-1 PN as of firmware version 1.6.
Rules
The following rules apply to a multiple use IO system:
● No IO device can be configured as shared device.
● The ports of the devices must be interconnected.
Devices for which no port interconnection is configured, for example, interface module
IM 154-6 IWLAN (ET 200pro PN), cannot be operated with STEP 7 V13 as IO devices on
a multiple use IO system.
● If an IO device in a multiple use IO system is an I-device (CPU as an "intelligent"
IO device):
– If the I-device has a lower-level IO system, this I-device cannot be connected to the
same PROFINET interface as the higher-level IO controller.
Note: If the I-device is configured using a PROFINET GSD, STEP 7 cannot check for
compliance with this rule. In this case, you are responsible for ensuring compliance
with the rule.
① I-device in multiple use IO system. The PROFINET interface is operated as IO device. No other IO system is
connected here.
② A lower-level IO system on the I-device is connected to another PROFINET interface.
Figure 5-77 Example configuration for "Multiple use IO system" with I-device
Configuration
You specify whether or not a configuration can be used multiple times in the properties of the
IO system.
All other parameter settings for the configured devices are then set automatically by STEP 7
and checked during compilation.
Boundary conditions
To prevent a standard machine project from having dependencies on other devices outside
of the machine, observe the following:
● A standard machine project consists of an IO controller and the corresponding IO
devices. You should therefore configure only one CPU as IO controller and the
corresponding IO devices in the standard machine project.
● Do not use connection configured at both ends for the communication. Instead, use only
a connection configured at one end or unspecified connections if necessary.
Background: To configure the communication in a STEP 7 project, it is always possible to
set the IP address parameters in the project. For multiple use IO systems, however, this
strategy is not possible since the IP address parameters of the IO controller and the
assigned IO devices are assigned locally. At the time of the configuration, the IP address
parameters are therefore unknown.
If you nevertheless want to configure communication with devices on PROFINET, for
example with a central coordinator, you can only use communications mechanisms that
allow dynamic assignment of the IP address parameters in the user program.
Example: Open User Communication
If, for example, the device is configured as an active end point (initiator of the
connection), the IP address parameters can be stored, for example, in a data block. You
then supply the data block with the currently valid IP address parameters during
commissioning. For this dynamic type of IP address parameter assignment, there is no
system support; in other words, if you change the configuration of the system, the IP
address parameters are not automatically adapted.
You will find a description of handling instructions for Open User Communication under
this keyword in the STEP 7 online help.
Requirements
● STEP 7 as of V13
● The IO controller supports the "Multiple use IO system" function, for example a CPU
1512SP-1 PN as of firmware version 1.6.
Procedure
The configuration of a series machine using an S7-1500-CPU as an example is described
below.
To create a standard machine project, follow these steps:
1. Create a project.
2. Configure a CPU as the IO controller, for example a CPU 1518-4 PN/DP as of firmware
version 1.5.
3. Configure the required IO devices and assign the IO devices to the IO controller.
4. Configure the port interconnection between the devices.
5. Select the IO system so that you can edit the properties in the inspector window.
6. Select the "Multiple use IO system" check box in the "General" area of the inspector
window.
The option "Permit overwriting of PROFINET device name" must be selected (CPU
parameters, properties of the PROFINET interface, Ethernet addresses area) so that the
IO controller can adapt the device name later at the operator.
This option is disabled by default.
The following figure shows the above-described settings for the IP address and PROFINET
device name.
① After the configuration is loaded from the standard machine project, the IO controller has no
device name and no IP address.
② Following loading, the IO devices have a device name and a device number but no IP address.
Figure 5-79 Settings for the IP address and the PROFINET device name
Requirements
● The machine was loaded with a standard machine project (see Configuring multiple use
IO systems (Page 221)).
● The display is ready for operation and the desired tool for assigning the IP address and
device name is available (e.g., PST Tool, STEP 7).
● The ports of the IO controller and IO devices are interconnected according to the
configuration.
Procedure
Observe the boundary conditions and instructions for commissioning an S7-1500. For more
information on commissioning an S7-1500 CPU, refer to the system manual S7-1500,
ET 200MP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792).
To adapt a standard machine locally, follow these steps:
1. Integrate the machine into the network.
2. Connect the device for assigning the IP address and device name to the CPU, for
example a PG/PC with the appropriate software.
3. Assign the desired device name and IP address to the IO controller.
4. Start up the CPU.
The IO controller then assigns the adapted PROFINET device name and a unique IP
address to the IO devices.
The following rules apply to the assignment:
● The device names of the IO devices are formed by chaining together the following name
components, separated by a period:
<configured name of the IO device from the standard machine project>.<name of the
associated IO controller set on the device>
● The IP addresses of the IO devices result from the locally configured IP address of the
associated IO controller and the device number (sum).
Note
Make sure that duplicate IP addresses cannot be created on the subnet during the
assignment. The IO controller does not assign a new IP address in this case.
In the following figure, the device name "m1" and the IP address 192.168.1.10 have been
assigned to the IO controller of the first machine.
The device name "m2" and the IP address 192.168.1.20 has been assigned for the second
machine.
Refer to the figure for the resulting device names and IP addresses.
See also
Configuring multiple use IO systems (Page 221)
In the following sections, you find a description of how to configure and program a
PROFINET IO system to commission, for example, a standard machine on-site without using
configuration software.
Concept
The principle of configuration control is already known at the device level for the flexible use
of submodules/modules ("option handling"). Different configurations can be derived from one
engineering project both for central as well as for distributed I/O.
With S7-1500 CPUs as of firmware version V1.7, this principle can also be applied at the
IO system level. You have the option of omitting, adding or changing the order of stations
(IO devices) of a PROFINET IO system in a specific plant.
Configuration control for devices and configuration control for IO systems can be combined;
the functions are independent of each other.
It is possible to operate variants deviating from a maximum configuration of an IO system. In
a standard machine project, you can prepare a kit of IO devices which can be flexibly
customized for various configurations using configuration control.
The following variations are available:
● Variation of the number of IO devices involved
You include optional IO devices for the configuration control in the configuration by
transferring a suitable data record with the required configuration in the user program.
● Variation of the order of IO devices involved
You adapt the port interconnection of the IO devices to the topology being used by
transferring a suitable data record with the required topology in the user program.
The following figure shows how you serve two different configurations with an IO device
marked as optional in the network view of STEP 7.
● Configuration without the optional IO device:
In this case, you use the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" to transfer a data record to the
PROFINET interface containing the information that no optional IO device is to be
included in the configuration.
● Configuration with the optional IO device:
In this case, you use the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" to transfer a data record to the
PROFINET interface adding the optional IO device to the configuration.
Requirements
● IO controller supports configuration control for IO systems, for example CPU
1516-3 PN/DP as of firmware version 1.7
● STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher
● The rules (Page 241) for the establishment and operation of a standard machine project
have been considered.
Procedure
To configure an IO device as optional IO device, proceed as follows:
1. Create a project.
2. Configure an S7-1500 CPU firmware version V1.7 or higher as IO controller.
3. Configure the required IO devices and assign the IO devices to the IO controller.
4. Configure the port interconnection between the devices.
Note
A port interconnection between the devices of the IO system is mandatory for IO systems
to be customized with the user program. Otherwise, no order would be defined for the
interconnected IO devices. The following settings are possible for the partner port:
• Specific partner port of an IO device (selection via the "Partner port" drop-down list in
the port properties or interconnection with drag-and-drop in the topology view)
• "Setting partner port by user program" (selection via the "Partner port" drop-down list
in the port properties).
Requirements
● IO controller supports configuration control for IO systems, for example CPU
1516-3 PN/DP as of firmware version 1.7
● STEP 7 V13 SP1
● At least one IO device was configured as optional IO device.
● The rules (Page 241) for the establishment and operation of a standard machine project
have been considered.
Procedure
Observe the information on and rules for commissioning in the documentation for SIMATIC
S7-1500, for the ET 200SP CPUs and for the CPU 1516pro-2 PN.
The following description of the proceeding only includes steps required to understand the
program-controlled activation of an optional IO device.
To activate or deactivate IO devices, follow these steps:
1. Create a data record "CTRLREC" for the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem". You can find
information on the structure of the data record in the STEP 7 online help.
2. Call the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" and select MODE 1 to deactivate all IO devices.
If you set the CPU to STOP or POWER OFF state in order to modify the plant in this
status (for example to add an optional IO device), explicit deactivation using
"ReconfigIOSystem" with mode 1 is not necessary. In this case, i.e. following a STOP-
RUN transition and following a POWER-OFF > POWER-ON transition, all IO devices are
deactivated automatically.
3. When you have brought the plant to a safe status that allows restructuring without any
danger:
Put the plant together according to your intended application. Add the required optional
IO devices at the points at which you planned this in the configuration (observe the
order!) or remove optional IO devices that you no longer require.
4. Network the IO devices.
5. Startup the S7-1500 system and call again the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem". Select
MODE 2 to transfer the data record CTRLREC.
6. Following successful transfer of the data record, call again the instruction
"ReconfigIOSystem". Select MODE 3 to activate all IO devices forming part of the current
configuration.
Result: The CPU activates the following IO devices:
– All IO devices that you have not set as optional IO devices.
– All optional IO devices listed in the control data record (CTRLREC).
The following IO devices remain disabled:
– Docking units (IO devices changing during operation).
– Optional IO devices that are not listed in the control data record.
Note
Call the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" for all values of the parameter MODE with the same
control data record (CTRLREC)!
If you use different data records for the values of the MODE parameter, this results in an
inconsistent customization of the configuration and thus to rather incomprehensible error
messages.
The data record is to be stored in a data block and to be transmitted to the PROFINET
interface of the IO controller in the user program using the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem".
MODE Description
1 All IO devices of the IO system can be disabled by calling the instruction with MODE 1. The
"ReconfigIOSystem" instruction uses the "D_ACT_DP" instruction internally. "ReconfigIO-
System" returns errors that are detected by D_ACT_DP in the following output parameters:
• STATUS (error code)
• ERR_INFO (hardware identifier of the IO device causing the error).
In STATUS and ERR_INFO, the CPU enters the last determined error/HW identifier and in
so doing overwrites an existing error code. For this reason, additional errors can be present
besides the entered error.
2 For controlling the actual configuration of the IO system, the instruction transfers the data
record to the PROFINET interface, which is addressed with LADDR block parameter (HW
identifier of the PROFINET interface).
3 All non-optional IO devices in the IO system and optional IO devices that are listed in the
control data record CTRLREC are enabled.
The optional IO devices that are not listed in the CTRLREC data record remain disabled.
If IO devices that are part of docking units (alternating IO devices in operation) are listed in
the CTRLREC control data record, the PN IO system reacts as follows:
• IO devices of the docking units remain disabled when ReconfigIOSystem is called with
MODE 3.
This reaction corresponds to the reaction of a configuration without configuration-
controlled IO devices. IO devices of docking units are disabled by default and must be
enabled in the user program.
For more information on docking units, refer to the section Docking systems (Page 246).
To keep the startup times short when activating the optional IO devices
(ReconfigIOSystem, mode 3), note the following tip: Check the device numbers of the IO
devices. The device numbers should follow the topological interconnection starting at the
IO controller in ascending order. The further an IO device is from the IO controller
topologically, in other words the more IO devices there are between the IO controller and
the IO device in question, the higher the device number should be.
You set the device numbers in the "Ethernet addresses - PROFINET" area in the
Inspector window with the PROFINET interface selected.
Example of the assignment of device numbers with a linear topology:
● The CPU processes the instruction "ReconfigIOSystem" to transfer the control data
record asynchronously.
For this reason, you must call "ReconfigIOSystem" in a loop repeatedly when calling the
instruction in the startup program until the output parameter "BUSY" or "DONE" indicate
that the data record has been transferred.
Tip: To program the loop, use the SCL programming language with the instruction
REPEAT ... UNTIL.
REPEAT
"ReconfigIOSystem"(REQ := "start_config_ctrl",
MODE := 1,
LADDR := 64,
CTRLREC := "myCTRLREC".ArrMachineConfig0,
END_REPEAT;
Additional information
For information on the basic structure of the data record and on using the instruction
"ReconfigIOSystem" see the STEP 7 online help.
See also
Configuring IO devices as optional (Page 229)
Concept
A typical application for a standard machine project consists of composing an entire plant
from a set of various plant units which only differ with respect to the different arrangement of
the units, e.g. in the case of transport systems. Each plant unit consists of a functional unit of
mechanics (rails or conveyor belts) and electrics (power supply, IO device with IO modules,
sensors, actuators, motors, PROFINET port for data exchange with central control ...).
The following figure shows how, simply by exchanging two rail segments, a new transport
system is created that is adapted with an upstream points to the local conditions.
From the automation viewpoint, no change in the project is required for the flexible
adjustment of the PROFINET configuration.
The order of the IO devices is determined by the port interconnection. For each IO device,
you define in the port properties the partner port and thus the neighboring device connected
at the respective local port. If the partner port is to be defined by the user program, the
option "Partner set by user program" is to be selected as partner port.
The figure below shows the initial configuration of the transport system shown above, which
is to permit the order of the connected IO devices to be changed via the user program. In the
example, the order of IO-Device_2 and IO-Device_3 is to be controlled via the user program.
To determine how the partner port settings are to be selected, you must note for each device
and each port of a device which partner can be interconnected.
● If the partner is always the same in the different configurations provided, you select the
partner port for this partner.
● If the partners vary in the different configurations, you select "Setting partner by user
program".
For the example in the figure above, the following port settings result:
Requirements
● IO controller supports configuration control for IO systems, for example CPU 1515-2 PN
as of firmware version 1.7
● STEP 7 V13 SP1 or higher
● The rules (Page 241) for the establishment and operation of a standard machine project
have been considered.
Procedure
To set the partner port for a program controlled interconnection, proceed as follows:
1. Select the PROFINET interface of the device (IO controller or IO device) whose port you
want to set.
2. In the properties of the PROFINET interface, select the area "Port interconnection"
(Extended options > Port [...] > Port interconnection).
3. From the drop-down list, select "Setting partner by user program" as partner port.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each port to be interconnected via the user program.
See also
Customizing arrangement of IO devices in the program (Page 238)
Requirements
● IO controller supports configuration control for IO systems, for example CPU 1516pro-2
PN as of firmware version 1.7 as an IO controller
● STEP 7 V13 SP1
● At least one partner port was configured as "Partner set by user program".
● The rules (Page 241) for the establishment and operation of a standard machine project
have been considered.
Procedure
The proceedings corresponds to the proceeding for activating optional IO devices.
Only the structure of the data record must be extended for the program-controlled
assignment of the ports. The extension is described in the following sections.
Figure 5-89 Example configuration: Customizing arrangement of IO devices in the user program
This example is based on the flexible configuration from the previous section (Page 236)
with the settings for the respective partner ports described there.
The partner ports in the specific derived configuration have been defined so that it is possible
to name the HW identifications of the ports involved.
The following table only contains those devices whose ports can be defined by the user
program. Only these devices are relevant for the data record structure.
Device Local port Partner port setting Partner port of the selected confi-
guration
IO device_1 p2 = Port 2 Partner is set by user Port 1 of IO device_3
HW identifier: 251 program HW identifier: 261
IO device_2 p1 = Port 1 Partner is set by user Port 2 of IO device_3
HW identifier: 281 program HW identifier: 291
IO device_2 p2 = Port 2 Partner is set by user Port 1 of IO device_4
HW identifier: 311 program HW identifier: 321
Figure 5-90 Data block with data record for port interconnections
Additional information
For information on the basic structure of the data record and on using the instruction
"ReconfigIOSystem" see the STEP 7 online help.
System behavior
● System diagnostics:
If an optional IO device is deactivated, the IO device is displayed as "deactivated" from
the system diagnostics viewpoint (online view or Online & Diagnostics).
● Topology view:
Offline view: As configured. No interconnection is shown for ports with partner ports
configured as "Setting partner by user program".
Online view: Ports and interconnections with deactivated IO devices are shown in a
different shade of green as error-free ports and interconnections of activated IO devices.
● Representation in the Web server:
The names of devices are shown as configured (Properties > General > Project
information).
The assigned PROFINET device name for the CPU is shown on the "Communication"
website, at the "Parameter" tab.
IP address parameters: Currently assigned IP address parameters are shown on the site
"Module state".
Topology: The current topology resulting from any customizations via user program is
shown in the Web server. IO devices configured as optional are shown as "deactivated"
IO devices in the Web server.
Rules
The rules for standard machine projects as described here (Page 218) apply.
For configuration-controlled IO systems, the following additional rules apply:
● When configuring MRP (Media Redundancy Protocol):
The ports configured as ring ports must not be interlinked via user program.
However, devices with ring ports (devices of an MRP domain) can be optional IO devices.
● When configuring docking stations (= IO devices changing during operation):
Neither the docking station nor the first IO device of a docking unit may be optional IO
devices.
The ports of the docking units must not be interlinked via user program.
● When configuring IRT:
The order of synchronized IO devices ("IRT devices") must be defined by the
configuration and must not be changed in the different variants of a standard machine.
For this reason, the ports of the IRT devices must not be interlinked via user program.
However, you have the possibility to configure IRT devices primarily as optional IO
devices.
You also have the option to interconnect, by user program, RT devices that are, for
example, separated from this line by a switchport (see figure).
Figure 5-91 Example: Configuration control for IO systems with separated RT device
Basic information
In order to use the PROFIenergy functionality, the existing IO controller has to be "upgraded"
to a so-called "PROFIenergy controller" by means of a function block in the PROFINET IO
system and at least one PROFIenergy-capable IO device ("PROFIenergy device") has to
exist. The PROFIenergy commands (for example to start or end a pause) are sent by the
"PROFIenergy controller" to the individual "PROFIenergy devices". Each
"PROFIenergy device" decides individually how it responds to the PROFIenergy command
(response is device- and manufacturer-specific).
No additional hardware is needed; the PROFIenergy commands are directly interpreted by
the PROFINET devices.
Principle of operation
At the beginning and end of pauses, the system manager enables or disables the pause
function of the system; then the IO controller sends the PROFIenergy command
"Start_Pause"/"End_Pause" to the PROFINET devices. The device interprets the contents of
the PROFIenergy command and switches off or back on.
Through other PROFIenergy functions, device information can be accessed during pauses.
The user can use this information in order to optimally time the transfer of the
"Start_Pause"/"End_Pause" command.
Note
In the case of the ET 200S distributed I/O system, you have to configure the application
of PROFIenergy in STEP 7. You configure PROFIenergy by selecting the "Use energy
saving for this potential group" check box in the PM-E DC24V/8A RO power module.
If you want to use PROFIenergy for an I-device, you have to configure this in STEP 7.
Information about configuring PROFIenergy for an I-device is available in the section
Configuring PROFIenergy with I-devices (Page 136).
Application examples
● SIMATIC S7 library for simple configuration of PROFIenergy.
The application example is available here
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478388).
● Application guide for implementation of shutdown concepts with PROFIenergy.
The application example is available here
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/96837137).
● Saving energy with SIMATIC S7 PROFIenergy with I-device
The application example is available here
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/41986454).
Note
Unique IP address
Each docking unit of a docking system must be configured with a unique IP address in a
shared project and operated on the same IO controller as all other docking units of the
system.
Applicative conditions
The following points should be observed when implementing a docking system with
alternating IO devices during operation:
● The IO devices of all docking units must be deactivated by default in the configuration.
● At any time, only one docking unit can be active, i.e., only the IO devices of one docking
unit can be activated. All IO devices of other docking units must be deactivated or
become deactivated before the IO devices of a docking unit can be activated. You
activate an IO device with the "D_ACT_DP" instruction.
● A physical connection to this docking unit and its IO devices must be created in order to
activate a docking unit. The IO devices are then switched on (power on). At the same
time, all the IO devices of this docking unit must be activated in the user program with the
"D_ACT_DP" instruction.
Note
Automatic deactivation in "Startup" mode of the CPU
If the CPU is in "Startup" mode, IO devices of a docking system that alternate during
operation are deactivated automatically.
● After the feedback "IO device activated", you can access the IO device by means of direct
I/O access.
● Call the "D_ACT_DP" instruction to activate and deactivate the IO device as close as
possible to the start of the OB 1 cycle.
Note
Number of alternating IO devices during operation ("alternating partner port") - number of
docking units
If you wish to achieve the shortest possible tool changeover times, you must observe the
following points that are dependent on the CPU or the CP that is being used:
• Only those IO devices that have been configured with the PROFINET function
"Prioritized startup" can start up in an optimized fashion. The number of IO devices
with configuration for this PROFINET function is restricted.
• Only a limited number of IO devices can be activated at the same time. This number
depends on the available "D_ACT_DP" resources. A docking unit should not contain
more than the corresponding number of IO devices. If more IO devices are operated in
a docking unit, the IO devices must be activated one after the other, which takes
correspondingly longer.
Example: An S7-CPU 1516-3 PN/DP can operate a maximum of 32 IO devices with
prioritized startup and can simultaneously activate 8 IO devices by means of
"D_ACT_DP".
Therefore, for a scheduled optimum use, a docking unit should include no more than 8 IO
devices and no more than 32 IO devices should be used in all the alternating docking
units.
Procedure in STEP 7
1. Configure your system as usual, but do not yet configure the topological interconnections
of the individual PROFINET devices.
2. Navigate to the "Topology view" tab.
3. Select the port which you want to operate with alternating partners during operation.
4. Navigate to the "Properties" tab of the inspector window and select "Port interconnection"
in the area navigation.
Tip:You can also use drag-and-drop operation to connect alternative partner ports in the
topology view.
Result
You have interconnected the respective port with one or more alternating IO devices. The
connections with the individual alternating partner ports during operation are shown in the
topology view by a green, dashed line.
Deleting interconnections
Select the port of the alternating partner and remove the interconnection with the "Remove"
button.
Note
Startup time up to 8 s
In the following situation, despite prioritized startup, a startup time of up to 8 s may occur:
On a docking point, multiple physical IO devices dock as an IO device with identical device
names and identical IP configurations (for example, docking point for automatic transport
system).
Dependencies
The length of the startup time for an IO device (distributed I/O) with the "Prioritized startup"
PROFINET function depends on the following factors:
● IO devices (distributed I/O)
● IO structure of the IO device (distributed I/O)
● Modules of the IO device (distributed I/O)
● IO controller
● Switch
● Port setting
● Cabling
Note
Startup time and RT class of the IO device
An IO device with IRT communication requires longer than an IO device with RT
communication for the accelerated startup.
The longer startup for IRT is due to the necessity of synchronizing the IO device before
the communication can be set up.
Note
IWLAN and prioritized startup
PROFINET devices which are connected via access points to PROFINET IO do not
support the "Prioritized startup" PROFINET function.
Definition
Prioritized startup refers to the PROFINET function for accelerating the startup of IO devices
in a PROFINET IO system with RT communication. It shortens the time that the respective
configured IO devices require in order to reach the cyclic user data exchange in the following
cases:
● After the power supply has returned
● After a station has returned
● After activation of IO devices
WARNING
Data exchange despite multiple use IP addresses/device names in PROFINET IO system
To achieve higher ramp-up times, the IO controller checks the uniqueness of device name
of IP address parallel to the device ramp-up. In the case of incorrect or double assignment
of device name or IP address, a short-time data exchange is possible until the IO controller
reacts to the error. In this time the IO controller can exchange IO data with the false device.
During commissioning, ensure that no IP addresses / device names are assigned multiple
times in the PROFINET IO system.
Advantages
The PROFINET functionality "prioritized startup" enables PROFINET IO applications in
which machine parts or tools and their IO devices have been permanently replaced. Waiting
times of several seconds between the scheduled processes of the restart are reduced to a
minimum by this optimization. This accelerates the production process with alternating IO
devices (PROFINET functionality "docking systems"), e.g. in tool changer applications, and
enables a greater throughput in production.
The PROFINET functionality "prioritized startup" also offers a considerable increase in
performance for applications where a quick startup time of the IO devices after "power on" or
after station failure / station return is required, or when activating IO devices.
Area of application
You can use prioritized startup, for example, for changing tools for robots in the automotive
industry. Typical tools are, for example:
● Welding guns
● Positioning tools for the manufacture of car body parts
Figure 5-96 Example configuration of a tool changer: Tools 1-3 configured with "Prioritized startup".
Requirements
You can enable the "Prioritized startup" PROFINET function for the IO devices (distributed
I/O) only in the following cases:
● The IO controller used can prioritize selected IO devices during startup.
● The IO device used supports prioritization.
Procedure
1. Select the IO device in the network view or device view for which you wish to accelerate
startup.
2. Open the IO device properties in the Inspector window.
3. Select "PROFINET interface > Advanced options > Interface options".
4. Select the "Prioritized startup" check box.
Note
Prioritized startup after a startup for the first time
A prioritized startup of the IO device is always available to you after the first configuration
of this IO device in the very first startup of the PROFINET IO system. Even in the case of
spare parts or a reset to factory settings, the first startup is a standard startup for the
respective configured IO devices.
Note
Number of IO devices (distributed I/O) with prioritized startup
You can only start up a maximum number of IO devices with the "Prioritized startup"
PROFINET functionality within one PROFINET IO system. This maximum number
depends on the IO controller used.
These settings are automatically applied during topology configuration for the partner port.
Requirements
You have made the following settings for the port in question to reduce the startup time of
the IO device:
● Fixed transmission rate
● Autonegotiation deactivated
The time for negotiating the transmission rate during startup is saved.
If you have disabled autonegotiation, you must observe the cabling rules.
Properties of ports
PROFINET devices have the following two types of ports:
Crossed pin assignment means that the pin assignment for the ports for sending and
receiving between the respective PROFINET devices is inverted internally.
Introduction
You can make certain changes in the user program to accelerate the startup for IO devices
of docking systems that alternate during operation.
API
API (Application Process Identifier) is a parameter, the value of which specifies the IO data
processing process (application).
The PROFINET standard IEC 61158 assigns profiles to specific APIs (PROFIdrive,
PROFIsave), which are defined by the PROFINET user organization.
The standard API is 0.
Application
An application is a program that runs directly on the MS-DOS/Windows operating system. An
application on the PG is STEP 7, for example.
AR
AR (Application Relation) is an addressing level for diagnostics data records.
Asset
An asset is a component of a machine or plant This can be either hardware or
software/firmware.
Automation system
Programmable logic controller for the open-loop and closed-loop control of process chains of
the process engineering industry and manufacturing technology. The automation system
consists of different components and integrated system functions according to the
automation task.
Backplane bus
The backplane bus is a serial data bus for module intercommunication and the distribution of
the necessary power to the modules. Bus connectors interconnect the modules.
Bus
A bus is a transfer medium that interconnects several devices. Data transmission can be
performed electrically or via optical fibers, either in series or in parallel.
Communications processor
Communication processors are modules used for point-to-point and bus connections.
Configuring
Selecting and putting together individual components of an automation system or installing
necessary software and adapting it for a specific application (for example, by configuring the
modules).
Consistent data
Data which belongs together in terms of content and must not be separated is known as
consistent data.
For example, the values of analog modules must always be handled as a whole, that is, the
value of an analog module must not be corrupted as a result of reading out at two different
points in time.
CP
→ Communications processor
CPU
Central Processing Unit - Central module of the S7 automation system with a control and
arithmetic unit, memory, operating system and interface for programming device.
DCP
DCP (Discovery and Basic Configuration Protocol). Enables the assignment of device
parameters (for example, the IP address) using manufacturer-specific
configuration/programming tools.
Default router
The default router is used when data has to be forwarded via TCP/IP to a partner located
outside the local network.
Determinism
Determinism means that a system responds in a predictable (deterministic) manner.
Device
In the PROFINET environment, "device" is the generic term for:
● Automation systems (for example, PLC, PC)
● Distributed I/O systems
● Field devices (for example, PLC, PC, hydraulic devices, pneumatic devices)
● Active network components (for example, switches, routers)
● Gateways to PROFIBUS, AS interface or other fieldbus systems
Diagnostics
→ System diagnostics
Diagnostics buffer
The diagnostics buffer represents a backup memory in the CPU, used to store diagnostics
events in their order of occurrence.
DP master
A master which behaves in accordance with EN 50170, Part 3, is known as a DP master.
→ See also Master
DP slave
A slave operated on PROFIBUS with PROFIBUS DP protocol and in accordance with
EN 50170, Part 3 is referred to as DP slave.
→ See also Slave
DPV1
The designation DPV1 refers to the functional extension of acyclic services (to include new
interrupts, for example) provided by the DP protocol. The DPV1 functionality is integrated in
IEC 61158/EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Duplex
Half duplex: One channel is available for alternating exchange of information.
Full duplex: Two channels are available for simultaneous exchange of information in both
directions.
Ethernet
Ethernet is an international standard technology for local area networks (LAN) based on
frames. It defines types of cables and signaling for the physical layer and packet formats and
protocols for media access control.
GSD file
As a Generic Station Description, this file contains all properties of a PROFINET device that
are necessary for its configuration in XML format.
I-device
The "I-device" (intelligent IO device) functionality of a CPU facilitates data exchange with an
IO controller, for example, as intelligent preprocessing unit of sub-processes. In its role as an
IO device, the I-device is accordingly integrated into a "higher-level" IO controller.
Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet is a guideline for installing an Ethernet in an industrial environment. The
biggest difference from standard Ethernet is the mechanical current carrying capacity and
noise immunity of the individual components.
Interrupt
An interrupt is an event that causes the operating system of an S7-CPU to automatically call
an assigned organization block (interrupt OB) in which the user can program the desired
reaction.
Interrupt, diagnostics
→ Diagnostics error interrupt
IP address
To allow a PROFINET device to be addressed as a device on Industrial Ethernet, this device
also requires an IP address that is unique within the network. Example: An IPv4 address
consists of 4 decimal numbers with the value range 0 to 255. The decimal numbers are
separated by periods.
The IP address is made up of the following components:
● Address of the network
● Address of the device (generally called the host or network node).
IRT
IRT is a synchronized communication protocol for cyclic exchange of IRT data between
PROFINET devices. A reserved bandwidth is available in the send cycle for IRT data. The
reserved bandwidth ensures that the IRT data can be transferred at reserved synchronized
intervals, without being influenced also by higher other network loads (such as TCP/IP
communication, or additional real-time communication).
LAN
Local Area Network - a local network to which multiple computers within a company are
connected. The LAN therefore has a limited geographical span and is only available to the
company or institution.
Line depth
Designates the number of external switches or integrated switches interconnected in series.
MAC address
Worldwide unique device identification for all Ethernet devices. It is assigned by the
manufacturer and has a 3-byte vendor ID and 3-byte device ID as a consecutive number.
Every PROFINET device is assigned a worldwide unique device identifier at the factory. This
6-byte long device identifier is the MAC address.
Master
Higher-level, active participant in the communication/on a PROFIBUS subnet. It has rights to
access the bus (token), sends data and requests it.
Media redundancy
The so-called Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP) enables the configuration of redundant
networks. Redundant transmission links (ring topology) ensure that an alternating
communication path is made available if a transmission link fails. The PROFINET devices
that are a part of this redundant network form an MRP domain.
MPI
The multipoint interface (Multi Point Interface,MPI) represents the programming device
interface of SIMATIC S7. It enables multiple devices (programming devices, text-based
displays, OPs) to be operated simultaneously by one or more CPUs. Each device is
identified by its unique (MPI) address.
MRPD
MRPD (Media Redundancy with Planned Duplication of Frames) based on IRT and MRP. To
realize media redundancy with short update times, the PROFINET devices participating in
the ring send their data in both directions. The devices receive this data at both ring ports so
that there is no reconfiguration time.
Network
A network consists of one or more interconnected subnets with any number of devices.
Several networks can exist alongside each other.
OB
→ Organization block
OPC
OPC (OLE for Process Control) refers to a standard interface for communication in
automation technology.
Operating mode
The SIMATIC S7 automation systems know the following operating states: STOP,
STARTUP, RUN.
Organization block
Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between the CPU operating system and the
user program. The order in which the user program is executed is defined in the organization
blocks.
Parameter
1. Tag of a STEP 7 code block:
2. Tag used to set one or several characteristics of a module
In delivery state, every module has practical basic settings, which can be modified by
configuration in STEP 7.
There are static and dynamic parameters
PG
→ Programming device
PLC
→ Programmable logic controller
Prioritized startup
Prioritized startup denotes the PROFINET functionality for accelerating the startup of IO
devices operated on a PROFINET IO system with RT and IRT communication. It reduces the
time that the correspondingly configured IO devices require in order to return to cyclic user
data exchange in the following cases:
● After the power supply has returned
● After a station has returned
● After activation of IO devices
Process image
The process image is part of CPU system memory. At the start of cyclic program execution,
the signal states of the input modules are transferred to the process image of the inputs. At
the end of cyclic program execution, the process image of the outputs is transferred to the
output modules as signal state.
→ See also System memory
PROFIBUS
Process Field Bus - European Fieldbus standard.
PROFIBUS device
A PROFIBUS device has at least one PROFIBUS interface with an electrical (RS485) or
optical (polymer optical fiber, POF) interface.
PROFIBUS DP
A PROFIBUS with DP protocol that complies with EN 50170. DP stands for distributed I/O
(fast, real-time capable, cyclic data exchange). From the perspective of the user program,
the distributed I/Os are addressed in exactly the same way as the centralized I/Os.
PROFIenergy
Function for energy saving in the process, for example, during pause times by briefly
switching off the entire system via standardized PROFIenergy commands.
PROFINET
Open component-based industrial communication system based on Ethernet for distributed
automation systems. Communication technology promoted by the PROFIBUS Users
Organization.
PROFINET device
A PROFINET device always has a PROFINET interface (electrical, optical, wireless). A lot of
devices also have a PROFIBUS DP interface to connect PROFIBUS devices.
PROFINET IO
Communication concept for the realization of modular, distributed applications within the
scope of PROFINET.
PROFINET IO is based on switched Ethernet with full-duplex operation and a bandwidth of
100 Mbps.
PROFINET IO Controller
Device used to address the connected IO devices. This means that the IO controller
exchanges input and output signals with assigned field devices. The IO controller is often the
controller on which the automation program runs.
PROFINET IO Device
A distributed field device that is assigned to one of the IO controllers (e.g. remote IO, valve
terminals, frequency converters, switches)
PROFINET IO System
PROFINET IO controller with assigned PROFINET IO devices.
Programming device
Programming devices are essentially compact and portable PCs which are suitable for
industrial applications. They are identified by a special hardware and software configuration
for programmable logic controllers.
Proxy
The PROFINET device with proxy functionality is the substitute for a PROFIBUS device on
Ethernet. The proxy functionality allows a PROFIBUS device to communicate not only with
its master but also with all devices on PROFINET.
With PROFINET, existing PROFIBUS systems can be integrated into the PROFINET
communication with the aid of an IE/PB link, for example. The IE/PB Link PN IO then
handles communication via PROFINET on behalf of the PROFIBUS components.
In this way, you can link both DPV0 and DPV1 slaves to PROFINET.
Real-time
Real-time means that a system processes external events within a defined time.
Real-time communication
Group error for RT and IRT.
PROFINET uses its own real-time channel (RT) rather than TCP/IP for communication of
time-critical IO user data.
Router
A router interconnects two subnets. A router works in a similar way to a switch. With a router,
however, you can also specify which communication devices may communicate via the
router and which may not. The communication devices on various sides of a router can only
communicate with one another if you have explicitly enabled communication between these
devices via the router. Real-time data cannot be exchanged beyond subnet boundaries.
RT
PROFINET IO with Real Time communication (RT) is the optimal transmission method for
time-critical applications in factory automation. PROFINET IO frames are prioritized over
standard frames in accordance with IEEE802.1Q. This ensures the required determinism in
the automation technology.
Security
Generic term for all the measures taken to protect against
● Loss of confidentiality due to unauthorized access to data
● Loss of integrity due to manipulation of data
● Loss of availability due to the destruction of data
Send clock
Period between two consecutive intervals for IRT or RT communication. The send clock is
the shortest possible transmit interval for exchanging data.
SIMATIC
The term denotes Siemens AG products and systems for industrial automation.
SIMATIC NET
Siemens Industrial Communication division for Networks and Network Components.
SIMATIC PC Station
A "PC station" is a PC with communication modules and software components within a
SIMATIC automation solution.
Slave
A slave can only exchange data after being requested to do so by the master.
→ See also DP slave
SNMP
The network management protocol SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) uses the
wireless UDP transport protocol. It consists of two network components, similar to the
client/server model. The SNMP manager monitors the network nodes and the SNMP agents
collect the various network-specific information in the individual network nodes and stores it
in a structured form in the MIB (Management Information Base). This information allows a
network management system to run detailed network diagnostics.
STEP 7
STEP 7 is an engineering system and contains programming software for the creation of
user programs for SIMATIC S7 controllers.
Subnet
All the devices interconnected by switches are nodes of the same network or subnet. All the
devices in a subnet can communicate directly with each other.
All devices in the same subnet have the same subnet mask.
A subnet is physically restricted by a router.
Subnet mask
The bits set in the subnet mask decide the part of the IP address that contains the address
of the network.
In general, the following applies:
● The network address is obtained from the AND operation of the IP address and subnet
mask.
● The device address is obtained from the AND NOT operation of the IP address and
subnet mask.
Switch
Network components used to connect several terminal devices or network segments in a
local network (LAN).
Sync domain
All PROFINET devices to be synchronized with IRT via PROFINET IO must belong to a sync
domain.
The sync domain consists of exactly one sync master and at least one sync slave. An IO
controller or switch generally handles the role of the sync master.
Non-synchronized PROFINET devices are not part of a sync domain.
System diagnostics
System diagnostics refers to the detection, evaluation, and signaling of errors that occur
within the automation system, for example, programming errors or module failures. System
errors can be indicated by LEDs or in STEP 7.
TCP/IP
The Ethernet itself is only a transport system for data - similar to a highway, which is a
transport system for people and goods. The actual data transport is performed by so-called
protocols - similar to cars and trucks, which transport people and goods on the highway.
The two basic protocols TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) and IP (Internet Protocol) -
TCP/IP for short - perform the following tasks:
1. The data is broken down into packets at the sender.
2. The packets are transported over the Ethernet to the correct recipient.
3. At the recipient, the packets are reassembled in the correct order.
4. Corrupt packets continue to be sent until they are received correctly.
Most higher-level protocols use TCP/IP to perform their duties. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
(HTTP), for example transfers documents written in Hyper Text Markup Language (HTML) in
the World Wide Web (WWW). This technique is what enables you to view web pages in your
Internet browser in the first place.
Topology
Structure of a network. Common structures include:
● Linear bus topology
● Ring topology
● Star topology
● Tree topology
Topology configuration
All the interconnected ports of the PROFINET devices in the STEP 7 project and their
relationships to each other.
Twisted-pair
Fast Ethernet via twisted-pair cables is based on the IEEE 802.3u standard (100 Base-TX).
The transmission medium is a shielded 2x2 twisted-pair cable with an impedance of 100 Ω
(AWG 22). The transmission characteristics of this cable must meet the requirements of
category 5.
The maximum length of the connection between the terminal and the network component
must not exceed 100 m. The connectors are designed according to the 100Base-TX
standard with the RJ45 connector system.
Update time
An IO device / IO controller in the PROFINET IO system is supplied cyclically with new data
from the IO controller / IO device within this time interval. The update time can be configured
separately for each IO device and determines the interval at which data is sent from the IO
controller to the IO device (outputs) as well as from the IO device to the IO controller
(inputs).
User program
In SIMATIC, we distinguish between the CPU operating system and user programs. The
user program contains all instructions, declarations and data by which a plant or process can
be controlled. The user program is assigned to a programmable module (for example, CPU,
CM) and can be structured in smaller units.
WAN
A network that extends beyond LAN boundaries and enables, for example, intercontinental
network communication. Legal rights do not belong to the user but to the provider of the
communication network.
XML
XML (Extensible Markup Language) is a flexible, easy to understand and easy to learn data
description language. Information is exchanged using readable XML documents. These
include continuous text supplemented by structure information.
CPU display
A Diagnostics, 97
Configuration control for IO systems, 217, 227, 241 Neighborhood detection, 211
Diagnostics, 77 G
Diagnostics status, 111 Gateway, 61
Evaluation of interrupts, 112 Go online, 103
I-device, 130 GSD file, 127
PROFINET ports, 105
STEP 7, 103 H
User program, 111 Hardware and network editor
via CPU display, 97 Assign device name, 47
via LEDs, 96 Assign IP address, 47
via Web server, 100 Topology view, 70
Diagnostics buffer, 98
Diagnostics data record, 109 I
Channel-specific, 109 I&M data, 81
Vendor-specific, 109 downloading to PROFINET IO devices, 81
Diagnostics levels, 79 I/O communication, 46, 57
Diagnostics status, 111 Identification data, 81
Display Identification of the PROFINET device, 56
Diagnostics, 97 I-device, 137
IP address, 52 Configuring with GSD file, 127
DNS conventions, 48 I-device (intelligent IO device)
Docking station, 246 Alarm response, 130
Docking unit, 246 Configuring, 125
Diagnostics, 130
E Functionality, 118
Evaluation of interrupts, 112 Lower-level PN IO system, 120
Exchangeable medium, 210 Properties, 119
Topology rules, 133
F IE/PB link, 115
Fast Ethernet, 30 Industrial Ethernet, 17, 30
Fiber-optic cable (FOC), 33 Industrial Wireless LAN, 35
Fieldbus integration, 113 Application examples, 36
Full-duplex mode, 31 Range, 37
Functionality Instruction
I-device, 118 SYNC_PI, 207
PROFINET IO, 27
S T
Saving energy, 243 T_CONFIG, 61
SCALANCE, 32, 37, 40 TCP/IP in the communication cycle, 177
Security Terminal port, 256
Definition, 39 Ti, 200
Example of data security, 41 To, 200
Protective measures, 40 Tool changer, 246
Send clock, 24 Topology
Set/actual topology, 100 Example, 69
SFC 126 "SYNC_PI, 201 Line, 68
SFC 127 "SYNC_PO", 201 Ring, 68, 161, 162
Shared device, 138, 154 Rules about the IO-system with I-device, 133
SNMP, 108 Set/actual, 100
MIB, 108 Star, 68
Network diagnostics, 108 Tree, 68
Standard machine Topology overview, 26
project, 216, 217, 218, 222, 224, 229, 230, 238, 238
Topology view
Startup of IO devices, 247, 251
Adopt devices identified online, 76
Store and forward, 174
Adopt port interconnections identified online, 75
Submodule, 28, 154
Hardware and network editor, 70
Subnet, 46
Interconnecting ports, 72
Subnet mask, 50
Transfer area, 137
Assigning for the first time, 52
Transmission bandwidth, 31
Example, 50
Transmission media with PROFINET, 34
Twisted-pair, 33
U
Update time, 24, 37
V
Value status, 154
W
Watchdog time, 24
Wire break, 107
Wireless networks, 37
___________________
Documentation guide 1
___________________
2
SIMATIC Description
___________________
Parameter
assignment/addressing 3
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS with STEP 7 V13 ___________________
Diagnostics 4
___________________
Functions 5
Function Manual
___________________
Service & Support A
12/2014
A5E03775446-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Scope
This function manual is the basic documentation for all SIMATIC products from the
PROFIBUS environment. The product documentation is based on this documentation.
The examples are based on the functionality of the S7-1500 automation system.
Conventions
STEP 7: We refer to "STEP 7" in this documentation as a synonym for the configuration and
programming software "STEP 7 as of V12 (TIA Portal)" and subsequent versions.
This documentation contains figures of the devices described. The figures may differ slightly
from the device supplied.
You should also pay particular attention to notes such as the one shown below:
Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.
Additional support
You will find information about available technical support in the appendix Service & Support
(Page 91).
The technical documentation for the individual SIMATIC products and systems is available
on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal).
The online catalog and the ordering system are available on the Internet
(http://mall.industry.siemens.com).
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 Description ............................................................................................................................................ 10
2.1 Introduction to PROFIBUS ......................................................................................................10
2.1.1 Applications of PROFIBUS DP ...............................................................................................11
2.1.2 PROFIBUS terminology ..........................................................................................................12
2.1.3 PROFIBUS DP interface .........................................................................................................16
2.2 Structure of PROFIBUS networks ..........................................................................................17
2.2.1 Passive network components for RS 485 networks ...............................................................19
2.2.1.1 RS 485 cables .........................................................................................................................19
2.2.1.2 PROFIBUS FastConnect system ............................................................................................20
2.2.1.3 PROFIBUS bus connector ......................................................................................................22
2.2.1.4 M12 bus connector .................................................................................................................24
2.2.1.5 Bus terminals for RS 485 networks ........................................................................................24
2.2.1.6 M12 bus terminating resistor ..................................................................................................24
2.2.2 Passive components for optical networks...............................................................................25
2.2.2.1 Fiber-optic cables ....................................................................................................................25
2.2.2.2 Plastic and PCF fiber-optic cables ..........................................................................................26
2.2.2.3 Glass fiber-optic cables...........................................................................................................27
2.2.3 Active network components ....................................................................................................29
2.2.3.1 Network components in electrical networks............................................................................29
2.2.3.2 Network components in optical networks ...............................................................................33
2.2.4 Examples for topology ............................................................................................................35
2.2.4.1 Topology with RS485 repeater ...............................................................................................35
2.2.4.2 Topology with diagnostic repeater ..........................................................................................37
2.2.4.3 OLM topology ..........................................................................................................................40
2.2.4.4 WLAN topology .......................................................................................................................40
2.2.4.5 Connecting PROFIBUS to PROFINET ...................................................................................41
3 Parameter assignment/addressing ........................................................................................................ 42
3.1 Assigning the DP slave to a DP master ..................................................................................43
3.2 PROFIBUS address ................................................................................................................45
3.3 Network settings .....................................................................................................................46
3.4 Cable configuration .................................................................................................................49
3.5 Additional network stations .....................................................................................................51
3.6 Bus parameters .......................................................................................................................52
3.7 Constant bus cycle time ..........................................................................................................55
4 Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................................... 57
4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................ 57
4.2 Diagnostics using the display of the S7-1500 ........................................................................ 58
4.3 Diagnostics with the diagnostic repeater ............................................................................... 60
4.4 I&M data (Identification and Maintenance) ............................................................................ 61
5 Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 62
5.1 Isochronous mode ................................................................................................................. 62
5.1.1 What is isochronous mode?................................................................................................... 62
5.1.2 Use of isochronous mode ...................................................................................................... 63
5.1.3 Isochronous applications ....................................................................................................... 64
5.1.4 Sequence of synchronization ................................................................................................. 65
5.1.5 Requirements for configuration .............................................................................................. 66
5.1.6 Configuring isochronous mode .............................................................................................. 67
5.1.7 Diagnostics and interrupt functions ........................................................................................ 70
5.1.8 Parameter settings for isochronous mode ............................................................................. 71
5.1.8.1 Viewing isochronous mode parameters ................................................................................. 71
5.1.8.2 Change parameters ............................................................................................................... 72
5.2 Acyclical data exchange ........................................................................................................ 74
5.3 SYNC/FREEZE groups .......................................................................................................... 75
5.4 Interrupts ................................................................................................................................ 77
5.5 Intelligent DP slaves (I-slaves)............................................................................................... 78
5.5.1 I-slave functionality ................................................................................................................ 78
5.5.2 Data exchange with higher-level DP master .......................................................................... 81
5.5.3 Configuring an I-slave ............................................................................................................ 82
5.5.4 Configuring transfer areas ..................................................................................................... 84
5.5.5 Sample program..................................................................................................................... 85
5.5.6 Diagnostics and interrupt behavior ........................................................................................ 89
A Service & Support ................................................................................................................................. 91
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................... 94
Index .................................................................................................................................................... 99
Basic information
System manuals and Getting Started describe in detail the configuration, installation, wiring
and commissioning of the SIMATIC S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL systems.
The STEP 7 online help supports you in the configuration and programming.
Device information
Product manuals contain a compact description of the module-specific information, such as
properties, terminal diagrams, characteristics and technical specifications.
General information
The function manuals contain detailed descriptions on general topics such as diagnostics,
communication, Motion Control, Web server.
You can download the documentation free of charge from the Internet
(http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/industrial-automation-systems-simatic/en/manual-
overview/Pages/Default.aspx).
Changes and additions to the manuals are documented in product information sheets.
Manual Collections
The Manual Collections contain the complete documentation of the systems put together in
one file.
You will find the Manual Collections on the Internet:
● S7-1500/ET 200MP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/86140384)
● ET 200SP (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84133942)
● ET 200AL (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/95242965)
My Documentation Manager
The My Documentation Manager is used to combine entire manuals or only parts of these to
your own manual.
You can export the manual as PDF file or in a format that can be edited later.
You can find the My Documentation Manager on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/38715968).
What is PROFIBUS?
PROFIBUS is a bus system that networks automation systems and field devices that are
compatible with PROFIBUS. As communication medium for the field level, PROFIBUS is an
important part of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA).
The different communication networks can be used independent of one another or they can
be combined with each other.
PROFIBUS protocols
PROFIBUS DP (distributed I/O) is a communication network for the field level according to
IEC 61158-2 / EN 61158-2 with the hybrid access protocols token bus and master-slave. The
networking takes place by means of two-wire lines or fiber-optic cables. Data transmission
rates of 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps are possible.
PROFIBUS PA is the PROFIBUS for process automation (PA). It connects the
PROFIBUS DP communication protocol with the MBP (Manchester Bus Powered)
transmission technology to IEC 61158-2.
PROFIBUS PA networks can be designed based on shielded, twisted two-wire lines
intrinsically safe and are therefore suitable for hazardous areas (Ex zones 0 and 1). The data
transmission rate is 31.25 kbps.
Introduction
The efficiency of control systems is not determined by automation devices alone, but
depends to a large extent on the overall configuration of an automation solution. This
includes a powerful communication system in addition to plant visualization and operator
control and monitoring.
The STEP 7 engineering tool supports you during the engineering and configuration of an
automation solution.
Applications of PROFIBUS DP
The PROFIBUS network offers wireless connection of several controllers, components and
subnets as electrical network, optical network or by using links. Sensors and actuators are
controlled centrally by means of PROFIBUS DP.
The following figure shows connection options to PROFIBUS DP:
Objectives of PROFIBUS DP
Distributed automation systems are increasingly used in production and process automation.
This means a complex control task is divided up into smaller, more transparent subtasks with
distributed control systems. This creates a high demand for communication between the
distributed systems.
Distributed systems offer the following benefits:
● Independent and simultaneous commissioning of individual devices is possible
● Small, manageable programs
● Parallel processing due to distributed automation systems
● Reduced response times
● Higher-level structures can take on additional diagnostics and logging functions.
● Increased plant availability because the rest of the overall system can continue to work
when a subordinate station fails.
I/O communication is also available with the communication module (CM) or the interface
module (IM) with integrated DP interface. These DP interfaces behave like integrated DP
interfaces of the CPU.
Additional information
You can find additional information on the hardware configuration in the STEP 7 online help.
Properties
A PROFIBUS device has at least one PROFIBUS interface with an electrical (RS 485)
interface or optical (Polymer Optical Fiber, POF) interface.
● Suitable
– Not relevant for this application
1) Depending on data rate and type of service used
2) Depending on cable type used
Introduction
The following applies to all RS 485 cables for PROFIBUS from Siemens:
● Their double shielding makes them especially suited for laying in industrial environments
with electromagnetic interference.
● A continuous grounding concept can be implemented by means of the outer shield of the
bus cable and the ground terminals of the bus terminals.
● The imprinted meter marking makes it easier to determine the length (accuracy ±5%).
Transmission rate Maximum cable length of a bus Maximum distance between two
segment stations
9.6 to 187.5 kbps 1000 m 10000 m
500 kbps 400 m 4000 m
1.5 Mbps 200 m 2000 m
3 to 12 Mbps 100 m 1000 m
Area of application
You need FastConnect bus connectors for PROFIBUS for the following applications:
● Connect devices with an electrical 9-pin D-Sub interface to IEC 61158-2 directly with
SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS cables.
● Connect electrical segments or individual devices to the Optical Link Module (OLM) and
Optical Bus Terminal (OBT).
● Connect devices or programming devices to the repeater.
Versions
The FastConnect bus connector in degree of protection IP20 is available in the following
versions:
● with integrated terminating resistor and isolating function
● with or without PG socket
● with a cable outlet of 35°, 90° or 180°
● with device category 3G suitable for zone 2 hazardous area
Figure 2-5 Example for PROFIBUS FastConnect bus connector with PG socket, cable outlet 90°
Additional information
For additional information on the available components visit the Siemens Mall
(http://mall.industry.siemens.com).
Area of application
You need PROFIBUS bus connectors for the following applications:
● Connect devices with a 9-pin D-Sub interface to IEC 61158-2 directly with the
SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS cables.
● Connect electrical segments or individual devices to the Optical Link Module (OLM) and
Optical Bus Terminal (OBT).
● Connect devices or programming devices to the repeater.
Versions
The PROFIBUS bus connector in degree of protection IP20 is available in the following
versions:
● with integrated terminating resistor and isolating function
● with or without PG socket
● with a cable outlet of 35°, 90° or 180°
● with device category 3G suitable for zone 2 hazardous area
Figure 2-6 Example for PROFIBUS bus connector with PG socket, cable outlet 35°
Additional information
For additional information on the available components visit the Siemens Mall
(http://mall.industry.siemens.com).
Area of application
Devices with an electrical M12 interface can use the M12 bus connector for SIMATIC NET
PROFIBUS for direct connection with the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS cables.
The M12 bus connector in degree of protection IP65 is available in the following versions:
● with screw-type terminals
● with insulation displacement termination
● with a cable outlet of 180°
Benefits
Fiber-optic cables offer the following benefits when compared with electrical cables:
● Galvanic isolation of the devices and segments
● No potential equalization currents
● No impact on transmission path through external electromagnetic interference
● No lightning protection elements required
● No noise radiation along the transmission route
● Low weight
● Depending on the type of fiber you can implement cable lengths up to few kilometers at
even higher transmission rates.
● No dependency of the maximum permitted distances on the transmission rate
Additional information
Additional information of the properties and technical specifications of the passive
components and connectors for fiber-optic cables is available in the PROFIBUS network
manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35222591).
Additional information
All operating instructions
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805951/133300) of the
SIMATIC NET bus components include information on distances that can be covered with
the SIMATIC NET glass fiber-optic cables. You can configure your optical network without
any calculations using simple limits.
RS485 repeater
The RS485 IP20 repeater connects two PROFIBUS bus segments in RS485 technology with
up to 32 devices. It provides transmission rates from 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps.
The RS485 repeater refreshes a signal regarding amplitude, signal width and edge
steepness between two segments. It is used when more than 32 stations are connected to
the bus or the maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded.
Bus segments can be operated ungrounded (galvanic isolation of segments) with an RS485
repeater.
Diagnostics repeater
The diagnostic repeater connects three PROFIBUS segments in RS485 technology, two of
which are diagnostics-capable segments with 31 devices each. It is designed as DP slave to
send diagnostics alarms to the DP master.
The diagnostic function provides the location and the cause of cable faults, such as wire
break or missing terminating resistors. The fault location is indicated relative to the existing
devices.
The diagnostics repeater refreshes a signal regarding amplitude, signal width and edge
steepness between the segments. The cascading depth between any two PROFIBUS
devices is limited to nine diagnostics repeaters.
PROFIBUS Terminator
The PROFIBUS Terminator forms an active bus termination. Bus devices can be switched
off, removed or replaced without affecting data transmission. This is particularly true for bus
devices on both ends of the bus cable at which terminating resistors must be connected or
supplied. The PROFIBUS Terminator can be mounted on a standard mounting rail.
IE/PB Link PN for the connection of a PROFIBUS segment to an Industrial Ethernet network
The IE/PB Link PN IO as independent component provides the seamless transition between
Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS. Through the use of IE/PB Link PN IO as substitute on
the Ethernet, the existing PROFIBUS devices can continue to be used and can be integrated
into a PROFINET application.
A PROFINET IO controller is required for this configuration. The IE/PB Link PN acts as
master on the PROFIBUS end.
Additional information
Information on the components is available in the Siemens Mall
(http://mall.industry.siemens.com).
Additional information is available in these manuals:
● PROFIBUS Network Manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35222591)
● Diagnostic repeater (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/7915183)
● DP/DP Coupler (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1179382)
● SIMATIC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736)
● Basics on Setting up an Industrial Wireless LAN
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/9975764)
● SIMATIC bus links, DP/PA coupler, active field distributors, DP/PA Link and Y Link
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1142696)
● Information on the CANopen module is available on the Internet
(http://www.hms-networks.com/can-for-et200s).
● DP/AS-interface LINK Advanced
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22502958/133300) manual
● DP/AS-i F-Link (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/24196041) manual
See also
Topology with RS485 repeater (Page 35)
OLM topology (Page 40)
WLAN topology (Page 40)
Connecting PROFIBUS to PROFINET (Page 41)
Additional information
Information on the components is available in the Siemens Mall
(http://mall.industry.siemens.com).
Additional information is available in these manuals:
● PROFIBUS network manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35222591)
● SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS, Optical Link Module
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/56606534/0/en)
● SIMATC NET Twisted-Pair and Fiber-Optic Networks
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/8763736)
Figure 2-9 Segment 1 connected to RS485 repeater and segment 2 looped-through to RS485
repeater
Configuration example
Maximum configuration
If you install a PROFIBUS network with RS485 repeaters, you may not connect more than
nine RS485 repeaters in series.
Figure 2-11 Schematic layout of a PROFIBUS network with maximum possible cascade depth at
diagnostic repeaters
Figure 2-13 Layout with several segments, maximum cascade depth exceeded
Additional information
Additional information is available in the Diagnostic Repeater
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/7915183) manual.
Configuration
"Configuring" is understood to mean arranging, setting and networking devices and modules
within the device or network view.
A PROFIBUS address is automatically assigned to each module. The addresses can be
subsequently modified.
The CPU compares the preset configuration created in STEP 7 with the actual configuration
of the plant. Errors can be detected and signaled immediately this way.
The exact procedure for configuring devices is described in detail in the STEP 7 online help.
Parameter assignment
"Parameter assignment" is understood to mean setting the properties of the components
used. The settings for the hardware components and for data exchange are assigned, for
example, activating diagnostics, input delay with DI.
The parameters are downloaded into the CPU and transferred to the corresponding modules
when the CPU starts up. Modules can be replaced with ease because with SIMATIC CPUs
the set parameters are automatically downloaded into the new module during each startup.
PROFIBUS DP system
A PROFIBUS DP system consists of a PROFIBUS DP master and its assigned
PROFIBUS DP slaves. Once the devices have been placed in the network view or device
view, STEP 7 assigns default parameter values to them. Initially, you only have to assign the
DP slaves to one DP master.
Requirement
● The network view of STEP 7 is open.
● A CPU has been placed (e.g., CPU 1516-3 PN/DP).
● A DP slave has been placed (e.g., IM151-1 HF).
Procedure
To assign DP slaves to a DP master, follow these steps:
1. On the DP slave, use the left mouse button to click on the "Not assigned" link. The
"Select DP master" menu opens.
2. Select the DP master in the menu to which you want to assign the DP slave.
Result: A subnet with a DP system is created on the CPU. The CPU is now the
PROFIBUS DP master. The DP slave is assigned to the DP master.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all other DP slaves that you want to assign to the DP master.
Network overview
You can check the communication relationships of the activated interface in the network
overview. The network overview is context-sensitive for selection in the network view:
● The selection of the CPU shows the DP communication of the CPU.
● The selection of the station shows the communication of the entire station.
● The selection of the interface shows the DP communication of the interface.
Profile
Depending on the connected device types and the protocols used, different profiles are
available on the PROFIBUS. The profiles differ with respect to their setting options and
calculation of the bus parameters.
The PROFIBUS subnet will only work properly if the bus parameters of all devices have the
same values.
DP (recommended profile)
Select the "DP" profile if only devices meeting the requirements of the standard
EN 61158-6-3 are connected to the PROFIBUS subnet. The setting of the bus parameters
has been optimized for these devices. These include devices with DP master and DP slave
interfaces of SIMATIC S7 as well as distributed I/O devices from third parties.
Note
Profile for constant bus cycle time and isochronous mode
DP is the recommended profile for the configuration of constant bus cycle time and
isochronous mode.
Standard
Compared with the "DP" profile, the "Standard" profile gives you the option to take into
consideration devices of another project or devices that have not been configured here for
calculation of the bus parameters. The bus parameters are then calculated with a simple
algorithm that was not optimized.
User-defined
The PROFIBUS subnet will only work properly if the parameters for the profile have been
synchronized. Select the "User-defined" profile if none of the other profiles "match" for
operation of a PROFIBUS device and if you have to adapt the bus parameters for your
special layout.
You cannot configure all theoretically possible combinations with the user-defined profile
either. The PROFIBUS standard prescribes some parameter limits depending on other
parameters. It is, for example, not permitted that a responder responds (Min Tsdr) before the
initiator is able to receive the frame (Trdy). These standard specifications are also checked
in the "User-defined" profile.
Note
User-defined settings
Use user-defined settings only if you are familiar with the PROFIBUS parameters. It is
usually better to work with the "DP" profile.
Contact Customer Support (Page 91) if you have any questions.
The bus parameters that were last valid on the PROFIBUS subnet are automatically set as
user-defined. If the "DP" bus profile was valid for the subnet, for example, the bus
parameters for "DP" are set in the "User-defined" bus profile. You can modify the parameters
based on these settings.
The monitoring times are not automatically recalculated in the "User-defined settings" setting
so that the uniformity of the set values is not changed without your knowledge, for example,
to configure other configuration tools.
You can calculate the monitoring times Ttr and watchdog based on the parameters you have
set. To do so, click on the "Recalculate" button.
See also
Additional network stations (Page 51)
Additional information
Additional information on adaptation of the retry value and the slot time is available in the
PROFIBUS Network Manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35222591).
Introduction
Bus parameters control the transmission behavior on the bus. Each device on the bus must
correspond with the bus parameters of other devices.
Note
The PROFIBUS subnet will only work properly if the parameters for the bus profile have
been synchronized. Change the preset values only if you are familiar with the parameter
assignment of the bus profile for PROFIBUS.
Note
Display of offline values
The offline values of the bus parameters are always displayed even if they are connected
online with the target system.
Recalculate
Use the button "Recalculate" to recalculate the parameters.
Figure 3-7 Enabling a bus cycle with constant bus cycle time
See also
Configuring isochronous mode (Page 67)
Diagnostics options
In case of an error you can determine the current status of your automation system and react
specifically by using the event-related diagnostics and the evaluation of interrupts.
You can use the following options for diagnostics of the PROFIBUS components:
● Determine the status of the system using the Lifelist in STEP 7.
● Evaluate the module status, error and message texts by using the display of the S7-1500
CPU.
● Run cable diagnostics during operation by means of the diagnostics repeater.
● Evaluate the diagnostics and interrupt behavior in isochronous mode. (Page 70)
● Determine status information for fault localization and fault rectification by using the
DP/PA coupler FDC 157-0 configured as PROFIBUS diagnostics slave.
Additional information
Additional information on diagnostics is available in these manuals:
● In the Diagnostics repeater for PROFIBUS-DP
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/7915183) manual for diagnostics
with STEP 7, diagnostics in the user program, monitoring function isochronous
PROFIBUS, topology display in STEP 7.
● In the Diagnostics (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59192926)
function manual for diagnostics options that are available for the SIMATIC systems
S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP and ET 200AL.
● In the PROFIBUS Network Manual
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/35222591) system manual for
diagnostics of fiber-optic cables.
● In the DP/PA Coupler, Active Field Distributors, DP/PA Link and Y Link
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1142696) operating instructions.
● In the Web Server (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193560)
function manual for diagnostics options (based on the functionality of the CPU).
Displays
Each CPU in the S7-1500 automation system has a front cover with a display and operating
buttons. Control and status information is displayed in different menus on the display. You
use the operating buttons to navigate through the menus.
The following states can be evaluated on the display:
● Module status for central and distributed modules
● Error and alarm texts (system diagnostics, user-defined alarms)
Module status
From the station overview you go to the module status for a distributed module via the
module overview.
Additional information
Additional information on the topic "Functions and operation of the display" is available in the
documentation for the S7-1500 automation system on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792).
Introduction
The diagnostic repeater is a repeater that can monitor two segments of a RS485-PROFIBUS
subnet (copper cable) during operation and signal cable faults to the DP master by sending a
diagnostic frame. Fault location and the cause of the fault can be displayed in plain text by
means of STEP 7 as well as operator control and monitoring devices (SIMATIC HMI).
With its cable diagnostics during operation, the diagnostic repeater allows you to detect and
localize cable faults early on. This means plant faults are detected early and plant downtimes
can be prevented.
Diagnostic functions
● The diagnostic function provides the location and the cause of cable faults, such as wire
break or missing terminating resistors. The fault location is specified relative to the
devices present, for example "Break on signal line A and/or B".
● Reading out the saved diagnostic and statistical information.
● Monitoring of the isochronous PROFIBUS, e.g., violation of cycle time.
● Providing identification data.
Additional information
Additional information on diagnostics with STEP 7 and for reading out the diagnostics with
the user program is available in the Diagnostic repeater for PROFIBUS DP
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/7915183) manual.
Additional information
Information if and to what extent a DP device supports I&M data is available in the respective
device manual of the device.
Just-In-Time
The high speed and reliable reaction time of a system operating in isochronous mode is
based on the fact that all data is provided just-in-time. The constant bus cycle time
PROFIBUS DP cycle beats the time here.
Isochronous workflow
By using the system property "isochronous mode" and the associated simultaneous
measured value acquisition, measurement can be performed continuously and the time
required for measurement is reduced. Resultant workflow:
● Continuous turning of the camshaft.
● During the continuous turning, measure the positions and cam excursion synchronously.
● Process the next camshaft.
All camshaft positions and the corresponding measured values (red) are measured
synchronously within a single rotation of the camshaft. This increases machine output and
maintains or enhances precision of the measurement.
To ensure that all input data is ready for transportation via the PROFIBUS DP line when the
next PROFIBUS DP cycle begins, the I/O read cycle has a lead time TI so that it starts
earlier. The TI is the "flash gun" for all inputs. This TI is necessary to compensate for analog
to digital conversion, backplane bus times, etc. The lead time TI can be configured by
STEP 7 or by the user. We recommend that you have TI assigned automatically by STEP 7 .
The PROFIBUS DP line transports the input data to the DP master. The synchronous cycle
interrupt OB SynchronousCycle is called. The user program in the synchronous cycle
interrupt OB decides the process reaction and provides the output data in time for the start of
the next data cycle. The length of the data cycle is always configured by the user.
To is the compensation from the backplane bus and the digital to analog conversion within
the slave. The To is the "flash gun" for all outputs. The time To can be configured by STEP 7
or by the user. We recommend that you have To assigned automatically by STEP 7.
Without isochronous mode, application, data transmission and field devices have their own,
unsynchronized processing cycles; these result in a higher total cycle time with high jitter.
With isochronous mode, application, data transmission and field device are synchronized
resulting in a minimum total cycle with minimum jitter.
Introduction
A SIMATIC automation solution can be connected to the isochronous PROFIBUS with the
isochronous mode function. Isochronous mode guarantees the synchronous reading of input
data, the processing and output of output data at the same (isochronous) intervals.
Requirement
● The network view in STEP 7 is open.
● A CPU has been placed (e.g., CPU 1516-3 PN/DP).
● An interface module has been placed and networked with the CPU (e.g., IM 151-1 HF).
● I/O modules have been placed (e.g., 2DI x DC24V HF and 2DO x DC24V/0,5A HF).
4. Repeat steps 1 and 3 for all I/O modules that you want to operate in isochronous mode.
Procedure
To assign a DP slave to a SYNC/FREEZE group, follow these steps:
1. Select the DP interface of the DP slave you want to assign to a group in the device view
or network view.
2. Select the check boxes for the required SYNC/FREEZE groups under the group
"SYNC/FREEZE" in the Inspector window.
You can assign each DP slave to only one SYNC/FREEZE group.
5.4 Interrupts
Additional information
A detailed description of the events at which interrupts are triggered is available in the
documentation of the respective manufacturer of the DPV1 slave.
I-slave functionality
The "I-slave" (intelligent DP slave) functionality of a CPU supports the exchange of data with
a DP master and thus allows the CPU to be used, for example, as intelligent preprocessing
unit of subprocesses. The I-slave is connected in its role as DP slave to a "higher-level" DP
master.
The preprocessing is handled by the user program in the I-slave. The process values
acquired by the I/O modules are preprocessed by the user program and made available to
the DP master.
Note
DP master or DP slave
Note: The communication modules of the S7-1500 CPUs/ET 200SP CPUs, for example the
CP 1542-5, support the operation as DP master or DP slave only as alternative.
Note
The I/O areas configured for data exchange between the DP master and DP slaves must not
be used by I/O modules.
Introduction
The following section describes the data exchange between the I-slave and the higher-level
DP master.
Transfer areas
Transfer areas are an interface to the user program of the I-slave CPU. Inputs are processed
in the user program and outputs are the result of the processing in the user program.
The data for communication between DP master and I-slave is made available in the transfer
areas. A transfer area contains an information unit that is exchanged consistently, in terms of
bytes, words or overall, between DP master and I-slave. You can find more information on
configuration and use of transfer areas in the section Configuring transfer areas (Page 84).
The following figure shows the data exchange between the I-slave and the higher-level DP
master. The individual communication relations are explained below based on the numbers.
③ Transfer relationship between the user program and the transfer area
In this way, the user program and the transfer area exchange input and output data.
④ Data exchange between the user program and the I/O of the I-slave
In this way, the user program and the centralized I/O of the I-slave exchange input and
output data.
Note
Operation using a GSD file
If you operate an I-slave using a GSD file, you should not select the "Test, commissioning
and routing" check box.
Create a DP subnet on the PROFIBUS interface of the I-slave.
Result
You have configured an I-slave.
① Click in the first cell of the "Transfer area" column. STEP 7 assigns a default name that you
can change.
② Select the type of communication relation: Currently, you can only select MS for
"master-slave communication relation".
③ STEP 7 assigns the addresses for the transfer area automatically. Correct the addresses if
necessary.
④ Set the length of the transfer area. Specify the length of the transfer area in the cell in the
following format: [1...64] Byte/Word.
Examples: "32 Byte", "64 Word"
⑤ Specify whether the transfer area is exchanged in units of bytes or words or consistently
over the entire length between the DP master and I-slave.
Figure 5-16 Configuring transfer areas
A separate entry is created in the area navigation for each transfer area. If you select one of
these entries, you can adjust the details of the transfer area, or correct them and comment
on them.
Introduction
This simple sample program shows how you use the transfer areas of an I-slave.
Requirement
You have configured an I-slave.
Task
The result of an "AND logic operation" of two inputs (preprocessing) in the I-slave is to be
provided to the higher-level DP master. This result is to be assigned to a local output in the
DP master (further processing).
Use a transfer area with the following addresses for this purpose:
● Address in the I-slave: Q568
● Address in the DP master: I68
Required steps
The following steps are necessary to solve the task:
1. Configuring the transfer area
2. Programming the I-slave
3. Programming the DP master
3. In the instruction window of the function "preprocessing", write the following program
code:
#result:=#input 1&#input 2;
4. Call the function "preprocessing" in a cycle OB, for example, in OB1.
5. Wire the function "preprocessing" in the cycle OB as follows:
3. In the instruction window of the function "further processing", write the following program
code:
#output:=#result;
4. Call the function "further processing" in a cycle OB, for example, in OB1.
5. Wire the function "further processing" in the cycle OB as follows:
Result
You mastered the task successfully.
DP master I-slave Reaction of DP master input transfer areas Reaction of I-slave input transfer areas
RUN→STOP RUN No updating of the process image The input transfer areas retain their current
values. (no access error)
STOP→RUN RUN The input transfer areas are updated by the The input transfer areas are updated via the
cyclic user program via the process image. process image.
RUN RUN→STOP The I-slave sets the input transfer areas on No updating of the process image
the DP master to "0".
RUN STOP→RUN The I-slave sets the input transfer areas on Prior to processing of the startup program,
the DP master to "0". the input transfer areas are updated via the
After the startup program of the I-slave, the process image.
input transfer areas of the DP master are
updated via the process image.
Online Support
The comprehensive online information platform supports you in all aspects of our Service &
Support at any time and from any location in the world.
You can find Online Support on the Internet at the following address: Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
Technical Consulting
Support in planning and designing your project: From detailed actual-state analysis,
definition of the goal and consultation on product and system questions right through to the
creation of the automation solution.
Technical Support
Expert advice on technical questions with a wide range of demand-optimized services for all
our products and systems.
You can find Technical Support on the Internet at the following address: Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request).
Training
Extend your competitive edge – through practical know-how directly from the manufacturer.
You can find the training courses we offer on the Internet at the following address: Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/sitrain).
Engineering Support
Support during project engineering and development with services fine-tuned to your
requirements, from configuration through to implementation of an automation project.
Field Service
Our Field Service offers you services for commissioning and maintenance – to ensure that
your machines and plants are always available.
Spare parts
In every sector worldwide, plants and systems are required to operate with constantly
increasing reliability. We will provide you with the support you need to prevent a standstill
from occurring in the first place: with a worldwide network and optimum logistics chains.
Repairs
Downtimes cause problems in the plant as well as unnecessary costs. We can help you to
reduce both to a minimum – with our worldwide repair facilities.
Optimization
During the service life of machines and plants, there is often a great potential for increasing
productivity or reducing costs.
To help you achieve this potential, we are offering a complete range of optimization services.
Modernization
You can also rely on our support when it comes to modernization – with comprehensive
services from the planning phase all the way to commissioning.
Service programs
Our service programs are selected service packages for an automation and drives system or
product group. The individual services are coordinated with each other to ensure smooth
coverage of the entire life cycle and support optimum use of your products and systems.
The services of a Service Program can be flexibly adapted at any time and used separately.
Examples of service programs:
● Service contracts
● Plant IT Security Services
● Life Cycle Services for Drive Engineering
● SIMATIC PCS 7 Life Cycle Services
● SINUMERIK Manufacturing Excellence
● SIMATIC Remote Support Services
Advantages at a glance:
● Reduced downtimes for increased productivity
● Optimized maintenance costs due to a tailored scope of services
● Costs that can be calculated and therefore planned
● Service reliability due to guaranteed response times and spare part delivery times
● Customer service personnel will be supported and relieved of additional tasks
● Complete service from one source: fewer interfaces and more know-how
Contact
At your service locally, around the globe: your partner for consultation, sales, training,
service, support, spare parts... for the entire range of products supplied by Industry
Automation and Drive Technologies.
You can find your personal contact in our contacts database at: Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner).
Automation system
Programmable logic controller for the open-loop and closed-loop control of process chains of
the process engineering industry and manufacturing technology. The automation system
consists of different components and integrated system functions according to the
automation task.
Bus
A common transfer route to which all nodes are connected; it has two defined ends.
In the case of PROFIBUS, the bus is a two-wire line or a fiber-optic cable.
Bus connector
Physical connection between the node and bus cable.
Bus system
All stations physically connected to a bus cable form a bus system.
Device
In the PROFIBUS environment, "device" is the generic term for:
● Automation systems (for example, PLC, PC)
● Distributed I/O systems
● Field devices (for example, hydraulic devices, pneumatic devices)
● Active network components
● Gateways to AS interface or other fieldbus systems
Device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, for example, a DP slave by means
of PROFIBUS DP.
Device
In the PROFIBUS environment, "device" is the generic term for:
● Automation systems (for example, PLC, PC)
● Distributed I/O systems
● Field devices (for example, hydraulic devices, pneumatic devices)
● Active network components
● Gateways to AS interface or other fieldbus systems
Device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, for example, a DP slave by means
of PROFIBUS DP.
Diagnostics
Monitoring functions for the recognition, localization, classification, display and further
evaluation of errors, faults and alarms. They run automatically during plant operation. This
increases the availability of systems/plants by reducing commissioning times and
downtimes.
DP master
CPU or device that conducts the communication with the DP slaves according to a defined
algorithm. To do this, the DP master uses the functions for communication with the DP
slaves which are defined by PROFIBUS DP. It acts according to standard EN 50170, Part 3.
→ Master
DP slave
Slave in the distributed I/O that is operated on the PROFIBUS with PROFIBUS DP protocol
and acts according to standard EN 50170, Part 3. The DP slave is addressed by the DP
master and provides it with specified functions (I/O data, diagnostics, etc.).
→ Slave
DPV1
The designation DPV1 refers to the functional extension of acyclic services (to include new
interrupts, for example) provided by the DP protocol. The DPV1 functionality is integrated in
IEC 61158/EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
FDL
Fieldbus Data Link (bus access protocol). Step 2 with PROFIBUS.
HMI device
Human Machine Interface, device for visualization and control of automation processes.
HSA
Highest Station Address. A bus parameter for PROFIBUS. Outputs the highest PROFIBUS
address of an active device. PROFIBUS addresses greater than HSA are permitted for
passive devices, up to 126.
Industrial Ethernet
Guideline for setting up Ethernet in an industrial environment. The main difference to the
standard Ethernet is the mechanical current carrying capacity and interference immunity of
the individual components.
I-slave
The "I-slave" functionality of a CPU supports the exchange of data with a DP master and can
thus be used, for example, as intelligent preprocessing unit of partial processes. The I-slave
is connected in its role as DP slave to a "higher-level" DP master.
Master
A master device that is in possession of the token can send data to other devices and
request data from them (= active device).
PCF
Polymer Cladded Fiber (plastic-covered glass fiber)
POF
Polymer Optical Fiber (plastic fiber-optic cable made of light-conducting plastics)
Process image
Address area in the system memory of the DP master. At the start of the cyclic program the
signal states of the input modules are transmitted to the process image of the inputs. And the
end of cyclic program execution, the process image of the outputs is transmitted to the DP
slave as signal state.
PROFIBUS
PROcess FIeld BUS, in IEC 61158-2 as "Type 3" standardized, bit-serial fieldbus system.
The standard specifies functional, electrical and mechanical properties.
PROFIBUS is a bus system that networks automation systems and field devices compatible
with PROFIBUS at the cell and field level. PROFIBUS is available with the protocols DP
(= distributed I/O), FMS (= fieldbus message specification) or PA (process automation).
PROFIBUS address
Unique identification of a device connected to PROFIBUS. The PROFIBUS address is
transmitted in the frame for addressing a device. A PC or programming device has the
PROFIBUS address "0". DP masters and DP slaves have a PROFIBUS address in the range
from 1 to 125.
PROFIBUS device
A PROFIBUS device has at least one PROFIBUS interface with an electrical (RS 485) or
optical (Polymer Optical Fiber, POF) interface.
PROFIBUS DP
A PROFIBUS with DP protocol that complies with EN 50170. DP stands for distributed I/O
(fast, real-time capable, cyclic data exchange). From the perspective of the user program,
the distributed I/Os are addressed in exactly the same way as the centralized I/Os.
PROFINET
Open component-based industrial communication system based on Ethernet for distributed
automation systems. Communication technology promoted by the PROFIBUS Users
Organization.
RS 485
Asynchronous data transmission process for PROFIBUS DP to ANSI TIA/EIA-RS485-A.
RS 485 repeater
Equipment for amplifying bus signals and for coupling segments over long distances.
Segment
The bus line between two terminating resistors forms a bus segment.
A bus segment can contain up to 32 bus nodes. Segments can be coupled, for example, by
means of RS 485 repeaters or diagnostics repeaters.
Slave
Distributed device in a fieldbus system that may exchange data with a master after being
requested to do so by the master. Slaves are all DP slaves, for example, such asET 200SP,
ET 200MP, ET 200AL.
Subnet
Part of a network whose parameters must be synchronized with the devices
(e.g., with PROFIBUS). A subnet includes the bus components and all connected stations.
SynchronousCycle
Name for synchronous cycle interrupt OB in STEP 7.
Target-Rotation-Time (Ttr)
Bus parameter for PROFIBUS. The token is the send permission for a device on
PROFIBUS. A device compares a token rotation time it has measured with the Target-
Rotation-Time and controls the sending of frames with high priority or low priority based on
this comparison.
Terminating resistor
Component that terminates the ends of a data transmission line to prevent reflections in the
transmission medium.
Terminator
Terminating resistor of bus segments with transmission rates of 9.6 kbps to 12 Mbps. The
power supply is separate from the bus nodes.
TIA Portal
Totally Integrated Automation Portal
Topology
Structure of a network. Common structures are line topology, ring topology, star topology
and tree topology.
Transmission rate
Specifies the number of bits transmitted per second.
Watchdog
Mechanism for monitoring the readiness for operation.
Diagnostics, 60
Topology, 37
A Diagnostics, 57
Display alarms, 58
Acyclic data exchange, 74
I-slave, 89
Address assignment, 45
Isochronous mode, errors and remedies, 70
Addressing, 42
Diagnostics repeater
Description, 29
Display, diagnostic messages, 58
B
DP master
Bus connector Operated as, 80
IP20, 22 DP slave, 43
M12 with IP65, 24 Operated as, 80
Bus parameters DP/AS-i F-Link, 31
Adapting, 50 DP/AS-i LINK Advanced, 31
Description, 52 DP/AS-Interface Link 20E, 31
Value ranges, 54 DP/DP coupler, 30
Bus profile, user-defined, 54 DP/PA bus link, 31
Bus terminal
M12, 24
RS 485, 24 E
Example of isochronous mode, 64
C
Cable configuration, 49 F
Cables, 19
FastConnect system, 20
Calculate bus times, 51
Fiber-optic, 27
CANopen module, 30
Fiber-optic cables, 25
Communication
Glass, 27
I/O communication, 14
Optical ring, 49
Communication load, 51
PCF, 26
Components, (See network components)
Plastic, 26
Configuration, 42
Configuring isochronous mode, 68
Basic procedure, 67
G
DP slave, 68
Requirements, 66 GAP factor, 54
Updating the process image partition, 69
Connecting PROFIBUS DP with PROFINET IO, 41
Constant bus cycle time, 55 H
Hardware
Configuring, 42
D
Parameter assignment, 42
Data exchange between IO systems, 81
Diagnostic repeater
Cascade depth, 37
I Diagnostics repeater, 29
DP/AS-i F-Link, 31
I/O addresses, 69
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced, 31
I/O communication, 14
DP/AS-Interface Link 20E, 31
Identification and maintenance data (I&M data), 61
DP/DP coupler, 30
IE/PB Link PN, 30
Fiber-optic cables, 25
Increasing DP cycle time, 56
IE/PB Link PN, 30
Installation, 17
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO, 30
Active network components, 29
OBT, Optical Bus Terminal, 33
Bus connection, 22
OLM, Optical Link Module, 33
Cables, 19
PROFIBUS terminator, 30
FastConnect, 20
RS 485 cables, 19
Topology, 35
RS485, 29
Interrupt OBs, 77
Network settings, 46
Interrupts
DPV1, 77
Isochronous mode, 70
O
IO system
Data exchange, 81 Optical Bus Terminal, OBT, 33
I-slave (intelligent DP slave) Optical Link Module, OLM
Diagnostics, 89 Description, 33
Interrupt behavior, 89 Topology, 40
Isochronous mode Optical ring, 49, 50
Change parameters, 71
Description, 62
Diagnostics, 70 P
Dialog box for isochronous mode, 71
Parameter assignment, 42
Example, 64
Process image partition, 69
Interrupts, 70
PROFIBUS
Sequence, in principle, 65
Address, 45
IWLAN/PB Link PN IO, 30, 40
Devices, 12
Installation, 17
PROFIBUS DP, 11
M
Protocols, 10
M12 RS 485 cables, 19
Bus connector, 24 PROFIBUS address, 45
Bus terminating resistor, 24 Change, 45
M12 bus terminating resistor, 24 HSA, 46
Maximum cable lengths PROFIBUS DP
Maximum cable lengths, 20 Applications, 11
Assigning the DP slave, 43
Connecting with PROFINET, 41
N Definition, 10
Devices and designations, 13
Network, 18
Interface, 16
electrical, conducted, 29
PROFIBUS DP interface
Optical, 33
Properties, 16
optical, electrical, 18
Representation in STEP 7, 16
Selection criteria, 18
PROFIBUS terminator, 30
Topology, 35
Profiles for network settings
Network components
DP, Standard, 46
Bus connections, 20
User-defined, 48
CANopen module, 30
R
Retry limit, 50, 54
RS 485 cables, 20
RS485 repeater
Description, 29
Topology, 35
S
Slot time, 50, 54
SYNC/FREEZE, 75
Synchronization, sequence, 65
Synchronous cycle interrupt, 69
Synchronous cycle interrupt OB,
SynchronousCycle, 70
SynchronousCycle, synchronous cycle interrupt OB, 70
T
Target Rotation Time, 54
Topology
Connecting PROFIBUS DP with PROFINET, 41
OLM, 40
RS485 repeater, 35
WLAN, 40
1
___________________
Guide
SIMATIC
___________________
System overview 2
Integration into the
___________________
automation system 3
IO-Link system
Function Manual
12/2017
A5E31637677-AB
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Conventions
In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for all versions of the configuration
and programming software "STEP 7 (TIA Portal)".
Please also observe notes marked as follows:
Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.
Additional support
● Information about Technical Support is available in section Siemens Industry Online
Support (Page 4).
● The range of technical documentation for the individual SIMATIC products and systems
can be found on the Internet.
● Information about the online catalog and online order system is available in section
Industry Mall (Page 5).
IO-Link system
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 3
Preface
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
IO-Link system
4 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB
Preface
Industry Mall
The Industry Mall is the catalog and order system of Siemens AG for automation and drive
solutions on the basis of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA) and Totally Integrated Power
(TIP).
You can find catalogs for all automation and drive products on the Internet
(https://mall.industry.siemens.com).
IO-Link system
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 5
Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Guide ...................................................................................................................................................... 7
2 System overview ..................................................................................................................................... 8
2.1 Advantages of IO-Link ............................................................................................................. 9
2.2 Overview of IO-Link system ................................................................................................... 10
2.3 IO-Link interface ..................................................................................................................... 12
2.4 IO-Link protocol ...................................................................................................................... 14
2.5 Device profiles........................................................................................................................ 16
2.6 IODD and Port Configuration Tool - S7-PCT ......................................................................... 17
2.7 Differences between IO-Link specifications V1.0 and V1.1 ................................................... 19
3 Integration into the automation system .................................................................................................. 20
3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system....................................................................................... 20
3.1.1 Configuration with S7-PCT .................................................................................................... 22
3.1.2 Configuration without S7-PCT ............................................................................................... 25
3.1.3 Overview of configuration options .......................................................................................... 27
3.2 Data access of the automation system and the HMI device .................................................. 29
3.3 Changing and saving device parameters during plant operation .......................................... 30
3.4 Replacing a master or device during operation ..................................................................... 32
Index .................................................................................................................................................... 33
IO-Link system
6 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB
Guide 1
Documentation
Various IO-Link products are available from Siemens. Each of these products has a separate
documentation. The IO-Link products are embedded in systems, e.g. ET 200SP. The
documentation for the system consists of the respective system manual, function manuals
and manuals. In addition, the STEP 7 online help and the Port Configuration Tool - S7-PCT
online help assist you in configuring and programming your automation system with IO-Link.
IO-Link system
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 7
System overview 2
Introduction
A continuous communication down to the lowest field level ensures enhanced use of the
functions and performance capability of sensors and actuators. Enhanced use of sensors
and actuators allows you to operate your machines and plants more productively.
No data other than the actual process value can be exchanged via the standard interfaces
(digital, analog) used at the sensor/actuator level. Sensors and actuators with integrated
intelligence are now used for increasingly complex functions and require a communication
interface tailored to these requirements.
Definition
IO-Link is an innovative, point-to-point communication interface for the sensor/actuator area
that is specified in IEC 61131-9.
IO-Link consists of the following system components:
● IO-Link master
● IO-Link device
● Unshielded 3-wire or 5-wire standard cable
● Engineering tool for configuring and assigning parameters of IO-Link
IO-Link system
8 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB
System overview
2.1 Advantages of IO-Link
IO-Link system
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 9
System overview
2.2 Overview of IO-Link system
Components
An IO-Link system consists of the following components:
● IO-Link master
● IO-Link device, for example:
– Sensors/actuators
– RFID readers
– I/O modules
– Valves
● Unshielded 3-wire or 5-wire standard cables
● Engineering tool for configuring and assigning parameters of IO-Link
IO-Link system
10 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB
System overview
2.2 Overview of IO-Link system
The IO-Link master establishes the connection between the IO-Link devices and the
automation system. If the IO-Link master is a component of the I/O system, it is installed
either in the control cabinet or directly in the field as remote I/O in degree of protection
IP65/67. The IO-Link master communicates by means of various fieldbuses or product-
specific backplane buses. An IO-Link master can have multiple IO-Link ports (channels). An
IO-Link device can be connected (point-to-point communication) to each port.
Engineering
The IO-Link system is engineered parallel to the overall automation system and can be
embedded in it and intermeshed with it.
IO-Link system
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 11
System overview
2.3 IO-Link interface
Introduction
The IO-Link is a serial, bidirectional point-to-point connection for signal transmission and
power distribution under any network, fieldbus or backplane bus.
IO-Link system
12 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB
System overview
2.3 IO-Link interface
Connecting cables
The devices are connected to the master with unshielded 3-wire or 5-wire standard cables
with a maximum length of 20 m. Standard cables can be used to wire the sensors. No
shielding or compliance with specific regulations is necessary for the installation of the
cables.
IO-Link system
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 13
System overview
2.4 IO-Link protocol
Operating modes
The IO-Link port of the master can be operated in the following modes:
● IO-Link:
The port is located in the IO-Link communication.
● DI:
The port behaves like a digital input.
● DQ:
The port behaves like a digital output.
● Disabled:
The port is disabled.
Transmission rate
In the IO-Link specification V1.1, three data transmission rates (baud rates) are specified for
the IO-Link operating mode:
● COM 1 = 4.8 kBaud
● COM 2 = 38.4 kBaud
● COM 3 = 230.4 kBaud (optional according to Specification V1.0)
The IO-Link device only supports one of the defined data transmission rates. The IO-Link
master to Specification V1.1 supports all data transmission rates and adjusts automatically to
the data transmission rated supported by the device.
IO-Link system
14 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB
System overview
2.4 IO-Link protocol
Transmission performance
IO-Link is a very robust communication system. This communication system operates with a
24V level. If transmissions fail, the frame is repeated two more times. The IO-Link master
only detects a break in communication after the failure of the second repeat attempt and
reports this to the higher-level CPU.
Data types
Four data types are available:
● Process data → Cyclic data
● PQI → Cyclic data
● Device data → Acyclic data
● Events → Acyclic data
Process data
The process data of the devices is transferred cyclically in a data frame with the process
data size being determined by the device. Process data from 0 to 32 bytes is possible per
device (input and output, respectively).
Device data
Device data can be parameters, identification data or diagnostic information. The data is
exchanged cyclically and at the request of the IO-Link master. Device data can be written to
the device and also read from the device.
Events
When an event occurs, the device signals to the master that an event is present. The master
then reads the event. Events can be error messages (for example, short-circuit) and
warning/maintenance data (for example, dirt, overheating).
Error messages are transferred from the device to the CPU or the HMI by the IO-Link
master.
The IO-Link master can also transfer events and states. Such events are, for example, wire
break, break in communication or overload.
Device parameters or events are transmitted independently of the cyclic transmission of
process data. The transmissions do not influence or impair each other.
IO-Link system
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 15
System overview
2.5 Device profiles
Introduction
Device profiles are defined for IO-Link to standardize access of the CPU user program to the
devices.
Data structure, data contents and basic functionality are defined in the device profiles. A
standard user view and an identical program access is thus achieved for a number of
different devices that have the same device profile.
IO-Link profiles
The device profile "Smart Sensor Profile" is currently defined for IO-Link. This profile is
especially suited for measurement sensors. In other words, measured values are transmitted
in addition to switching points.
In addition, the switchgear (for example, contactors) support the LVSG (Low Voltage
Switchgear) profile defined in IEC 61915-2.
IO-Link system
16 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB
System overview
2.6 IODD and Port Configuration Tool - S7-PCT
IODDfinder
The IODDfinder is a cross-vendor, central IO-Link database.
This database provides you with the latest IODDs of the device manufacturers and offers an
information and download platform.
The IODDfinder is available on the Internet (https://ioddfinder.io-link.com).
IO-Link system
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 17
System overview
2.6 IODD and Port Configuration Tool - S7-PCT
Figure 2-5 S7-PCT with IODD of a device and the device information contained therein
IO-Link system
18 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB
System overview
2.7 Differences between IO-Link specifications V1.0 and V1.1
Specification
The technical definition of the IO-Link system is described in a specification of the IO-Link
consortium. The first step was the creation of specification version 1.0. The further
development and added functions of the IO-Link system led to version 1.1.
The main enhancements of version 1.1 are:
● Data backup for device replacement during operation (Backup&Restore)
● Data transmission rate 230.4 kBaud is mandatory for the IO-Link master
IO-Link system
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 19
Integration into the automation system 3
3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system
Introduction
An IO-Link system is configured in several steps. In the first step, the master is integrated in
the automation system and configured. In the second step, the IO-Link devices are
configured.
IO-Link system
20 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB
Integration into the automation system
3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system
Figure 3-2 Device view with setting of the IO-Link address range
In addition, you can set in the module properties of the IO-Link master how the IO-Link
system is to be configured and parameterized.
In doing so, you can select whether or not you also want to work with the S7-PCT
configuration tool.
Note
IO data length
To ensure smooth operation, select an IO data length during configuration of the IO-Link
master that corresponds at least to the IO data length of all connected IO-Link devices.
IO-Link system
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 21
Integration into the automation system
3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system
Introduction
The following sections describe how you configure your IO-Link master with the S7-Port
Configuration Tool (S7-PCT).
You need S7-PCT to display the system architecture completely and transparently all the
way to the IO-Link device and to configure and parameterize the IO-Link system in detail.
With S7-PCT you can easily configure the IO-Link devices with the help of the IODD (IO-Link
Device Description) supplied by the device manufacturer.
In the S7-PCT online view you can display the diagnostics states and process values of the
IO-Link devices in detail.
IO-Link system
22 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB
Integration into the automation system
3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system
① Higher-level field bus and overview or structure of the lower-level IO-Link master
② Detailed information on the selected IO-Link master
③ Current configuration of the IO-Link ports of the selected IO-Link master
④ Detailed information on the selected IO-Link device
⑤ Device catalog with the IODDS of the IO-Link devices from different manufacturers
Figure 3-3 Configuration of an IO-Link master in S7-PCT
IO-Link system
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 23
Integration into the automation system
3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system
Starting from the displayed defaults, you can edit and save the values in the defined value
range.
The configuration of the IO-Link system and the parameters of the devices are available to
the IO-Link system and the entire automation project. You have the option of saving and
printing the configuration and the parameters.
IO-Link system
24 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB
Integration into the automation system
3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system
Introduction
The following sections describe how you configure your IO-Link master without the S7-Port
Configuration Tool (S7-PCT).
Your options for configuration of the IO-Link system without S7-PCT are limited.
You can configure the port of the IO-Link master using STEP 7 or the GSD file, but you
cannot set any parameters of the lower-level IO-Link devices.
IO-Link system
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 25
Integration into the automation system
3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system
● Device ID
ID number of the device. You can find the Device ID on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109748852).
● Inspection level for data backup:
– Identical type (V1.0) without Backup&Restore
– Type-compatible (V1.1) without Backup&Restore
– Type-compatible (V1.1) with Backup&Restore
– Type-compatible (V1.1) with Restore
The figure below shows you an example of the settings of a port configuration in STEP 7 or
with GSD file:
Figure 3-5 Settings of the port configuration in STEP 7 or with GSD file
IO-Link system
26 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB
Integration into the automation system
3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system
Introduction
The tables below show the configuration options offered by the SIMATIC IO-Link master with
or without S7-PCT and which FW versions of the IO-Link master support the individual
configurations.
IO-Link system
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 27
Integration into the automation system
3.1 Configuration of the IO-Link system
IO-Link system
28 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB
Integration into the automation system
3.2 Data access of the automation system and the HMI device
3.2 Data access of the automation system and the HMI device
Note
Function blocks "IO_LINK_MASTER" and "IO_LINK_DEVICE"
The function blocks "IO_LINK_MASTER" and "IO_LINK_DEVICE" replace the functions of
the previously available block "IOL_CALL".
Reference
The IO-Link block library with a description of the integration is available on the Internet
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/82981502).
You can find an application example of using the block library with HMI devices on the
Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/90529409).
IO-Link system
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 29
Integration into the automation system
3.3 Changing and saving device parameters during plant operation
Note
IO-Link Specification V1.0
IO-Link master and devices to IO-Link specification V1.0 do not offer this function; a data
backup cannot be set (Data backup: None).
Note that the behavior of the IO-Link master and the IO-Link devices during device
replacement depends directly on the set data backup level.
You can find additional information on this dependency in the section Replacing a master or
device during operation (Page 32).
IO-Link system
30 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB
Integration into the automation system
3.3 Changing and saving device parameters during plant operation
Triggering a backup
Requirements
● You have set the correct data backup level.
● The IO-Link master and the IO-Link devices you are using support this function (IO-Link
Specification V1.1).
Procedure
There are several ways to trigger a backup:
● In the engineering tool:
After you have downloaded the engineering settings to the device, the IO-Link device
immediately triggers a backup.
● In the CPU user program:
IO-Link device parameters can be changed successively by the user program.
A backup is only triggered by a system command. The system command must be
triggered by the user program after the parameter changes.
You can implement the parameter changes and the system command for triggering the
backup with function blocks of the CPU.
● Using the HMI:
You proceed as with triggering by the user program.
The plant operator then triggers the necessary system command on the HMI device.
● Locally by operating the IO-Link device:
After confirming the input on the IO-Link device, the IO-Link device initiates the backup.
IO-Link system
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 31
Integration into the automation system
3.4 Replacing a master or device during operation
Replacing a device
Replacing a device during operation is a scenario that occurs again and again and has to be
completed without longer plant downtimes. Replace a device quickly and avoid incorrect
settings. Devices can also be replaced by operators without special knowledge and aids.
When you use the backup function of the master, the master automatically supplies the
saved parameters to the new device during device replacement.
You have the following setting options for device replacement:
● Backup&Restore
You have set the master port to Backup&Restore. The new device behaves as the
replaced device because the master has saved the last parameter change with the
backup function.
● Restore
You have set the master port to Restore. The new device applies the parameter settings
that were saved in the master at the time of the last backup.
If you have made parameter changes since the last backup, these are not saved in the
master and are not available to the new device.
The behavior of the new device can deviate from the behavior of the replaced device.
This may be useful if you want to make short-term plant optimizations but do not want to
save them in the plant backup.
Note
Field calibration of sensors
When you are using sensors that must be adapted to specific rated conditions on site (field
calibration), you must repeat this calibration after replacing the device.
The backup does not include the data of the field calibration. After repeating the field
calibration, the new device works just like the replaced device.
Replacing a master
Replacing a master during operation is a rather rare scenario. Here, too, longer plant
downtimes are to be avoided. Replace a device quickly and avoid incorrect settings. Devices
can also be replaced by operators without special knowledge and aids.
You can save the configuration and parameter data of the master and the devices connected
to the master in the CPU and download this information to the new master after the
replacement.
When using an S7-CPU, you can use function blocks for this purpose.
You can find additional information on function blocks in the section Data access of the
automation system and the HMI device (Page 29).
IO-Link system
32 Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB
Index
Interface, 12
Protocol, 14
B Response time, 14
Specification, 19
Backup, 30
Backup&Restore, 30
O
C Operating modes, 14
Configuration, 22
without S7-PCT, 25
P
Connecting cables, 13
Connection system in IP65/67, 12 Port
Address range, 23
Port types in IP65/67, 13
D Process data, 15
Data exchange
Acyclic, 29
R
Cyclic, 29
Data types, 15 Restore, 30
Device data, 15
Device parameters, 24
Changing, 30 S
Save, 30
S7-PCT
Device profiles, 16
Example configuration, 23
Startup of the IO system, 16
E
Events, 15 T
Transmission performance, 15
Transmission rate, 14
F
Function block
IO_LINK_DEVICE, 29 W
IO_LINK_MASTER, 29
with S7-PCT, 22
I
IODD
Device description, 17
IO-Link
Advantages, 9
Combination, 19
Components, 7
Configuration tool, 17
Definition, 8
IO-Link system
Function Manual, 12/2017, A5E31637677-AB 33
Analog value processing ___________________
Preface
___________________
Documentation guide 1
What you should know about
___________________
analog technology 2
SIMATIC Representation of analog
___________________
values 3
S7-1500, ET 200MP,
ET 200SP, ET 200AL, ___________________
Connecting transducers 4
ET 200pro, ET 200eco PN
Analog value processing ___________________
Thermocouples 5
___________________
Wiring loads/actuators 6
Function Manual
___________________
Supported functions 7
___________________
High-speed analog modules 8
06/2014
A5E03461439-AC
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Conventions
STEP 7: In this documentation, "STEP 7" is used as a synonym for "STEP 7 as of V12
(TIA Portal)" and subsequent versions of the configuration and programming software.
This documentation includes images of the products it describes. The products supplied may
differ slightly from these images.
Please observe notes labeled as follows:
Note
Notes contain important information on a point in the documentation of particular importance.
Additional support
Additional information on SIMATIC products is available on the Internet. The associated
documentation is also available on the Internet.
● The portfolio of technical documentation for SIMATIC products and systems can be
accessed on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal).
● The online catalog and the ordering system are available on the Internet
(http://mall.automation.siemens.com).
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 7
2 What you should know about analog technology ..................................................................................... 9
2.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................ 9
2.2 Precision/resolution ......................................................................................................................13
2.3 Scaling analog values ..................................................................................................................17
2.4 Unscaling analog values ..............................................................................................................19
2.5 Linearity errors .............................................................................................................................21
2.6 Repeat accuracy ..........................................................................................................................22
2.7 Operational and basic error limits ................................................................................................23
2.8 Temperature error ........................................................................................................................26
2.9 Interference frequency suppression.............................................................................................27
2.10 Common mode interference (UCM) .............................................................................................29
2.11 Series mode interference (USM) .................................................................................................31
2.12 Interference voltage suppression .................................................................................................32
2.13 Crosstalk between channels ........................................................................................................34
2.14 Diagnostics ...................................................................................................................................36
2.15 Value status .................................................................................................................................46
2.16 Conversion time of an analog module .........................................................................................49
2.17 Cycle time of an analog module...................................................................................................51
2.18 Settling and response times of analog output modules ...............................................................52
2.19 Smoothing ....................................................................................................................................54
2.20 Burden with 2-wire transducers ...................................................................................................57
3 Representation of analog values ........................................................................................................... 60
3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................60
3.2 Representation of input ranges ....................................................................................................62
3.3 Representation of output ranges..................................................................................................63
SIMATIC manuals
All current manuals for SIMATIC products are available for download free of charge from the
Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
Introduction
This chapter is intended to familiarize you with the essential parameters of analog input
modules and analog output modules based on the fundamentals of analog technology. The
descriptions and examples provided on the following pages serve as a reference to the
manuals for the respective analog module and are intended to facilitate the handling of these
manuals.
Transducers
Controllers are only capable of processing analog values in the form of bit patterns. For this
purpose, transducers which can be connected to the analog module measure physical
variables such as pressure or temperature. The analog input module reads this analog value
in the form of current, voltage or resistance. To enable the CPU to process the current or
voltage measured, an integrated analog-to-digital converter in the analog input module
converts the value into a 16-bit integer value. Depending on the type of measurement, you
can use the following transducers:
● Voltage transducers
● Current transducers
– 2-wire transducers
– 4-wire transducers
● Resistance transducers
– 4-wire connection
– 3-wire connection
– 2-wire connection
● Thermocouples
Additional information on wiring various types of transducers to analog inputs can be found
in Wiring transducers (Page 65).
Example
Speed is acquired using a transducer which converts the speed range of 0 to 1500 rpm to a
voltage range of 1 to 5 V. At a measured speed of 865 rpm, the transducer outputs a value
of 3.3 V.
The resulting voltage value is calculated as follows:
Analog-to-digital conversion
A CPU processes information exclusively in digital format. The analog value is therefore
converted into a bit pattern. Conversion is done using an integrated ADC (analog-to-digital
converter) in the analog input module. For the CPU, this conversion always returns a 16-bit
word for SIMATIC products. The ADC used digitalizes the analog signal and approximates
its value with a stepped curve. Resolution and conversion speed are the most important
ADC parameters.
① Analog value
② Digital value
Figure 2-2 Approximation of an analog graph with low- and high-resolution stepped curves
Digital-to-analog conversion
Once the CPU has processed the digital signal, an integrated DAC (digital-to-analog
converter) in the analog output module converts the output signal to an analog current or
voltage value. The resulting value of the output signal corresponds to the output value used
to control the analog actuators. Such actuators include, for example, small servo drives or
proportional valves. You will find more information on wiring actuators in Wiring
loads/actuators (Page 103).
2.2 Precision/resolution
The resolution of an analog module depends on the converter and its external circuitry. An
approximation of the analog signal to be acquired/output is returned by a stepped curve. The
resolution determines the number of increments of the analog value along this stepped
curve. A higher module resolution reduces the length of increments and adds precision to
the digitization of the analog signal.
① Analog value
② Digital value
Measuring ranges
For the display of the measuring range, SIMATIC S7 distinguishes between the rated range,
the overrange and underrange, and the overflow or underflow. This distinction allows you to
recognize whether the measured value is actually in the measuring range determined in the
technical specifications. The overflow and underflow ranges are reserved for error detection.
At a resolution of 16 bits the theoretically possible 32768 increments are distributed across a
voltage range of 11.852 V, which means that only 27648 increments are actually available
for the resolution of a measuring range of 10 V. The minimum value which can be
represented is therefore 0.3617 mV (see table).
The digitized visualization of the input ranges, separated into bipolar and unipolar input
ranges, is shown in the section Visualization of the input ranges (Page 62). The digitized
visualization of the output ranges, separated into bipolar and unipolar output ranges, is
shown in the section Visualization of the output ranges (Page 63). You will find a summary of
all measuring ranges which you can use with your analog module in the corresponding
device manual.
Example
Scaling
It is often necessary to calculate the actual process value rather than increments
(e.g., 10 V = 27648 increments) for further processing of digitalized analog values. The
conversion of a value range (e.g., -27648 to +27648 increments) to the original physical
quantity (e.g., 0 to 500 liters) is referred to as scaling.
Scaling blocks
STEP 7 offers the suitable program block for scaling of analog values. The SCALE block
is included in the STEP 7 scope of delivery and permits input of a high and low limit
(e.g., 0 to 500 liters).
Example
In the example below the fill level of a tank with a capacity of 500 liters is to be measured.
The transducer used measures a voltage of -10 V with an empty tank and a voltage of +10 V
with a full tank. The analog module converts the voltage range from -10 V to +10 V into the
value range -27648 to +27648 and converts this range into the original quantity of 0 to
500 liters with the SCALE program block.
The analog value at input IN is read directly by the module or is transferred by a data
interface in INT format. The input LO_LIM is used to determine the low limit (0 liters) and
HI_LIM to determine the high limit (500 liters) of the physical quantity. The output OUT
outputs the scaled value (physical quantity) as floating-point number
(LO_LIM <= OUT <= HI_LIM). You can assign parameters via the input BIPOLAR to specify
if only positive or only negative values are to be converted. If the parameter receives an
operand with the state '0', there is a unipolar scaling. An operand with the state '1' results in
a bipolar scaling. The output RET_VAL outputs an error code in case of an error (e.g.,
overflow) and the value '0' in case of an error-free execution.
Additional information on the SCALE block can be found in the STEP 7 online help.
Note
Transducers
The prerequisite for a measurement within a bipolar measuring range is that the used
transducer supports bipolar measuring ranges.
The measurement of the fill level in the bipolar measuring range takes place with twice the
resolution (Δ) as in the unipolar measuring range.
Unscaling
The output of scaled analog values often requires conversion of the analog value calculated
by the user program into the value range of the analog output module. This conversion is
referred to as unscaling.
Unscaling blocks
STEP 7 offers the suitable program block for unscaling of analog values. The UNSCALE
block is included in the STEP 7 scope of delivery and permits the input of a high and low limit
that defines the range of the program value.
Example
An analog value from 0.0 to 100.0% calculated by the user program is to be converted with
the UNSCALE block to the value range -27648 to +27648. When the unscaled value is
output to an analog output module, this module addresses an analog actuator (e.g.,
modulating valve). The actuator is to be addressed at a program value of 0% with the
minimum value (-10 V or -20 mA) and at 100% with the maximum value (+10 V or +20 mA).
The value calculated by the program must be transferred in the REAL format (IN). You use
the input LO_LIM to determine the low limit (0.0%), and HI_LIM to determine the high limit
(100.0%) within which the program value moves. The unscaled value is output in INT format
at the OUT output. You can assign parameters via the input BIPOLAR to specify if only
positive or only negative values are to be converted. If the parameter receives an operand
with the state '0', there is a unipolar scaling. An operand with the state '1' results in a bipolar
scaling. The output RET_VAL outputs an error code in case of an error and the value '0' in
case of an error-free execution.
Additional information on the UNSCALE block can be found in the STEP 7 online help.
The figure below shows the scaling for an actuator that is to be addressed at a program
value of 0% (-27648) with the minimum value 0 (-10 V or -20 mA) and at 100% (+27648) with
the maximum value (+10 V or +20 mA).
Definition
Linearity denotes the deviation of the actual A/D or D/A conversion from the ideal lines within
a specified measuring range. The linearity error therefore represents the deviation of the real
transmission function from the ideal straight line. The error is given in the technical data as a
percentage of the rated range of the analog module.
The figure below shows the linearity error of an ADC, magnified for better visibility.
Example
An error of ±1 mV is returned at an input range of ±10 V and a linearity error of ±0.01%. The
error is calculated as follows: 10 V · 0.01 % = 1 mV
The linearity error information given in the technical specifications is taken into account in the
operational limit. You will find a detailed description of the operational limit in Operational
and basic error limits (Page 23).
Definition
The repeat accuracy is the maximum deviation in measured/output value for the same input
signal or output value after another value has been created or output. Other parameters, e.g.
the Temperature parameter, remain unchanged. The repeat accuracy refers to the rated
range of the module and applies in a steady temperature state.
Example
The specified repeat accuracy for an analog input module as a percentage of the measuring
range end value is ±0.02 %. This corresponds to a repeat accuracy of 2 mV for any value
within the measuring range of ±10 V. If you change the measured value from 10 V to -10 V,
for example, and then measure with 10 V again, the measured value deviation may not
exceed ±2 mV.
Introduction
The following section shows you how to determine the operational or basic error limits and
thus the measurement error or output error with the help of the technical specification. The
worst-case configuration ensures that the module will not exceed the specified value within
the valid operational range.
The precision of analog input or output modules is only part of the precision of the entire
measurement section. A measurement section usually consists of transducer, transmitter,
transmission line as well as input / output module.
Operational limit
The operational limit is the entire measurement or output error rate of the analog module in
the rated range in temperature-settled state within the approved temperature range.
Note
The operational limit and basic error limit percentages listed in the technical specifications
always relate to the maximum possible I/O value (the measuring range end value) in the
rated range of the module.
The following image shows an example of operational and basic error limits in comparison
with the ideal curve.
Note
Bipolar measuring ranges
The calculation also applies to bipolar measuring ranges.
An error of ±10 mV is also returned at an input range of ±10 V and a linearity error of ±0.1%.
Introduction
Analog modules are exposed to operational conditions that have an impact on their precision
and on the measurement results they return. Temperature errors develop, for example, if the
operating temperature of the module deviates from the ambient temperature of 25 °C. These
temperature errors within the approved temperature range are taken into account in the
operational limit.
Definition
The temperature error identifies the maximum drift of measuring/output values caused by
fluctuation of the ambient temperature at the analog module. The maximum drift can occur at
any ambient temperature. The temperature error is specified depending on the module used
in percent per degree Celsius and/or percent per Kelvin, e.g. ±0.005%/K, and relates to the
measuring range end value of the analog module.
Note
Calculating the error in thermocouple measurements
Add the error of a thermocouple measurement to the error of the compensation
measurement to determine the total error of a thermocouple measurement. These errors are
defined in the respective manual.
Example
In this example, the total error of the temperature measurement is determined with the help
of a type K thermocouple. The type K thermocouple takes measurements at a temperature
range from -270 °C to +1372 °C.
The technical specifications state an operational limit of >-200 °C ±2.4 K for the type K
thermocouple. The temperature error of compensation amounts to ±6 °C. The total
temperature error is measured as follows at a temperature of >-200 °C:
Operational error (±2.4 K) + temperature error of compensation (±6 °C) = ±8.4 °C.
Definition
The interference frequency suppression function is applied to analog input modules to
suppress the noise caused by the frequency of the AC voltage supply used.
The frequency of the AC voltage supply is likely to have a negative effect particularly on the
values returned by measurements in the low voltage range and on thermocouples.
Parameter assignment
The line frequency at which the system is operated can be set by means of module
parameters, for example, in STEP 7.
The conversion time changes depending on the set interference frequency suppression. The
data sheets of the respective module define this dependency.
Please note the following when selecting interference frequency suppression:
The higher the frequency setting, the shorter the conversion time.
Note
Line frequency
Always select the interference frequency based on the line frequency used. Mismatch errors
must be expected if a frequency that deviates from this line frequency is set, for example, to
reduce the conversion time. In this case, the specified technical data and, in particular,
precision are possibly outside the specified range.
Smoothing
By smoothing analog values, you achieve an additional improvement for the suppression of
interference frequencies. For more information on the smoothing of analog values, refer to
the section Smoothing (Page 54).
Definition
Common mode interference denotes interference voltages and currents in the lines
connecting electrical devices and system components. They affect both the positive and
negative line with the same phase angle and amplitude. The interference signal needs an
additional current path to affect the utility signal. This current path is usually provided by
common reference potential, e.g. earth or ground connection, of the utility signal and
interference source.
Example
The following figure of an analog module with two inputs (Ch1/Ch2) shows the coupled
interference voltages at the inputs (UCM1/UCM2) as well as an interference voltage coupled
between these inputs (UCM3). Common mode rejection indicates the extent to which these
interference signals can be suppressed. It is calculated using the following equation:
CMR [dB] = 20 · log (UCM / Ua)
If there is common-mode voltage (UCM), the equation is solved for Ua to calculate the
measuring error (Ua):
Note
The common mode rejection (CMR) is detailed in "Common mode interference" in the
technical data of the device manual for your analog module.
Definition
Series mode interference is interference voltages and currents affecting the connection lines
in opposite directions. They have opposite polarity in the positive and negative directions.
Series mode interference currents cause a voltage drop at the input impedance that has the
effect of an interference voltage.
Causes
Series mode interference is caused by capacitive or inductive coupling. Inductive coupling
generates a magnetic flow that is radiated between adjacent current-carrying conductors.
This induces an interference voltage in the conductor. Galvanic coupling is given where
different circuits influence each other due to common conductor sections, e.g. common
ground connection.
The diagram below shows series mode interference as a voltage source (USM) connected in
series to the actual measuring signal (UM). The index "SM" stands for "Series Mode". Series
Mode rejection indicates the extent to which these interference signals are suppressed. It is
calculated using the following equation: SMR [dB] = 20 · log (USM / Ua)
The voltage (Ua) measurement error is calculated by solving the equation for Ua.
The following equation shows the calculation of current (Ia) measuring errors using a current
input.
Note
The series mode rejection (SMR) is detailed in "Series mode interference" in the technical
data of the device manual for your analog module. The level of input resistance (Rein) is also
specified in the technical data.
Definition
Interference voltage suppression gives the factor by which the interference signal is
suppressed in measurement value acquisition. Higher values reduce the effect of
interference on the measurement signal. The technical data differentiates between "Common
mode interference" and "Series mode interference". Interference voltage suppression is
specified in decibels.
Example
The diagram below shows the measuring error for interference voltages in volts and
interference voltage suppression of 0 to 120 dB.
Note
Interference-free design
Disturbance variables can be substantially reduced by means of appropriate grounding and
shielding to increase interference immunity of the configuration. You will find a detailed
description of how to avoid interference in the Configuring interference-free controllers
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566) function manual.
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 ± 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency), n = 1, 2, ...
Common mode interference > 100 dB
Common mode voltage, max. 10 V
Interference voltage suppression for f = n x (f1 ± 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency), n = 1, 2, ...
Series mode interference > 60 dB
Definition
Crosstalk between signal channels denotes the interactive influence between two
independent channels as a result of leakage currents and capacitive or inductive coupling.
Crosstalk between the channels changes the signal by the value of the amplitude of the
crosstalk signal.
Causes
Technically, it is not feasible to totally isolate the module channels from environmental
conditions. This means that it is always possible for leakage currents or disturbance coupling
having an interactive effect.
The diagram shows the effects of crosstalk for the user with two channels (Ch1/Ch2) of an
analog module. The crosstalk value is the factor by which the utility signal at a second
channel Ua2 is affected by the signal at the first channel Ue1. The measuring error (Ua1) can
be calculated using the following equation:
2.14 Diagnostics
Diagnostics of the analog module are carried out while the system is in operation, on the
basis of the current output variables such as current or voltage. If the output current or output
voltage is no longer sufficient, the module will not be able to run reliable diagnostics. The
limits within which diagnostics are possible are specified in the technical data for each
module.
The module reports the diagnosed state to the CPU using a diagnostics error interrupt. If
several diagnostics are pending at the same time, the diagnostics with the highest priority is
reported to the CPU first. Diagnostics are output on LED displays on the affected module, on
the CPU display, on the Web server or on an HMI device.
The configurable diagnostics types depend on the respective selected measuring type or
output type. The following tables shows the relationship between the diagnostics types,
measuring types or output types of an analog input module or analog output module.
Table 2- 3 Diagnostics types of an analog input module to be configured depending on the measurement type "Voltage"
* For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow"
Table 2- 4 Diagnostics types of an analog input module to be configured depending on the measurement type "Current
(4-wire transducer)"
* For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow"
** Diagnostics for encoder supply only
Table 2- 5 Diagnostics types of an analog input module to be configured depending on the measurement type "Current
(2-wire transducer)"
* For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow"
** Diagnostics for encoder supply only
Table 2- 6 Configurable diagnostics types of an analog input module depending on the measurement type "Resistor
(4-wire connection)"
* For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow"
Table 2- 7 Configurable diagnostics types of an analog input module depending on the measurement type "Resistor
(3-wire connection)"
* For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow"
Table 2- 8 Configurable diagnostics types of an analog input module depending on the measurement type "Resistor
(2-wire connection)"
* For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow"
Table 2- 9 Configurable diagnostics types of an analog input module depending on the measurement type "Thermal
resistor (4-wire connection)"
* For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow"
Table 2- 10 Configurable diagnostics types of an analog input module depending on the measurement type "Thermal
resistor (3-wire connection)"
* For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow"
Table 2- 11 Configurable diagnostics types of an analog input module depending on the measurement type "Thermal
resistor (2-wire connection)"
* For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow"
Table 2- 12 Diagnostics types of an analog input module to be configured depending on the measurement type
"Thermocouple"
* For ET 200pro, the parameters "Overflow" and "Underflow" are combined to the parameter "Overflow/Underflow"
Table 2- 13 Diagnostics types of an analog output module to be configured depending on the measurement type "Voltage"
Table 2- 14 Diagnostics types of an analog output module to be configured depending on the measurement type "Current"
Note
Measuring ranges
Note that the diagnostics types that can be parameterized depend on the selected
measurement/output type as well as on the respective measuring range.
Note
Minimum output values
Certain errors such as wire break and short circuit cannot be diagnosed below a given
current or voltage value. Diagnostics are only possible again once the output returns to
above this minimum value.
No supply voltage L+
You can diagnose a missing or low supply voltage L+ at the analog module by activating the
"No supply voltage L+" checkbox. If the supply voltage is missing or too low, the status and
error display on the analog module will provide the relevant information. The entry in the
diagnostics buffer also makes this information available to the CPU.
If there is no supply voltage, no other types of diagnostics available are possible either.
Wire break
The term wire break denotes a failure state that is triggered by the interruption of a usually
closed electrical circuit.
Figure 2-19 Configuring the wire break current limit for an analog input module in STEP 7
Usually, the live zero technique is deployed to detect wire breaks. The start of the measuring
range for the standard live zero signal of 4 to 20 mA is assigned the 4 mA signal value. A
wire break between the input and sensor can therefore be detected based on the missing
current flow. Instead of a current signal, you may also use a voltage signal from 1 to 5 V to
detect a wire break. The "Wire break" diagnostics function can therefore only be configured
for a range of 4 to 20 mA or 1 to 5 V.
For "Resistor", "Thermal resistor" and "Thermocouple" measurements, a current is
impressed into the line. If a wire break occurs, the flow of current is interrupted and the
analog module therefore detects the wire break.
Overflow/underflow
The resolution of the measuring range of an analog input module distinguishes between the
rated range, the overrange or underrange, and the overflow or underflow. The following table
assign the number of increments into which the measured signal is divided to the various
voltage measuring ranges.
As of a decimal value of 32512, the value acquired is beyond the overrange and is no longer
valid. If this is the case, the error status "Overflow" is diagnosed. The overrange is a
tolerance range before overflow is reached.
As of a decimal value of -32513, the value acquired is below the configured measuring range
and is no longer valid. If this is the case, the error status "Underflow" is diagnosed. The
underrange is the equivalent of the overrange, but for negative values.
An "Overflow" or "Underflow" diagnostics may be caused, for example, by a wire break, an
incorrect measuring range or incorrect wiring.
Note
Accuracy
The accuracy specified in the technical data of the relevant module is only guaranteed within
the rated range.
Note
With 4-wire transducers, a current meter connected in series will result in too great a drop in
voltage.
Potential differences UCM beyond the valid limits may lead to measurement errors and
malfunctions. If you want to ensure that the maximum value is not exceeded, interconnect
the measuring inputs and analog ground MANA with an equipotential bonding cable. More
detailed information can be found in Wiring transducers.
Short-circuit
Activating the "Short circuit" checkbox activates short-circuit diagnostics for an analog
channel. The diagnostics function is triggered by channel overload.
Possible causes:
● Wiring error (e.g. short circuit between conductors at the connections or in the cable)
● Use of faulty or incorrect actuators (e.g. internal short circuit or low input resistance as a
result of actuator failure)
The analog signal output is used for short circuit detection. If the voltage is too low, reliable
short-circuit diagnostics are not possible. In this case, the diagnostics function is deactivated
without triggering a change of the diagnostics status. The voltage limit up to which the
module will diagnose a short circuit can be found in the technical data for the module.
SIMATIC modules have a special protective circuit to prevent short circuit. The short circuit
current is limited internally in the module. The level of short circuit current is specified in the
technical data of your analog module.
Note
Overload
Please note that overload exposes the modules are exposed to a greater thermal load. This
can affect the output channels. You should therefore avoid continuously running analog
output modules in overload.
Reference junction
This type of diagnostics can only be selected for analog input modules for "Thermocouple"
measuring. Selecting the "Reference junction" check box diagnoses an error on the
reference channel for compensating the reference junction temperature.
The temperature at the reference junction of a thermocouple is measured at the reference
channel of the module using an external thermal resistor (RTD). If an error occurs, for
example as a result of a wire break, the temperature measured at the reference junction of
the thermocouple will no longer be compensated. The reference temperature may then be
outside the valid range.
Additional information on connecting thermocouples and thermal resistors and on how they
operate can be found in Thermocouples and Wiring transducers.
Overload
Activating the "Overload" checkbox activates the diagnostics of the thermal monitoring of the
output level. The "Overload" diagnostics is triggered when the maximum temperature is
exceeded at the output and is detected channel by channel.
The maximum temperature may be exceeded for the following reasons:
● Ambient temperature is too high
● Output is being operated outside the specification
Note
Overload
Please note that overload exposes the modules to a high thermal load. This can affect the
output channels. You should therefore avoid continuously running analog output modules in
overload.
Value status
In case of a faulty analog value, the analog module outputs the error values 0x7FFF (error
value for overflow and all other error states) or 0x8000 (error value for underflow) for the
affected channel. The user program is now able to detect and evaluate a channel error. The
user also has the option to evaluate the system diagnostics event-driven by means of
diagnostics alarms.
In addition to the error values 0x7FFF or 0x8000 and the configured diagnostic types, analog
input and output modules provide diagnostics information by means of the Process image
input (PII). It is referred to as Value status and transferred synchronously with the user data.
The value status (Quality Information = QI) provides a statement regarding the validity of the
input signal. A distinction is made between the quality level "Good" (signal valid = 1) and
"Bad" (signal invalid = 0).
Note
For analog input modules, the use of the value status is an alternative to the evaluation of
the channels by the error values 0x7FFF or 0x8000. Compared to the error values, the
binary evaluation of the value status (0 or 1) in the user program is simpler and more clearly
arranged.
For analog output modules, the value status informs you as to whether the written value can
be output by the respective channel. Using the value status you can respond to this
information without having to evaluate the diagnostics of the module in the first place.
Example
An additional byte is occupied in the input address space of the respective module when you
enable the value status. Each bit in this byte is assigned to a channel and provides
information on, for example, whether the output value specified by the user program is
actually queued at the module terminal (0= value is invalid; 1= value is valid).
Error occurrence
If a wire break occurs at an analog input module, for example, the current signal state is
entered in the process image and the value status of the signal is set to "invalid". To trigger
an indicator light in case of an error, for example, evaluate the value status in the user
program.
Note
The Value status represents a group diagnostics which only gives the user a Good or Bad
information. The Value status is not suitable for a more specific identification of the cause of
the error (e.g., wire break, short circuit in the encoder cable or load voltage failure).
Example
This example shows channel 6 of an analog input module for resistance measurement in the
range of 6000 Ω, a configured integration time of 20 ms, and activated wire break
monitoring.
The conversion time of the channel is derived from the total of the following measurement
variables:
Note
Relationship between diagnostics and conversion time
While some diagnostics run parallel to the conversion and do not extend the conversion
time, other diagnostics types can lead to an extension of the conversion time, as
demonstrated in the example above.
Definition
The cycle time of an analog module represents the time that the module needs to process all
channels used. The cycle time depends on the form of measured value acquisition used, e.g.
multiplex or parallel measured value acquisition.
Response time
The response time for a new output value is defined as the time between the input of a
digital output value to the internal memory of the module and the value to be output at the
analog output being reached (with a residual error of 1 %).
The response time (tA) is the sum of application time (tX), conversion time (tW) and settling
time (tE):
tA = tX + tW + tE
tA Response time
tX Application time
tZ Module cycle time
tW Conversion time
tE Settling time
t1 New digital output value is available in the internal memory of the module
t2 Module activates the digital output value and starts conversion
t3 Module ends conversion at the terminal of the analog output channel and outputs the analog
signal
t4 Signal has settled and the specified analog output value has been reached (residual error 1 %)
Application time
The CPU/IM (interface module) writes new output values to the internal memory of the
analog output module. The time required for this is not determined by the CPU/IM. These
output values are converted asynchronously to their entry in buffer memory. The worst-case
application time (tX) may be equal to the cycle time (tZ). This situation develops if the CPU
writes a new value to the internal memory of the module immediately after the transfer of the
value for conversion. This new value will not be processed until the next conversion.
The figure below shows acyclic access of the analog output module to output values from
the internal memory in non-isochronous mode. You can find more information on
isochronous mode in the paragraph on isochronous mode of the section High-Speed analog
modules (Page 113).
tX Application time
t1 New digital output value is available in the internal memory of the module
t2 Module activates the digital output value and starts conversion
t3 Module ends conversion at the terminal of the analog output channel and outputs the analog signal
Figure 2-23 Application of the output values
Conversion time
The conversion time of an output channel starts with the transfer of the digital value from the
internal memory of the module (t2) and ends with the digital-to-analog conversion (t3).
Settling time
The settling time starts when the analog signal is output to the module (t3) terminals and
ends when the output value (t4) is reached. The output value is reached as soon as the
output signal has settled at its final value, taking into account a residual error of 1%.
The settling time depends on the type of output for the module, and on the connected load.
The load for the analog output consists of connecting line and connected actuator. When the
output is "Current", the settling time increases with high ohmic resistance. Inductive loads
cause subsequent fluctuation in the output value. When the output is "Voltage", the
capacitive load causes subsequent fluctuation.
2.19 Smoothing
Smoothing principle
The measured values are smoothed by means of filtering. The module forms mean values
from a specified number of converted (digitalized) analog values. Smoothing should not be
confused with the integration of measured values over a defined period of time. It is therefore
not possible to smooth measured signals to filter out a specific interference frequency.
However, this smoothing returns more "stable" data values because it suppresses peaks
which overlay the measured signal.
4 (none, weak, medium, strong) or more levels of smoothing can be configured by the user
depending on the module used. The level determines the number of analog values from
which the mean value is generated. The greater the smoothing factor, the better the filtering.
Smoothing method
A smoothing algorithm is applied to a configurable number of measured values (e.g. 4, 8, 32)
in line with the moving average. Each new measured value is factored in, and the oldest
measured value then ignored. This mechanism suppresses interference peaks which overlay
the measured signal. Utility signal jumps only become evident in the data after some time
(see examples below).
The modules of the various product ranges use different smoothing algorithms. Smoothing is
either linear or exponential. The differences are apparent particularly with strong smoothing
and lead to a faster or slower rate of rise depending on the product used.
For information on whether or not a specific module supports customization of the smoothing
function, please refer to the manual of the analog input module.
① No smoothing (k = 1)
② Weak smoothing (k = 4)
③ Medium smoothing (k = 16)
④ Strong smoothing (k = 32)
① No smoothing (k = 1)
② Weak smoothing (k = 4)
③ Medium smoothing (k = 16)
④ Strong smoothing (k = 32)
2-wire transducers
2-wire transducers are current transducers which convert the process variable into a current
signal of between 4 and 20 mA. Two connection lines supply the transducer with an output
current of at least 4 mA. Additional information on connecting 2-wire transducers to analog
input modules can be found in the section Wiring current transducers (Page 72).
Burden
The burden indicates how great the external resistance in a current loop may be. If the
external resistance is greater than the specified burden, the 2-wire transducer supply voltage
is too low. The burden consists of the resistance of the transducer and all other resistances
connected to the current loop.
The maximum admissible burden of the transducer, e.g. 820 Ω, is specified in the technical
data of the analog module.
With a supply voltage of at least 8.5 V, the transducer has a resistance of 425 Ω. The
resistance is less than 820 Ω. You can therefore connect the transducer to the analog input
module (AI) without exceeding the maximum burden.
① 2-wire transducers
UV Terminal for feed voltage at the channel
I+ Terminal for current input
Umin Voltage drop at 2-wire transducer
The resistance of the measuring instrument may therefore not exceed 395 Ω.
① 2-wire transducers
② Digital multimeter
③ Zener diode
UV Terminal for feed voltage at the channel
I+ Terminal for current input
Umin Voltage drop at 2-wire transducer
RMess Resistance at measuring instrument
UMess Voltage drop at the measuring instrument
Sign
The sign (S) of the analog value is always set in bit 15:
● "0" → +
● "1" → -
Example
The following example shows how the least significant digits are padded with "0" values:
● The module with 16-bit resolution is capable of incrementing the values in steps of one
unit (20 = 1).
● The module with 13-bit resolution is capable of incrementing the values in steps of 8 units
(23 = 8).
S = sign
Note
For information on the resolution supported by each analog module, please refer to the
technical data for the relevant module.
* When values > 32511 are specified, the output value is limited to 117.589 % or 0 % (0.0 V / 0.0 mA), depending on the
module used.
** When values < -32512 are specified, the output value is limited to -117.593 % or 0 % (0.0 V / 0.0 mA), depending on the
module used.
* When values > 32511 are specified, the output value is limited to 117.589 % or 0 % (0.0 V / 0.0 mA), depending on the
module used.
** When values < 0 are specified, the output value is limited to 0% (0.0 V / 0.0 mA).
Introduction
This chapter describes the basic procedure for wiring transducers to analog inputs.
Information on specific wiring options is available in the manual of each module.
For more information, e.g. on cable routing and shielding or potential equalization,
etc., refer to the function manual for Configuring interference-free controllers
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566).
Figure 4-1 Example: Reference potential for analog input modules with MANA connection
Figure 4-2 Example: Reference potential for analog input modules without MANA connection
Note
2-wire transducers must be electrically isolated.
Figure 4-5 Example: Wiring 2-wire transducers to an analog input for 4-wire transducers
Figure 4-7 Example: 4-wire connection of thermal resistor to an analog input module
Figure 4-8 Example: 3-wire connection of thermal resistor to an analog input module
Figure 4-9 Example: 2-wire connection of thermal resistor to an analog input module
Introduction
Thermocouples are generally supplied ready-to-use. Protective casing prevents the
thermocouples from being destroyed by mechanical force, for example.
Compensating lines
The compensating lines belonging to the respective thermocouples are identified by a
special color code, because only the compensating line that is made of the material
matching the thermocouple may be used. The standardized compensating lines are
specified in DIN EN 60584. Observe the maximum temperatures in the manufacturer's
specifications.
Further information
Further information, such as the selection of thermocouples and how they operate, can be
found in the section Thermocouples (Page 77).
Introduction
Thermocouples are electrical devices for precise temperature measurement. They consist of
two different metals connected at one point. Temperature affecting this point generates a
voltage difference from which the temperature can be calculated.
Thermocouples can measure a wide range of temperatures and come in extremely robust
models. They are therefore frequently used in industrial applications. Below are some of the
criteria to consider when selecting the right thermocouple:
● Temperature range
● Atmospheric conditions
● Price
Grounded thermocouples
In grounded thermocouples, a conductive thermocouple wire is attached to the inside of the
sensor housing. This results in good heat transfer from the sensor housing to the
thermocouple measuring tip.
Non-grounded thermocouples
In non-grounded thermocouples, the thermocouple is not connected to the sensor housing.
The response time following temperature changes is longer than with grounded
thermocouples. The measuring point is galvanically isolated.
Note
Due to physical conditions, thermocouples are extremely inaccurate outside the specified
temperature range. Only use thermocouple in the temperature range specified by the
manufacturer.
The following table lists the types and material compositions, as well as the temperature
measuring range of different thermocouples:
Thermocouple structure
A thermocouple consists of a pair of thermal sensors and the respective installation and
wiring elements. Two wires made of different metals/alloys are welded together at their ends
(hot end). The welding point forms the so-called measuring point, while the free ends of the
thermocouple form the reference junction.
The free ends are interconnected with the evaluation device (e.g. analog input module) via
insulated wires or cables.
The different thermocouple types, e.g. K/J/N, are derived from different material composition;
the same measuring principle is applied to all thermocouples, independent on their type.
Note
Always observe the polarity, as incorrect wiring will result in unacceptable measuring errors.
5.3.1 Overview
Introduction
You have several options for measuring the reference junction temperature in order to obtain
a correct temperature value as a function of the temperature difference between the
reference junction and the measuring point.
You have various compensation options to suit requirements at the location of the reference
junction.
The compensation options supported by the analog module used are specified in the manual
of the respective module.
Function principle
The reference junction for compensation via internal reference junction is at the terminals of
the analog input module. Wire the thermocouples or compensating lines directly to the
module inputs. The internal temperature sensor acquires the module temperature and
returns a compensating voltage.
Note that compensation via internal reference junction will not always reach the precision of
external compensation!
Procedure
Configuration steps:
1. Open the project in STEP 7.
2. In the device view, select the required analog module and the corresponding channel.
3. Select the "General" tab in the Inspector window of the selected module.
4. Select the "Inputs/Measuring" area.
5. Select the "Thermocouple" value as "Measurement type".
6. As "Reference junction", select the value "Internal reference junction".
Wiring thermocouples
Wire the thermocouples directly or indirectly via compensating lines to the module inputs.
Figure 5-3 Example: Wiring thermocouples for compensation via internal reference junction
Function principle
With this type of compensation, the reference junction temperature is determined using an
external thermal resistor (RTD). Certain modules provide an internal reference channel.
Procedure
Configuration steps:
1. Open the project in STEP 7.
2. In the device view, select the required analog module and the corresponding channel.
3. Select the "General" tab in the Inspector window of the selected module.
4. Select the "Inputs/Measuring" area.
5. Select the "Thermocouple" value as "Measurement type".
6. As "Reference junction", select the value "Reference channel of the module"".
① Thermocouple
② Compensating line (same material as thermocouple)
③ Copper supply cable, for example
④ Thermal resistor (RTD)
⑤ Reference junction
Function principle
For this compensation, a module channel with a connected thermal resistor (RTD) acts as
"Reference temperature transmitter". Other channels (reference temperature receivers) with
connected thermocouples can be compensated using this reference temperature. The
measured temperatures of all channels (receivers) that you have configured for this
compensation type will be compensated automatically by the temperature value of the
reference junction (transmitter).
The reference junction temperature is determined by means of an external thermal resistor
(RTD).
Procedure
Configuration steps:
1. Open the project in STEP 7.
2. In the device view, select the required analog module and the corresponding channel.
3. Select the "General" tab in the Inspector window of the selected module.
4. Select the area "Inputs/measurement".
5. For the channel of the relevant module, specify as transmitter:
As "Measurement type" select, for example, "Thermal resistor (4-wire connection)".
As "Reference junction", select the value "Reference channel of group 0".
① Thermocouple
② Compensating line (same material as thermocouple)
③ Copper supply cable, for example
④ Thermal resistor (RTD)
⑤ Reference junction
Function principle
With this type of compensation, the reference junction temperature is stored in the module
as fixed value.
Procedure
Configuration steps:
1. Open the project in STEP 7.
2. Select the required analog module in the Device view.
3. Select the "General" tab in the Inspector window of the selected module.
4. Select the "Inputs/Measuring" area.
5. Select the "Thermocouple" value as "Measurement type".
6. As "Reference junction", select the value "Fixed reference temperature".
7. Specify the temperature of the reference junction in the "Fixed reference temperature"
area, for example, 20 °C.
Figure 5-10 Example 1: Connecting a thermocouple to an analog module for compensation with
"fixed reference temperature"
The figure below shows the connection options for thermocouples provided the temperature
of the reference junction (outside the module) is kept at a fixed reference temperature
(20 °C).
Figure 5-11 Example 2: Connecting a thermocouple to an analog module for compensation with
"fixed reference temperature"
Function principle
This compensation type allows you to handle the reference junction temperature for
temperature compensation in the user program. You can derive the temperature value from
any other module of the station. The reference junction temperature is transferred via data
records using the instruction WRREC (SFB 53).
The structure of the data records is detailed in the device manual for each module.
Requirement
STEP 7 project with the following contents:
● User program with WRREC (SFB 53) instruction for transferring the data records with
reference temperature
● Analog module for acquisition of the process temperature using thermocouple (TC)
● Analog module for measuring the process temperature using thermal resistor (RTD)
Analog module for acquisition of the process temperature using thermocouple (TC)
Configuration steps:
1. Open the project in STEP 7.
2. In the device view, select the required analog module and the corresponding channel.
3. Select the "General" tab in the Inspector window of the selected module.
4. Select the "Inputs/Measuring" area.
5. Select the "Thermocouple" value as "Measurement type".
6. As "Reference junction", select the value "Dynamic reference temperature".
Analog module for measuring the process temperature using thermal resistor (RTD)
Configuration steps:
1. Open the project in STEP 7.
2. In the device view, select the required analog module and the corresponding channel.
3. Select the "General" tab in the Inspector window of the selected module.
4. Select the "Inputs/Measuring" area.
5. Select the "Thermal resistor (4-wire connection)" value as "Measurement type".
① Thermocouple
② Compensating line (same material as thermocouple)
③ Copper supply cable, for example
④ Thermal resistor (RTD)
⑤ Reference junction
Function principle
The reference junction temperature of the thermocouples is measured outside the analog
input module, e.g., by means of a compensating box on the thermocouple. The temperature
of the reference junction for this type of compensation is specified as 0° C.
The compensating box includes a bridge circuit that is calibrated for a specific reference
junction temperature (compensation temperature). The connectors for the ends of the
compensating line of the thermocouple form the reference junction. If the actual comparison
temperature deviates from the compensation temperature, the temperature-dependent
bridge resistor changes. A positive or negative compensation voltage is generated and
added to the thermal voltage.
Note
Thermocouples of type B do not require a compensating box.
Procedure
Configuration steps:
1. Open the project in STEP 7.
2. Select the required analog module in the Device view.
3. Select the "Inputs" tab in the Inspector window of the selected module and the respective
channel.
4. Select the "Thermocouple" value as "Measurement type" in the "Measuring" area.
5. As "Reference junction", select the value "None" or "External compensation" depending
on the used module.
① Copper cables
② Compensating box (per channel), for example; thermocouple type B does not require a
compensating box
③ Thermocouple
Function principle
The reference junction temperature is determined by means of the resistance value of a
Pt 1000 at the clamping unit of the M12 compensation connector. The resistance
measurement is only permitted at the X1 circular socket (channel 0). All of the module's
channels with this type of compensation receive the same reference junction temperature.
Procedure
Configuration steps:
1. Open the project in STEP 7.
2. Select the required analog module in the Device view.
3. Select the "Inputs" tab in the Inspector window of the selected module.
4. Select the "Thermocouple" value as "Measurement type" in the "Measuring" area.
5. As "Reference junction", select the value "RTD (0)".
Connection example
Figure 5-18 Connection example "RTD (0)" as reference junction in the M12 compensation connector
The figure below shows a connection example "RTD (0)" as reference junction with external
thermal resistor Pt1000:
Figure 5-19 Connection example "RTD (0)" as reference junction with external Pt1000
Introduction
This chapter describes the basic procedure for wiring loads/actuators to analog outputs.
Information on specific wiring options is available in the manual of each module.
For detailed information on cable routing and shielding, potential equalization, etc. please
refer to the function manual Configuring interference-free controllers
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566).
Figure 6-1 Example: Reference potential for an analog output module with MANA connection
Figure 6-2 Example: Reference potential for an analog output module without MANA connection
7.1.1 Overview
Calibration
A calibration checks the process values measured by the analog input module and the
process values output by the analog output module, determines the deviation from the actual
values and compensates for any measurement and output errors.
Note
The calibration saves the calibration values of each channel for the specific measuring range
retentively on the module, which means the values apply to the same measuring range in
which the user calibration took place.
If you reconfigure a channel with effective user calibration values to another type of
measuring mode, the calibration values saved at the plant for this channel and for this
measuring range will become effective.
But the user calibration values are not deleted. They are not overwritten until there is a new
user calibration of the channel. If you set the original measuring range for this channel once
again without new user calibration, the previously determined user calibration values will
become effective.
The respective manual will include information whether or not your analog module supports
the "Calibration" functionality.
Scope of functions
The "Calibration" group offers the following functions:
● Specifying the current calibration of all channels
● Calibrating a channel
● Canceling a running calibration
● Resetting the calibration of a channel to the factory settings
Manual calibration
The following requirements must be met to start manual calibration:
● An online connection exists between STEP 7, the respective CPU and the analog module
to be calibrated.
● You have opened the "Online & Diagnostics" view for the selected analog module from
the shortcut menu of the project and you are now in the "Functions > Calibration" area.
● The configuration reflects the actual structure of the station.
● No calibration process is busy on the module (if you want to launch calibration).
● A 24 V load voltage must be present at each module for the calibration.
● The last step was successfully completed (if you want to continue or conclude
calibration).
Procedure
The basic mask for calibration opens once you start the "Calibration" function. The module
reads the following general information data and calibration values after each new selection
of a channel:
● Calibration: Indicates whether or not the currently effective calibration values are factory
calibration values or user calibration values.
● Measurement type: Information about the selected measurement type
● Measuring range: Currently configured measuring range of the selected channel
● Gain: Currently effective gain correction of the analog-digital converter
● Offset: Currently effective offset correction of the analog-digital converter
The required calibration values of the selected channel according to the measuring range
configured for this channel are specified once again during the user calibration.
Note
The calibration can take place in RUN mode as well as STOP mode of the CPU. If the CPU
is in RUN, the calibration value that was last collected prior to the start of the calibration is
supplied for the duration of the calibration.
The module channel to be calibrated cannot process any new process values during the
user calibration. All analog input values of the module are set to 0x7FFF ("Invalid analog
value") until the end of the calibration. When the value status is enabled, the value status of
the signal is set to "invalid" for the duration of the calibration.
You must provide a voltage and/or temperature during a user calibration. To do so, use the
corresponding external wiring and an external voltage/temperature transducer. The field
"Command" includes numbers of pins to which you can connect the calibration stimulus.
The first pin number identifies the positive connector, the second pin number the negative
connector. The accuracy of the calibration depends on the accuracy of the provided
voltage/temperature.
Note
To ensure that the module retains the specified measuring accuracy after the user
calibration, the provided voltage/temperature must be twice as accurate as specified for the
module. Inaccurate voltages or temperature result in a faulty calibration.
The figure below shows an example of channel calibration with "Voltage" measurement,
measuring range "+/- 10 V".
● Command: The field "Command" indicates which actions the user has to execute during
the current calibration step. Here you execute the specified actions and confirm them with
the "Next" button. The module now executes all actions required for the current
calibration step. If the calibration step was error-free, the next calibration step takes
place.
The instructions in the "Command" field are to be performed additively. For example, after
you have applied the voltage/ground to the terminals 3/4, these connections must remain
in place during the execution of the next calibration step.
● Status: Depending on the set type of measurement, several calibration steps are required
for calibration of a channel. The field "Status" indicates whether or not the last calibration
step included errors. If an error occurs during processing of a calibration step, the error is
displayed here and calibration of the channel is aborted. All calibration values recorded
up to this point are deleted. The calibration values that were in effect prior to the start of
the user calibration are effective once again.
Note
Calibrators
If the "Wire break" diagnostics is activated for analog input modules, a test current is
applied to the line for the measuring types "Resistance", "Thermistor" and
"Thermocouple". This applied test current can result in inaccurate measured values in
some calibrators. The wire break monitoring is therefore automatically disabled in some
analog modules during the calibration.
To avoid the risk of inaccurate measured values, we recommend you disable the "Wire
break" diagnostics during the calibration of analog input modules.
Result
Calibration sets new settings for the channel.
Error occurrence
If an error occurs during the calibration, the module cancels the calibration. All calibration
values recorded up to this point are lost. The channel to be calibrated will then have the
same settings as before the start of calibration.
Requirement
● You have opened the "Online & Diagnostics" view for the selected analog module from
the shortcut menu of the project and you are now in the "Functions > Calibration" area.
● The associated CPU is online.
● A calibration is currently running on the analog module.
Procedure
Click the "Cancel" button to cancel an ongoing calibration.
Result
The active calibration is canceled. The channel to be calibrated will then have the same
settings as before the start of calibration.
Requirement
● You have opened the "Online & Diagnostics" view for the selected analog module from
the shortcut menu of the project and you are now in the "Functions > Calibration" area.
● The associated CPU is online.
Procedure
Proceed as follows to reset the channel of an analog module to factory settings:
1. In the overview table, select the line of the channel to be calibrated.
2. Click the "Set to factory settings" button.
Result
The factory settings of the channel are restored.
Note
When you reset the current channel to the factory settings, the original calibration values that
were saved in the delivery state of the module become effective once again. Any existing
user calibration values of this channel are lost. You cannot restore these user calibration
values.
Isochronous mode
Isochronous mode refers to synchronous coupling:
● Of signal acquisition and output via the distributed I/O
● Of signal transmission via PROFIBUS or PROFINET
● Of program processing with the constant bus cycle time of PROFIBUS or PROFINET.
The result is a system that acquires its input signals in constant time intervals, processes
them and outputs the output signals. Isochronous mode guarantees reproducible and
defined process reaction times as well as equidistant and synchronous signal processing
with distributed I/O.
The bus system and the I/O modules work synchronously with configured isochronous
mode. The transmitted input and output data are linked to an "isochronous task" in the CPU.
As a result, the data of a cycle are always consistent. All data of a process image belong
together logically and in time. Jitter in the user program caused by the acquisition of
outdated values is therefore almost impossible.
Even fast processes can be perfectly controlled by the exact timing reproducibility of all
processes. Isochronous mode thus contributes to high control quality and hence to greater
manufacturing precision. While possible fluctuations of the process reaction times are
drastically reduced. The time-assured processing can be utilized to improve machine cycle
times. Shorter cycle times increase the processing speed and help to lower production costs.
Send clocks
When you configure isochronous mode, the input and output data is synchronized within a
send clock (cycle). The data of the input modules is acquired in cycle n and simultaneously
transferred to the IM. The data is available in cycle n+1 in the CPU and can be processed.
The CPU copies the data to the IM in the next cycle n+2. The output modules then output
the data simultaneously in the same send clock. The acquisition – processing – output
therefore takes place in three cycles. You can find more information on the configuration of
isochronous mode in the STEP 7 online help.
① Measured values of the input modules are acquired and copied to the IM
② Measured values are processed and output values determined
③ Output values are copied to the IM and output by output modules
Oversampling
The use of the oversampling function in analog input or analog output modules requires an
isochronous configuration.
With analog input modules, the set send clock is divided into time-equidistant sub-cycles.
The send clocks can be subdivided into 2 to 16 sub-cycles. Each sub-cycle reads in a
measured value. The read-in measured values of a data cycle are copied to the IM in the
next send clock and are then available to the processing CPU one send clock later.
With analog output modules, the set send clock is also divided into time-equidistant sub-
cycles. The send clocks can be subdivided into 2 to 16 sub-cycles. Each sub-cycle returns
an output value. The output values are copied to the IM by the CPU within the same send
clock and are written to the process one send clock later.
The read-in and output values are transmitted in the user data of the analog module. This
way, the address space of the module is extended from 2 bytes of user data per channel to
16 x 2 bytes of user data per channel. If you subdivide the send clock into less than 16 sub-
cycles, the unused addresses are assigned the error value 0x7FFF during input. For output,
the values of the unused addresses are ignored.
Because the sub-cycles have to be within a send clock, oversampling needs an additional
send clock to copy the data to the IM, unlike the 3-cycle model of isochronous mode. The
result is a 5-cycle model.
① Send clock is divided into sub-cycles which record the measured value
② Measured values are copied to the IM
③ Measured values are processed and output values determined
④ Output values are copied by the CPU to the IM
⑤ Output values are written to the process
Due to the configured modules, the send clock of an IO device has a minimum possible
update time, which means the time interval within which an IO device/IO controller of the
PROFINET IO system is supplied with new data. Modules with oversampling functionality,
however, offer the option of further reducing the update time for their channels without
having to shorten the send clock for the entire S7 station at the same time. The subdivision
of the send clock into time-equidistant sub-cycles therefore enables an even faster signal
processing speed.
Example
In practice, the use of oversampling makes sense when the isochronous system works with
only one specific specific send clock (for example, 1 ms) due to the modules used and when
faster sampling of the process values is required. By using oversampling and a subdivision
of the send clock into 4 sub-cycles, for example, you can sample the process values in
intervals of 250 µs.
Configuring oversampling
Enable the option "Isochronous mode" in the IO device used and set the corresponding
parameters ("Send clock", etc.). You define the number of sub-cycles in the relevant
distributed analog module with the "Sampling rate" parameter for analog input modules and
the "Output rate" parameter for analog output modules. If, for example, you configure a
"Sampling rate" of 4 "Values/cycle" for a "Send clock" of 1 ms, the send clock is subdivided
into 4 sub-cycles and the process values are sampled in intervals of 250 µs.
① Synchronization time for all analog input modules in isochronous mode and simultaneously
time of the converted input signal at the terminal in this cycle
② Digitalized input signal is transferred to the backplane bus
tZ Cycle time
t1 Time between cycle start and synchronization
t2 Hardware-related runtime up to the analog-digital converter
t3 Processing time of digitalized input data in the module
t4 Transfer time of the backplane bus
tW Conversion time of the module
Typical applications
In principle, isochronous mode is worthwhile whenever measured values must be acquired
synchronously, movements must be coordinated, and process reactions must be defined
and executed at the same time. There are thus numerous areas in which isochronous mode
can be used.
Typical applications include, for example, the acquisition of binary signals for quality
assurance at specific times and positions. But hydraulic applications with position and
pressure control can benefit as well from the equidistant and isochronous data transmission.
The following example shows the use of isochronous mode within the production process of
camshafts. Precise measurements must be made at several measuring points for quality
assurance.
① Measured values
② Camshaft
By using the system property "isochronous mode" and the associated simultaneous
measured value acquisition, measurement can be performed continuously. The time
required for measurement is reduced. Resultant workflow:
● Continuous machining of the camshaft
● During the continuous turning, measure the positions and cam excursion synchronously
● Process the next cam shaft
All camshaft positions and the corresponding measured values are measured synchronously
within a single rotation of the camshaft. This increases machine output and maintains or
enhances precision of the measurement.
Conversion method
Integrating conversion
ST modules usually work according to the integrating conversion principle. The integrating
conversion involves the sampling of a measured signal across a specified time period
(integration time). Although this method is slower than instantaneous value conversion, it
returns a conversion with higher immunity to interference. When you select the time interval
for the conversion so that it corresponds to one or several periods of the surrounding
network frequency, the omnipresent interference that is possibly also overlaying the signal is
basically suppressed. SIMATIC modules give you the option to set the network frequency at
which the plant is operated by means of parameter assignment. The resolution and
conversion times may change depending on the interference frequency suppression that is
set. The technical specifications of the respective module define these dependencies.
Analog inputs with integrating methods can be used universally. Even though the cabling
must also be carefully designed with these analog inputs, the requirements are much less
than those for analog inputs with instantaneous value conversion due to their slower signal
acquisition that is basically immune to interference.
Figure 8-6 While an interference directly influences the value that is supplied to the application with
instantaneous value encryption, its influence is negligible for the integrating method.
Electromagnetic compatibility
The entire architecture of HS modules is designed for fast processing of the signals. An
interference-free design is therefore critical when using HS modules.
The following rules apply to the wiring of HS modules with sensors and actuators:
● Keep the cables as short as possible
● Use shielded and twisted pair cables
● Low-impedance connection of the cable shield at the respective shield supports
● Short cable loop between shield support and terminal connection
Note
Interference-free design
Make sure that you pay close attention to the notes listed in the function manual Configuring
interference-free controllers (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193566)
when using HS modules.
tE Settling time
t1 Module ends conversion at the terminal of the analog output channel and outputs the analog
signal
t2 The signal running through a cable with short length has settled and the specified analog
output value has been reached (residual error 1 %)
t3 The signal running through a 20 m cable has settled and the specified analog output value has
been reached (residual error 1 %)
t4 The signal running through a 200 m cable has settled and the specified analog output value
has been reached (residual error 1 %)
Figure 8-9 Settling time of five different analog signals with different value jumps
digital-to-analog, 21
Conversion
A analog-to-digital, 11
Digital-to-analog, 11
Abbreviations, 66, 103
Conversion time, 27, 49, 53
Accuracy, 15
coupling
Actuators, 11, 103, 104
capacitive, 34
Additional support, 4
galvanic, 31
Analog input modules, 60, 65
inductive, 31, 34
Analog output modules, 60, 104
CPU, 11, 60, 67, 69
Analog value conversion, 60
Crosstalk, 34
Application time, 53
Crosstalk attenuation, 35
Current, 10
B
Basic conversion time, 49 D
Basic error limit, 15, 24
Digital multimeter, 59
Basic knowledge
Direct voltage, 69
Required, 3
Documentation
Bipolar measuring range, 25
additional, 7
Blocks
Drift, 26
SCALE, 17
Dynamic reference temperature
UNSCALE, 19
Overview, 83
Burden, 57
E
C
EMC, 32
Calibration, 106
Error
Canceling, 111
Linearity errors, 21
Channels
Output error, 25
Calibrating, 108
Temperature error, 26
Resetting to factory settings, 112
ET 200AL, 7
Common mode, 67, 69
ET 200eco PN, 7
Common mode rejection, 30, 33
ET 200MP, 7
Common mode voltage, 67
ET 200pro, 7
compensation
ET 200SP, 7
Reference channel of group 0, 88
External compensation
Compensation
Overview, 83
none/external, 98
Compensation with
Dynamic reference temperature, 94
F
fixed reference temperature, 91
internal reference junction, 84 Factory settings
RDT (0), 100 Resetting channels to, 112
Reference channel of the module, 86 Fixed reference temperature
conversion Overview, 82
analog-to-digital, 21, 51
G O
Ground connection, 31 Online catalog, 4
GSD file, 48 Operating principle
of thermocouples, 80
Operational limit, 15, 23
H
High-speed analog modules
P
Isochronous mode, 113
Pressure, 9
PROFIBUS, 113
I PROFINET, 113
Input impedance, 31
Insulation voltage, 67, 69
Q
Interference frequency suppression, 27
Interference voltage, 31 Quality Information (QI), 46
Internal reference junction, 84
Overview, 81
Isochronous mode R
Oversampling, 114
Reference channel of group 0
Overview, 82
Reference channel of the module
L
Overview, 82
Line frequency Reference junction, 79
16 2/3 Hz, 28 Reference junction temperature, 81
400 Hz, 28 Reference potential, 69, 104
50 Hz, 28 Repeat accuracy, 22
60 Hz, 28 Representation of analog values, 60
Linearity, 21 Binary representation, input ranges, 62, 63
lines Binary representation, output ranges, 63
for analog signals, 66 Resistance, 10
Lines Resistance thermometers
for analog signals, 103 see Thermal resistor, 74
Load, 53 Resistance transducers
Loads, 103, 104 4-wire connection, 74
Resolution, 13, 60
Response time, 52
M RTD (0)
Overview, 83
Material composition
of thermocouples, 78
Measurement point, 79
S
Measuring ranges
Overflow, 42 S7-1500, 7
Overrange, 42 Scaling, 17
Rated range, 42 Scope
Underflow, 42 of the documentation, 3
Underrange, 42 Sensors,
Series mode rejection, 31, 33
Settling time, 53
Setup
of thermocouples, 79
Sign (S), 60 V
Signals
Value status, 46
Analog, 9
Variables
Binary, 9
Analog, 9
Processing, 12
physical, 10
Smoothing
variance
exponential, 56
measured value, 22
Linear, 55
Voltage, 10
Speed, 9
Voltage drop, 59
Standards
Voltage measuring ranges
EN 61131, 15
Overflow, 14
FDA, 106
Overrange, 14
Step 7, 4
Rated range, 14
Step response, 55
Underflow, 14
Underrange, 14
Voltage range, 27
T
Temperature, 9
Temperature measuring range W
of thermocouples, 78
Wire break, 41
Thermal resistor
2-wire connection, 75
3-wire connection, 75
Z
Connecting, 74
Thermocouples Zener diode, 59
Wiring, 76
TIA Portal, 4
Transducers, 72
2-wire, 57, 72
4-wire, 73
Connecting, 65
Current transducers, 10, 57, 72
Resistance transducers, 10
Thermal resistor, 74
Thermocouples, 10, 27, 76, 79
Voltage transducers, 10, 71
Wiring, 72
Types of diagnostics, 36
Common mode error, 43
No supply voltage, 41
Overflow/underflow, 42
Overload, 45
Reference channel error, 43
Reference junction, 44
Short-circuit, 44
Wire break, 41
U
Unscaling, 19
based IO ___________________
Documentation guide 1
___________________
Time-based IO basics 2
SIMATIC Configuring and parameter
___________________
assignment 3
08/2014
A5E33454822-AB
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Conventions
The following terms are used as synonyms in this documentation:
● TIA Portal: This term is used as synonym for the "STEP 7" configuration and
programming software (TIA Portal)".
● TIO module: This term is used as synonym for I/O modules of the type:
– IO-Link Master CM 4xIO-Link
– ET 200MP TM Timer DIDQ 16x24V
– ET 200SP TM Timer DIDQ 10x24V
● TIO_Time: This term is used as synonym for the shared time basis (relative time) of the
TIO modules.
● Jitter: This is a general term that includes various time influences affecting accuracy. This
means that:
– for input data: Deviation of the measured time from the actual event.
– for output data: Deviation of the actual switching time from the specified time.
This documentation contains pictures of the devices described. The pictures may differ
slightly from the devices supplied.
You should also pay particular attention to notes such as the one shown below:
Note
The notes contain important information on the product, handling the product or on part of
the documentation to which particular attention should be paid.
Additional support
You will find information about the technical support available in the appendix.
The range of technical documentation for the individual SIMATIC products and systems can
be found on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-doku-portal).
The online catalog and the ordering system are available on the Internet
(http://mall.automation.siemens.com).
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 9
2 Time-based IO basics ........................................................................................................................... 13
2.1 Using Time-based IO ...................................................................................................................13
2.2 Time behavior of Time-based IO .................................................................................................14
2.2.1 Time behavior of standard technology .........................................................................................14
2.2.2 Time-based IO properties ............................................................................................................15
2.3 System environment ....................................................................................................................17
2.4 Hardware requirements ...............................................................................................................18
2.5 Configuration software requirements ...........................................................................................19
2.6 Technical implementation ............................................................................................................20
3 Configuring and parameter assignment ................................................................................................. 25
3.1 Requirements ...............................................................................................................................25
3.2 Settings for Time-based IO ..........................................................................................................26
3.3 Configure IO-Link and activate Time-based IO ...........................................................................27
4 Programming ........................................................................................................................................ 29
4.1 Overview of instructions ...............................................................................................................29
4.2 Programming of Time-based IO...................................................................................................30
4.3 Time-based IO .............................................................................................................................34
4.3.1 TIO_SYNC: Synchronizing TIO modules .....................................................................................34
4.3.2 TIO_IOLink_IN: Read process input signals with time stamps ....................................................38
4.3.3 TIO_DI: Reading in edges at digital input and associated time stamps ......................................42
4.3.4 TIO_IOLink_OUT: Output time-controlled process output signals ...............................................47
4.3.5 TIO_DQ: Output edges time-controlled at the digital output ........................................................52
4.3.6 UDT "TIO_SYNC_Data" ...............................................................................................................57
5 Service & Support ................................................................................................................................. 59
5.1 Service & Support ........................................................................................................................59
Index..................................................................................................................................................... 63
SIMATIC manuals
All current manuals for SIMATIC products are available for download free of charge from the
Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
Length measurement
The length of a product passing by can be determined by the difference between two input
time stamps and an associated travel speed.
Cam controller
The ongoing movement can be extrapolated from a synchronous position information (for
example, from a counter module or an axis). Based on this result, the time of a switching
position (cam position) is calculated and transferred to the TIO module (output). This way the
switch event takes place at the required position.
Dosing
By specifying a switch-on and a switch-off edge to a time-controlled digital output, a valve
can be opened for a specific time and the amount of liquid can be dosed accordingly.
Accuracy
Accuracy is crucial for the performance capability of Time-based IO.
Accuracy is a property of
● TIO module
● IO-Link sensor/ actuator
and indicates the deviation with which the required response is achieved. For Time-based
IO, the accuracy and reproducibility of the response is in the millisecond range.
Response time
In addition to a very high accuracy, a minimum response time to an input event can result
depending on the configuration.
The response time is the time between the input event and the required output event.
For the minimum response time:
at least 3 * application cycle (TAPP)
Introduction
Possible system configurations with PROFINET for the use of Time-based IO are shown
below.
Introduction
The properties of the hardware components required for Time-based IO are listed below.
You will also find specific modules as an example.
Requirements
Introduction
Below please find a list of the software versions which support the "Time-based IO" function.
Requirements
TIO instructions
The TIO instructions are specific function blocks for use of Time-based IO. The following TIO
instructions (Page 29) are available:
● TIO_SYNC
● TIO_IOLink_IN
● TIO_IOLink_OUT
● TIO_DI
● TIO_DQ
As of V13 Update 3, the TIO instructions are available as integrated instructions in
TIA Portal.
Introduction
The information below will help you better understand the core aspects of Time-based IO
and find out which SIMATIC functions are used to implement the described aspects.
TIO_Time
The TIO_Time is the central time basis to which all time stamps refer.
TIO_Time has the following properties:
● Shared time basis for all TIO modules which are synchronized with the TIO instruction
TIO_SYNC.
● The time starts counting again with each CPU startup.
● TIO_Time has the data type LTime (e.g., LT#14s830ms652us315ns).
● All valid time stamps refer to TIO_Time:
– Input time stamps of the TIO modules are converted to TIO_Time in TIO instructions
TIO_IOLink_IN and TIO_DI.
– Output time stamps are converted to output time stamps of the TIO modules in TIO
instructions TIO_IOLink_OUT and TIO_DQ.
Influence of accuracy
To estimate the accuracy you need the accuracy of
● TIO module
● Sensor/ actuator
Consult the data sheets of the respective module regarding the accuracy value.
You have to add the individual jitters of the TIO modules and the sensors/actuators. You can
neglect any other influencing factors.
See also
Programming of Time-based IO (Page 30)
Introduction
You need additional software components to use Time-based IO. You must also have
created the standard configuration for your project.
Below you will learn more about the standard configuration for Time-based IO.
Requirements
In the TIA Portal:
● The project has been created.
● The CPU has been created and the parameters are assigned.
● ET 200 distributed I/O and modules have been created and the parameters are assigned.
● The connection has been created and the parameters are assigned via PROFINET.
● A "Synchronous Cycle" OB has been created.
In addition for IO-Link:
● S7-PCT is installed on the programming device/PC.
● IODD for IO-Link device (with time stamp function) are installed.
See also
System environment (Page 17)
Configuration software requirements (Page 19)
* Does not describe the exact location but the topic in the configuration software.
See also
Programming of Time-based IO (Page 30)
Introduction
For Time-based IO, the ports of the IO-Link Master must be set to the required operating
mode and suitable sensors/actuators must be connected to the ports.
Requirements
● S7-PCT is installed on the programming device/PC.
● IODD for IO-Link Device (with time stamp function) are installed.
You can find additional information on installation in the online help for S7-PCT.
● The project is open in network view in the TIA Portal.
● The hardware catalog is open.
Procedure
1. Right-click the IO-Link Master in the TIA Portal and select "Start Device Tool".
The Port Configuration Tool (S7-PCT) opens.
2. Select the connected IO-Link Device (sensors/actuators with time stamp function) from
the device catalog for the ports of the IO-Link Master in S7-PCT.
Use drag-and-drop to insert the IO-Link Device to the matching Port of the IO-Link
Master.
3. Adapt the settings of the ports to match their respective task in the application.
Possible port settings:
– IO-Link Time based IN: The input signals of the sensor are given a time stamp.
– IO-Link Time based OUT: The signal is output at the specified time.
4. Save the settings.
5. Download the Port configuration to the IO-Link Master.
6. Close S7-PCT.
Result
The IO-Link Master is configured with the connected sensor and actuator information.
Introduction
Time-based IO is used with special instructions (TIO instructions). The TIO_SYNC TIO
instruction is responsible for synchronizing all involved TIO modules and creates a unique
time basis (TIO_Time) to which all actions are referenced.
Depending on the type of TIO module, additional instructions undertake the reading in of
process input signals with associated time stamps and/or the time-controlled output of
process output signals.
Note
The TIO instructions use the time stamp functions of the TIO modules. For the other
functions of the respective TIO module, no use of instructions is necessary.
TIO instructions
Introduction
For use of Time-based IO, the TIO instructions must be called in a "Synchronous Cycle" OB.
The application can also run in another OB. In this way, you can shorten the runtime of the
"Synchronous Cycle" OB.
You need the following TIO instructions according to the required task:
This section below describes the programming of the CPU for Time-based IO.
Requirements
Hardware configuration in the TIA Portal:
● The TIO modules are assigned to an isochronous network.
● The TIO modules are assigned to a shared process image partition.
● The process image partition is assigned to a "Synchronous Cycle" OB.
Additional information on configuration of Time-based IO is available in the section Settings
for Time-based IO (Page 26).
Procedure
1. Create a TIO_SYNC TIO instruction in the "Synchronous Cycle" OB.
2. Connect all TIO modules to be synchronized at the TIO_SYNC TIO instruction using
parameters HWID_1 to HWID_8.
The HWID is located in HWCN under the module properties.
3. Configure the send clock at the TIO_SYNC TIO instruction.
The send clock is listed in the properties of the ET 200 station.
4. Set the data update mode at the TIO_SYNC instruction at the PIP_Mode input parameter.
The description of the modes is available in the chapter Technical implementation
(Page 20).
The parameter assignment of the TIO_SYNC TIO instruction is complete.
5. For the following instructions, note the call sequence depending on the selected value for
PIP_Mode:
6. Add the TIO instructions for data read-in/output required for your application in the
"Synchronous Cycle" OB.
7. Connect the TIO_SYNC_Data input to the output of the same name at TIO_SYNC at each
TIO instruction for read-in and output.
8. Assign the input parameters TO (see properties of the ET 200 station), HWID (see
module properties in HWCN), and Port/Channel" for the TIO instructions for data
read-in/output.
Programming for the Time-based IO functionality is complete.
9. Connect the Time-based IO functionality with your application.
10.Compile and download the entire project to the CPU.
Result
You have completed programming the use of Time-based IO.
Example
Below you see an application example with a TIO_IOLink_IN and a TIO_IOLink_OUT.
4.3 Time-based IO
Description
You can use Time-based IO with the TIO_SYNC instruction. TIO_SYNC synchronizes TIO
modules to a shared time basis TIO_Time.
You can synchronize up to 8 TIO modules with TIO_SYNC. All TIO modules must be
assigned to the same process image partition (PIP). If you select "0" for the input parameter
PIP_Mode, you assign the number of the process image partition at the PIP_PART input
parameter.
Startup characteristics
At the startup of the CPU, the TIO_SYNC instruction receives and checks the input
parameters once and initializes the TIO_Time. If startup takes place without errors, the
instruction changes to normal operation. In the event of an error, the instruction does not
change to normal operation and generates an error message.
Operating principle
In normal operation, the instruction ensures synchronization of all TIO modules configured at
the HWID input.
The calculated TIO_Time for the instructions of the TIO modules is provided at the
TIO_SYNC_Data output.
Reaction to error
The Error output indicates whether the instruction parameters are assigned correctly and
whether an error has occurred. If the instruction was not processed successfully, the reasons
for the errors are displayed at the Status output.
Parameter
The table below shows the parameters of the TIO_SYNC instruction.
Status parameter
Error codes or status information is output as double word at the Status output.
The double word is divided as follows:
Description
You can use the Time-based IO with the TIO_IOLink_IN instruction. TIO_IOLink_IN detects
an event at the IO-Link Device and returns the process value including the associated time
stamp.
The IO-Link Device must be equipped with the time stamp function and the Port must be in
"IO-Link, Time based IN" mode.
Startup characteristics
During startup of the CPU, the instruction TIO_IOLink_IN applies the input parameters once
and checks the following:
● Checking HWID
● Checking whether the Port number is in the range (1 to 4)
● Checking TIO_SYNC_Data.Error: Is an error present at TIO_SYNC?
● Checking To for a positive value
● Checking the setting to type IO-Link
● Checking Port mode regarding configuration for IO-Link Time based IN
● Checking whether the OB is a "Synchronous Cycle" OB
● Checking PortQualifier
If startup takes place without errors, the instruction changes to normal operation. In the event
of an error, the instruction does not change to normal operation and generates an error
message.
Operating principle
In normal operation, the instruction detects the process data (SA_Data) of an IO-Link Device
and the associated time stamp (time = TIO_Time) of the last valid change. Each valid
change of the SA_Data with a correctly functioning port is accompanied by a valid time
stamp.
You connect the input TIO_SYNC_Data with the output of the same name of the TIO_SYNC
instruction. This ensures a shared time basis.
Reaction to error
The Error output indicates if the instruction was processed correctly. The reasons for the
errors are displayed at the Status output.
Parameter
The table below shows the parameters of the TIO_IOLink_IN instruction.
Status parameter
Error codes or status information is output as double word at the Status output.
The double word is divided as follows:
4.3.3 TIO_DI: Reading in edges at digital input and associated time stamps
Description
You can use the Time-based IO with the TIO_DI instruction. TIO_DI continuously detects the
edges at a digital input of a TM Timer DIDQ and returns the associated time stamps.
Startup characteristics
During startup of the CPU, the instruction TIO_DI applies the input parameters once and
checks the following:
● Checking HWID
● Checking to see if the number of the digital input (Channel) is in the permitted range
(depending on addressed module and channel configuration)
● Checking TIO_SYNC_Data.Error: Is an error present at TIO_SYNC?
● Checking To for validity (0 ms to 4 ms)
● Checking whether the OB is a "Synchronous Cycle" OB
If startup takes place without errors, the instruction changes to normal operation. The input
parameter EdgeSel can be changed during normal operation. In the event of an error, the
instruction does not change to normal operation and generates an error message.
Operating principle
In normal operation, the instruction detects the edges at a digital input and the associated
time stamps (time = TIO_Time) of the last valid, defined edge pair. Use the input parameter
EdgeSel to determine the edges for which time stamps are detected.
You connect the input TIO_SYNC_Data with the output of the same name of the TIO_SYNC
instruction. This ensures a shared time basis.
Reaction to error
The Error output indicates if the instruction was processed correctly. The reasons for the
errors are displayed at the Status output.
Parameter
The table below shows the parameters of the TIO_DI instruction.
Status parameter
Error codes or status information is output as double word at the Status output.
The double word is divided as follows:
Description
You can use Time-based IO with the TIO_IOLink_OUT instruction. TIO_IOLink_OUT lets you
activate the output data of an IO-Link Device at a specified time.
The IO-Link Device must be equipped with the time stamp function and the Port must be in
"IO-Link, Time based OUT" mode.
Startup characteristics
During startup of the CPU, the instruction TIO_IOLink_OUT applies the input parameters
once and checks the following:
● Checking HWID
● Checking whether the Port number is in the range (1 to 4)
● Checking TIO_SYNC_Data.Error: Is an error present at TIO_SYNC?
● Checking To for a positive value
● Checking the setting to type IO-Link
● Checking Port mode regarding configuration for IO-Link Time based OUT
● Checking whether the OB is a "Synchronous Cycle" OB
● Checking PortQualifier
If startup takes place without errors, the instruction changes to normal operation. The input
parameters REQ , Out_Mode, TimeStamp and AA_Data can be changed during normal
operation. In the event of an error, the instruction does not change to normal operation and
generates an error message.
Operating principle
In normal operation, the instruction sends the process data (AA_Data) to an IO-Link Device.
The output data AA_Data are activated at the time defined at the input parameter
TimeStamp.
You connect the input TIO_SYNC_Data with the output of the same name of the TIO_SYNC
instruction. This ensures a shared time basis.
You start an output job with a positive edge at the "REQ" parameter. You can only start a
new job when there is no error pending and no job is active. When starting the output job,
the AA_Data (bit 0, 1) are activated on the IO-Link Device at a time defined by TimeStamp.
The job is done when the last application cycle is executed before the output time is reached
(Done). Status and Error are constantly being updated during the job runtime.
Note
Once the job has been started with a positive edge, you can adapt the output time with the
input of a new TimeStamp without having to restart the job.
Constraint:
If the adapted time stamp is less than 16 ms before the output time
(TimeStamp - TIO_Time < 16), the last valid time stamp is used.
If you specify the value 0 as TimeStamp, the output is written directly with the data specified
at the input AA_Data. This gives you the option to implement a direct control from the TIO
module without time stamp in manual mode. You can use the direct control to interrupt an
ongoing job.
Reaction to error
The Error output indicates if the instruction was processed correctly. The reasons for the
errors are displayed at the Status output.
Parameter
The table below shows the parameters of the TIO_IOLink_OUT instruction.
Status parameter
Error codes or status information is output as double word at the Status output.
The double word is divided as follows:
Segment of Meaning
the error code
z0yywwww Error of a system function:
• during startup (z = 0)
• during normal operation (z = 1)
System functions with subordinate use are coded in yy: See table with error codes.
wwww specifies the RET_VAL of the system function. The error information is available in the help for the
system function.
z0yy0000 An error that does not originate in a system function. This error receives a consecutive error number yy.
The error can occur:
• during startup (z = 0)
• during normal operation (z = 1)
Description
You can use Time-based IO with the TIO_DQ instruction. TIO_DQ switches the digital output
of a TM Timer DIDQ at a specified time.
Startup characteristics
During startup of the CPU, the instruction TIO_DQ applies the input parameters once and
checks the following:
● Checking HWID
● Checking to see if the number of the digital input (Channel) is in the permitted range
(depending on addressed module and channel configuration)
● Checking TIO_SYNC_Data.Error: Is an error present at TIO_SYNC?
● Checking To for validity (0 ms to 4 ms)
● Checking whether the OB is a "Synchronous Cycle" OB
If startup takes place without errors, the instruction changes to normal operation. The input
parameters REQ , Out_Mode, TimeStampRE and TimeStampFE can be changed during
normal operation. In the event of an error, the instruction does not change to normal
operation and generates an error message.
Operating principle
The instruction outputs edges time-controlled at a digital output during normal operation.
● At the time defined at the TimeStampRE input parameter, a positive edge is output at the
digital output.
● At the time defined at the TimeStampFE input parameter, a negative edge is output at the
digital output.
Use the input parameter Out_Mode to determine if only one edge or both edges are output.
You connect the input TIO_SYNC_Data with the output of the same name of the TIO_SYNC
instruction. This ensures a shared time basis.
You start an output job with a positive edge at the "REQ" parameter. You can only start a
new job when there is no error pending and no job is active. When the output job is started,
the digital output is switched at the times defined with TimeStampRE and TimeStampFE.
● If the digital output is already set at time TimeStampRE, the output job is not transferred
to the module for the positive edge.
● If the digital output is not set at time TimeStampFE, the output job is not transferred to the
module for the negative edge.
This means the digital output is not switched in both cases.
The job is done when the last application cycle is executed before the second output time is
reached (DONE). Status and Error are constantly being updated during the job runtime.
The figure below shows an example for the reaction of the bits DONE and BUSY at the start
of an output job under the following conditions:
● Out_Mode = 2
● The two time stamps are not adapted between the start of the job and the output.
Note
Once the job has been started with a positive edge, you can adapt the output times with the
input of TimeStampRE and TimeStampFE without having to restart the job.
Constraint:
If an adapted time stamp is less than two application cycles away from the output time
(TimeStampRE - TIO_Time < 2*TAPP or TimeStampFE - TIO_Time < 2*TAPP), the last valid
time stamp is used.
If you specify the value "0" as TimeStampRE or TimeStampFE, you can output the
respective edge directly at the digital output with the input parameter Out_Mode = 3. This
gives you the option to implement a direct control from the TIO module without time stamp in
manual mode. You can use the direct control to interrupt an ongoing job.
Changes to the input parameters are not applied until the TIO_DQ instruction detects a
startup of the CPU.
Reaction to error
The Error output indicates if the instruction was processed correctly. The reasons for the
errors are displayed at the Status output.
Parameter
The table below shows the parameters of the TIO_DQ instruction.
Status parameter
Error codes or status information is output as double word at the Status output.
The double word is divided as follows:
Segment of Meaning
the error code
z0yywwww Error of a system function:
• during startup (z = 0)
• during normal operation (z = 1)
System functions with subordinate use are coded in yy: See table with error codes.
wwww specifies the RET_VAL of the system function. The error information is available in the help for the
system function.
z0yy0000 An error that does not originate in a system function. This error receives a consecutive error number yy.
The error can occur:
• during startup (z = 0)
• during normal operation (z = 1)
Description
The data type UDT "TIO_SYNC_Data" contains the central structure and data for
synchronization of the modules and passing of the TIO_Time.
Parameter
Online Support
The comprehensive online information platform supports you in all aspects of our
Service & Support at any time and from any location in the world.
You can find Online Support on the Internet at the following address: Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
Technical Consulting
Support in planning and designing your project: From detailed actual-state analysis,
definition of the goal and consultation on product and system questions right through to the
creation of the automation solution.
Technical Support
Expert advice on technical questions with a wide range of demand-optimized services for all
our products and systems.
You can find Technical Support on the Internet at the following address: Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request).
Training
Extend your competitive edge – through practical know-how directly from the manufacturer.
You can find the training courses we offer on the Internet at the following address: Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/sitrain).
Engineering Support
Support during project engineering and development with services fine-tuned to your
requirements, from configuration through to implementation of an automation project.
Field Service
Our Field Service offers you services for commissioning and maintenance – to ensure that
your machines and plants are always available.
Spare parts
In every sector worldwide, plants and systems are required to operate with constantly
increasing reliability. We will provide you with the support you need to prevent a standstill
from occurring in the first place: with a worldwide network and optimum logistics chains.
Repairs
Downtimes cause problems in the plant as well as unnecessary costs. We can help you to
reduce both to a minimum – with our worldwide repair facilities.
Optimization
During the service life of machines and plants, there is often a great potential for increasing
productivity or reducing costs.
To help you achieve this potential, we are offering a complete range of optimization services.
Modernization
You can also rely on our support when it comes to modernization – with comprehensive
services from the planning phase all the way to commissioning.
Service programs
Our service programs are selected service packages for an automation and drives system or
product group. The individual services are coordinated with each other to ensure smooth
coverage of the entire life cycle and support optimum use of your products and systems.
The services of a Service Program can be flexibly adapted at any time and used separately.
Examples of service programs:
● Service contracts
● Plant IT Security Services
● Life Cycle Services for Drive Engineering
● SIMATIC PCS 7 Life Cycle Services
● SINUMERIK Manufacturing Excellence
● SIMATIC Remote Support Services
Advantages at a glance:
● Reduced downtimes for increased productivity
● Optimized maintenance costs due to a tailored scope of services
● Costs that can be calculated and therefore planned
● Service reliability due to guaranteed response times and spare part delivery times
● Customer service personnel will be supported and relieved of additional tasks
● Comprehensive service from a single source, fewer interfaces and greater expertise
Contact
At your service locally, around the globe: your partner for consultation, sales, training,
service, support, spare parts... for the entire range of products supplied by Industry
Automation and Drive Technologies.
You can find your personal contact in our contacts database at: Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner).
TM Timer DIDQ, 18
A
H
Accuracy, 16
Calculating TIO_Time, 23 Hardware requirements, 18
Application cycle, 21, 30, 57
Application examples Time-based IO, 13
I
IODD,
C
IO-Link, 18, 19, 34, 38, 47
Call sequence, 30 Setting ports, 28
Cam controller, IO-Link Device, 19, 25, 26, 27
CM 4xIO-Link, IPO model
Configuration, Understanding IPO, 21
Standard configuration, 25 Isochronous communication, 20
Configuration software, 19
Conventions
Jitter, 4 J
TIA Portal, 4
Jitter, 4, 23
TIO module, 4
TIO_Time, 4
CPU cycle time, 13
L
Cycle time, 14
Length measurement,
D
M
Data update,
Default setting, 27 Modes,
Delay time, 21 Selecting the model of program editing, 21
Determinism,
Digital input
TIO_DI, 42 O
Digital output
OIP model
TIO_DQ, 52
Understanding OIP, 22
Documentation, 9
Dosing,
E
Error codes
TIO_DI, 44
TIO_DQ, 55
TIO_IOLink_IN, 40
TIO_IOLink_OUT, 50
TIO_SYNC, 36
ET 200, 18, 26
S
S7-PCT, 11
Scope, 3
Send clock, 57
Service & Support, 4
SIMATIC functions, 20
Software download
Port Configuration Tool, 11
STEP 7, 19
SYNC_PI, 21
SYNC_PO, 21
Synchronous Cycle, 30
Understanding TIO instructions, 20
System environment, 17
T
TAPP,
TIA Portal, 4
Time behavior
Standard technology, 14
Time-based IO, 15
Time-based IO
Setting Time-based IO, 26
___________________
Documentation guide 1
Basic information on
___________________
electromagnetic compatibility 2
SIMATIC Interference-free cable
___________________
routing 3
S7-1500, ET 200MP, ET 200SP,
ET 200AL ___________________
Cable shielding 4
Designing interference-free controllers
___________________
Equipotential bonding 5
Function Manual
Special measures for
___________________
interference-free operation 6
Lightning protection and
___________________
overvoltage protection 7
06/2014
A5E03461486-AB
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Conventions
You should also pay particular attention to notes such as the one shown below:
Note
A note contains important information on the product described in the documentation, on the
handling of the product or on the section of the documentation to which particular attention
should be paid.
Additional support
Additional information on SIMATIC products is available on the Internet. The associated
documentation is also available on the Internet.
● The range of technical documentation for the individual SIMATIC products and
automation systems can be found on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-tech-
doku-portal).
● The online catalog and the ordering system are available on the Internet
(http://mall.automation.siemens.com).
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are
important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’
products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly
that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic,
state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should
also be considered. You can find more information about industrial security on the Internet
(http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific
newsletter. You can find more information on the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com).
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Documentation guide .............................................................................................................................. 6
2 Basic information on electromagnetic compatibility .................................................................................. 7
2.1 Overview of possible interference .................................................................................................. 7
2.2 Coupling mechanisms .................................................................................................................... 8
3 Interference-free cable routing ................................................................................................................ 9
3.1 Classifying cables into cable categories ........................................................................................ 9
3.2 Cable routing inside cabinets in buildings ....................................................................................11
3.3 Cable routing outside cabinets and inside buildings ....................................................................11
3.4 Cable routing outside buildings ....................................................................................................12
3.5 Underground cable routing ..........................................................................................................13
3.6 Bending radii and tensile strength of cables ................................................................................14
4 Cable shielding ..................................................................................................................................... 15
4.1 Connecting the cable shielding for S7-1500 and ET 200MP .......................................................17
4.2 Connecting the cable shielding for ET 200SP .............................................................................19
4.3 Connecting the cable shielding for ET 200AL..............................................................................20
4.4 Connecting the cable shield for bus cables .................................................................................21
4.5 Connecting the cable shield for other components......................................................................22
5 Equipotential bonding............................................................................................................................ 23
6 Special measures for interference-free operation .................................................................................. 25
7 Lightning protection and overvoltage protection ..................................................................................... 26
7.1 What is lightning and overvoltage protection? .............................................................................26
7.2 Lightning protection zone concept ...............................................................................................27
7.3 Rules and components for the transitions between lightning protection zones ...........................29
Index..................................................................................................................................................... 37
SIMATIC manuals
All current manuals for SIMATIC products are available for download free of charge from the
Internet (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support).
Introduction
SIMATIC products and their components have been developed for use in industrial
environment and meet the legal EMC requirements (EMC - Electromagnetic Compatibility).
However, you still need to conduct an EMC assessment before installing your controller in
order to identify possible sources of interference and to include these in your considerations.
Electromagnetic compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility describes the ability of an electrical device to function properly
in its particular electromagnetic environment. Neither the environment itself nor the electrical
device are influenced in an unacceptable manner.
Possible interference
Electromagnetic interference can influence an automation system in various ways. The most
significant interferences and their causes are as follows:
● Electromagnetic fields having a direct influence on the system
● Interference coupling caused by bus signals (for example, PROFINET)
● Interference influencing the system via the process wiring
● Interference which reaches the system via the power supply and/or protective ground
The figure below shows the likely paths of electromagnetic interference.
The following table shows the minimum clearance you must maintain when installing cables.
If you install different cable categories in the same cable channel, use metallic cable
channels with metallic partition.
The following figure show a schematic view of a cable channel with partition.
Rule
Observe the following rules for proper cable routing inside of control cabinets:
● If a crossing of cables is unavoidable, then cross the cables at an angle of 90°, if
possible, in order to keep interference from electrical fields as low as possible.
● Do not route cables coming into the cabinet from outside parallel to the shield supports.
Rule
Observe the following rules for proper cable routing outside control cabinets and inside
buildings:
● Read the information in section Assigning cables to cable categories (Page 9).
● If you route the cables in metallic cable channels, you can rearrange the cable channels
next to each other.
● Connect metallically conductive cable racks to the potential equalization of the building.
● If a crossing of cables is unavoidable, then cross the cables at an angle of 90°, if
possible, in order to keep interference from electrical fields as low as possible.
Rule
Observe the following rules when laying cables outside of buildings:
● Use metallic auxiliary terminal boxes to connect cables coming from outside at the
junction to cables inside the building. Ground these boxes.
● If a crossing of cables is unavoidable, then cross the cables at an angle of 90°, if
possible, in order to keep interference from electrical fields as low as possible.
● Integrate bus cables installed outside of buildings into your lightning and overvoltage
concept.
Lightning protection
When you lay cables for SIMATIC devices outside of buildings, you have to take internal and
external lightning protection measures.
Reference
For additional information about lightning protection, refer to chapter Lightning protection and
overvoltage protection (Page 26).
Rule
Observe the following rules for underground cable routing:
● Lay the cable at least 60 cm below the ground surface.
● Install equipotential bonding approximately 20 cm above the cable. You can use a zinc-
plated ground strip, for example. The ground strips also serve as protection against
lightning strikes.
● Protect the cable against mechanical damage by, for example, using a plastic pipe and/or
a cable warning tape in the ground, approximately 40 cm above the cable.
● Separate the various cable categories in the ground using cable channels, for example.
The following figure shows the arrangement of cable warning tape, equipotential bonding
and a cable.
Lightning protection
When you lay cables for SIMATIC devices outside of buildings, you have to take internal and
external lightning protection measures.
Reference
For additional information about lightning protection, refer to chapter Lightning protection and
overvoltage protection (Page 26).
Tensile strain
A high strain on the cables due to tensile forces leads to conductor material flow. The tensile
forces thus cause a change in the structure of the material and lower the conductor cross-
section. This decrease of the conductor cross-section leads, in turn, to a heating of the
conductor and premature wear of the conductor insulation.
Use the supplied cable ties to relieve the terminal points on the plugs for the I/O modules of
the product series SIMATIC S7-1500 and SIMATIC ET 200MP.
Bending radius
If you select too small bending radii when laying cables, this will cause the materials to
stretch and compress and changes the mechanical structure of the cables. The electrical
properties are impaired as a result.
Pay particular attention to the bending radii of fiber-optic cables. If the bending radii are too
small, the optical properties of the fiber-optic cable are adversely affected. Reliable
transmission is no longer guaranteed.
Rules
Ideally, you should use cables equipped with a protective braided shield. The shield's
contacting must be more than 80% at the contact point. Avoid tensile and compression strain
on cables with a foil shield. This type of strain can damage the foil shield very slightly at the
fastening point. The result is a reduced shielding effect.
Note
Laying an additional equipotential bonding cable
Whenever potential differences develop between the grounding points, an equalizing current
flows on a shielding that is connected at both ends. In this case, lay an additional
equipotential bonding cable. You can find more information on this topic in the chapter
Equipotential bonding (Page 23).
① Shield clamp
② Stripped cable shield
③ Shield terminal
The shield clamp is inserted from below onto the front connector until the shield clamp
latches audibly. The shield terminal is fastened to the shield clamp.
Additional information
For additional information on installing the shield clamp and shield terminal, refer to the
"Connecting front connectors" chapter in the S7-1500 automation system
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59191792) or ET 200MP Distributed
I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/59193214) system
manuals.
① BaseUnit of ET 200SP
② Shield terminal
③ Shield support with flat plug for terminal sockets
Additional information
For more information on mounting the shield terminal, refer to the "Connecting cable shields"
chapter of the system manual ET 200SP Distributed I/O System
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293).
Additional information
You can find more information on installing ET 200AL modules in the Installing Modules
section of the system manual Distributed I/O System ET 200AL
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/89254965).
Reference
For more information on installing the connectors, refer to the "Connecting PROFINET IO
BusAdapter BA 2xRJ45 to the interface module" chapter of the system manual ET 200SP
Distributed I/O System (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/58649293) and
to the supplied product information.
Rule
Note the following points when handling the shield:
● Always use metal clamps to mount the protective braided shields of the cables. The
clamps must cover a large area of the shield and provide appropriate contact force.
● Attach the shield to a shielding bus directly after the point where the cable enters the
cabinet. If you route the shield further to the module, do not connect the shield again in
front of the module, as this would create ground loops.
The following figure shows standard types of shield fastening.
Measures
In such cases, an additional equipotential bonding cable between the individual potentials
can solve the problem. The equipotential bonding cable must also be able to divert large
currents and carry lightning stroke current. The following equipotential bonding systems have
proven themselves in practice:
● 16 mm2 for copper equipotential bonding cables up to 200 m long
● 25 mm2 for copper equipotential bonding cables over 200 m long
To prevent ground loops, equipotential bonding cables are installed in parallel and,
whenever possible, near to the signal/bus cable. This allows the area between the two
cables to be kept as small as possible.
The following figure shows a schematic view of the installation of an equipotential bonding
cable.
Rule
Note the following issues regarding equipotential bonding:
● The lower the impedance of an equipotential bonding cable, the more effective is
equipotential bonding. The impedance of the additionally installed equipotential bonding
cable should not exceed 10% of the shield impedance.
● Connect the equipotential bonding cables to a large area of the grounding system.
● Protect the connection points against corrosion.
● Avoid ground loops.
● Install the equipotential bonding cables in such a way as to minimize the areas enclosed
between the equipotential bonding cables and signal lines.
Wiring Wiring
DC-operated inductances AC-operated inductances
Programming devices
Provide a socket in each cabinet for the supply of the programming devices. The sockets are
supplied from the distribution board to which the protective conductor for the cabinet is also
connected.
Observe the following points during the installation of the socket in the control cabinet:
● Include the grounding of the socket in your consideration of the equipotential bonding.
● The common star point of the two ground potentials (cabinet and socket) must be close to
the two end points.
● An equipotential bonding cable is not permitted as communication cable between
programming device and controller.
Introduction
The term "Lightning and overvoltage protection" covers both the concept and system for the
protection of structural systems (such as buildings or electrical equipment). This concept
also includes the protection of people and animals.
Overvoltages are most frequently caused by lightning strikes.
Introduction
Each building requires a coordinated protection zone concept. The grading of the protection
is of key importance for this. Sufficient protection can only be guaranteed if this grading
requirement is satisfied.
The lightning protection zone concept described in the standards IEC 62305-4 and
DIN EN 62305-4 is used for this purpose. The lightning protection zone concept groups
devices and areas that have the same risk potential and can be wired to arresters of the
same type.
Use overvoltage protection devices at the transitions of the lightning protection zones based
on the requirements. Install the overvoltage protection devices at an appropriate location
such as the main or sub-distribution board.
Overvoltages
Electromagnetic fields of the lightning channel can be reduced with appropriate shielding
measures. Overvoltages due to inductions can be reduced to a safe level starting in lightning
protection zone LPZ 0B with overvoltage arresters.
Introduction
This chapter provides you with information on the rules for transitions between lightning
protection zones. Measures must be taken to reduce the surge current load and the
magnetic fields at the transitions between the lightning protection zones.
Each zone-penetrating metallic/electrical system is incorporated into the equipotential
bonding at the zone transition.
The metallic systems include channels, structural parts, and pipes (for water, gas, and heat,
for example).
Electrical systems include power and IT cables and wires (for example, power cables and
bus cables).
Components for lightning protection equipotential bonding from lightning protection zone 0A to 1
The following table shows components for lightning protection equipotential bonding from
lightning protection zone 0A to 1.
Additional measures
If the actions listed above cannot be implemented, protection by means of overvoltage
arresters must be provided. The following sections contain tables with overvoltage arresters
that are very suitable for protecting the plant.
Components for lightning protection equipotential bonding from lightning protection zone
0B to 1 and 1 to 2
The following table shows components for lightning protection equipotential bonding from
lightning protection zone 0B to 1 and 1 to 2.
Components for lightning protection equipotential bonding from lightning protection zone 2 to 3
The following table shows components for lightning protection equipotential bonding from
lightning protection zone 2 to 3 that you can use for S7-1500/ET 200MP and ET 200SP.
Table 7- 4 Components for transition from lightning protection zone 2 to 3 (for S7-1500/ET 200MP
and ET 200SP)
The following table shows components for lightning protection equipotential bonding from
lightning protection zone 2 to 3 that you can use for ET 200AL.
Table 7- 5 Components for transition from lightning protection zone 2 to 3 (for ET 200AL)
B
Bending radius, 14
C
Cable shielding, 15
E
Electromagnetic compatibility, 7
Electromagnetic interference, 7
EMC, 7
I
Interference-free operation, 25
L
Lightning protection
Equipotential bonding, 30
External, 26
Internal, 26
Overvoltage protection, 30, 31
Lightning protection zone concept, 27
Lightning protection zones, 29
Definition, 28
O
Overvoltage, 28
Overvoltage protection
Components, 30, 32, 34
T
Tensile strain, 14